Trimble XCN-2050 Display User Guide

Add to my manuals
535 Pages

advertisement

Trimble XCN-2050 Display User Guide | Manualzz

USER GUIDE

FM-1000™ Plus Application

Version 3.0

Revision A

August 2015

1

Corporate Office

Trimble Navigation Limited

935 Stewart Drive

Sunnyvale, CA 94085

USA www.trimble.com

Agriculture

10368 Westmoor Drive

Westminster, Colorado 80021

USA

800-361-1249 (toll free in USA)

+1-937-245-5154 Phone

+1-937-233-9441 Fax www.trimble.com

Email: [email protected]

Legal Notices

© 2015 Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved.

Trimble, the Globe & Triangle logo, EZ-Boom, EZ-Guide, EZ-Pilot, EZ-

Steer, FarmWorks Software, FmX, GreenSeeker, OmniSTAR, Trimble

Ready, Tru Count Air Clutch, and WM-Drain are trademarks of Trimble

Navigation Limited, registered in the United States and in other countries.

Autopilot, AutoSense, CenterPoint, CFX-750, Connected Farm, EZ-

Remote, Farm Works, Farm Works Mapping, Farm Works Software,

Field-IQ, FieldLevel, FM-750, FM-1000, FreeForm, LiquiBlock,

NextSwath, Rawson, RTX, T3, TMX-2050, TrueGuide, TrueTracker, VRS

Now, VRS, WM-Topo, XCN-2050, xFill, and Zephyr are trademarks of

Trimble Navigation Limited.

For STL support, the software uses the Moscow Center for SPARC

Technology adaptation of the SGI Standard Template Library. Copyright

© 1994 Hewlett-Packard Company, Copyright © 1996, 97 Silicon

Graphics Computer Systems, Inc., Copyright © 1997 Moscow Center for

SPARC Technology.

Portions Copyright © 2009 Nokia Corporation and/or its subsidiary(-ies).

Portions Copyright © 2003, Bitstream Inc.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Release Notice

This is the August 2015 release (Revision A ) of the FM-1000 Plus application documentation. It applies to version 3.0 of the display software.

Legal Notices

The following limited warranties give you specific legal rights. You may have others, which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction.

Product Limited Warranty

Trimble warrants that this Trimble product and its internal components

(the 'Product") shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship and will substantially conform to Trimble's applicable published specifications for the Product for a period of one (1) year, starting from the earlier of (i) the date of installation, or (ii) six (6) months from the date of original Product shipment from Trimble. This warranty applies only to the Product if installed by Trimble or a dealer authorized by

Trimble to perform Product installation services.

Software Components

All Product software components (sometimes hereinafter also referred to as "Software") are licensed solely for use as an integral part of the

Product and are not sold. Any software accompanied by a separate end user license agreement ("EULA") shall be governed by the terms, conditions, restrictions and limited warranty terms of such EULA notwithstanding the preceding paragraph.

During the limited warranty period you will be entitled to receive such

Fixes to the Product software that Trimble releases and makes commercially available and for which it does not charge separately, subject to the procedures for delivery to purchasers of Trimble products generally. If you have purchased the Product from an authorized

Trimble dealer rather than from Trimble directly, Trimble may, at its option, forward the software Fix to the Trimble dealer for final distribution to you. Minor Updates, Major Upgrades, new products, or substantially new software releases, as identified by Trimble, are expressly excluded from this update process and limited warranty.

Receipt of software Fixes or other enhancements shall not serve to extend the limited warranty period.

For purposes of this warranty the following definitions shall apply: (1)

"Fix(es)' means an error correction or other update created to fix a previous software version that does not substantially conform to its

Trimble specifications; (2) "Minor Update" occurs when enhancements are made to current features in a software program; and (3) "Major

Upgrade" occurs when significant new features are added to software, or when a new product containing new features replaces the further development of a current product line. Trimble reserves the right to determine, in its sole discretion, what constitutes a Fix, Minor Update, or

Major Upgrade.

Gson components licensed under the Apache 2.0 License. The source is available from http://code.google.com/p/google-gson/. Google

MVEL components licensed under the Apache 2.0 Llicense. The source is available from http://code.google.com/p/mvel.codehause.org. Google

Guava components listed under the Apache 2.0 License. The source is available from http://code.google.com/p/guava-libraries. MapQuest content licensed under the Open Data Commons Database License

(DbCL). The source is available from http://developer.mapquest.com.

APACE LICENSE (Version 2.0, January 2004) http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,

REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

1. Definitions

"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through Section 9 of this document.

""Licensor " shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent

(50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).

"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the

Work and Derivative Works thereof.

"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or

Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal

Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."

"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this

License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

2

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this

License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their

Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a

Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to

You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, 4and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and

If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such thirdparty notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the

Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.

You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such

Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any

Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such

Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR

CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,

MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

LWGL LICENSE

ODC DATABASE CONTENTS LICENSE

SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008)

Copyright © 2013 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the

"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON

GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER

LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR

OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE

SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon

Graphics, Inc.

MAPQUEST PLATFORM TERMS OF USE (Last Updated: November 1,

2011)

Community Edition License Agreement

INTRODUCTION. MapQuest has been helping people find places and get maps and directions for over 40 years. We make the MapQuest

APIs, our Open Services (as described at http://open.mapquestapi.com/), Community Accounts and other developer services (in short, the "MapQuest Services"), along with the maps, driving directions and other content delivered through the

MapQuest Services (the "MapQuest Content"), available without charge to encourage developers to use these services and content in developing their applications and websites. We want you to be creative and build awesome applications and websites that thrill your users. All we ask is that you comply with the terms that are included in these

Terms of Use.

We will provide the developer community at-large with support in various forms, such as forums, blog posts or FAQs. Since we're providing the MapQuest Services for free, we don't provide individual technical support or warranties for the Community Services, but if you want to receive technical support and warranties, we have a product for you.

Please check out our MapQuest Platform Services Enterprise Edition and learn more about the services we will provide for reasonable fees.

If you choose to use any of the MapQuest Services or if you set up a

Community Account, you are agreeing to abide by these Terms of Use and are forming an agreement between yourself and MapQuest, Inc.

("MapQuest"). If you do not want to abide by these Terms of Use, then don't use the MapQuest Services.

LICENSES FROM MAPQUEST TO YOU.

2.1. MapQuest Services License. MapQuest grants you a non-exclusive, non-assignable, non-sublicensable, revocable limited license to use the

MapQuest Services during the Term of these Terms of Use as provided by MapQuest in the manner permitted in these Terms of Use.

2.2. MapQuest Content License. MapQuest grants you a non-exclusive, non-assignable, non-sublicensable, revocable limited license access, use, publicly perform and publicly display the MapQuest Content as the

MapQuest Content is provided through the MapQuest Services and in the manner permitted by these Terms of Use.

GENERAL RESTRICTIONS, ADDITIONAL LEGAL NOTICE, RESERVATION

OF RIGHTS.

3.1. Restrictions. Except as expressly authorized by MapQuest, You must not: decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or otherwise attempt to derive any source code from the MapQuest Services or MapQuest

Content, other than the Open Services; interfere or disrupt MapQuest servers or networks, or disobey any network access or security requirements, policies, procedures or regulations of MapQuest (including the enabling of any viruses, Trojan horses, trap doors, back doors, worms, time bombs, cancelbots, adware, spyware or other computer programming routines designed or intended to damage, detrimentally interfere with, surreptitiously intercept or expropriate any system, data or personal information); use the MapQuest Services as a means to engage in conduct that reflects poorly upon, disparages or devalues MapQuest's reputation or goodwill, as determined in MapQuest's sole discretion;

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

3

use the MapQuest Services, other than the Open Services, in conjunction with any commercial application not publicly available without charge (other than mobile applications for which users pay a fee to download/install the application). If your application does not fit this criteria and you would like to discuss additional options for using the

MapQuest Services please contact [email protected]; use the MapQuest Services, other than the Open Services, to process or generate data for any third party (other than for end users as expressly permitted hereunder); use the MapQuest Services with any content or product that falsely expresses or implies that such content or product is sponsored or endorsed by MapQuest; use the MapQuest Services in conjunction with a site or application which contains or displays adult content or promotes illegal activities, gambling, or the sale of tobacco or alcohol to persons under twenty-one

(21) years of age;

3.2. Additional Legal Requirements. In addition to the restrictions set forth in Section 3.1, your use of the MapQuest Services and MapQuest

Content is subject to the Additional Legal Requirements which are incorporated and made a part of these Terms of Use. Please read the

Additional Legal Requirements carefully as they include usage limits and additional restrictions that may impact your plans for development.

3.3. Reservation of Rights. MapQuest reserves all rights not expressly granted in these Terms of Use and you may not use the MapQuest

Services or MapQuest Content in any manner not expressly authorized in these Terms of Use.

LICENSE FROM YOU TO MAPQUEST. If you upload any data, feedback, ideas, suggestions, content, points of interest (including any points of interest that include Trademarks) or other material to MapQuest

(collectively "Your Content"), you hereby grant MapQuest a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to access, archive, reproduce, publicly display, translate, modify the format or the display of, distribute, transmit, stream, cache, overlay, seam, perform, sublicense, and otherwise use Your Content with or without attribution and without financial obligation, in whole or in part, via any method for any purpose. MapQuest makes no assertion of ownership over Your

Content, and you retain all intellectual property rights to Your Content, subject to the license you grant to MapQuest above.

MODIFICATIONS TO THESE TERMS OF USE AND THE SERVICES.

MapQuest reserves the right to change or modify these Terms of Use, the MapQuest Services and/or the MapQuest Content. Please check these Terms of Use, including the Additional Legal Requirements periodically for changes. Your continued use of the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content following the posting of any changes to the Terms of Use constitutes acceptance of those changes.

TERMINATION. MapQuest may terminate these Terms of Use and/or the provision of the MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content at any time, for any reason, with or without notice.

PRIVACY POLICY AND END USER TERMS.

7.1. Privacy Policy. MapQuest's collection and use of personally identifiable information is governed by the AOL Network Privacy Policy, available at http://about.aol.com/aolnetwork/aol_pp.

7.2. End User Terms. End users shall only be entitled to use the

MapQuest Services and MapQuest Content if they accept the then current end user Terms of Use located at http://info.mapquest.com/terms-of-use/. MapQuest reserves the right to amend and/or replace these terms and the form and manner of presentation. You must provide a hypertext link at the bottom of each page in your website or application where the MapQuest Services or

MapQuest Content can be viewed or accessed, or within the terms of use of your application or website, to the end user terms of use.

ACCESS AND USAGE DATA.

8.1. Credentials. MapQuest, at its discretion, may require you to create an account and obtain an access key and other related credentials

(collectively "Credentials") to use the MapQuest Services or certain aspects of the MapQuest Services. You are responsible for maintaining the confidentiality of your Credentials and for any usage or abuse of the

MapQuest Services or MapQuest Content by anyone using your

Credentials.

8.2. Usage Data. MapQuest's servers record information when you visit

MapQuest websites or when applications and/or Credentials call or invoke the MapQuest Services. This information may include, without limitation, the URL, IP address, browser type, Credential and access times and dates. MapQuest may use this information to promote, operate, and improve MapQuest services, products and properties.

PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. You acknowledge and agree the MapQuest

Services and MapQuest Content are works for purposes of copyright law, and embody valuable, confidential, trade secret information of

MapQuest, the development of which required the expenditure of substantial time and money. As between MapQuest and You,

MapQuest retains exclusive ownership of any and all rights, title and interest (including all intellectual property rights) in the MapQuest

Services and MapQuest Content, and you shall not acquire any rights, express or implied, in the foregoing by virtue of these Terms of Use other than otherwise expressly set forth. For purposes of these Terms of Use, the term "Trademarks" means all trademarks, trade names, service marks, logos, domain names, along with any other distinctive brand features of MapQuest or its suppliers. All use by You of Trademarks shall inure to the benefit of MapQuest. Further, You shall not (a) display a Trademark as the most prominent element on any page of Your website, application or paper map; (b) display a Trademark in a manner that is misleading, defamatory, infringing, libelous, disparaging, obscene or otherwise objectionable to MapQuest as determined by MapQuest in its sole discretion; or (c) remove, distort or alter any element of a

Trademark.

DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES. THE MAPQUEST SERVICES AND

MAPQUEST CONTENT ARE PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" AND "AS

AVAILABLE" BASIS. MAPQUEST DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL

WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT

LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.

MAPQUEST DOES NOT REPRESENT OR WARRANT THAT THE

MAPQUEST SERVICES OR CONTENT, OR ANY PORTION THEREOF, IS OR

WILL BE FREE OF DEFECTS OR ERRORS (OR THAT ANY SUCH DEFECTS

OR ERRORS WILL BE CORRECTED), VIRUS FREE, ABLE TO OPERATE ON

AN UNINTERRUPTED BASIS, MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR CAPABLE

OF BEING INTEGRATED INTO OR WITH YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM,

APPLICATIONS OR NETWORK. FURTHER, MAPQUEST DOES NOT

WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE USE OR

THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE MAPQUEST SERVICES, OR ANY

PORTION THEREOF, IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY,

QUALITY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. THIS DISCLAIMER

CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THESE TERMS OF USE. IF THIS

EXCLUSION IS HELD UNENFORCEABLE, THEN ALL EXPRESS AND

IMPLIED WARRANTIES SHALL BE LIMITED IN DURATION TO A PERIOD

OF FIFTEEN (15) DAYS AFTER THE EFFECTIVE DATE, AND NO

WARRANTIES SHALL APPLY AFTER THAT PERIOD.

LIMITATION ON LIABILITY. NEITHER MAPQUEST NOR ITS AFFILIATES

NOR ANY OF THEIR SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY

OTHER THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL

OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE ARISING OUT OF THE

POSSESSION OF, ACCESS TO, USE OF, OR INABILITY TO ACCESS OR

USE THE MAPQUEST SERVICES OR MAPQUEST CONTENT, OR ANY

PORTION, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, DATA

LOSS, COST OF PROCUREMENT FOR SUBSTITUTE GOODS, OR

COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, EVEN IF MAPQUEST HAS

BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND

REGARDLESS OF WHETHER THE CLAIM OR LIABILITY IS BASED UPON

ANY CONTRACT, TORT, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR OTHER LEGAL OR

EQUITABLE THEORY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MAPQUEST'S TOTAL

AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER THESE TERMS OF USE EXCEED THE

LESSER OF (A) THE TOTAL AMOUNT OF FEES PAID BY YOU TO

MAPQUEST UNDER THESE TERMS OF USEFOR THE TWELVE (12)

MONTHS PRECEDING THE DATE OF THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH

CLAIM; OR (B) FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($500).

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT THE

PARTICIPATION IN AND USE OF THE MAPQUEST SERVICES AND

MAPQUEST CONTENT IS DONE AT YOUR OWN RISK AND THAT YOU

ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE AND LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGE SUSTAINED

TO YOUR COMPUTER SYSTEM, NETWORK OR DATA RESULTING FROM

SUCH PARTICIPATION OR USE.

SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF CERTAIN

WARRANTIES OR THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR

INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

INDEMNITY. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold MapQuest and its affiliates, and each of their officers, directors, employees, agents, cobranders or other partners (as well as each of their suppliers), successors and permitted assigns ("Indemnified Parties") harmless from and against any third party claim or action, including any liability, cost, losses, damages, expenses, and attorney's fees, arising from or in any way related to Your access, use or participation in the MapQuest Services

(including claims related to Your Content and any use of the MapQuest

Services with software, data, content, systems, or other technology not provided by MapQuest), any violation of these Terms of Use, or any alleged infringement of a patent, copyright, trademark, trade secret, or other intellectual property right. MapQuest shall use good faith efforts

4

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

to provide you with prompt notice of any such claim or action; provided however, you agree that, upon MapQuest's written request, MapQuest shall control the defense or settlement of any such claim or action and you shall provide reasonable cooperation to MapQuest. You may not settle an indemnifiable claim without obtain MapQuest's prior written consent.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You agree to comply with all export and import laws and restrictions and regulations of the United States or any foreign agency or authority, and not to export or re-export MapQuest Services or any direct product thereof in violation of any such restrictions, laws or regulations, or without all necessary approvals.

NOTICES AND TRANSACTING ELECTRONICALLY. You understand and agree that MapQuest is an online service and that you are transacting with MapQuest electronically. MapQuest shall provide electronic notices by posting them on this website and/or by sending an email to any account associated with your Credentials.

GENERAL PROVISIONS.

15.1. Entire Agreement. These Terms of Use constitute the entire agreement between MapQuest and You with respect to the subject matter of these Terms of Use, and supersedes all prior agreements, understandings and communications between MapQuest and You with respect to such subject matter. No modification or amendment to these

Terms of Use shall be effective unless in writing by MapQuest.

15.2. Choice of Law; Jurisdiction. These Terms of Use are made under and shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia (except for its conflicts of laws principles) and specifically excluding f the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. MapQuest and You expressly agree that exclusive jurisdiction for any claim or dispute relating to or arising out of these Terms of Use resides in the state courts in Loudoun County,

Virginia and the federal courts of the Eastern District of Virginia

(Alexandria Division) and further agree and expressly consent to the exercise of personal jurisdiction in such state and federal courts of

Virginia in connection with any such dispute.

15.3. Severability; Waiver. If any provision in these Terms of Use should be held illegal or unenforceable by a court having jurisdiction, such provision shall be modified to the extent necessary to render it enforceable without losing its intent, or severed from these Terms of Use if no such modification is possible, and other provisions of these Terms of

Use shall remain in full force and effect. A waiver by either MapQuest or

You (as applicable) of any term or condition of these Terms of Use or any breach thereof, in any one instance, shall not waive such term or condition or any subsequent breach thereof.

15.4. Public Statements. You acknowledge and agree that MapQuest may make any public statements regarding the existence of these

Terms of Use or the relationship described herein, without Your consent.

15.5. Survival. Any term or condition of these Terms of Use that by its nature would logically survive termination or expiration of these Terms of Use, including but not limited to protections of proprietary rights, indemnifications, and limitations of liability, shall survive such termination or expiration.

15.6. Independent Contractors. The parties to these Terms of Use are independent contractors. Neither party is an agent, representative or partner of the other party. Neither party shall have any right, power or authority to enter into any agreement for or on behalf of, or incur any obligation or liability of, or otherwise to bind, the other party.

15.7. Equitable Remedies. You acknowledge and agree that monetary damages may be insufficient to compensate MapQuest for an actual or anticipated breach of these Terms of Use by you. You agree that in such circumstances MapQuest shall be entitled to seek equitable remedies

(including preliminary and permanent injunctions), in addition to any other remedies available to MapQuest at law or hereunder.

15.8. Statute of Limitations. You agree that regardless of any statute or law to the contrary, any claim or cause of action arising out of or related to use of the MapQuest Services or these Terms of Use must be filed by you within one (1) year after such claim or cause of action arose or be forever barred.

15.9. Consent to Further Contacts. You agree that MapQuest may contact You with respect to these Terms of Use, any other MapQuest products and services, and in relation to any marketing relatedpurposes.

ODC Open Database License (ODbL)

The Open Database License (ODbL) is a license agreement intended to allow users to freely share, modify, and use this Database while maintaining this same freedom for others. Many databases are covered by copyright, and therefore this document licenses these rights. Some jurisdictions, mainly in the European Union, have specific rights that cover databases, and so the ODbL addresses these rights, too. Finally, the ODbL is also an agreement in contract for users of this Database to act in certain ways in return for accessing this Database.

Databases can contain a wide variety of types of content (images, audiovisual material, and sounds all in the same database, for example), and so the ODbL only governs the rights over the Database, and not the contents of the Database individually. Licensors should use the ODbL together with another license for the contents, if the contents have a single set of rights that uniformly covers all of the contents. If the contents have multiple sets of different rights, Licensors should describe what rights govern what contents together in the individual record or in some other way that clarifies what rights apply.

Sometimes the contents of a database, or the database itself, can be covered by other rights not addressed here (such as private contracts, trade mark over the name, or privacy rights / data protection rights over information in the contents), and so you are advised that you may have to consult other documents or clear other rights before doing activities not covered by this License.

The Licensor (as defined below) and You (as defined below) agree as follows:

1.0 Definitions of Capitalised Words

"Collective Database" – Means this Database in unmodified form as part of a collection of independent databases in themselves that together are assembled into a collective whole. A work that constitutes a Collective

Database will not be considered a Derivative Database.

"Convey" – As a verb, means Using the Database, a Derivative

Database, or the Database as part of a Collective Database in any way that enables a Person to make or receive copies of the Database or a

Derivative Database. Conveying does not include interaction with a user through a computer network, or creating and Using a Produced Work, where no transfer of a copy of the Database or a Derivative Database occurs.

"Contents" – The contents of this Database, which includes the information, independent works, or other material collected into the

Database. For example, the contents of the Database could be factual data or works such as images, audiovisual material, text, or sounds.

"Database" – A collection of material (the Contents) arranged in a systematic or methodical way and individually accessible by electronic or other means offered under the terms of this License.

"Database Directive" – Means Directive 96/9/EC of the European

Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 1996 on the legal protection of databases, as amended or succeeded.

"Database Right" – Means rights resulting from the Chapter III

("suigeneris") rights in the Database Directive (as amended and as transposed by member states), which includes the Extraction and Reutilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents, as well as any similar rights available in the relevant jurisdiction under Section

10.4.

"Derivative Database" – Means a database based upon the Database, and includes any translation, adaptation, arrangement, modification, or any other alteration of the Database or of a Substantial part of the

Contents. This includes, but is not limited to, Extracting or Re-utilising the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents in a new Database.

"Extraction" – Means the permanent or temporary transfer of all or a

Substantial part of the Contents to another medium by any means or in any form.

"License" – Means this license agreement and is both a license of rights such as copyright and Database Rights and an agreement in contract.

"Licensor" – Means the Person that offers the Database under the terms of this License.

"Person" – Means a natural or legal person or a body of persons corporate or incorporate.

"Produced Work" – a work (such as an image, audiovisual material, text, or sounds) resulting from using the whole or a Substantial part of the

Contents (via a search or other query) from this Database, a Derivative

Database, or this Database as part of a Collective Database.

"Publicly" – means to Persons other than You or under Your control by either more than 50% ownership or by the power to direct their activities

(such as contracting with an independent consultant).

"Re-utilisation" – means any form of making available to the public all or a Substantial part of the Contents by the distribution of copies, by renting, by online or other forms of transmission.

"Substantial" – Means substantial in terms of quantity or quality or a combination of both. The repeated and systematic Extraction or Reutilisation of insubstantial parts of the Contents may amount to the

Extraction or Re-utilisation of a Substantial part of the Contents.

"Use" – As a verb, means doing any act that is restricted by copyrightor

Database Rights whether in the original medium or any other; and includes without limitation distributing, copying, publicly performing,

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

5

publicly displaying, and preparing derivative works of the Database, as well as modifying the Database as may be technically necessary to use it in a different mode or format.

"You" – Means a Person exercising rights under this License who has not previously violated the terms of this License with respect to the

Database, or who has received express permission from the Licensor to exercise rights under this License despite a previous violation.

Words in the singular include the plural and vice versa.

2.0 What this License covers

2.1. Legal effect of this document. This License is: a. A license of applicable copyright and neighbouring rights; b. A license of the Database Right; and c. An agreement in contract between You and the Licensor.

2.2 Legal rights covered. This License covers the legal rights in the

Database, including: a. Copyright. Any copyright or neighbouring rights in the Database. The copyright licensed includes any individual elements of the Database, but does not cover the copyright over the Contents independent of this

Database. See Section 2.4 for details. Copyright law varies between jurisdictions, but is likely to cover: the Database model or schema, which is the structure, arrangement, and organization of the Database, and can also include the Database tables and table indexes; the data entry and output sheets; and the Field names of Contents stored in the Database; b. Database Rights. Database Rights only extend to the Extraction and

Re-utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents.

Database Rights can apply even when there is no copyright over the

Database. Database Rights can also apply when the Contents are removed from the Database and are elected and arranged in a way that would not infringe any applicable copyright; and c. Contract. This is an agreement between You and the Licensor for access to the Database. In return you agree to certain conditions of use on this access as outlined in this License.

2.3 Rights not covered.

a. This License does not apply to computer programs used in the making or operation of the Database; b. This License does not cover any patents over the Contents or the

Database; and c. This License does not cover any trademarks associated with the

Database.

2.4 Relationship to Contents in the Database. The individual items of the

Contents contained in this Database may be covered by other rights, including copyright, patent, data protection, privacy, or personality rights, and this License does not cover any rights (other than Database Rights or in contract) in individual Contents contained in the Database. For example, if used on a Database of images (the Contents), this License would not apply to copyright over individual images, which could have their own separate licenses, or one single license covering all of the rights over the images.

3.0 Rights granted

3.1 Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Licensor grants to You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, terminable (but only under Section 9) license to Use the Database for the duration of any applicable copyright and Database Rights. These rights explicitly include commercial use, and do not exclude any field of endeavour. To the extent possible in the relevant jurisdiction, these rights may be exercised in all media and formats whether now known or created in the future.

The rights granted cover, for example: a. Extraction and Re-utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the

Contents; b. Creation of Derivative Databases; c. Creation of Collective Databases; d. Creation of temporary or permanent reproductions by any means and in any form, in whole or in part, including of any Derivative Databases or as a part of Collective Databases; and e. Distribution, communication, display, lending, making available, or performance to the public by any means and in any form, in whole or in part, including of any Derivative Database or as a part of Collective

Databases.

3.2 Compulsory license schemes. For the avoidance of doubt: a. Non-waivable compulsory license schemes. In those jurisdictions in which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or compulsory licensing scheme cannot be waived, the Licensor reserves the exclusive right to collect such royalties for any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License; b. Waivable compulsory license schemes. In those jurisdictions in which the right to collect royalties through any statutory or compulsory licensing scheme can be waived, the Licensor waives the exclusive right to collect such royalties for any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License; and, c. Voluntary license schemes. The Licensor waives the right to collect royalties, whether individually or, in the event that the Licensor is a member of a collecting society that administers voluntary licensing schemes, via that society, from any exercise by You of the rights granted under this License.

3.3 The right to release the Database under different terms, or to stop distributing or making available the Database, is reserved. Note that this

Database may be multiple-licensed, and so You may have the choice of using alternative licenses for this Database. Subject to Section 10.4, all other rights not expressly granted by Licensor are reserved.

4.0 Conditions of Use

4.1 The rights granted in Section 3 above are expressly made subject to

Your complying with the following conditions of use. These are important conditions of this License, and if You fail to follow them, You will be in material breach of its terms.

4.2 Notices. If You Publicly Convey this Database, any Derivative

Database, or the Database as part of a Collective Database, then You must: a. Do so only under the terms of this License or another license permitted under Section 4.4; b. Include a copy of this License (or, as applicable, a license permitted under Section 4.4) or its Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) with the

Database or Derivative Database, including both in the Database or

Derivative Database and in any relevant documentation; and c. Keep intact any copyright or Database Right notices and notices that refer to this License.

d. If it is not possible to put the required notices in a particular file due to its structure, then You must include the notices in a location (such as a relevant directory) where users would be likely to look for it.

4.3 Notice for using output (Contents). Creating and Using a Produced

Work does not require the notice in Section 4.2. However, if you Publicly

Use a Produced Work, You must include a notice associated with the

Produced Work reasonably calculated to make any Person that uses, views, accesses, interacts with, or is otherwise exposed to the Produced

Work aware that Content was obtained from the Database, Derivative

Database, or the Database as part of a Collective Database, and that it is available under this License.

a. Example notice. The following text will satisfy notice under

Section 4.3: Contains information from DATABASE NAME, which is made available here under the Open Database License (ODbL).

DATABASE NAME should be replaced with the name of the Database and a hyperlink to the URI of the Database. "Open Database License" should contain a hyperlink to the URI of the text of this License. If hyperlinks are not possible, You should include the plain text of the required URI's with the above notice.

4.4 Share alike.

a. Any Derivative Database that You Publicly Use must be only under the terms of: i. This License; ii. A later version of this License similar in spirit to this License; or iii. A compatible license.

If You license the Derivative Database under one of the licenses mentioned in (iii), You must comply with the terms of that license.

b. For the avoidance of doubt, Extraction or Re-utilisation of the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents into a new database is a Derivative

Database and must comply with Section 4.4.

c. Derivative Databases and Produced Works. A Derivative Database is

Publicly Used and so must comply with Section 4.4. if a Produced Work created from the Derivative Database is Publicly Used.

d. Share Alike and additional Contents. For the avoidance of doubt, You must not add Contents to Derivative Databases under Section 4.4 a that are incompatible with the rights granted under this License.

e. Compatible licenses. Licensors may authorise a proxy to determine compatible licenses under Section 4.4 a iii. If they do so, the authorised proxy's public statement of acceptance of a compatible license grants

You permission to use the compatible license.

4.5 Limits of Share Alike. The requirements of Section 4.4 do not apply in the following: a. For the avoidance of doubt, You are not required to license Collective

Databases under this License if You incorporate this Database or a

Derivative Database in the collection, but this License still applies to this

Database or a Derivative Database as a part of the Collective Database; b. Using this Database, a Derivative Database, or this Database as part of a Collective Database to create a Produced Work does not create a

Derivative Database for purposes of Section 4.4; and

6

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

c. Use of a Derivative Database internally within an organisation is not to the public and therefore does not fall under the requirements of Section

4.4.

4.6 Access to Derivative Databases. If You Publicly Use a

DerivativeDatabase or a Produced Work from a Derivative Database,

You must also offer to recipients of the Derivative Database or Produced

Work a copy in a machine readable form of: a. The entire Derivative Database; or b. A file containing all of the alterations made to the Database or the method of making the alterations to the Database (such as an algorithm), including any additional Contents, that make up all the differences between the Database and the Derivative Database. The

Derivative Database (under a.) or alteration file (under b.) must be available at no more than a reasonable production cost for physical distributions and free of charge if distributed over the internet.

4.7 Technological measures and additional terms a. This License does not allow You to impose (except subject to Section

4.7 b.) any terms or any technological measures on the Database, a

Derivative Database, or the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents that alter or restrict the terms of this License, or any rights granted under it, or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to exercise those rights.

b. Parallel distribution. You may impose terms or technological measures on the Database, a Derivative Database, or the whole or a

Substantial part of the Contents (a "Restricted Database") in contravention of Section 4.74 a. only if You also make a copy of the

Database or a Derivative Database available to the recipient of the

Restricted Database: i. That is available without additional fee; ii. That is available in a medium that does not alter or restrict the terms of this License, or any rights granted under it, or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to exercise those rights (an

"Unrestricted Database"); and iii. The Unrestricted Database is at least as accessible to the recipient as a practical matter as the Restricted Database.

c. For the avoidance of doubt, You may place this Database or a

Derivative Database in an authenticated environment, behind a password, or within a similar access control scheme provided that You do not alter or restrict the terms of this License or any rights granted under it or have the effect or intent of restricting the ability of any person to exercise those rights.

4.8 Licensing of others. You may not sublicense the Database. Each time

You communicate the Database, the whole or Substantial part of the

Contents, or any Derivative Database to anyone else in any way, the

Licensor offers to the recipient a license to the Database on the same terms and conditions as this License. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License, but You may enforce any rights that You have over a Derivative Database. You are solely responsible for any modifications of a Derivative Database made by You or another Person at Your direction. You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License.

5.0 Moral rights

5.1 Moral rights. This section covers moral rights, including any rights to be identified as the author of the Database or to object to treatment that would otherwise prejudice the author's honour and reputation, or any other derogatory treatment: a. For jurisdictions allowing waiver of moral rights, Licensor waives all moral rights that Licensor may have in the Database to the fullest extent possible by the law of the relevant jurisdiction under Section 10.4; b. If waiver of moral rights under Section 5.1 a in the relevant jurisdiction is not possible, Licensor agrees not to assert any moral rights over the

Database and waives all claims in moral rights to the fullest extent possible by the law of the relevant jurisdiction under Section 10.4; and c. For jurisdictions not allowing waiver or an agreement not to assert moral rights under Section 5.1 a and b, the author may retain their moral rights over certain aspects of the Database. Please note that some jurisdictions do not allow for the waiver of moral rights, and so moral rights may still subsist over the Database in some jurisdictions.

6.0 Fair dealing, Database exceptions, and other rights not affected

6.1 This License does not affect any rights that You or anyone else may independently have under any applicable law to make any use of this

Database, including without limitation: a. Exceptions to the Database Right including: Extraction of Contents from non-electronic Databases for private purposes, Extraction for purposes of illustration for teaching or scientific research, and Extraction or Re-utilisation for public security or an administrative or judicial procedure.

b. Fair dealing, fair use, or any other legally recognised limitation or exception to infringement of copyright or other applicable laws.

6.2 This License does not affect any rights of lawful users to Extract and

Re-utilise insubstantial parts of the Contents, evaluated quantitatively or qualitatively, for any purposes whatsoever, including creating a

Derivative Database (subject to other rights over the Contents, see

Section 2.4). The repeated and systematic Extraction or Re-utilisation of insubstantial parts of the Contents may however amount to the

Extraction or Re-utilisation of a Substantial part of the Contents.

7.0 Warranties and Disclaimer7.1 The Database is licensed by the

Licensor "as is" and without any warranty of any kind, either express, implied, or arising by statute, custom, course of dealing, or trade usage.

Licensor specifically disclaims any and all implied warranties or conditions of title, non-infringement, accuracy or completeness, the presence or absence of errors, fitness for a particular purpose, merchantability, or otherwise.

Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so this exclusion may not apply to You.

8.0 Limitation of liability

8.1 Subject to any liability that may not be excluded or limited by law, the Licensor is not liable for, and expressly excludes, all liability for loss or damage however and whenever caused to anyone by any use under this License, whether by You or by anyone else, and whether caused by any fault on the part of the Licensor or not. This exclusion of liability includes, but is not limited to, any special, incidental, consequential, punitive, or exemplary damages such as loss of revenue, data, anticipated profits, and lost business. This exclusion applies even if the

Licensor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

8.2 If liability may not be excluded by law, it is limited to actual and direct financial loss to the extent it is caused by proved negligence on the part of the Licensor.

9.0 Termination of Your rights under this License

9.1 Any breach by You of the terms and conditions of this License automatically terminates this License with immediate effect and without notice to You. For the avoidance of doubt, Persons who have received the Database, the whole or a Substantial part of the Contents, Derivative

Databases, or the Database as part of a Collective Database from You under this License will not have their licenses terminated provided their use is in full compliance with this License or a license granted under

Section 4.8 of this License. Sections 1, 2, 7, 8, 9 and 10 will survive any termination of this License.

9.2 If You are not in breach of the terms of this License, the Licensor will not terminate Your rights under it.

9.3 Unless terminated under Section 9.1, this License is granted to You for the duration of applicable rights in the Database.

9.4 Reinstatement of rights. If you cease any breach of the terms and conditions of this License, then your full rights under this License will be reinstated: a. Provisionally and subject to permanent termination until the 60th day after cessation of breach; b. Permanently on the 60th day after cessation of breach unless otherwise reasonably notified by the Licensor; or c. Permanently if reasonably notified by the Licensor of the violation, this is the first time You have received notice of violation of this License from the Licensor, and You cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice.

Persons subject to permanent termination of rights are not eligible to be a recipient and receive a license under Section 4.8.

9.5 Notwithstanding the above, Licensor reserves the right to release the

Database under different license terms or to stop distributing or making available the Database. Releasing the Database under different license terms or stopping the distribution of the Database will not withdraw this

License (or any other license that has been, or is required to be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full force and effect unless terminated as stated above.

10.0 General

10.1 If any provision of this License is held to be invalid or unenforceable, that must not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms and conditions of this License and each remaining provision of this License shall be valid and enforced to the fullest extent permitted by law.

10.2 This License is the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the rights granted here over the Database. It replaces any earlier understandings, agreements or representations with respect to the Database.

10.3 If You are in breach of the terms of this License, You will not be entitled to rely on the terms of this License or to complain of any breach by the Licensor.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

7

10.4 Choice of law. This License takes effect in and will be governed by the laws of the relevant jurisdiction in which the License terms are sought to be enforced. If the standard suite of rights granted under applicable copyright law and Database Rights in the relevant jurisdiction includes additional rights not granted under this License, these additional rights are granted in this License in order to meet the terms of this

License.

Warranty Remedies

Trimble's sole liability and your exclusive remedy under the warranties set forth above shall be, at Trimble's option, to repair or replace any

Product that fails to conform to such warranty ('Nonconforming

Product"), and/or issue a cash refund up to the purchase price paid by you for any such Nonconforming Product, excluding costs of installation, upon your return of the Nonconforming Product to Trimble in accordance with Trimble's product return procedures than in effect. Such remedy may include reimbursement of the cost of repairs for damage to thirdparty equipment onto which the Product is installed, if such damage is found to be directly caused by the Product as reasonably determined by

Trimble following a root cause analysis.

Warranty Exclusions and Disclaimer

These warranties shall be applied only in the event and to the extent that (a) the Products and Software are properly and correctly installed, configured, interfaced, maintained, stored, and operated in accordance with Trimble's relevant operator's manual and specifications, and; (b) the Products and Software are not modified or misused. The preceding warranties shall not apply to, and Trimble shall not be responsible for defects or performance problems resulting from (i) the combination or utilization of the Product or Software with hardware or software products, information, data, systems, interfaces or devices not made, supplied or specified by Trimble; (ii) the operation of the Product or

Software under any specification other than, or in addition to, Trimble's standard specifications for its products; (iii) the unauthorized, installation, modification, or use of the Product or Software; (iv) damage caused by accident, lightning or other electrical discharge, fresh or salt water immersion or spray (outside of Product specifications); or (v) normal wear and tear on consumable parts (e.g., batteries). Trimble does not warrant or guarantee the results obtained through the use of the Product or that software components will operate error free.

THE WARRANTIES ABOVE STATE TRIMBLE'S ENTIRE LIABILITY, AND

YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES, RELATING TO THE PRODUCTS AND

SOFTWARE. EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN,

THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE, AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION

AND MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER TRIMBLE NAVIGATION

LIMITED OR ANYONE WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN ITS CREATION,

PRODUCTION, INSTALLATION, OR DISTRIBUTION INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND

FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND

NONINFRINGEMENT. THE STATED EXPRESS WARRANTIES ARE IN LIEU

OF ALL OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES ON THE PART OF TRIMBLE

ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY PRODUCTS OR

SOFTWARE. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DO NOT

ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON DURATION OR THE EXCLUSION OF AN

IMPLIED WARRANTY, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR

FULLY APPLY TO YOU.

NOTICE REGARDING PRODUCTS EQUIPPED WITH TECHNOLOGY

CAPABLE OF TRACKING SATELLITE SIGNALS FROM SATELLITE BASED

AUGMENTATION SYSTEMS (SBAS) (WAAS/EGNOS, AND MSAS),

OMNISTAR, GPS, MODERNIZED GPS OR GLONASS SATELLITES, OR

FROM IALA BEACON SOURCES: TRIMBLE IS NOT RESPONSIBLE

FOR THE OPERATION OR FAILURE OF OPERATION OF ANY

SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SYSTEM OR THE AVAILABILITY

OF ANY SATELLITE BASED POSITIONING SIGNALS.

Limitation or Liability

TRIMBLE'S ENTIRE LIABILITY UNDER ANY PROVISION HEREIN SHALL BE

LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE PRODUCT OR

SOFTWARE LICENSE. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY

APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL TRIMBLE OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES WHATSOEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE OR LEGAL

THEORY RELATING IN ANY WAY TO THE PRODUCTS, SOFTWARE AND

ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION AND MATERIALS, (INCLUDING,

WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS PROFITS,

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION, OR ANY

OTHER PECUNIARY LOSS), REGARDLESS WHETHER TRIMBLE HAS BEEN

ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH LOSS AND REGARDLESS

OF THE COURSE OF DEALING WHICH DEVELOPS OR HAS DEVELOPED

BETWEEN YOU AND TRIMBLE. BECAUSE SOME STATES AND

JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF

LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE

ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU.

PLEASE NOTE: THE ABOVE TRIMBLE LIMITED WARRANTY

PROVISIONS WILL NOT APPLY TO PRODUCTS PURCHASED IN

THOSE JURISDICTIONS (E.G., MEMBER STATES OF THE

EUROPEAN ECONOMIC AREA) IN WHICH PRODUCT

WARRANTIES ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE LOCAL DEALER

FROM WHOM THE PRODUCTS ARE ACQUIRED. IN SUCH A

CASE, PLEASE CONTACT YOUR TRIMBLE DEALER FOR

APPLICABLE WARRANTY INFORMATION.

Official Language

THE OFFICIAL LANGUAGE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS IS

ENGLISH. IN THE EVENT OF A CONFLICT BETWEEN ENGLISH AND

OTHER LANGUAGE VERSIONS, THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE SHALL

CONTROL.

Registration

To receive information regarding updates and new products, please contact your local dealer or visit the Trimble website at www.trimble.com/register. Upon registration you may select the newsletter, upgrade or new product information you desire.

Notices

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. TRIMBLE is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Responsible

Party:

Trimble Navigation

935 Stewart Drive

Sunnyvale CA 94085

Telephone: 1-408 481 8000

Canada

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

This apparatus complies with Canadian RSS-GEN.

Cet appareil est conforme à la norme CNR-GEN du Canada.

Europe

The product covered by this guide are intended to be used in all EU member countries, Norway, and

Switzerland. Products been tested and found to comply with the requirements for a Class B device pursuant to

European Council Directive 89/336/EEC on EMC, thereby satisfying the requirements for CE Marking and sale within the European Economic

Area (EEA). Contains a Bluetooth radio module. These requirements are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a residential or commercial environment. The 450 MHZ (PMR) bands and 2.4 GHz are nonharmonized throughout Europe.

CE Declaration of Conformity

8

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Hereby, Trimble Navigation, declares that the GPS receivers are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

Australia and New Zealand

This product conforms with the regulatory requirements of the Australian Communications and Media Authority

(ACMA) EMC framework, thus satisfying the requirements for C-Tick Marking and sale within Australia and New Zealand.

Restriction of Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (RoHS)

Trimble products in this guide comply in all material respects with

DIRECTIVE 2002/95/EC OF THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND OF THE

COUNCIL of 27 January 2003 on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS

Directive) and Amendment 2005/618/EC filed under C(2005) 3143, with exemptions for lead in solder pursuant to Paragraph 7 of the Annex to the RoHS Directive applied.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

For product recycling instructions and more information, please go to www.trimble.com/ev.shtml

.

Recycling in Europe: To recycle Trimble WEEE (Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment, products that run on electrical power.), Call

+31 497 53 24 30, and ask for the “WEEE Associate”. Or, mail a request for recycling instructions to:

Trimble Europe BV c/o Menlo Worldwide Logistics

Meerheide 45

5521 DZ Eersel, NL

Unlicensed radios in products

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Licensed radios in products

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the condition that this device may not cause harmful interference.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

9

Safety Information

Safety Information

Always follow the instructions that accompany a Warning or Caution. The information it provides is intended to minimize the risk of personal injury and/or damage to property. In particular, observe safety instructions that are presented in the following format:

WARNING –

This alert warns of a potential hazard which, if not avoided, could result in severe injury or even death.

CAUTION – This alert warns of a potential hazard or unsafe practice which, if not avoided, could result in injury or property damage or irretrievable data loss.

Note  – An absence of specific alerts does not mean that there are no safety risks involved.

Warnings

Auto guidance

WARNING –

Auto guidance systems cannot avoid items in the field such as obstacles. Make sure you are adequately trained to operate the auto guidance system.

WARNING –

Obstacles in the field can cause collisions, which may injure you a damage the vehicle. If an obstacle in the field makes it unsafe to continue a particular phase of the Automated Deadzone calibration:

- Stop the vehicle to abort the phase.

- Turn the steering wheel to disengage the system.

- Reposition the vehicle and continue from the current test phase.

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

WARNING –

Installers, technicians, and operators must verify that the Autopilot function (line acquisition and online guidance) is in good, safe, working order before the operator uses NextSwath.

WARNING –

Do not use automated implement functions to: 1) control hazardous materials (including NH3) or 2) operate implements near ground laborers. Failure to follow these restrictions could result in serious injury or death.

10

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Safety Information

WARNING –

A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.

WARNING –

NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.

WARNING –

Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While

NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.

Calibration

WARNING –

Anhydrous valve and flow calibrations require the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground (the implement lift switch must be down). Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Make sure that the implement is safe to operate.

WARNING –

The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden wheel movements.

WARNING –

The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the

TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury. Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements.

WARNING –

The vehicle needs to move during the Hydraulic Tracked Pump Knees calibration procedure. To avoid injury, be prepared for vehicle movement.

WARNING –

Obstacles in the field can cause collisions, which may injure you and damage the vehicle. If an obstacle in the field makes it unsafe to continue the Automated Deadzone calibration, stop the vehicle and turn the steering wheel to disengage the system.

1) Wait until the display prompts you that the phase is ready to begin.

2) Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn.

3) Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available.

4) Tap the button to begin the next phase.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

11

Safety Information

WARNING –

During the Automated Deadzone calibration, the system moves the wheels that steer the vehicle. To avoid injury, be prepared for sudden vehicle movement and that the area around the vehicle (and implement, if applicable) are clear.

WARNING –

During flow calibration, the machine will become operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.

WARNING –

Material will be dispensed during calibration. Make sure that the implement is safe to operate.

WARNING –

Incorrect adjustment of Manual Override Sensitivity could cause this critical safety feature to fail, resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle. Do not to choose a setting that is either too sensitive or not sensitive enough. It is vital to avoid setting the sensitivity so low that the system will not detect any steering wheel motion.

Display

WARNING –

When the temperature of the display case reaches 65° C (149 ° F) the display shows the following:

WARNING! HOT SURFACE, DO NOT TOUCH. The display will dim the screen until the temperature returns to normal. Use caution when touching the display when this warning is visible.

Implement master switch

WARNING –

When the implement is down and the master switch is in the On position, the machine is fully operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so could result in injury or death.

NH3, anhydrous ammonia

WARNING –

NH3 is an irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, respiratory tract and mucous membranes, and is dangerous if not handled properly. It may cause severe burns to the eyes, lungs, and skin. Skin, and respiratoryrelated diseases could be aggravated by exposure. It is recommended that protective gloves, boots, slicker and/or pants and jacket, and chemical-splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times.

WARNING –

Anhydrous valve and flow calibrations require the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground (the implement lift switch must be down). Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.

12

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Safety Information

Cautions

Data

CAUTION – Deleting data is permanent. You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data.

CAUTION – POTENTIAL LOSS OF DATA!

If you copy files from:

- An FM-1000 Plus application to another or to an FM-1000 integrated display.

- An physical FM-1000 integrated display to another or to an FM-1000 Plus application

First make sure you have created a subfolder labeled with the display serial number for your files. Transfer your files to this subfolder. Otherwise, you will overwrite files when you copy and you will corrupt your data.

CAUTION – Do not remove the USB drive from the socket while the application is copying data. This will corrupt the data.

Display

CAUTION – Do not remove power from the display or the DCM-300 modem for 10 minutes after you tap the

Generate New button.

CAUTION – If you leave the display powered on after shutting off the vehicle's ignition, the display power can drain the battery.

GNSS interference

CAUTION – The GNSS antenna may experience interference if you operate the vehicle within 100 m (300 ft) of any power line, radar dish, or cell phone tower.

Setup

CAUTION – Always verify implement and NextSwath settings, and verify performance for each implement you use for NextSwath. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.

CAUTION – Some Raven controllers do not support zero rates. If the target rate is zero, and spray is still being applied, you must turn off the boom sections manually.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

13

Safety Information

CAUTION – Always verify implement and NextSwath settings, and verify performance for each implement you use for NextSwath. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.

CAUTION – You must configure the correct front/back offset. If you are using:

- An Autopilot system: Set the front/back offset to the distance from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the implement.

- Manual guidance: Set the front/back offset to the distance from the antenna centerpoint to the implement.

Touchscreen

CAUTION – Do not apply glass cleaner directly to the touchscreen.

CAUTION – Do not press on the screen with a sharp object such as a pencil. This could damage the surface of the screen.

Working with anhydrous ammonia

l

Contact your NH3 supplier to review all safety requirements associated with anhydrous ammonia (NH3).

l

Always wear correct personal protective equipment. This includes, but is not limited to:

Goggles or face shield l

Protective suit and gloves l

Respirator l

Do not allow anyone to operate the system without proper instruction and training.

l

Stand up-wind when working around NH3 and related equipment.

l

Always keep NH3 equipment away from buildings, livestock, and other people.

l

Never work on NH3 equipment in confined spaces.

l

Before you attempt to transport the implement, discharge the system of all NH3 and completely shut down the system. See

Discharging the System (page 15) .

l

If symptoms of illness occur during or shortly after use of NH3 products, seek immediate medical attention.

l

Keep a source of clean water (at least five gallons) readily available. In case of exposure, flush exposed skin or eyes immediately with large quantities of water and seek immediate medical attention.

l

NH3 can be harmful to the environment if not used correctly. Follow all local, state, and federal regulations regarding proper handling of this chemical.

14

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Safety Information

Servicing the Equipment

1. Remove the system from operation before performing any maintenance.

2. Thoroughly bleed all system lines and disconnect the nurse tank hose. See

Discharging the

System (page 15) .

3. Make sure that the gauge pressure is at zero before you open the system.

4. Use extreme caution when opening a previously pressurized system.

Discharging the System

1. Turn off the console or vehicle master switch.

2. Completely close the main shut-off valve on the supply or nurse tank.

3. Resume field application until the pressure gauge shows zero pressure.

4. Check again that the console and/or vehicle master switch, and all section switches, are turned off.

5. Completely close the emergency shut-off valve the cooling tower.

6. Bleed and disconnect the nurse tank supply hose from the system.

7. Turn on the console master switch and all section switches.

8. Stand up-wind from the implement and then slowly open the bleed valve(s) until fully open.

9. Allow at least one (1) hour for the system to fully discharge.

10. Before you open the system, make sure that the pressure gauge on the manifold reads zero and that the cooling tower is not cold to the touch. This ensures that all liquid NH3 has evaporated and that the pressure is discharged.

Note  – Frost on any component is a positive indication of trapped NH3 at low pressure. Lack of frost does not always indicate a lack of NH3.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

15

Contents

Safety Information

Warnings

Cautions

Working with anhydrous ammonia

1 Introduction

About the FM-1000 Plus application

Optional features

Compatibility

Installation

Supported features

Changes to this document

2 FM-1000 Plus application basics

Display power on/off

Automatic power on

Manual power on

Automatic power off

Manual power off

Touch screen basics

Interactive controls

Cleaning the touch screen

Main screens

Launcher screen

Interruption of services

Application menu button

Home screen

Configuration Selection screen

Field Selection screen

Configuration screen

Run screen

On-screen user guide

System bar

Navigation buttons

Emergency button

Screenshot

Optional features/plugins

Vehicle guidance

Features for application

ISOBUS

Implement control

Connectivity

16

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

Contents

29

30

30

30

31

31

32

10

10

13

14

33

48

48

48

48

49

49

47

47

47

47

43

44

45

46

39

39

40

41

36

37

38

39

34

34

34

34

35

36

Version 3.0, Revision A

Contents

Water Management

Harvest

Screen shots

FM-1000 Plus application Passwords

Access password

Change administration password

3 Basic settings

Settings

FM-1000 Plus application-specific settings

FM-1000 Plus application and display settings

Display-specific settings

Upgrades and unlocks

Unlocks and upgrades

Firmware upgrades

USB upgrades

Wireless upgrades

Feature unlocks

Manual code entry

QR code scan

Check for unlocks

Activate features/plugins for use

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Data dictionary

Data Files

EZ-Remote Joystick

Field feature mapping settings

Guidance settings

Language, measurements, keyboard layout

Lightbar settings

Map settings

Port settings

Configuration principles

Restore default settings

Signal input module for OEM switch

Sounds

Status items

Display settings

Access display settings

Shortcut

Launcher screen

Date and time settings

Languages and units settings for display

Users and passwords

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

17

53

76

77

78

79

68

70

74

75

64

65

66

67

60

61

62

63

91

92

93

91

91

91

91

59

59

59

59

56

56

56

57

54

54

54

54

55

49

49

50

51

51

51

Add a user

Take a photo of a user

Wi-Fi settings

Restore defaults

Admin User Options

4 Data management

Managing data

Transfer data

Data Files screen

Delete data

Data storage structure

AB Lines folder

Archives folder

Autopilot folder

Data folder

Data Dictionary folder

Diagnostics folder

Prescriptions folder

Summaries folder

Task Data folder

Data Dictionary categories

Default data entry categories

Edit data entry categories

Create / load a data dictionary

5 Connectivity settings

GPS receiver settings

AgRemote Interface

Basic correction settings

CenterPoint RTK

CenterPoint RTX US or EU (fs)

CenterPoint RTX (sc)

CenterPoint RTX (ss)

OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 - VBS

OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2

OmniSTAR VBS

RangePoint RTX

Frequencies and baud rate

GPS output settings

CAN GPS messages

Serial NMEA messages

NMEA messages

Remote Output setup

18

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

Contents

95

102

102

102

109

109

110

110

112

96

96

96

99

101

101

112

112

112

113

93

93

94

94

94

115

124

126

128

130

131

132

133

133

116

117

118

119

121

123

134

135

136

Version 3.0, Revision A

Contents

Remote Output settings

Calibrate implement lead time

Serial Data Input

Ag3000 modem

Modem activation

Modem setup

DCM-300 Modem

Unlock the modem

Service activation

Modem setup

6 Field feature mapping setup

Field feature mapping settings

Access Feature Mapping settings

Assign feature buttons

Create a field feature

Edit a field feature

Mapping location setting

Recording with coverage

Field area feature settings

Line feature settings

Boundary feature settings

Point feature settings

7 Implement setup

Implement setup

Create an implement

Select an implement

Import an implement

Edit implement settings

Implement Type

Measurements

Geometry

Overlap

Switches

Delete an implement

8 Vehicle guidance setup

Guidance settings

Manual guidance

Autopilot system

Begin setup

Autopilot calibration

Row Guidance

Version 3.0, Revision A

155

156

157

157

158

158

158

159

159

160

160

160

161

162

162

164

164

169

185

147

150

151

151

152

152

154

148

148

148

149

149

136

139

142

143

143

143

144

144

144

145

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

19

Save vehicle profile

OnSwath settings

NextSwath settings

Requirements

Restrictions

Automatic turn settings

Automated headlands management settings

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

Vehicle settings for EZ-Pilot system

Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system

Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system

EZ-Pilot system calibration

EZ-Steer assisted steering system

Engage settings for EZ-Steer

Advanced settings for EZ-Pilot

EZ-Steer system calibration

9 Field-IQ system setup

Field-IQ system functionality

Pressure limiting

Flow control

Pressure limiting

Setup

General setup information

Implement setup for Field-IQ

Field-IQ system setup

Material setup

Alarms tab

Operation tab

Coefficent tab

Control setup

Material tab

Layout

Section Control tab

Material linking

Automatic Section Control

Rate Control tab

Rate control module setup

Section Widths screen

Drive Setup screen

Row monitoring

Sensor tab

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Air Seeder calibration

20

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

Contents

211

225

226

227

230

232

232

233

237

237

239

239

218

219

219

220

221

222

222

224

212

214

214

214

215

215

215

199

200

201

202

205

206

206

208

186

188

189

189

190

190

194

199

Version 3.0, Revision A

Contents

Anhydrous calibration

Planter calibration

Sprayer calibration

Spreader calibration

10 GreenSeeker setup

GreenSeeker functionality

Care and maintenance

Field preparations for nitrogen application

Field setup

Field preparations for user defined rate

Field calibration

Delivery system and liquid control

Select a nozzle

11 ISOBUS setup

ISOBUS settings

Virtual Terminal setup

Task Controller setup

GPS output settings

Equipment setup

12 Serial Rate Control setup

Supported variable rate controllers

Variable rate controller setup

Amazone Amatron +

Bogballe Calibrator

Flex-Air setup

Hardi 5500 and 6500

LH5000

Raven

Rawson and New Leader

Vaderstad Control Station

Additional controller setup

Alarms

Coverage mapping

Prescriptions

Target and applied rates

Units

13 TrueGuide setup

TrueGuide system

Benefits

Requirements

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

21

240

242

246

251

263

264

264

264

265

266

257

258

258

259

260

261

261

261

262

269

274

276

277

277

278

278

278

278

278

270

271

272

272

272

273

274

279

280

280

280

Implement setup and selection

TrueGuide setup

System aggressiveness settings

TrueGuide calibration

14 TrueTracker setup

TrueTracker

Requirements

Setup process

Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system

Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system

Engage settings for TrueTracker system

Steering settings for TrueTracker system

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

Controller orientation setup

Proportional Steering Gain calibration

Implement Steering Sensor calibration

Implement Automated Deadzone calibration

Antenna position and roll offset correction

Line Acquisition Aggressiveness calibration

15 Vehicle Sync setup

Vehicle Sync

Requirements

Setup steps

16 Water Management setup

Water Management features

Requirements

FieldLevel II Survey/Design

Benchmarks

Rebenching

Settings

FieldLevel II Leveling

Requirements

Setup process

Leveling models

Implement settings for FieldLevel II

GPS receiver setup

FieldLevel II settings

Valve module calibration

Tandem / dual scraper setup

Tandem scraper

Dual scraper

22

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

Contents

281

282

282

283

285

292

292

292

294

295

296

299

286

286

287

287

288

290

291

301

302

302

302

305

310

310

311

311

311

312

316

317

317

317

306

306

307

307

307

307

310

Version 3.0, Revision A

Contents

Set up

Implement setup

Prepare connections

Primary receiver setup

Secondary receiver setup

Tandem / Dual settings

Tandem / dual calibration

WM-Drain setup

Implement control settings

Valve settings

Limit and increment settings

Relative heights settings

Operation settings

Calibrate WM-Drain for cantilever plow

Calibrate the valve

17 Yield Monitoring setup

Yield Monitoring functionality

Yield Monitoring best practices

Installation

Tare calibration

Flow calibration

Pitch/Roll calibration

Test weight

Calibrating and operating conditions

Yield Monitoring settings

Before setup

Setup steps

Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration

Calibration steps

Speed method

Cut width method

Third-party display instructions

Claas Cebis Quantimeter setup

Claas Cebis Quantimeter calibration

Claas Cebis Auto Pilot calibration

Greenstar Monitor: Stop Head Height setup

Greenstar Monitor calibrations

Command Center (70 Series Combines)

18 Operations

Operations overview

Operation basics

Main buttons

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

23

331

336

336

336

340

340

341

342

343

332

333

333

333

334

334

335

335

343

344

345

345

346

347

351

352

352

353

321

323

323

324

324

326

330

317

318

318

318

318

318

319

320

Feature panels

Engage button

Coverage button for logging

GNSS status

On-screen lightbar for vehicle

On-screen lightbar for implement

Fields

Field creation / selection

Implement selection

Vehicle selection

Event summary adjustment

Close a field

Field feature use

Add field features

Guidance pattern use

Creating patterns

Access paths

Existing patterns

Guidance mapping controls

Swaths Management screen

Straight guidance pattern

Curved pattern

Headland pattern

Pivot pattern

FreeForm pattern

Pause recording

Access paths

Switch to the next pattern

Import AB Lines or boundaries

Load a pattern

Rename a swath

Delete a swath

Switch to the next pattern

Shift a swath

Skip a swath

Coverage logging

Field-IQ operation

Field-IQ panel

Field-IQ master switch box functions

Field-IQ 12-section switch box (optional)

Material assignment

Enable sections

Prescriptions

Manual guidance operation

24

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

Contents

376

377

379

380

380

381

381

383

365

365

366

367

369

371

372

374

362

363

363

363

364

364

365

365

356

359

360

360

360

360

361

361

383

383

385

386

389

390

394

396

396

397

398

401

Version 3.0, Revision A

Contents

Autopilot system operation

Adjust Autopilot guidance

Disengage Autopilot system

NextSwath operation

Automatic turn

Auto turn cancel

Adjust direction and swath number

Start turn now

Yellow turn button

Red turn button

Green turn button

TrueSwath operation

Using automated headlands management

EZ-Pilot system operation

Disengage EZ-Pilot system

Adjust EZ-Pilot guidance

EZ-Steer system operation

Disengage EZ-Steer system

Adjust EZ-Steer guidance

GreenSeeker operation

Best practice

Variable rate setup

Create a custom table

Calibrate GreenSeeker

ISOBUS operation

Task Controller operation

Virtual Terminal operation

Remote Output operation

Crossing a line feature operation

Distance-based pulse operation

Within range limits

Outside range limits

Change trigger limits during operation

Manually output a pulse

Row Guidance operation

Use row sensors

Shift or skip guidance line

Row Guidance adjustments

TrueGuide operation

Using TrueGuide

TrueTracker operation

TrueTracker controls

Implement status

Implement on-screen lightbar

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

25

427

427

428

429

429

431

431

432

419

420

421

422

422

423

423

424

411

411

412

413

415

416

417

418

402

403

404

405

406

409

410

411

432

432

433

434

435

436

437

438

439

439

440

440

Vehicle Sync operation

Common uses

Benefits

Using Vehicle Sync

Guidance lines with Vehicle Sync

Coverage

Water Management functionality

Create a survey

Design

Leveling

WM-Drain operation

Survey tab

Install tab

Design tab

Design screen

Set survey height offset

Create a tile / ditch survey line

Design a section line

Add a fixed point

Clip a portion of a section line

Installation/ditch cleaning

Define boot depth

Yield Monitoring operation

Yield Monitoring panel

Variety tracking

Load tracking

19 Diagnostics

System diagnostics

Advanced system diagnostics

CAN Bus data

Configuration data

Network diagnostics

Serial Comms

Autopilot diagnostics

Controls

Guidance tab

Steering tab

Details tab

Autopilot Faults screen

Warning screen

EZ-Pilot diagnostics

EZ-Steer diagnostics

Field-IQ diagnostics

26

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

Contents

485

487

488

488

489

489

490

490

490

486

486

487

487

487

490

491

492

448

450

464

465

466

467

468

473

442

442

442

442

443

444

446

446

474

474

477

477

478

481

482

482

483

484

Version 3.0, Revision A

Contents

20 Glossary

P

R

N

O

I

H

L

M

S

T

V

W

F

G

D

E

A

B

C

Operations tab

Hardware tab

Row Monitor tab

Field-IQ faults and troubleshooting

FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test

GPS status

GreenSeeker diagnostics

Incorrect data

Error conditions

Row-Guidance diagnostics

Vehicle Sync diagnostics

Yield Monitoring diagnostics

Status tab

Yield Monitor error messages

Yield Monitor troubleshooting

Yield Monitoring warning messages

Version 3.0, Revision A

527

531

531

531

532

532

533

533

533

527

527

528

529

530

530

530

534

535

535

535

515

515

517

518

518

519

521

522

492

493

493

494

514

514

514

515

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

27

Contents

28

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

1

Introduction

In this chapter:

About the FM-1000 Plus application

Changes to this document

30

32

This user guide includes information on setting up and using the FM-1000™ Plus application. For installation information, see

XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

29

About the FM-1000 Plus application 1   Introduction

About the FM-1000 Plus application

With the FM-1000™ Plus application, you can perform: l

Field definition and mapping l

Feature mapping l

Guidance to predefined field patterns l

Logging of coverage data l

Variable rate control l

Boom/Row switching l

Logging of topographic mapping data l

Output of information for analysis in office-based Geographic Information System (GIS) software l

Seed, Liquid, Granular, and Anhydrous Ammonia control l

Seed monitoring

Optional features

The FM-1000 Plus application has a number of optional features /plugins you can install to expand its functionality.

Most of these features require additional hardware. For installation information, see the XCN-2050

Cabling Guide.

Note  – Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen. To access these settings, return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button. When prompted to close the field, tap Yes.

Also see

Optional features/plugins (page 48) ,

Feature unlocks (page 59)

and

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

Compatibility

The following are compatible with the FM-1000 Plus application: l

Trimble Autopilot™ automated steering system l

Trimble EZ-Steer® assisted steering system l

Trimble EZ-Pilot® steering system l

Trimble TrueTracker™ implement steering system l

Trimble TrueGuide™ implement guidance system l

Trimble FieldLevel™ II

30

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

1   Introduction About the FM-1000 Plus application l

Trimble WM-Drain® farm drainage system l

Trimble Rawson™ drive l

Trimble Field-IQ™ crop input control system l

Trimble RangePoint™ RTX™ l

Trimble CenterPoint™ RTX and CenterPoint VRS™ l

Trimble VRSNow™ l

Trimble Farm Works Software® l

Trimble GreenSeeker® l

Trimble Tru Count Air Clutch® l

Trimble AutoSense™ l

Trimble T2™ terrain compensation technology l

Trimble T3™ roll compensation l

OmniSTAR® wide-area differential GPS service l

Trimble NextSwath™ end of row turn technology

Installation

To install the display and required cabling for your configuration, see the XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

Supported features

All features available in the FM-1000™ display are available in the 1.0 version of the FM-1000 Plus application except: l

Remote Assistant l

External speakers for the Trimble EZ-Pilot® system and EZ-Steer® assisted steering system

Productivity and Delay and cameras are separate applications that you can access from the

Launcher screen (page 39)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

31

Changes to this document 1   Introduction

Changes to this document

The changes for this document for the FM-1000 Plus application version 3.0, revision A are: l

Remote Output: Crossing a Line Feature has been added. See

Remote Output settings (page

136)

and

Remote Output operation (page 429) .

l

WM Drain: Changes to the Run screen and added features, including clipping/deleting a section line and adding fixed points during design. See

WM-Drain operation (page 464) .

l

Serial NMEA messages: 10 Hz has been added as an output. See

Serial NMEA messages (page

134) .

l

The addition of pressure limiting to Field-IQ. See

Pressure limiting (page 214) .

l

The addition of CenterPoint RTX fast satellite for Europe. See

CenterPoint RTX US or EU (fs)

(page 121)

.

32

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

2

FM-1000 Plus application basics

In this chapter:

Display power on/off

Touch screen basics

Main screens

On-screen user guide

System bar

Optional features/plugins

Screen shots

FM-1000 Plus application Passwords

48

50

51

34

36

38

46

47

The FM-1000 Plus application has five main screens you use for setup and operations.

You can also access on-screen help.

Optional features (plugins) are available to add to the FM-1000 Plus application.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

33

Display power on/off 2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Display power on/off

Note  – The display must be correctly installed

Cabling Guide.

before

powering on. For more information, see XCN-2050

CAUTION – If you leave the display powered on after shutting off the vehicle's ignition, the display power can drain the battery.

Automatic power on

If the display is connected to the ignition source, power on the vehicle. The TM-200 Module sends power to the display when the vehicle powers on. The display powers on. After a short pause, the

Launcher screen (page 39)

displays.

To open the FM-1000 Plus application, tap .

Note  – After you have initially powered on the display, the FM-1000 Plus application may not open until the

TM-200 Module has initialized or finished booting.

Manual power on

To turn on the display manually, hold the power button down briefly (about half a second).The

power button is on the rear of the display.

The display powers on. After a short pause, the

Launcher screen (page 39)

displays.

To open the FM-1000 Plus application, tap .

Note  – After you have initially powered on the display, the FM-1000 Plus application may not open until the

TM-200 Module has initialized or finished booting.

Automatic power off

If the display is connected to the ignition source, when you switch the ignition off, a shutdown/reboot dialog displays. If you do nothing the display shuts off in 60 seconds. If you choose not to shutdown the display, it will remain powered on indefinitely.

Note  – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before power down, you may experience a loss of data.

CAUTION – If you leave the display powered on after shutting off the vehicle's ignition, the display power can drain the battery.

34

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

2   FM-1000 Plus application basics Display power on/off

Manual power off

To manually turn the power off, hold the power down button for one to two seconds. See the steps below.

1. Close the FM-1000 Plus application.

2. Turn off the display manually by holding the power button down for about two seconds.

3. Choose one of the following options:

Shutdown: Powers down the display l

Reboot: Restarts the display l

Cancel: Cancels the power off process

Note  – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before rebooting or shutdown, you may experience a loss of data.

Note  – Sometimes after you press the power button and tap

Shutdown

, the display does not immediately turnoff. This is because the FM-1000 Plus application is saving settings. The display will power off after all settings are saved.

If these steps do not cause the power to go off, you can force a shut down of the display by holding the power button for 5 seconds.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

35

Touch screen basics 2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Touch screen basics

If you are unfamiliar with using a touch screen, this section contains the basics of using a touch screen and how to clean it.

Interactive controls

Use your fingers to interact with buttons, maps, lists and selectors.

CAUTION – Do not press on the screen with a sharp object such as a pencil. This could damage the surface of the screen.

Item

Buttons and selectors

Lists

Action

Tapping

Scrolling

Settings shortcut

Swiping down

Explanation

Tap means to touch a point on the screen and then remove your finger from the screen.

A tap is a single touch. You do not move your finger while touching the screen. You tap buttons, items in lists, points on a range, and so on.

When a list has more items than fit on a screen or in a box, you can move the list to see all items by scrolling up, down, or side to side. To scroll:

1. Touch anywhere on the scroll bar and hold your finger on the it.

2. Move your finger in the direction that you want to move the up or down.

3. Remove your finger when you are satisfied with the position of the list.

Swipe down on the upper right area of the screen to quickly access the brightness control and Display settings.

See

Access display settings (page 91) .

36

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

2   FM-1000 Plus application basics Touch screen basics

Cleaning the touch screen

CAUTION – Do not press on the screen with a sharp object such as a pencil. This could damage the surface of the screen.

Use the following supplies to clean the touch screen of the display: l

Ammonia-free glass cleaner l

Soft, lint-free cotton cloth l

50% isopropyl alcohol

CAUTION – Do not apply glass cleaner directly to the touchscreen.

1. Apply a small amount of ammonia-free glass cleaner to the cloth.

2. Gently rub the touchscreen with the cloth.

3. To remove stains or smudges, use a cotton cloth dampened with 50% isopropyl alcohol.

Tip – You can set up status items to show the length of the swath (Swath Length) and the calculated distance to the end of the swath (Along Track Error). See

Status items (page 79)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

37

Main screens 2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Main screens

The FM-1000 Plus application has the following main screens: l

Launcher screen (page 39) : The first screen that displays when you power on the display

l

Home screen (page 40)

: The first screen that displays when you open FM-1000 Plus application l l

Run screen (page 45)

: For performing operations

Configuration Selection screen (page 41)

: For switching and editing selections for system, vehicle and implement l

Configuration screen (page 44)

(and subsequent setup screens): For setting up the system and features l

Field Selection screen (page 43) : For choosing which field to work in

l

On-screen user guide (page 46)

: For viewing immediate help about a screen

38

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Launcher screen

Main screens

You open applications from the Launcher screen by tapping them, including: l

FM-1000 Plus application l

XCN-2050™ application l

Connected Farm™ applications l

Dealer-specific applications

The FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-2050 application cannot be open at the same time. If you are switching from FM-1000 Plus application to XCN-2050 application or XCN-2050 application to FM-

1000 Plus application:

1. Close the FM-1000 Plus application by navigating to the Home screen and tapping

Close

.

Note  – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before rebooting, you may experience a loss of data.

2. Reboot the display by holding down the power button for 1-2 seconds.

3. When the option menu displays, tap

Reboot

.

Interruption of services

If automatic steering, spraying, seeding or other services are engaged in FM-1000 Plus application and you go to the Launcher screen, the automatic systems will disengage.

Application menu button

To see all the application icons on the Launcher screen, tap the application menu button .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

39

Main screens 2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Home screen

The Home screen lists the following information about the configuration: l

The display build date, firmware and hardware version l

All optional features/plugins loaded on the application l

The automatic steering system (if applicable) l

The GPS receiver version, correction source and subscription information l

The selected vehicle make and model

The Home screen has two tabs: l

Home tab, containing the buttons: l

Open Field

: Tap to open the

Configuration Selection screen (page 41)

.

Settings

: Tap to open the

Configuration screen (page 44)

.

l

Data Transfer

: Tap to display the Data Transfer screen. See

Transfer data (page 96) .

l

Modules

: Tap to upgrade hardware modules.

l

System Information tab, listing about the configuration: l

Display firmware build date, firmware, and hardware version

Optional features/plugins loaded on the application l

Vehicle and implement automatic steering controller version, date, and serial number (if applicable) l

GPS receiver version, correction source, and subscription information l

Selected vehicle make and model

40

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Configuration Selection screen

Before you enter the Run screen, the Configuration Selection screen shows the current configuration selected for the: l

System l

Vehicle l

Implement

Access the Configuration Selection screen from the Home screen.

Main screens

For each of these you can: l

Switch to another system, vehicle or implement l

Edit settings

The Configuration Selection screen shows the current configuration selected for the: l

System l

Vehicle l

Implement

System configuration switching

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

41

Main screens

Vehicle configuration switching

2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Implement configuration switching

42

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Field Selection screen

Main screens

1. When you want to go to a field to begin work in the Run screen, tap at the Home screen.

2. If the system, vehicle and implement at the Configuration Screen are what you want to use, tap

OK

.

3. At the Field Selection screen, you can:

Choose existing fields you have created in the system l

Create a new field (as well as the client, farm and event associated with it)

For more information, see

Field creation / selection (page 361) .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

43

Main screens 2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Configuration screen

You can access the Configuration screen from the Home or Run screen.

Note  – Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen. To access these settings, return to the Run screen and then tap . When prompted to close the field, tap

Close

. Then tap access the Configuration screen.

For each item shown in the configuration list on the Configuration screen, you can: l

Change settings l

View diagnostics l

Save the configuration l

Switch the selected configuration

You can also add or remove features/plugins to perform different operations. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

to

44

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Run screen

You access the Run screen from the Home screen.

Main screens

You can also move between the Run screen and the Configuration screen in some cases.

The Run screen is used during operations and shows your guidance lines and an on-screen representation of your vehicle in the field. The areas of the Run screen include: l

Operational view (page 355)

l

Main buttons (page 353)

l

On-screen lightbar for vehicle (page 360)

l

Optional features/plugins (page 48)

l

Coverage button and information. See

Coverage button for logging (page 360)

.

l

Engage button (page 359)

, if applicable

You can navigate from the Run screen to the Configuration screen to: l

Change settings l

View diagnostics l

Save configuration (in some cases)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

45

On-screen user guide 2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

On-screen user guide

To access the on-screen user guide for the FM-1000 Plus application:

1. Close the FM-1000 Plus application by navigating to the Home screen and tapping

Close

.

Note  – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before rebooting, you may experience a loss of data.

2. Go to the

Launcher screen (page 39)

.

3. Tap

.

Note  – If automatic steering, spraying, seeding or other services are engaged in FM-1000 Plus application and you go to the Launcher screen without closing the FM-1000 Plus application, the automatic systems will disengage.

46

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

2   FM-1000 Plus application basics System bar

System bar

CAUTION – Do not press on the screen with a sharp object such as a pencil. This could damage the surface of the screen.

The system bar is always available at the bottom of the screen on the FM-1000 Plus application.

Navigation buttons

Navigation buttons in the middle of the bottom display bar enable you to navigate between views.

Button Tap to...

Go to the

Home screen (page 40)

.

Go to the

Launcher screen (page 39)

.

See all views. Tap the view you want to fill the screen.

Emergency button

In the middle of the bottom bar, the Emergency button is displayed at all times. To cancel all functions controlled by the display, tap . This button is useful if you need to quickly disengage an automatic steering system or end application control.

Note  – Tapping this button does not turn the vehicle off or stop it. It only cancels display-controlled functions such as automatic steering systems, spraying, seeding and so on.

Screenshot

To capture a screen, tap the camera button

Screen shots (page 50)

.

on the far right of the bottom display bar. See

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

47

Optional features/plugins 2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Optional features/plugins

The FM-1000 Plus application has a number of optional features (plugins) you can install to expand its functionality. Most of these features require additional hardware. You must:

1. Purchase the feature.

2. Install any hardware required by the feature.

3. Unlock the feature. See

Feature unlocks (page 59)

.

4. Activate the feature for use. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

5. Configure the feature.

Vehicle guidance

l

Trimble Autopilot™ automated steering system: See

Autopilot system (page 164)

.

l

Trimble EZ-Pilot™ assisted steering system: See

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system (page 199) .

l

Trimble EZ-Steer® assisted steering system: See

EZ-Steer assisted steering system (page 205) .

l

RG-100 Row Guidance system: Works with the Autopilot system to center the combine on the rows. See

Row Guidance (page 185) .

Features for application

l

Trimble Field-IQ™ crop input control system: Control sections and vary application rates. See

Field-IQ system setup (page 218)

and

Field-IQ operation (page 389) .

l

GreenSeeker®: Vary fertilizer rate in real-time using crop vigor measurements. See

GreenSeeker functionality (page 258)

and

GreenSeeker operation (page 422) .

l

Serial Rate Controller: Use a variable rate controller. See

Additional controller setup (page 277)

.

ISOBUS

l

Virtual Terminal: View and use Virtual Terminal. See

Virtual Terminal setup (page 264)

and

Virtual Terminal operation (page 428)

.

l

Task Controller: Use Task Controller. See

Task Controller setup (page 264)

and

Task Controller operation (page 427) .

48

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

2   FM-1000 Plus application basics Optional features/plugins

Implement control

l

Trimble TrueGuide™ implement guidance system: Use guidance on the implement for greater accuracy. See

TrueGuide system (page 280)

and

TrueGuide operation (page 437)

.

l

Trimble TrueTracker™ implement steering system: Automatically steer the implement for greater accuracy. See

TrueTracker (page 286)

and

TrueTracker operation (page 439) .

Connectivity

l l

Ag3000 modem: Receive cellular RTK corrections. See

Ag3000 modem (page 143) .

DCM-300 modem: Receive RTK corrections from a VRS

™ a CORS. See

DCM-300 Modem (page 144) .

network, a third-party RTK provider or l

Vehicle Sync: Transmit data between vehicles. See

Vehicle Sync (page 302) .

l

Serial Data Input: Enable data input from an external serial device. See

Serial Data Input (page

142)

.

l

Remote Output: Enable remote data output to an external device. See

Remote Output setup

(page 136) .

l

EZ-Remote™ Joystick: Control a variety of FM-1000 Plus applicationfunctions remotely. See

EZ-Remote Joystick (page 64) .

Water Management

l

Survey and design: Survey a field and then create a design. See

Survey the field (page 447)

and

Create / save a design (page 449) .

l

FieldLevel™ II:

Level the field to a design, install subsurface drainage or surface ditches. See

FieldLevel II

Leveling (page 310) .

l

Control leveling with two GPS receivers, in one of two possible scraper configurations. See

Tandem / dual scraper setup (page 317)

,

Dual scraper controls (page 462) , and

Tandem scraper controls (page 463) .

l

WM-Drain® farm drainage solution: For subsurface drainage. See

WM-Drain setup (page 320)

and

WM-Drain operation (page 464)

.

Harvest

l

Yield Monitoring: Display yield monitoring data. See

Yield Monitoring settings (page 336)

and

Yield Monitoring operation (page 482)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

49

Screen shots 2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

Screen shots

To save an image of the FM-1000 Plus application screen, tap screen.

The screenshot is stored: l

On the USB drive under Pictures \ Screenshots l

In the Data Dictionary under Diagnostics \ Screenshots on the bottom left of the

50

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

2   FM-1000 Plus application basics FM-1000 Plus application Passwords

FM-1000 Plus application Passwords

The access and administration passwords apply to the FM-1000 Plus application.

Access password

Any

Setup

or

Calibrate

button marked with a padlock icon is protected by two passwords: l

Administration password: Your password.

l

Master password: A backup password in case you lose the Administration password. If you need the Master password, contact your local reseller.

The password screen displays the first time that you tap a

Setup

or

Calibrate

button after you turn on the FM-1000 Plus application. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the administration password and then tap

OK

.

Note  – Passwords are case sensitive.

Change administration password

Note  – To change the Administration password, you need the Master password. If you do not know it, contact your local reseller.

1. If you have not entered the password during the current session, at the Configuration screen tap

Setup

or

Calibrate

.

2. If you have already entered the password during this session, tap button and then tap

Lock

Configuration

. On the Configuration screen tap

Setup

or

Calibrate

.

3. The Enter Administration Password screen displays.

4. Enter an incorrect password. The Wrong Password screen displays.

5. Tap

Enter Master Password

.

6. Enter the master password and then tap

OK

. The Change Administration Password screen displays.

7. Enter your new administration password in both fields. The new administration password is now active.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

51

FM-1000 Plus application Passwords 2   FM-1000 Plus application basics

52

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

3

Basic settings

In this chapter:

Settings

Unlocks and upgrades

Activate features/plugins for use

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Display settings

Access display settings

Date and time settings

91

91

Languages and units settings for display 92

Users and passwords 93

Wi-Fi settings

Restore defaults

94

94

54

56

60

61

91

Basic settings include: l

Upgrades: Upgrading the system firmware or features you have purchased and activated l

Unlocks: Features you purchase are included with a passcode so that you can unlock them on your system.

l

Activation for use: After you have unlocked a feature, you can activate it for use for your operation. You can also deactivate features in order to activate other features for use.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

53

Settings 3   Basic settings

Settings

You can customize and set up many options for both the FM-1000 Plus application and the XCN-

2050 display.

FM-1000 Plus application-specific settings

Some settings are specific to the FM-1000 Plus application only: l

Data dictionary (page 62)

l

EZ-Remote Joystick (page 64)

l

Field feature mapping settings (page 65)

l

Guidance settings (page 66)

l

Language, measurements, keyboard layout (page 67)

l

Lightbar settings (page 68)

l

Map settings (page 70)

l

Restore default settings (page 76)

l

Signal input module for OEM switch (page 77)

l

Sounds (page 78)

l

Status items (page 79)

FM-1000 Plus application and display settings

Some settings affect both FM-1000 Plus application and the display, including the Launcher screen: l

Languages and units settings for display (page 92)

l

Date and time settings (page 91)

l

Users and passwords (page 93)

l

Restore defaults (page 94)

l

Wi-Fi settings (page 94)

Display-specific settings

Settings in

Display settings (page 91)

affect the volume, brightness and sounds from the display.

54

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings

Upgrades and unlocks

Navigate to these settings to upgrade firmware or unlock features: l

Firmware upgrades (page 56)

l

Feature unlocks (page 59)

Settings

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

55

Unlocks and upgrades 3   Basic settings

Unlocks and upgrades

Unlocks are passcodes you enter to activate a feature or service on the display after you have purchase it.

Upgrades are firmware updates to the existing firmware or feature that you have already activated.

Note  – If you are using the XCN-2050 display for the first time, you must first obtain a GPS position for unlocks to become active. If the display was installed indoors, you must move the equipment with the display outside to gain satellite access.

Firmware upgrades

You can upgrade firmware using a USB drive or wirelessly if your configuration includes a DCM-300 modem, subscription to Office Sync and Wi-Fi or data plan.

USB upgrades

Note  – Do NOT shut down the system during upgrades. The upgrade process can take at least 10 minutes, depending on your system's configuration. The system will reboot automatically at least once. It can take up to two minutes for the reboot process to be complete.

1. Turn off the display manually by holding the power button down for about two seconds.

2. Tap Shutdown. The display powers off and saves a backup of the database.

3. Power on the display by holding down the power button briefly (about one half of a second).

4. Insert the USB drive in either socket of the XCN-2050 display.

5. At the

Launcher screen (page 39) , tap

.

6. Tap

Firmware Upgrades

.

7. A list displays with the firmware versions available.

8. Choose the version of the firmware package for FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-2050 application you want to upgrade to.

9. Tap the checkmark to continue the upgrade.

Note  – Do NOT shut down the system during upgrades. The upgrade process can take at least 10 minutes, depending on your system's configuration. The system will reboot automatically at least once. It can take up to two minutes for the reboot process to be complete.

56

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings Unlocks and upgrades

Wireless upgrades

Note  – Do NOT shut down the system during upgrades. The upgrade process can take at least 10 minutes, depending on your system's configuration. The system will reboot automatically at least once. It can take up to two minutes for the reboot process to be complete.

Note  – Wireless upgrades require a DCM-300 modem, a subscription to Office Sync and a data plan or access to WiFi. See

Wi-Fi settings (page 94)

and

DCM-300 Modem (page 144) .

1. Tap Shutdown. The display powers off and saves a backup of the database.

2. Power on the display by holding down the power button briefly (about one half of a second).

3. At the

Launcher screen (page 39)

, tap .

4. Tap

Firmware Upgrades

.

5.

Tap Check for Updates

.

6. A list displays with the firmware versions available.

7. Choose the version of the firmware package for FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-2050 application you want to upgrade to.

8. Tap the checkmark to continue the upgrade.

Settings for wireless upgrades

To access display settings, see

Access display settings (page 91)

.

You can control how FM-1000 Plus application checks for upgrades and when to wirelessly download them.

1. Tap Firmware Upgrades.

2. Tap

Settings

.

Setting Explanation

Auto check for new upgrades If you activate this, the system will automatically check for new upgrades.

Auto download new upgrades when available

Auto install firmware on power down

Only download via WiFi

This choice is only available if you have chosen to have the system automatically check for new upgrades. The system will install the updates as they are available.

This choice is only available if you have chosen to have the system automatically check for new upgrades. The system will install the updates before the display powers off.

This choice is only available if you have chosen to have the system automatically check for new upgrades. The system

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

57

Unlocks and upgrades 3   Basic settings

Setting

Show support beta releases in list

Explanation

will download the updates only through a WiFi connection.

The system includes beta releases available for you to download.

Installed packages

To access display settings, see

Access display settings (page 91) .

1. Tap Firmware Upgrades.

2. Tap

Installed Packages

.

Check for updates

To access display settings, see

Access display settings (page 91) .

1. Tap Firmware Upgrades.

2. Tap

Check for Updates

. If you are set up for wireless upgrades the system checks for updates and begins the upgrade process immediately unless you have altered when the upgrade occurs in

Settings.

58

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings Unlocks and upgrades

Feature unlocks

Note  – If you are using the XCN-2050 display for the first time, you must first obtain a GPS position for unlocks to become active. If the display was installed indoors, you must move the equipment with the display outside to gain satellite access.

For some optional features, you must enter the unlock password. If you do not have an unlock password, contact your local reseller.

To access display settings, see

Access display settings (page 91)

.

Tap Feature Unlocks. You can unlock features by manually entering the code, having the display read the QR code of the unlock, or checking for unlocks.

At the bottom of the screen, the list of currently locked features displays.

Manual code entry

1. Tap the Code text box and enter the code.

2. If the system accepts the code, tap Accept.

3. If the system rejects the code, you can try again or contact your reseller for help.

QR code scan

1. Tap

Read QR

.

2. Hold your code image in front of the camera for it to be read.

3. If the system accepts the code, Tap Accept.

4. If the system rejects the code, you can try again or contact your reseller for help.

Check for unlocks

1. Tap

Check for Unlocks

.

2. The request will be sent for the display to check for any available service or licenses. It may take several minutes for the unlocks to be processed.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

59

Activate features/plugins for use 3   Basic settings

Activate features/plugins for use

All features that have been unlocked must be activated (or "added") for use before you can set up or use them.

1. Open the FM-1000 Plus application if you are not already in it.

2. At the Home screen, tap

Note  – To add or remove features/plugins, you must access the Configuration screen only from the

Home screen.

3. At the Configuration screen, tap

Add/Remove

. The Select Active Plugins screen displays.

4. To use a feature, select it from the

Inactive Plugins list and tap

Add >

.

5. To stop using a feature, select it from the

Active Plugins list and tap

<Remove

.

6. When you are finished with your choices, tap

OK

. The system returns you to the Configuration screen.

60

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings

FM-1000 Plus application settings

FM-1000 Plus application settings

To complete the settings for the FM-1000 Plus application, at the Configuration screen, select the

System option and then tap

Setup

. The Display Setup screen displays.

If required, enter the administrator password. See

FM-1000 Plus application Passwords (page 51) .

1. At the Configuration screen, tap

System in the list, then tap

Setup

.

2. If necessary, enter the administrator password. See

FM-1000 Plus application Passwords (page

51) .

3. The Display Setup screen displays.

4. At this screen, you can navigate to and edit:

Data dictionary (page 62)

l

EZ-Remote Joystick (page 64)

l

Field feature mapping settings (page 65)

l

Guidance settings (page 66)

l

Language, measurements, keyboard layout (page 67)

l

Lightbar settings (page 68)

l

Map settings (page 70)

l

Port settings (page 74)

l

Signal input module for OEM switch (page 77)

l

Status items (page 79)

that display on the Run screen

You can also return the display to its default settings. See

Restore default settings (page 76) .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

61

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Data dictionary

For information about data management, see: l

Managing data (page 96)

l

Data Dictionary categories (page 112)

l

Create / load a data dictionary (page 113)

3   Basic settings

62

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings

Data Files

FM-1000 Plus application settings

At the Data Files screen, you can transfer data. See

Transfer data (page 96) .

You can access the Data Files screen from the Display Setup screen as well as from the Home screen.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

63

FM-1000 Plus application settings

EZ-Remote Joystick

3   Basic settings

For installation information, see the EZ-Remote Joystick Quick Reference Card.

If you use the EZ-Remote joystick, you do not need to tap buttons on the display. This improves your accuracy when you select buttons, and gives you faster reaction times. You can program the

EZ-Remote joystick to controls the functions of the FM-1000 Plus application.

Note  – The functions available to assign to each button depend on which optional features (plugins) are activated on the display.

1. Connect the EZ-Remote joystick into into a CAN connection on Port A or B of the TM-200

Module. An EZ-Remote joystick icon automatically displays on the Configuration screen.

2. At the Configuration screen, select EZ-Remote and then tap

Setup

. The EZ-Remote Assignment screen displays.

Configure each key for the function you want to control remotely. You can also adjust the brightness of the LED joystick buttons.

3. On the EZ-Remote joystick, press the first button you wish to program. The Function

Assignment screen displays.

4. Tap the feature that you want to program into that button on the control joystick.

5. Tap

Set

and then tap

OK

. The Keypad Assignment screen displays again.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to program more buttons as required.

7. When completed, tap

OK

.

Note  – You can configure the EZ-Remote control joystick while operating in a field. From the Run screen, tap and then follow the previous steps.

64

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings

Field feature mapping settings

A field feature is an item you designate on the display while your in your field to indicate lines (such as fences), areas (such as areas to exclude) and points (such as rocks).

The field feature mapping settings determine: l

What buttons are available on the Mapping Guidance panel of the Run screen for creating features in the field l

The reference point for creating field features (center, left or right of the boom) l

If a path should be recorded when you begin logging coverage l

The types of warnings that can trigger when entering a feature or area l

When to restrict remote output l

How a boundary is recorded

For detailed information, see

Field feature mapping settings (page 148)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

65

FM-1000 Plus application settings 3   Basic settings

Guidance settings

Note  – If you are setting up the system for the first time, you should not need to adjust these settings.

Setting

Limit Field Selection

Auto Steering Lockout

Explanation

Limits the number of fields that display when you are selecting a field.

l

Yes

: Enables Limit Field Selection. The displayed fields are within the set radius of the vehicle's current location, based on the vehicle's GPS position.

l

No

: Disables Limit Field Selection l

Selection Radius

: Fields that fall within this radius will display. To exclude: l

More fields, enter a smaller number

Fewer fields, enter a larger number

Disables engagement of an automated guidance system until you enable guidance in the Run screen.

l

Yes

: System functions as normal. Auto Guidance Enabled on/off is still allowed.

l

No

: System cannot engage. The Engage button shows as red.

66

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings

Language, measurements, keyboard layout

Setting

Language Selection

Display Units

Keyboard Layout

Explanation

Same as XCN

: Sets the language for the FM-1000 Plus application to be the same as that of the XCN-2050 display. This is the default settings.

To set the language for the display, see

Languages and units settings for display (page 92) .

FM-1000 Only

: Enables you to set a language for the FM-1000 Plus application that is different from the language set for the XCN-2050 display.

Select the unit of measure for the display: l

Metric l

Feet and Inches (default) l

Decimal Feet

The FM-1000 Plus application uses an on-screen keyboard on the touchscreen. Options for layout: l

ABCDEF

: Letters appear in alphabetical order l

QWERTY

: Layout the same as a computer keyboard (default)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

67

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Lightbar settings

3   Basic settings

On-screen lightbar

You can edit the default settings for the on-screen (virtual) lightbar.

1. At the Display Setup screen, select

Lightbar

.

2. Tap

Setup

. The Lightbar Configuration screen displays.

3. Tap

Virtual Lightbar and tap

Setup

.

4. Complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting

LED spacing

Display Mode

Explanation

The distance represented by each LED on the lightbar.

a. Tap the appropriate number field.

b. Enter the required values.

Default: 3 cm per LED/1" per LED

How the LEDs respond to offline distances. When “Show error” is selected, the FM-1000 Plus application shows the direction that you need to move in. When

Show correction is selected, the

FM-1000 Plus application shows your current distance offline.

a. From the list, tap the appropriate option.

b. Enter the virtual lightbar settings, then tap

OK

.

c. At the Lightbars Configuration screen, tap

OK

.

Default: show error (chase mode)

68

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings

External lightbar

To set up the external lightbar:

1. Connect the LB25 lightbar to any available CAN connection on Port A or Port B of the AG-815 integrated radio.

2. At the Display Setup screen, tap

Lightbar

.

3. Tap

Setup

. The Lightbar Configuration screen displays.

4. Tap

Lightbar and tap

Setup

.

5. Complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting

Name

Orientation

Brightness

LED Spacing

Lightbar Purpose

Look ahead time

Explanation

Name and serial number of the lightbar

Choose the orientation of the lightbar

Setting for how bright the lightbar displays

The distance represented by each LED on the lightbar.

a. Tap the appropriate number field.

b. Enter the required values.

Default: 3 cm per LED/1" per LED

Choose the purpose of the lightbar

The distance ahead of the vehicle that the lightbar will use for

LED guidance and offline distance.

Default: 0 seconds

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

69

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Map settings

At the Mapping screen, you can complete settings on these tabs: l

Main

l

Track Logging

3   Basic settings

70

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings

Main tab

Note  – For a new toolbar orientation to take effect, restart the display.

Setting

Map orientation

Explanation

Controls the direction that the screen follows the position of the vehicle.

l

North Up

: When you perform a turn, the field remains stationary and the vehicle turns.

l

Vehicle Up

: When you perform a turn, the field rotates but the vehicle remains pointing up.

Color scheme

Save summaries

Note  – To change the map orientation from the Run screen, tap the north arrow.

Default mode l

On

: The FM-1000 Plus application creates a saved file for your work.

l

Off

: The FM-1000 Plus application does not create a saved file for your work.

Track Logging tab

On the

Track Logging tab, you can configure the FM-1000 Plus application to record the vehicle track at either a set time or a set distance. Points along the trck are logged at the greater of the two values

(either logging time or logging distance).

To always log a point based on either of the two values, set the other value to zero. To disable track logging, set both values to zero.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

71

FM-1000 Plus application settings 3   Basic settings

Setting

Distance = 0, Time = 0

Distance = 1+, Time = 0

Track logging is...

Turned off

Recorded by distance (m)

Distance = 0, Time = >1+ Recorded by time (s)

Distance = >1+, Time = >1+ Recorded by whichever setting is higher

Track logging files

Track logging files are created whenever you open an event. The track file records points at the rate set on the

Track Logging

tab. At each point, a number of attributes are recorded.

Note  – The data stored in the track logging file (Track3D_<date time>.dbf) is in metric units.

The information stored for each point in the track logging file is listed in the following table.

Column

Along_Line

Units

meters

Ant_HAE

Ant_Lat

Ant_Long

Appln_Wdth

As_Applied

Auto_Steer

Corct_Age

Field_Name

GPS_Status

Ground_HAE

HDOP

Heading

Description

Along line distance from start of swath.

Attribute Not Populated

Antenna height above ellipsoid.

Attribute Not Populated.

Antenna latitude (WGS-84).

Antenna longitude (WGS-84).

Application width.

Applied rate. Attribute Not Populated

Auto-Steer flag (1=on, 0=off).

DGPS signal correction age.

The name of the field.

GPS status value (NMEA).

Ground height above ellipsoid.

Attribute Not Populated

Horizontal Dilution of Precision – A measure of the quality of positions based on satellite geometry.

Direction of travel with respect to true North.

meters

DD.dddddddd

DD.dddddddd

meters

On or off seconds

1, 2, 5, 4 meters

– decimal degrees

72

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings

Column

Height

Local_Time

Logging_On

Num_Stats

Offline

Pitch

Relative_Height

Roll

Speed

Status_Text

Swath_Num

Swath_Wdth

Target

Total_Qty

Units

UTC_Date

UTC_Time

Version

Yaw

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Description

Mean sea level height of ground.

Local time.

Coverage logging flag (1=on, 0=off).

Number of GPS satellites.

Offline distance from swath center line.

The pitch. Attribute Not Populated

Units

meters hh:mm:ss.s

On or off

– meters

Height.

The roll. Attribute Not Populated

GPS-derived ground speed.

GPS status description.

meters

– kph

Current swath/headland number.

Swath width.

The target rate at the current position.

Total volume of material as applied for the current field. Only supported for the Aerial Flow

Controller, Autocal Flow controller, and

Crophawk Flow Meter.

– meters

Units.

Attribute Not Populated metric

Point creation date.

UTC time.

Track attribute file version.

The yaw. Attribute Not Populated

YYYYMMDD hh:mm:ss.s

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

73

FM-1000 Plus application settings 3   Basic settings

Port settings

The Port Setup screen displays information about: l

Receiver connection status l

The TM-200 Module serial number l

The serial number of the AG-815 integrated radio, if connected

To configure your system:

1. Connect hardware. See the XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

2.

Assign

the primary USB port and the EXP-100(s) in the Port Setup screen.

3. Complete port information for each optional feature/plugin as you set it up.

Assignments

1. Choose which EXP-100 is used as primary, secondary and tertiary.

2. Assign which USB port of the XCN-2050 display should be used to transfer data to a USB drive.

Setting

EXP-100 #1

EXP-100 #2

Receiver EXP-100 or AG-815 integrated radio

(This label changes, depending on your configuration)

Choose the serial number of the...

Primary EXP-100

Note  – Typically used for SerialVR or external receivers.

Equivalent to Port A or Port B on a physical FM-1000 integrated display.

Secondary EXP-100

Note  – Typically used for SerialVR or external receivers.

Equivalent to Port A or Port B on a physical FM-1000 integrated display.

EXP-100 (third port expander cable)

Note  – Used to assign GNSS-2 or external radios. Typically used for TrueTracker. Equivalent to Port D on a physical FM-

1000 integrated display.

74

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings

Configuration principles

Use these rules to configure the settings of your configuration.

l

Any serial connection requires an EXP-100. You can connect up to three EXP-100s together.

However, port A of the TM-200 Module is used for Autopilot.

l

For CAN connections, two CAN ports are available on the TM-200 Module. The EZ-Steer system and EZ-Pilot system use Port B on the TM-200 Module.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

75

FM-1000 Plus application settings 3   Basic settings

Restore default settings

Note  – These default settings for the FM-1000 Plus application are different from the

Restore defaults (page

94)

settings for the XCN-2050 display.

You can reset the FM-1000 Plus application to its default values. This can be useful if: l

You made changes to the display settings. The results are poor, but you cannot determine which setting was the cause.

l

You move the display from one vehicle to another.

Note  – If you restore the defaults, the Autopilot vehicle setup information is not reset.

To restore the default settings:

1. At the Configuration screen, select the screen displays.

2. Tap

Default

. A confirmation screen displays.

System option and then tap

Setup

. The Display Setup

3. Tap

Yes

. The default settings are restored.

76

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings

Signal input module for OEM switch

FM-1000 Plus application settings

The signal input module (SIM) can interface with existing equipment inputs to control on-screen buttons and features. A SIM must be connected to assign features to the buttons.

1. To assign the buttons, highlight the action in the

Actions list.

2. Tap

<-- Set

to set the action to the specified input.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

77

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Sounds

The ways sounds can be produced are: l l

Through the internal speaker of the FM-1000 Plus application

If Autopilot is part of your configration, you can use an exernal Sonalert

1. At the Display Setup screen, select

Sounds and tap setup.

2. Complete the settings and tap

OK

.

Setting

Alarm

Warning

Track Logging

Touch Screen

Explanation

Off, External Speaker, AP Sonalert.

Note  – Sonalert works only with Autopilot.

Off, External Speaker, AP Sonalert.

Note  – Sonalert works only with Autopilot.

Off, External Speaker

Both high, Off, External low

3   Basic settings

78

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings

Status items

FM-1000 Plus application settings

The status items are features you have activated for use. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page

60)

. If a feature is deactivated, the status items associated with it are no longer available.

The Select Status Items screen has two tabs where you can configure various FM-1000 Plus application options for the status text items.

Run screen slide-out status

On the

Run Screen tab, you can set what items display on the Run screen in the status slide-out panel when you tap the edge of the panel. The status text items appropriate for the features/plugins you are currently using display in the Info Items list.

1. Set the upper left status text item: a. From the

Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.

b. Tap the left

^ Set Item

button. The information displays in the upper left field.

2. Set the upper right status text item: a. From the

Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.

b. Tap the right

^ Set Item

button. The information displays in the upper right field.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

79

FM-1000 Plus application settings 3   Basic settings

3. From the

Timeout list, select a time. This is how long the tab remains on-screen before retracting.

To have the tab extended until you close it manually, select

Never

.

4. To add status items to the slide-out tab: a. Tap the position on the tab that you want to fill. For example, to add an item to the first position on the list, tap at the location shown.

b. From the

Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.

c. Tap

<- Set Item

.

5. To save the configuration, tap

OK

.

Info screen

On the

Info Screen tab, you can determine which items will be displayed on the Info panel when you tap .

The status text items appropriate for the features/plugins you are currently using display in the

Info

Screen list.

1. Set the left Info text items: a. From the

Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.

b. Tap the left

^ Set Item

button.

c. Repeat steps a and b until you have all the items you want, or the list is full. The information displays in the left field.

2. Set the right Info text items: a. From the

Info Items list, tap the item you want to use.

b. Tap the right

^ Set Item

button.

c. Repeat steps a and b until you have all the items you require, or the list is full. The information displays in the right field.

3. To save the configuration, tap

OK

.

Status option list

The following list shows the status items you can choose to display on the Run screen. The status items available depend on the optional features/plugins that are currently activated.

In the Display Setup screen, select

Status Items

and then tap

Setup

.

Status Item

(blank)

Along Track Error

Explanation

Status text item is not shown

80

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings

Status Item

Altitude

Applied Rate

Area to Empty

Auxiliary Valve

Available Memory

Average Population

Avg Seed Spacing

Blade Height

Boot Depth

CH1 - CH4 Product Level

Client Name

CMR Percent

Control Speed

Correction Age

Correction Type

Coverage Percent

Current Flow

Cut/Fill

Design Height

Explanation

Current height of the vehicle

Current application rate

Area that can still be applied before the tank is empty

Current status of the auxiliary valve

Amount of free space on the display's internal memory

Average rate across all rows

Average distance between seeds based on the average sample size

Current height of the blade

Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches (used with the Autoslope leveling model)

Current level of the products that are in channels 1-4

Name of the current client

Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds

Speed reported to the multi-application controller

Length of time since the last correction was received

Correction type that is being used

Percentage of the field area that is covered area

Current flow of material

Difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height: l

When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height.

l

When Fill is shown, the current ground height is below the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height.

Height the blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows turn green.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

81

FM-1000 Plus application settings 3   Basic settings

Status Item

Design Slope

Dist to Feature

Dist to Pause

East

Engaged Time

Event Coverage Area

Event Coverage Distance

Event Coverage Time

Event Name

Farm Name

Field Area

Field Name

Free External Storage

Free Internal Storage

GMT Time

GPS Position Spacing

GPS Status

H Error

Heading

Heading to Feature

Heading to Pause

Impl. Altitude

Impl. CMR Percent

Explanation

When using the Autoslope leveling model, this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the section line.

Distance to the nearest feature

Distance to the pause position

Distance that the vehicle is to the east of the field origin point (a negative number means the vehicle is to the west of the field origin point)

Length of time that the system has been engaged

Area that has been logged during the current event

Distance covered while logging during the current event

Length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the current event

Name of the current event

Name of the current farm

Field area within a pivot or headland boundary

Name of the current field

Amount of free space on the USB drive

Amount of free space on the display's internal memory

Current Greenwich Mean Time

GPS correction type that the GPS receiver is currently using

Horizontal error:An estimation of the level of precision of the GPS position in 2 dimensions

Current heading of the vehicle, in degrees, from direct north

Vehicle location relative to the nearest feature (feature is directly ahead = 0°; directly behind = 180°)

Direction vehicle is facing relative to the paused vehicle position

(directly ahead = 0°; directly behind = 180°)

Current height of the implement

Percentage of radio CMR packets received by the implement GPS

82

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings

Status Item

Impl. Correction Age

Impl. Correction Type

Impl. East

Impl. Engaged Time

Impl. GPS Status

Impl. H Error

Impl. HDOP

Impl. Heading

Impl. Latitude

Impl. Long-Term XTE

Impl. Longitude

Impl. Network ID

Impl. North

Impl. Nudge/Trim

Impl. Offline Dist

Impl. Satellites

Impl. Short-term XTE

Impl. Speed

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Explanation

receiver over the last 100 seconds

Age of the corrections used by the implement receiver

Correction type used by the implement receiver

Distance that the implement is to the east of the field origin point (a negative number means the implement is to the west of the field origin point)

Time that the implement has been engaged

The status of the GPS correction used for the implement

Implement horizontal error: An estimation of the level of precision of the implement GPS position in 2 dimensions

Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the implement receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky.

If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the HDOP is higher

(lower is better).

Current heading of the implement, in degrees, from direct north

Implement's current latitude

Implement Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur more than one hour apart

Implement's current longitude

RTK network ID of the implement receiver's corrections

Distance that the implement is to the north of the field origin point

(a negative number means the implement is to the south of the field origin point)

Amount of nudge or trim currently applied to the implement position

Distance away from the guidance line

Number of satellites the implement receiver is reading

Implement pass-to-pass Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur within less than 15 minutes

Current implement speed

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

83

Impl. Vehicle Model

Implement

Implement F/B Offset

Implement L/R Offset

Implement Width

Latitude

Line Feature Length

Local Time

Long-term XTE

Longitude

Longitude

NDVI

Nearest Point Name

Network ID

Network Status

North

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Status Item

Impl. Steering Angle

Impl. Up

Nudge

Nudge/Trim

Offline Dist.

Offset X

Offset Y

P Altitude

3   Basic settings

Explanation

Steering angle of the implement

Vertical height of the implement relative to the field origin point (a negative number means the implement is lower than the field origin point)

Implement profile name

Name of the current implement

Distance of front to back offset

Distance of left to right offset

Width of the implement

Vehicle's current latitude

Length of the current line feature

Current local time

Vehicle Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur more than one hour apart.

Vehicle's current longitude

Vehicle's current longitude

Normalized Difference Vegetation Index

Bame of the nearest point feature

RTK network ID of the GPS receiver's corrections

Current status of the wireless cellular network

Distance that the vehicle is to the north of the field origin point (a negative number means the vehicle is to the south of the field origin point)

Amount of nudge currently applied

Amount of nudge or trim currently applied

Distance away from the guidance line

Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark

Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark

Current height of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade GPS

84

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings

Status Item

P Blade Height

P Boot Depth

P CMR Percent

P Correction Age

P Correction Type

P Cut/Fill

P Design Height

P Design Slope

P Distance Traveled

P East

P GPS Status

P H Error

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Explanation

receiver

Current height of the primary blade

Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches (used with the Autoslope leveling model)

Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds by the primary blade GPS receiver

Time since the GPS corrections were last received from the primary

FieldLevel™ GPS receiver

Correction type used by the primary blade receiver

Difference between the Primary Blade Height and the Primary

Target Height: l

When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height.

l

When fill is shown, the current ground height is below the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height.

Height the primary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design

Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows turn green.

When using the Autoslope leveling model, this displays the design slope with respect to the current location along the section line.

Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled. (For use with

FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode). The d

Distance that the primary blade receiver is to the east of the field origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the west of the field origin point)

GPS correction type that the primary blade GPS receiver is currently using

(Horizontal error) An estimation of the level of precision of the primary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

85

FM-1000 Plus application settings 3   Basic settings

Status Item

P HDOP

P Heading

P Latitude

P Longitude

P Network ID

P North

P Offset

P Offset X

P Offset Y

P Satellites

P Section Line Number

P Speed

P Target Height

P Up

P VDOP

P Vertical Error Estimate

Pressure

Explanation

Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the primary blade receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the HDOP is higher (lower is better).

Current heading of the primary blade, in degrees, from direct north

Primary blade's current latitude

Primary blade's current longitude

RTK network ID of the primary blade receiver's corrections

Distance that the primary blade receiver is to the north of the field origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the south of the field origin point)

Separate plane that is parallel to the design plane. The offset if defined by a single measurement, which is the height that the offset plane is from the design plane.

Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark

Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark

Number of satellites the system is currently being received by the

FieldLevel II GPS receiver

Line number of the primary blade

Speed of the vehicle as reported by the primary blade GPS receiver

Height the primary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design

Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows turn green.

Height of the primary blade receiver relative to the field origin point

(a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin point)

Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the VDOP is higher (lower is better).

Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II

GPS receiver

Current pressure as reported by the primary pressure sensor

86

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings

Status Item

Productive Area

Radio Signal Strength

S Altitude

S Blade Height

S CMR Percent

S Correction Age

S Correction Type

S Cut/Fill

S Design Height

S Distance Traveled

S East

S GPS Status

S H Error

S HDOP

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Explanation

Area of Area Features that are designated as "productive"

DCM-300 wireless signal strength

Current height of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade

GPS receiver

Current height of the secondary blade

Percentage of radio CMR packets received over the last 100 seconds by the secondary blade GPS receiver

Time since the GPS corrections were last received from the secondary FieldLEvel GPS receiver

Correction type used by the secondary blade receiver

Difference between the Secondary Blade Height and the Secondary

Target Height: l

When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height.

l

When Fill is shown, the current ground height is below the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height.

Height the secondary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design

Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows turn green.

Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled (for use with

FieldLevel II Point to Slope mode)

Distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the east of the field origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the west of the field origin point)

GPS correction type that the secondary blade GPS receiver is currently using

(Horizontal error) Estimation of the level of precision of the secondary blade GPS position in 2 dimensions

Horizontal Dilution of Precision of the secondary blade receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

87

FM-1000 Plus application settings 3   Basic settings

Status Item

S Heading

S Latitude

S Longitude

S Network ID

S North

S Offset

S Offset X

S Offset Y

S Satellites

S Section Line Number

S Speed

S Target Height

S Up

S VDOP

S Vertical Error Estimate

Satellites

Explanation

sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the HDOP is higher (lower is better).

Current heading of the secondary blade, in degrees, from direct north

Secondary blade's current latitude

Secondary blade's current longitude

RTK network ID of the secondary blade receiver's corrections

Distance that the secondary blade receiver is to the north of the field origin point (a negative number means the receiver is to the south of the field origin point)

Separate plane that is parallel to the design plane. The offset if defined by a single measurement, which is the height that the offset plane is from the design plane.

Relative Position X offset from the master benchmark

Relative Position Y offset from the master benchmark

Number of satellites the system is currently being received by the

FieldLevel II GPS receiver

Line number of the secondary blade

Speed of the vehicle as reported by the secondary blade GPS receiver

Height the secondary blade will attempt to reach. This is the Design

Height ± the Offset. When the blade reaches the Target Height, the arrows turn green.

Height of the secondary blade receiver relative to the field origin point (a negative number means the blade is lower than the field origin point)

Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky. If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the VDOP is higher (lower is better).

Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II

GPS receiver

Number of satellites the system is currently receiving

88

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings FM-1000 Plus application settings

Status Item

Secondary Pressure

Section Line Number

Seed Mults %

Seed Population

Seed Singulation

Seed Skips %

Seed Spacing

Session Coverage Area

Session Coverage Dist

Session Coverage Time

Session Time

Short-term XTE

Speed

Steering Angle

Survey Area

Survey Cut/Fill

Survey Points

Swath Length

Explanation

Current pressure, as reported by the secondary pressure sensor

Number of the current section line

Percentage of time an more than one seed is placed for every intended drop

Amount of seed planted per acre/hectare

Percentage of time an individual seed is placed for every intended drop

Percentage of seed that has not been planted

Percentage of seed that has been applied in the specified spacing

Area that has been logged during the current session

Distance covered while logging during the current session

Length of time that coverage logging has been engaged during the current session

Length of the current field session

Vehicle pass-to-pass Cross Track Error (XTE) when passes occur within less than 15 minutes

Current vehicle speed

Angle reported by the rotary potentiomenter or the AutoSense™ device

Total area of the current survey

Difference between the Blade Height and the Target Height: l

When Cut is shown, the current ground height is above the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow, which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the Target Height.

l

When Fill is shown, the current ground height is below the target height. The height adjustment indicator shows a red up arrow, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the Target Height.

Number of survey points that have been created

Length of the current guidance line

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

89

FM-1000 Plus application settings

Status Item

Swath Number

Swath Points

Tank Level

Tank Level N

Tank Level NH3

Tank/Bin Level

Target Rate

Total Boundaries Area

Total Seed Rate

Total Vol Applied

Total Vol Applied N

Total Vol Applied NH3

Transfer Status

TrueGuide Roll

TrueGuide Trim

Up

VDOP

Vehicle Model

Vehicle Type

Vertical Error Estimate

3   Basic settings

Explanation

Note  – FreeForm™ curves are made up of line segments, so the Swath

Length value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves.

Swath number (L = left, R = right)

Note  – FreeForm curves are made up of line segments, so the Swath

Number value is not appropriate for FreeForm curves.

The number of points that define the current line.

Current level of the tank

Level of nitrogen currently in the tank

Level of anhydrous ammonia currently in the tank

Current level of the tank or bin

Application target rate

Total area between the current boundaries

Total seed rate that is currently being applied

Total volume of material applied

Total volume of nitrogen applied

Total volume of anhydrous ammonia applied

Connected Farm™ transfer activity

Roll corrections in degrees that are applied

Distance from the guidance line that the vehicle has been shifted

Vertical height of the vehicle relative to the field origin point (a negative number means the vehicle is lower than the field origin point)

Vertical Dilution of Precision of the FieldLevel II GPS receiver: A measure of accuracy based on the geometry of the satellites in the sky.

If the satellites are near each other in the sky, the VDOP is higher

(lower is better).

Model of vehicle that is configured

Type of vehicle that is configured

Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel II

GPS receiver

90

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings Display settings

Display settings

Most of the display settings affect the XCN-2050 display and the FM-1000 Plus application.

Access display settings

You can access settings for the XCN-2050 display from the: l

Shortcut to settings

l

Launcher screen

Shortcut

You can access XCN-2050 display settings only using a shortcut.

1. Navigate to the

Home screen (page 40)

and tap

Close

to close the FM-1000 Plus application.

Note  – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before rebooting, you may experience a loss of data.

2. At the upper right of the display screen, swipe down.

3. Tap .

4. Tap

.

Launcher screen

You can access XCN-2050 display settings only from the

Launcher screen (page 39) .

1. Navigate to the

Home screen (page 40)

and tap

Close

to close the FM-1000 Plus application.

Note  – If you fail to close FM-1000 Plus application before rebooting, you may experience a loss of data.

2. Tap

3. Tap

.

to navigate to the

Launcher screen (page 39) .

Note  – If you have an automatic steering system that is currently engaged, before you go to the Launcher screen, the steering system will disengage.

Date and time settings

The time and date for the display and the FM-1000 Plus application is automatically obtained from the GNSS receiver in the TM-200 Module.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

91

Languages and units settings for display 3   Basic settings

Setting

Automatic date and time

Set date

Set time

Select time zone

Use 24-hour format

Select date format

Tap to...

Turn on or off. If you choose to use the automatic date and time, the Set date and Set time controls are disabled. The display then obtains time and date from the GNSS receiver in the TM-200

Module.

Choose the current date. Scroll in the month, date and year columns.

Choose the current time. Scroll in the hour, minute and AM/PM columns.

Choose time zone. Scroll the list of time zones and tap the time zone that applies to you.

You must set the time zone. The system does not automatically set this.

Turn on or off.

Choose the date format you want to see on the screen. Options are: MM/dd/YYYY, dd/MM, YYYY/MM/dd.

See

Access display settings (page 91) .

Languages and units settings for display

At this settings page, you can set for the XCN-2050 display (such as the

Launcher screen (page 39) ):

l

The language l

The type of units of measure l

Whether the password entry is always obscured or delayed from being obscured

Setting

Languages

Display Units

Number Format

Tap to view or choose...

The language for the display.

Scroll the list and tap the language you want.

The type of units you want on the display: English or Metric

Either commas or periods.

You can choose to have a different language on the FM-1000 Plus application from that on the XCN-

2050 display. See

Language, measurements, keyboard layout (page 67) .

See

Access display settings (page 91) .

92

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

3   Basic settings Users and passwords

Users and passwords

User profiles and passwords are system-wide, meaning they are active for the FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-2050 application as well as other Trimble applications.

Setting

Enable Operators

Add User

(Existing user name)

Tap to...

Turn this feature on to use operator login.

Add a user

Edit the user profile

See

Access display settings (page 91) .

Add a user

1. Tap

Add User

.

2. Enter the Operator ID.

3. Enter and confirm the user's password.

4. Tap

Create User

.

Take a photo of a user

You can capture a photo of the user, which will display: l

Next to the user's information in the Users and passwords section of Settings l

On the top display bar when the user is logged in

1. At the Users and passwords section, Tap the user icon on the right of the user information.

2. The camera activates and displays a frame on the screen. Make sure the user's face is contained within this frame.

3. To capture the photo, tap

Capture

. The photo displays on the lower right. You can continue to tap 

Capture

until you are satisfied with the photo.

4. When you are ready to save the photo, tap

Done

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

93

Wi-Fi settings 3   Basic settings

Wi-Fi settings

With a DCM-300 modem and additional subscription services, Wi-Fi enables you to transfer data wirelessly from: l

Vehicle to office using Office Sync l

Vehicle to vehicle using Vehicle Sync

You can use Wi-Fi in addition to or instead of the cellular network.

At Wi-Fi network settings, turn on Wi-Fi.

Note  – Before you can configure Wi-Fi settings in the FM-1000 Plus application, you must turn this setting on for Wi-Fi to operate properly.

At Available Networks, tap

Refresh

to scan for additional networks you can connect to.

For content on:

Diagnostics and status

See:

GPS status (page 514)

Restore defaults

During troubleshooting, you may be asked by Support to perform a reset.

See

Access display settings (page 91) .

Admin User Options

Setting

Restore Default user

Preferences

Restore Preferences to

Factory Defaults

Tap to...

Restore the default preferences for the user currently logged in.

Factory Reset

Restore the display to default factory settings. Erases all custom settings for all user accounts for FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-

2050 application.

Erase all user accounts, system and application data, coverage, configurations, feature unlocks, minor firmware updates and downloaded applications.

Note  – Only perform a factory reset on the advice of technical support.

94

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

4

Data management

In this chapter:

Managing data

Transfer data

Delete data

Data storage structure

Data Dictionary categories

96

96

99

101

112

This chapter explains: l

How to transfer data between a USB drive and the FM-1000 Plus application l

The structure of data on the USB and computer l

The Data Dictionary

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

95

Managing data 4   Data management

Managing data

As part of data management, you can: l

Transfer files. See

Transfer data (page 96) .

l

Delete files. See

Delete data (page 99)

.

l

Edit and add to the data entry categories by editing the data dictionary. See

Data Dictionary categories (page 112)

.

l

Create or load a data dictionary. See

Create / load a data dictionary (page 113)

.

l

View a PDF file of an event summary. See

Event subfolder (page 105)

.

l

Import an AB line or boundary. See

Import AB Lines or boundaries (page 380) .

l

Save an Autopilot system vehicle configuration file (.vdb). See

Save vehicle profile (page 186) .

Files generated by the FM-1000 Plus application are saved in a specific structure on the USB drive.

See

Data storage structure (page 101) .

Transfer data

At the Data Files screen, you can: l

Transfer data between a USB drive and the display's internal storage. See

Transfer to USB (page

97)

or

Transfer from USB (page 98) .

l

Transfer data between a USB drive and a computer. See

USB to computer (page 98)

.

l

Delete data from a USB drive or the display's internal storage. See

Delete data (page 99)

.

Data Files screen

You can access the Data Files screen from either:

96

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

4   Data management Transfer data l

The Home screen: Tap

Data Files

.

l

The

Configuration

screen: a. At the Home screen, tap

.

b. At the Configuration screen, tap

System and then tap

Setup

.

c. If necessary, enter the administration password and then tap

OK

.

d. Select

Data Files from the list and then tap

Manage

. The Data Files screen displays.

Data File categories

The categories available on the Data Files screen are:

Category

Summary Files

Diagnostics

Configuration

Data Dictionary

Field Data

Subcategories and data

PDF summary files listed under client name

Screen shots: Folder containing screen captures

System logs

Features:

Implements:

System Archive:

Varieties:

Vehicle Archive:

Data dictionary. See

Data Dictionary categories (page 112)

.

Data for all activities in the field. Data is structured as:

Client / Farm / Field / Event

Transfer to USB

CAUTION – Do not remove the USB drive from the socket while the application is copying data. This will corrupt the data.

CAUTION – POTENTIAL LOSS OF DATA!

If you copy files from:

- An FM-1000 Plus application to another or to an FM-1000 integrated display.

- An physical FM-1000 integrated display to another or to an FM-1000 Plus application

First make sure you have created a subfolder labeled with the display serial number for your files. Transfer your files to this subfolder. Otherwise, you will overwrite files when you copy and you will corrupt your data.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

97

Transfer data 4   Data management

1. At the Data Files screen from the display's

Internal Storage list, tap the item to copy. You can:

Select all files in the category: Select the entire category by tapping the category name.

l

Select individual files: See files within a category by tapping . The arrow changes to a down arrow and shows the files stored under the category. Then select the file or files you want.

l

Select all files: Select

Everything

.

2. Tap

Copy >

. The item is copied to the

USB list.

Transfer from USB

CAUTION – Do not remove the USB drive from the socket while the application is copying data. This will corrupt the data.

CAUTION – POTENTIAL LOSS OF DATA!

If you copy files from:

- An FM-1000 Plus application to another or to an FM-1000 integrated display.

- An physical FM-1000 integrated display to another or to an FM-1000 Plus application

First make sure you have created a subfolder labeled with the display serial number for your files. Transfer your files to this subfolder. Otherwise, you will overwrite files when you copy and you will corrupt your data.

USB to FM-1000 Plus application

1. At the Data Files screen from the

USB list, tap the item to copy. You can:

Select all files in the category: Select the entire category by tapping the category name.

l

Select individual files: See files within a category by tapping . The arrow changes to a down arrow and shows the files stored under the category. Then select the file or files you want.

l

Select all files: Select

Everything

.

2. Tap

Copy >

. The item is copied to the

Internal Storage list.

USB to computer

After you have transferred data from the FM-1000 Plus application to the USB:

1. Remove the USB drive from the display.

2. Insert the USB drive into your computer.

98

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

4   Data management Delete data

If you place the files in a series of folders, the combined filename and folder path may become too long and the operating system may not allow you to open the files. To avoid this, it is recommended that you place data in your computer’s

C:\ folder.

3. Copy the appropriate folder to the office computer using an application such as Windows

®

Explorer. This copies all the sub-folders and files in the folder.

Note  – When you copy or move files using Windows Explorer, you must keep all the shape-files (.dbf,

.shp, and .shx) together so that office software can open the theme file. To ensure that the files stay together, always copy the entire folder rather than just the individual files.

4. If you create a new event in a field, and you already have the

\Field\ folder containing any previous events on the office computer, you should still copy the

\Field\ folder so that the new

EventHistory information is copied.

Delete data

CAUTION – Deleting data is permanent. You cannot undo the deletion or restore the data.

If you need to create more space, you can use the FM-1000 Plus application to delete from the FM-

1000 Plus application internal memory or the USB drive: l

Clients l

Farms l

Fields l

Events

Note  – You cannot undo data deletion or restore the data.

1. At the Data Files screen, tap

Delete Data

. The Delete Data Storage screen displays.

2. If you want to delete from:

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

99

Delete data 4   Data management

The internal memory of the FM-1000 Plus application: Tap the

Internal tab.

l

The USB drive: Tap the

3. To delete a specific item from the FM-1000 Plus application: a. In the lists for Client, Farm, Field or Event, tap the item you want to delete.

b. Tap

Delete

.

USB Drive tab.

c. To exit the Delete Data Storage screen, tap

OK

.

4. To delete all materials from the FM-1000 Plus application:

5. To delete all events from the FM-1000 Plus application: a. Tap

Delete All Events

.

b. Enter the administration password.

6. To delete all files from the FM-1000 Plus application: a. Tap

Delete EVERYTHING

.

b. Enter the administration password.

7. The system displays a message asking you to confirm the deletion. If you want to proceed, tap

Yes

.

100

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

4   Data management Data storage structure

Data storage structure

The FM-1000 Plus application stores client, farm, field, and event data in a specific structure on the computer and USB drive. The first level folder is AgGPS.

Depending on your system configuration and the operations you perform, the top level folders of the structure are: l

AB Lines folder (page 101)

l

Archives folder (page 102)

l

Autopilot folder (page 102)

l

Data folder (page 102)

l

Data Dictionary folder (page 109)

l

Diagnostics folder (page 109)

l

Prescriptions folder (page 110)

l

Summaries folder (page 110)

l

Task Data folder (page 112)

Column

Area

Date

Dist1

Dist2

ID

Length

AB Lines folder

There is one set of boundary and AB Line shapes for each field: l

Boundary.* - Fields with boundaries include a boundary polygon stored in the boundary.shp

file. Fields without boundaries do not contain a boundary file.

l

Swath.* - For fields with boundaries, AB polylines are stored in the swath.shp file.

Note  – Units are always metric in files created by the FM-1000 Plus application.

The following is stored in the boundary and AB line attribute files.

Field Description

Field area (Boundary area)

Date the field was created

Format

ha

YYYYMMDD

AB Line number ID

Length of the AB Line meters

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

101

Data storage structure 4   Data management

Column

Name

Perimeter

Field Description

Name assigned to the AB Line

Field perimeter distance (Boundary only)

Format

meters

The size of the field is not defined unless a field has a boundary. Therefore, the %_Complete in the

EventHistory.dbf file is always zero for fields without boundaries

Note  – If you browse the .dbf files using an Excel spreadsheet, date fields may appear in a different format, depending on your local settings.Unless a field has a boundary, the size of the field is not defined. Therefore, for fields without boundaries the %_Complete in the EventHistory.dbf file is always zero.

Archives folder

When the ProgramLog.txt file becomes larger than 1024 KB, it is backed up to a file named

ProgramLog.old and stored in the Archives folder.

Autopilot folder

The Autopilot folder contains the following subfolders: l

Configuration l

Custom Vehicle Configurations l

VDB l

Vehicle Database

Data folder

The data folder contains the client subfolder and all subsequent subfolders related to the client.

Client subfolder

The client is the customer for whom the work is being done. This folder contains at least one Farm subfolder for each client.

Farm subfolder

A farm is a collection of fields. This folder contains at least one Field subfolder related to each farm.

Field subfolder

You create an on-screen field to represent an actual field, part of an actual field, or a group of more than one actual fields.

102

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

4   Data management Data storage structure

This folder contains an Event subfolder for each event performed on the field as well as the following files:

Data

Field AB Line

Field Boundary

Coordinates

Paused Files

Event history

Point

Line

Area

features features features

Explanation

Boundary and/or AB Line polylines

Polygon (Only available if the field is a headland field and therefore has a boundary)

Files

Swaths.shp

Swaths.dbf

Swaths.shx

Boundary.shp

Boundary.dbf

Boundary.shx

Contains coordinates of the field boundary file

Information regarding guidance being paused

Information about each event carried out in the field

<Latitude Longitude Altitude>.pos

Attribute ID and latitude, longitude, and height

EventHistory.dbf

Version / Client / Farm / Field /

Event / Operator / Material /

Date Open / Time Open /

Date Close / Time Close / Duration /

Primary AB / ABLine / Cover Area /

Cover Distance / Cover Time / Engage

Time

PointFeature.shp

PointFeature.dbf

PointFeature.shx

Line with attribute ID LineFeature.shp

LineFeature.dbf

LineFeature.shx

Area polygons with attribute ID AreaFeature.shp

AreaFeature.dbf

AreaFeature.shx

Event History file

The EventHistory.dbf file contains information on every event carried out in the field.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

103

Data storage structure 4   Data management

Data

ABLine

Client

Cover area

Cover distance

Cover time

Date close

Date open

Duration

Engage time

Event

Farm

Field

Material

Operator

PrimaryAB

Time close

Time open

Version

Explanation

Guidance line used

Client name

Area covered

Distance covered

Total time to cover the covered area

Date the field was closed

Date the field was opened

Length of time that the field was open (seconds)

Time engaged

Event name

Farm name

Field name

Material name

Operator name

Number of the primary AB Line

Time the field was closed

Time the field was opened

FM-1000 Plus application firmware version

Data

Area

Date

Dist1

Dist2

Data in features file

One row of data is stored in the

<type>

.dbf file for each feature of that feature type recorded in the field.

Explanation

Field area (Area only)

Date the feature was created.

Format / Notes

ha yyyy/mm/dd

104

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

4   Data management Data storage structure

Data

ID

Length

Name

Perimeter

PrefWeight

SwathsIn

Time

Version

Explanation

Feature ID

Length of the AB Line.

Feature name

Field perimeter distance (Area only)

Time the feature was recorded.

Features attribute file version.

The following data is only recorded in point features.

Data

AlarmRad

Height

Latitude

Longitude

Status_Txt

WarningRad

Explanation

Alarm radius

Ground mean sea level height at antenna position. If you are mapping on a slope, the height may be wrong.

Antenna latitude

Antenna longitude

GPS status

Warning radius

Format / Notes

meters meters hh:mm:ss.s

Format / Notes

meters meters decimal degrees decimal degrees meters meters

Event subfolder

An event is a precision agriculture application or activity on a particular field. For example: l

Planting of seed l

Application of fertilizer or lime l

Spraying with fungicide, herbicide, or insecticide

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

105

Data storage structure 4   Data management

Files stored in this folder are:

Data

Coverage

Track

Free Form Guidance

Explanation

Graphical files containing polygons

Graphical files containing a series of

3D points with attributes

Graphical files containing paths for free form guidance

Files

Coverage.shp

Coverage.dbf

Coverage.shx

Track3D_<date time>.shp

Track3D_<date time>.dbf

Track3D_<date time>.shx

Swaths.shp

Swaths.shx

Swaths.dbf

Coverage logging file

The display creates a coverage logging file when any application coverage is recorded. For each coverage polygon, the following information is saved to the coverage logging file.

Data

AppType

AppliedRate

DateClosed

GPS_Status

Height

Speed

Status_Txt

Swath

TimeClosed

Version

XTE

Field Description

Application type ID

Applied rate reported by the variable rate controller

Date the polygon was closed

Numeric GPS status value

Height in meters

Average GPS ground speed for the polygon (in meters per second)

GPS status description

The current swath number when coverage was recorded

Time the polygon was closed

Coverage attribute file version

Implement Cross Track Error (in meters)

Track logging file

A track logging file is created whenever the event is opened. At each point, a number of attributes are recorded.

The units stored in the track attribute file (

Track3D_<date time>

.dbf) are in metric units.

106

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

4   Data management Data storage structure

Also see: 

Map settings (page 70) .

Data

Along_Line

Ant_HAE

Ant_Lat

Ant_Long

Appln_Wdth

As applied

Auto_Steer

Corct_Age

DOP

Field_Name

GPS_Status

Ground_HAE

Heading

Height

Local_Time

Logging_On

NDVI

Field Description

Along Line distance from start of swath

Antenna height above ellipsoid

Antenna latitude (WGS-84)

Antenna longitude (WGS-84)

Application width

The actual rate applied by the rate control system when serial rate control, TAC or the Field-IQ system are used

Auto-Steer Flag (1=on, 0=off)

DGPS signal correction age

Horizontal Dilution of Precision – a measure of the quality of positions based on satellite geometry

Name of the field

GPS status value

Ground height above ellipsoid

Direction of travel with respect to true North.

Mean sea level height of ground

Local time

Coverage logging Flag (1=on, 0=off)

The NDVI values recorded when using the GreenSeeker plugin (not currently implemented)

Num_Stats

Offline

Number of GPS satellites

Offline distance from swath center line

Pitch The pitch

Relative_Height Height

Roll

Speed

Status_Text

The roll

GPS derived ground speed

GPS status description

– meters

– meters

– kph

Format / Notes

meters meters

DD.dddddddd

DD.dddddddd

meters

On or off seconds

1 to 12 meters decimal degrees meters hh:mm:ss.s

On or off

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

107

Data storage structure 4   Data management

Data

Swath_Num

Swath_wdth

Target

Target

Total_Qty

TRACK_ID

Units

UTC_Date

UTC_Time

Version

Yaw

Field Description

Current swath/headland number

Swath width

Target rate at the current position

Target application rate when serial rate control, TAC or the Field-IQ system are used

Total volume of material as applied for the current field

Only supported for the: l

Aerial Flow Controller l

Autocal Flow controller l

Crophawk Flow Meter

Date and time stamp

Units

Point creation date

UTC time

Track attribute file version

The yaw

Format / Notes

meters

– metric

YYYYMMDD hh:mm:ss.s

Graphical data formats

The FM-1000 Plus application uses the Environmental Systems Research Institute (ESRI) 3D shapefile format for storing the layers of graphical information collected in the field (for example, spray coverage, track logging points, and features). The three files in a shapefile set are: l

<filename>.dbf file: Contains the feature attributes l

<filename>.shp file: Contains position information l

<filename>.shx file: An index file that links the position information with its attributes

The term shapefile is used to refer to these three files collectively.

The FM-1000 Plus application records all latitude, longitude, and height data in decimal degrees.

Note  – The FM-1000 Plus application reads and writes ESRI ArcView version 2.0 or 3.1 3D polylines, polygons, and points. The M and Z entity types introduced in ArcView 3.1 can be generated in the track logging files, but cannot be read by the display. For more information, visit the ESRI website (

www.esri.com

).

108

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

4   Data management Data storage structure

Graphical file editing

ESRI shape (.shp) and attribute (.dbf) files can be used in many other software packages that can import or use .shp and .dbf formats.

The Farm Works Software® is recommended. For more information, go to www.farmworks.com

.

Data collected by the FM-1000 Plus application can be opened directly into the Farm Works software. You can make changes to the files and save them on an office computer.

The Microsoft Excel

® spreadsheet software and most database software also let you open and view the data in the attribute (

.dbf

) file.

The FM-1000 Plus application can load files that you created in office software. Save Shapefile or

Agfile (.gdx) prescriptions to the

\AgGPS\Prescriptions\ folder on the USB drive to send rates to a variable rate controller.

Data Dictionary folder

The Data Dictionary folder contains text files you can add to customize the data dictionary. See

Data

Dictionary categories (page 112)

and

Create / load a data dictionary (page 113) .

Diagnostics folder

Diagnostic logs are stored for the FM-1000 Plus application and XCN-2050 application activities. Logs are useful for Trimble Support to troubleshoot system operation issues.

The ProgramLog.txt file is saved in the Diagnostics folder and can be useful for troubleshooting. This file contains data from checks performed by the FM-1000 Plus application: l

When the display is turned on or off l

Periodically, while running

The file can be read with a text editor such as Notepad.

When this file becomes larger than 1024 KB, it is backed up to a file named ProgramLog.old and stored in the Archives folder. See

Archives folder (page 102) .

The Diagnostics folder contains the following subfolders: l

Autopilot (if you are using the Autopilot system) l

Preferences: System settings stored in the <Preferences>.xml file l

Screenshots: Screenshot files automatically numbered Screenshot_<num>.png

l gps l logs l

Screenshots

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

109

Data storage structure 4   Data management

Autopilot subfolder

This folder contains Autopilot configuration settings ( vehicle

.

cfg

).

Screenshots folder

The Screenshots folder contains screenshots you have captured.

System folder

The system folder contains log files used in troubleshooting.

Program log files

The ProgramLog.txt file can be useful for troubleshooting. This file contains data from checks performed by the FM-1000 Plus application: l

When the display is turned on or off l

Periodically, while running

When this file becomes larger than 1024 KB, it is backed up to a file named ProgramLog.old and stored in the Archives folder. See

Archives folder (page 102) .

The file can be read with a text editor such as Notepad.

Prescriptions folder

For each prescription that you generate, the system stores three prescription files in either of these formats: l

ESRI shape-file format:

<prescription_name>.shp

l <prescription_name>.dbf

l <prescription_name>.shx

l

.gdx file format:

<prescription_name>.gdx

Some GIS software packages generate other files and include different contents in the files. If these files are on the USB drive, they are ignored when you transfer from the USB to the FM-1000 Plus application.

Summaries folder

The Summaries folder contains files such as:

110

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

4   Data management Data storage structure l

Program log files l

PDF summary file

PDF summary file

When you close a field, the FM-1000 Plus application creates a PDF summary file. This file is saved to the folder: 

\AgGPS\Summaries\<client_farm_field_event>\

.

The Event Summary PDF file may include the following images of the field: l

Overlap: Coverage and any overlaps l

Height: Vertical height of the GPS position l

Applied rate: Volume at which the spray boom applied solution l

GPS quality l

Average XTE coverage layer: Degree of implement drift

The file also shows information about the: l

Event l

Vehicle setup

To view a summary report on a computer:

1. Remove the USB drive from the display.

2. Insert the USB into an office computer.

3. Select the folder

\AgGPS\Summaries\

.

4. Open the file

Index.html

.

Note  – If you use the Microsoft

®

Internet Explorer

®

Internet browser, you may need to allow ActiveX

®

technology to see all of the summary file.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

111

Data Dictionary categories 4   Data management

Task Data folder

The TaskData folder contains yield data collected in the ISO11783 BIN format, which is read by Farm

Works and other precision agriculture software.

Data Dictionary categories

The data dictionary editor enables you to edit default data entry categories and add new ones.

Default data entry categories

The following are default categories in the Data Dictionary.

l

Application method l

Client l

Crop l

Custom 1, 2, 3 and 4 l

Event l

Farm l

Farm location l

Field l

Harvest l

Harvest year l

Implement l

Material l

Operator l

Operator EPA# l

Sky conditions l

Soil conditions l

Soil type l

Stoppage reason l

Target pests l

Vehicle l

Wind direction l

Wind gust speed l

Wind speed

Edit data entry categories

1. At the Display Setup screen, tap

Data Dictionary

.

2. Tap

Setup

. The Data Dictionary Setup screen displays.

3. From the data list, select the data item you want to add or change.

112

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

4   Data management Data Dictionary categories

Tap

New

to create a new item.

l

Tap

Edit

to change an existing item.

4. Define the custom entry by manually entering or updating the name, then tap

OK

.

5. The new or edited entry displays in the data list on the Data Dictionary Setup screen.

Create / load a data dictionary

The FM-1000 Plus application can load data dictionaries that enable you to select field entry data

(for example, Client, Farm, Field, and Event) from a list of predefined values. This saves you time from continually entering commonly used categories.

You can create a data dictionary either through the FM-1000 Plus application or using Farm Works software.

To create a data dictionary on a computer:

1. On a computer, create a text file. The text file can have any name, but the file extension must be

.txt

.

2. Enter the text.

3. Copy the

.txt

file to the

\AgGPS\Data Dictionary\ folder on a USB drive.

4. On specific FM-1000 Plus application screens (for example, at the Client screen), the file entries will display.

5. To access the entries in the dictionary: a. At the Field Setup screen, tap

New

.

b. Tap any list's down arrow to see the available items in the list.

c. Select the appropriate item from the list.

d. Tap

OK

.

Note  – You can still enter new information as before, but these entries are not added to the data dictionary. To add items to the data dictionary, edit the .txt file on an office computer.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

113

Data Dictionary categories 4   Data management

114

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

5

Connectivity settings

In this chapter:

GPS receiver settings

GPS output settings

Remote Output setup

Serial Data Input

Ag3000 modem

DCM-300 Modem

116

133

136

142

143

144

This chapter covers connectivity related to: l

GPS receiver settings, including corrections l

GPS output l

Serial data input l

Remote Output setup

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

115

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

GPS receiver settings

The FM-1000 Plus application automatically adds a GPS receiver option that controls the internal

GPS receiver, when you install: l

Manual Guidance l

Autopilot l

FieldLevel II

In addition, the system may need second GPS receiver. For example, the TrueTracker system uses a second receiver that is configured with a separate GPS receiver option.

Note  – GPS receiver settings will show different options, depending on how your system is setup.

Setup of the GPS receiver begins with corrections. The following corrections are available: l

Autonomous (no GPS corrections): WAAS and EGNOS l

CenterPoint™ RTK. See

CenterPoint RTK (page 119)

.

l

CenterPoint RTX™. See

CenterPoint RTX US or EU (fs) (page 121) .

l

CenterPoint RTX (sc) (page 123)

l

CenterPoint RTX (ss) (page 124)

l

OmniSTAR® wide-area differential GPS service. See

OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 (page 128) .

l

RangePoint RTX (page 131)

l

SBAS: Tracks DGPS correction systems using WAAS

116

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

AgRemote Interface

Note  – Only advanced users should use the AgRemote interface.

The FM-1000 Plus application has an on-screen AgRemote interface for manually adjusting GPS receiver settings.

To access the on-screen AgRemote interface:

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver and then tap

Diagnostics

. The GPS Status

2. Tap

AgRemote

. The on-screen AgRemote interface displays.

For more information on the correct use of the AgRemote interface, refer to the AgRemote Software

Guide for AgGPS Receivers on www.trimble.com

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

117

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

Basic correction settings

For the basic corrections, complete the following steps.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver

, then tap

Setup

. The GPS Receiver Settings

2. On the

Settings tab, from the

Corrections list select either:

Autonomous l

SBAS

3. On the

Advanced tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

RTK Base Station Filter

RTK Base Station CMR ID

Scintillation Filter

Explanation

Enabled, Disabled

Can be edited if Filter is enabled

On or Off

4. On the

Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select

Record Logs

.

5. On the

Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Connector

Radar Frequency Rate

Explanation

TM-200 Port B connector P6

Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the

Autopilot system.

Enter Hz/mph rate

6. When you have completed the settings, tap

OK

.

118

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

CenterPoint RTK

Trimble CenterPoint™ RTK is radio-broadcast corrections from a ground-based reference station using either: l

Single-based line (CenterPoint RTK) l

Internet with a DCM-300 modem (CenterPoint VRS)

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver

2. On the

Settings tab, complete the settings.

, then tap

Setup

. The GPS Receiver Settings

Setting

Antenna Selection

Corrections

Net ID

GPS Output

Explanation

Select a supported antenna type

Choose CenterPoint RTK

Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See

GPS output settings (page 133)

.

3. On the xFill tab, enter the settings.

Setting

x-Fill™ technology

Frequency

Baud Rate

Datum Selector

Explanation

On or Off

During RTK signal interruptions, xFill technology can sustain

RTK operation for up to 20 minutes.

See

Frequencies and baud rate (page 132)

.

See

Frequencies and baud rate (page 132)

.

Choose the datum that was used when the RTK base station was surveyed. For more information contact your local reseller.

Note  – You must select the correct base datum for your location.

If you select an incorrect value, this will result in incorrect xFill operation.

4. On the

SecureRTK tab, enter the key or keys and an optional description.

The base station access code provided by your base station service provider. After you enter this code, the

Status and

Expiry values change to show the current status of the security feature.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

119

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

SecureRTK is a Trimble proprietary base station security feature that enables a service provider with a RTK base station to generate time-based access codes for their supported rovers. If

SecureRTK is enabled on the base station, rovers with authorized access codes can use corrections from that base.

SecureRTK requires firmware version 1.59, or later, on MS750

GPS receivers, and firmware version 4.60 or later on AgRTK, AgGPS 442, and Ag GPS 542 base stations.

Note  – Rovers without a SecureRTK access code are unable to access a secure Trimble RTK base station.

5. On the

Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

RTK Base Station Filter

RTK Base Station CMR ID

Scintillation Filter

Explanation

Enabled, Disabled

Can be edited if Filter is enabled

On or Off

6. On the

Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select

Record Logs

.

7. On the

Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Connector

Radar Frequency Rate

Explanation

TM-200 Port B connector P6

Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the

Autopilot system.

Enter the required rate.

8. When you have completed the settings, tap

OK

.

120

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

CenterPoint RTX US or EU (fs)

CenterPoint RTX™ (fs - fast satellite) is a satellite-based subscription correction service for the United

States and European Union.

Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver

2. On the

Settings tab, complete the settings.

, then tap

Setup

. The GPS Receiver Settings

Setting

Antenna Selection

Corrections

GPS Output

Explanation

Select a supported antenna type

Choose CenterPoint RTX US or EU (fs), depending on your region

Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See

GPS output settings (page 133)

.

3. On the

Frequencies tab, enter the settings for

Frequency and

Baud Rate

. See

Frequencies and baud rate (page 132)

.

4. On the

Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

RTK Base Station Filter

RTK Base Station CMR ID

Scintillation Filter

Explanation

Enabled, Disabled

Can be edited if Filter is enabled

On or Off

5. On the

Logging tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Record AgRemote Logs

Explanation

Off or Record Logs

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

121

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

6. On the

Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Connector

Radar Frequency Rate

Explanation

TM-200 Port B connector P6

Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the

Autopilot system.

Enter the required rate.

7. When you have completed the settings, tap

OK

.

122

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

CenterPoint RTX (sc)

CenterPoint RTX (sc - standard cell) is a satellite-based subscription correction service.

Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver

2. On the

Settings tab, complete the settings.

, then tap

Setup

. The GPS Receiver Settings

Setting

Antenna Selection

Corrections

FastRestart

Convergence Threshold

GPS Output

Explanation

Select a supported antenna type

Choose CenterPoint RTX (ss)

On or off

FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for

OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2/VBS and CenterPoint RTX convergence. After the satellite signal has initially converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown.

Disabled

Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See

GPS output settings (page 133) .

3. On the

Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select

Record Logs

.

4. On the

Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Connector

Radar Frequency Rate

Explanation

TM-200 Port B connector P6

Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the

Autopilot system.

Enter the required rate.

5. When you have completed the settings, tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

123

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

CenterPoint RTX (ss)

CenterPoint RTX (ss - standard satellite) is a satellite-based subscription correction service.

Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver

2. On the

Settings tab, complete the settings.

, then tap

Setup

. The GPS Receiver Settings

Setting

Antenna Selection

Corrections

FastRestart

Convergence Threshold

GPS Output

Explanation

Select a supported antenna type

Choose CenterPoint RTX (ss)

On or off

FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for

OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2/VBS and CenterPoint RTX convergence. After the satellite signal has initially converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown.

Note  – Do not move the vehicle from the point of system shut down. Otherwise this feature will not work.

Disabled

Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See

GPS output settings (page 133)

.

3. On the

Frequencies tab, enter the settings for

Frequency and

Baud Rate

. See

Frequencies and baud rate (page 132) .

4. On the

Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

RTK Base Station Filter

RTK Base Station CMR ID

Scintillation Filter

Explanation

Enabled, Disabled

Can be edited if Filter is enabled

On or Off

5. On the

Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select

Record Logs

.

124

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

6. On the

Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Connector

Radar Frequency Rate

Explanation

TM-200 Port B connector P6

Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the

Autopilot system.

Enter the required rate.

7. When you have completed the settings, tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

125

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 - VBS

OmniSTAR VBS is a satellite-based subscription correction service delivered either by: l

Satellite l

Internet using a DCM-300 modem with <1.5" (3.8 cm) accuracy and GLONASS compatibility

Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver

2. On the

Settings tab, complete the settings.

, then tap

Setup

. The GPS Receiver Settings

Setting

Antenna Selection

Corrections

FastRestart

Convergence Threshold

GPS Output

Explanation

Select a supported antenna type

Choose OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 - VBS

On or off

FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for convergence. After the satellite signal has initially converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown.

Note  – Do not move the vehicle from the point of system shut down. Otherwise this feature will not work.

Disabled

Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See

GPS output settings (page 133)

.

3. On the

Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

Explanation

4. On the

Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select

Record Logs

.

126

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

5. On the

Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Connector

Radar Frequency Rate

Explanation

TM-200 Port B connector P6

Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the

Autopilot system.

Enter the required rate.

6. When you have completed the settings, tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

127

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2

OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2 is a high-accuracy, satellite-based subscription correction service. The accuracy for each type is: l

HP: 2-4" (5-10 cm) accuracy l

XP: 3-4" (8-10 cm) accuracy l

GP: 2-4" (8-10 cm) accuracy (compatible with GLONASS)

Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver

2. On the

Settings tab, complete the settings.

, then tap

Setup

. The GPS Receiver Settings

Setting

Antenna Selection

Corrections

FastRestart

Convergence Threshold

GPS Output

Explanation

Select a supported antenna type

Choose OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2

On or off

FastRestart technology greatly reduces the time needed for convergence. After the satellite signal has initially converged, you can turn off the receiver. When you turn the receiver on again, accuracy levels will be similar to those experienced before shutdown.

The required accuracy of the correction service before the signal will converge and the automatic steering system will engage.

Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See

GPS output settings (page 133)

.

3. On the

Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

Explanation

4. On the

Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select

Record Logs

.

128

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

5. On the

Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Connector

Radar Frequency Rate

Explanation

TM-200 Port B connector P6

Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the

Autopilot system.

Enter the required rate.

6. When you have completed the settings, tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

129

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

OmniSTAR VBS

OmniSTAR VBS is a satellite-based subscription correction service with 6-8" (15-20 cm) accuracy.

Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver

2. On the

Settings tab, complete the settings.

, then tap

Setup

. The GPS Receiver Settings

Setting

Antenna Selection

Corrections

GPS Output

Explanation

Select a supported antenna type

Choose OmniSTAR VBS

Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See

GPS output settings (page 133)

.

3. On the

Advanced tab, only alter the settings if directed by Support.

Setting

Elevation Mask

SNR Mask

Explanation

4. On the

Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select

Record Logs

.

5. On the

Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Connector

Radar Frequency Rate

Explanation

TM-200 Port B connector P6

Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the

Autopilot system.

Enter the required rate.

6. When you have completed the settings, tap

OK

.

130

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings GPS receiver settings

RangePoint RTX

Trimble RangePoint™ RTX is a satellite-based subscription correction service with pass-to-pass <6"

(15 cm) accuracy and GLONASS compatibility.

Note  – Make sure you have unlocked the service before setting it up.

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver

2. On the

Settings tab, complete the settings.

, then tap

Setup

. The GPS Receiver Settings

Setting

Antenna Selection

Corrections

GPS Output

Explanation

Select a supported antenna type

Choose RangePoint RTX

Tap to open the GPS Output Settings screen to send messages. See

GPS output settings (page 133)

.

3. On the

Frequencies tab, enter the settings for

Frequency and

Baud Rate

. See

Frequencies and baud rate (page 132)

.

4. On the

Logging tab, if you want to record logs, select

Record Logs

.

5. On the

Radar Output tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Connector

Radar Frequency Rate

Explanation

TM-200 Port B connector P6

Radar output works for the EZ-Steer system or the

Autopilot system.

Enter the required rate.

6. When you have completed the settings, tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

131

GPS receiver settings 5   Connectivity settings

Frequencies and baud rate

When you receive satellite signals, you must select the frequency and baud rate based on your specific region.

Region

Western North America (RTX WN)

Central North America (RTX CN)

Eastern North America (RTX EN)

South/Central America (RTX SA)

Europe/Africa (RTX EA)

Europe (RTX FS)

Asia Pacific (RTX AP)

Baud Rate

1557.8615 MHz at 600 baud

1557.8150 MHz at 2400 baud

1557.8590 MHz at 600 baud

1539.8325 MHz at 600 baud

1539.9525 MHz at 600 baud

1529.7250 MHz at 2400 baud

1539.8325 MHz at 600 baud

Note  – These frequencies do change occasionally. If you experience issues with the satellite signal, contact your reseller for updated satellite information.

132

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings GPS output settings

GPS output settings

To access the GPS Output Settings screen:

1. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

GPS Receiver

, then tap

Setup

. The GPS Receiver Settings

2. On the

Settings tab, tap

GPS Output

. The GPS Output Settings screen displays. There are three tabs available: l

CAN GPS messages (page 133)

NMEA messages (page 135)

l

Serial NMEA messages (page 134)

CAN GPS messages

You can set up specific messages to be sent from the GPS receiver from a CAN port. If you are using an ISO-certified implement, use this setting to send information to the implement (such as speed).

At the

CAN GPS tab on the GPS Output Settings screen, complete the settings and tap

OK

.

Section

Output

Setting

Port

Rate

Simulated Speeds Wheel Speed Port

Wheel Speed Rate

Radar/Ground Speed

Port

Radar/Ground Speed

Rate

Explanation

The TM-200 CAN connection on Port A or Port B you want the GPS speed to be sent from

How often you want the message to be sent

The TM-200 CAN connection on Port A or Port B you want the wheel speed to be sent from

Off or On

The TM-200 CAN connection on Port A or Port B you want the radar/ground speed to be sent from

Off or On

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

133

GPS output settings 5   Connectivity settings

Serial NMEA messages

Note  – Depending on your configuration, NMEA message output may require: Part number 67091, FmX to

DE9, RS232 cable (Port A or B), Part number 59043, DB9(F) to DB9(F) modem cable.

Some GPS receivers can output serial NMEA messages to an external device. For example, if you have an external device connected to the Autopilot controller, you can have the receiver send GPS position information to the device. The messages are output through the NavController harness laptop connector.

Note  – To enable NMEA output from another receiver for an optional feature, make sure the feature has been selected from the feature list.

At the

Serial NMEA Messages tab on the GPS Output Settings screen, complete the settings and tap

OK

.

Setting

Message Rate

Output Port

Baud Rate

Maximum CGA Quality

Lat/Lon Precision

Explanation

How often the message is sent. Options are: l

Off l

1 min l

30 sec l

10 sec l

1 Hz l

3 Hz l

5 Hz l

10 Hz

What Serial port the message should be sent on

Note  – The output port may be on a EPX-100 typically assigned to

Reciever EXP-100 or the Autopilot serial port.

Baud rate. Options are: l

2400 l

4800 l

9600 l

19200 l

38400 l

57600

How high the quality of the message should be

Options are 1 through 10

134

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings GPS output settings

NMEA messages

Some GPS receivers can output NMEA GGA type messages to an external device. For example, if you have an external device connected to the Autopilot controller, you can have the receiver send GPS position information to the device. The messages are output through the NavController harness laptop connector.

Note  – To enable NMEA output from another receiver for an optional feature (for example, the GPS receiver connected to an TrueTracker system controller), make sure the feature has been selected from the feature list.

At the

NMEA tab on the GPS Output Settings screen, complete the settings and tap

OK

.

Setting

Message Rate

Baud Rate

Messages Enabled

Explanation

How often you want the message sent

Baud rate

On: Send NMEA message. Off: Do not send NMEA message.

Message types supported are: l

CGA l

VTG l

GSA l

GST l

RMC l

ZDA

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

135

Remote Output setup 5   Connectivity settings

Remote Output setup

When remote output is activated, the FM-1000 Plus application sends pulses to an external device.

For example, you can use a remote output signal to control a tree planter.

To set up Remote Output: 

1. Install Remote Output. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60)

.

2. Set up Remote Output. See

Remote Output settings (page 136)

.

3. Calibrate the lead time. See

Calibrate implement lead time (page 139) .

Remote Output settings

To enable pulse remote output:

1. Navigate to

Port settings (page 74)

and assign the EXP-100s to the first position or the second position.

2. At the Configuration screen, select

Remote Output and then tap

Setup

.

3. The Remote Output screen displays. Complete the settings and tap

OK

.

4. For Remote Output Connector:

Select the digital input/output connection assigned by EXP-100 #1 or EXP-100 #2.

See

Port settings (page 74)

.

5. For Remote Output Type, choose the type: a. For

Time Based Pulse

, enter:

Setting

Time

Duration b. For

Distance Based Pulse

, enter:

Explanation

The pulse interval in seconds

The pulse duration in milliseconds

136

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings Remote Output setup

Setting

Lead Time

Distance

Duration

Within Line Distance

Design Trigger Color

Manual Trigger Color

Trigger Limits

Explanation

See

Calibrate implement lead time (page 139)

.

The distance in meters/decimal feet/feet and inches. The pulse occurs at each increment of this distance. The first pulse occurs at the A point. Pulse remote output is not recommended for Headland patterns.

The duration of the pulse in milliseconds (ms)

The pulse occurs only when the vehicle is within this distance of being online. If the vehicle is more than this distance offline, no pulse occurs

The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when the system automatically outputs a pulse

The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when you press the manual trigger button

If you select

None

, the pulses triggered by the system are unlimited. If you select

Edit

, enter the maximum number of pulses (per swath) that will be triggered after you pass the A point.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

137

Remote Output setup 5   Connectivity settings

Note  – This option works with straight AB and A+ lines.

For using remote output using distance based pulses, see

Distance-based pulse operation

(page 431) .

c. For

When Within Area Feature

, enter the

Lead Time

. Calibrate the Lead Time setting to match your implement. See

Calibrate implement lead time (page 139)

. The pulse occurs only when Remote Output is enabled. You must also enable Remote Output for each area feature individually in the Mapping setup. See

Field feature use (page 364) .

d. For

When Engaged

, there are no options to set. Remote output occurs when the system is engaged.

e. For

When Crossing a Line Feature

, enter:

Setting

Lead Time

Distance

Duration

Explanation

See

Calibrate implement lead time (page 139)

.

The distance in meters/decimal feet/feet and inches. The pulse occurs at each increment of this distance. The first pulse occurs at the A point.

Note  – Pulse remote output is not recommended for Headland patterns.

The duration of the pulse in milliseconds (ms)

138

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings Remote Output setup

Setting

Within Line Distance

Design Trigger Color

Manual Trigger Color

Explanation

The pulse occurs only when the vehicle is within this distance of being online. If the vehicle is more than this distance offline, no pulse occurs

The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when the system automatically outputs a pulse

The color of the pulse indicator that will display on the screen when you press the manual trigger button

Be sure to edit the line feature to enable remote output and the trigger warning. See

Line feature settings (page 152)

. Complete the settings and tap

OK

.

Note  – This option works with straight AB and A+ lines, pivots and curves.

For using remote output using when crossing a line feature, see

Crossing a line feature operation (page 429)

.

6. Tap

OK

when your are finished.

Calibrate implement lead time

There is usually a gap between the time when the system generates a pulse and the time when that pulse triggers an action on the implement. To compensate for this system delay, you can set a lead time to trigger the pulse slightly early so that the action occurs at the correct location.

For this calibration, drive the vehicle along a line and back, using Remote Output to mark points on the ground. If the remote output is correctly calibrated, the points that you create when driving in both directions will be close together.

To calibrate implement lead time:

1.

Set front/back offset (page 139) .

2.

Calibrate front/back offset (page 140) .

3.

Set lead time (page 140) .

Set front/back offset

Configure the correct front/back offset.

1. Accurately measure either of these as appropriate:

Autopilot systems: The distance between the fixed axle of the vehicle and the part of the implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground.

l

Manual guidance systems: The distance between the antenna center-point and the part of the implement where the trigger marks will be applied on the ground.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

139

Remote Output setup 5   Connectivity settings

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

Implement Setup

.

3. Enter the measurement as the F/B Offset distance on the Implement Boom Setup screen.

Calibrate front/back offset

1. Create a straight AB Line.

2. At the Remote Output screen, set the

Lead Time to 0.

3. Drive as slowly as possible down the AB Line from point A to point B, marking points on the ground where the remote output triggers.

4. At the end of the line, turn the vehicle around.

5. Drive back down the line from point B to point A, marking another set of trigger points.

6. Measure the distance between the points from the first run and the points from the second run.

7. Divide the distance by two.

8. Adjust your

Front/Back Offset value by this amount.

9. If the return points are nearer where you originally started than the first set of points, increase the F/B offset.

10. If the return points are further from where you originally started than the first set of points, lower the F/B offset.

Set lead time

1. Drive at your intended application speed down the AB Line from point A to point B, marking points on the ground where the remote output triggers. Ensure that your speed remains constant.

2. At the end of the line, turn the vehicle around.

3. Drive back down the line from point B to point A, marking the trigger points.

4. Measure any offset distance between the points from the first run and the points from the second run.

5. Divide the distance by two.

6. Convert your speed from mph to inches/second.

Inches/second = mph x 17.6.

7. To calculate the lead time setting (in seconds), divide the distance between the points (in inches) from Step 5 by the vehicle speed (in inches/second).

Lead Time = Half the distance between points (inches) divided by speed (inches per second)

8. Enter the lead time at the Remote Output screen.

For example, if a 4 mph pass creates a 14" distance between each set of points:

140

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings Remote Output setup

Divide the distance between the points by 2. (In this example, 14" / 2 = 7") l l

Convert the speed from mph to inches/second. (4 mph = (4 x 17.6) = 70.4 inches/second)

Divide the halved distance between the points by the speeds

7" divided by 70.4" per second = 0.999 Lead time in seconds

9. Drive along the AB line and then back at your application speed while you create trigger points.

10. Ensure that the trigger points are sufficiently close to one another.

11. If the gap between the points is unacceptable, repeat the calibrations.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

141

Serial Data Input 5   Connectivity settings

Serial Data Input

Serial Data Input is an optional feature/plugin. When it is activated, the FM-1000 Plus application can receive and log NMEA messages from an external device (for example, an infra-red sensor).

1. Install Serial Data Input. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

2. At the Configuration screen, select

Serial Data Input and tap

Setup

. The Serial Data Input screen displays.

3. Complete the settings and tap

OK

.

Setting

Port

Baud rate

Explanation

The port the device is connected to. Usually an EXP-100 assigned to

EXP-100#1 or EXP-100#2 used for serial communication on the

Port settings (page 74)

screen.

The rate information is transferred. Enter the appropriate rate for your region. See

Frequencies and baud rate (page 132)

.

Parity

Data bits

Stop bits

Prefix

Suffix

Log Interval

The start point of the data you want to collect.

To log data from the start of the line, leave this field empty.

l

To drop introductory characters, enter them. For example, if you receive data that begins with "$GPGGA...", enter "\24GP" in this field. The data will then begin with "GGA...". ("\24" is the

ASCII code for "$".)

The end point of the data you want to collect.

To log to the end of the line, keep the default field ("\0D\0A").

How regularly the data is written to the file.

142

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings Ag3000 modem

Ag3000 modem

The Ag3000 modem enables the FM-1000 Plus application to receive RTK corrections from a: l

Trimble VRS network l

Third-party RTK provider l

Continuously Operating Reference Station (CORS)

Modem activation

In the USA, the Ag3000 is bundled with a Trimble-installed AT&T card, which is tied to your Ag3000 unit and cannot be separated. You cannot use any other SIM cards with this device.

Additionally, the Ag3000 modem does not work in a CDMA network.

Outside of the USA, you must contact your local VRS Now™ or third-party cell provider for a SIM card.

Modem setup

Activate VRS for use. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

1. At the Configuration screen, select

VRS and then tap

Setup

.

2. The VRS Configuration screen displays.

3. Select the

VRS Server Setup tab. Enter the required settings, as provided by your Trimble VRS

Now

™ or Network RTK operator.

Setting

Server Name/Address

Server Port Number

Mount Point

User Name

Password

Explanation

RTK/VRS/CORS base station broadcast name

Base station port number

Base station mount point

Assigned username

Assigned password

4. If you are inside the USA, tap

OK

. The Configuration screen displays. The Ag3000 modem is now configured.

5. If you are outside the USA, select the

SIM Card Setup tab. Enter the details of the SIM card from the card provider, then tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

143

DCM-300 Modem 5   Connectivity settings

DCM-300 Modem

The DCM-300 modem is a rugged and sealed 3G communications solution for customers who need reliable communications for their farming operations. This modem enables the FM-1000 Plus application to receive RTK corrections from a: l

Trimble VRS network l

Third-party RTK provider l

Continuously Operating Reference Station (CORS)

The benefits of using the DCM-300 modem include: l

More acres of RTK accuracy from Trimble VRS Now delivered to the FM-1000 Plus application.

l

Easy interface and configuration with the FM-1000 Plus application.

l

Roof-mounted high-gain cellular antenna for enhanced signal reception to minimize cell phone signal related drop outs.

l

On-screen wireless status and diagnostics.

l

Vehicle Sync l

Office Sync

The DCM-300 modem is available: l

With a HSDPA modem for use with GSM wireless networks globally l

An EVDO modem for use with the Verizon wireless network in the USA

Unlock the modem

The DCM-300 modem is available at different prices for Asset Tracking and VRS/File Transfer. The

VRS/File Transfer functionality in the DCM-300 modem must be unlocked to use VRS or data transfer.

To unlock the DCM-300 with a passcode, you must connect the modem to the display and then turn it on. The Unlock screen shows the DCM-300 when connected.

Enter the passcode in the FM-1000 Plus application and then tap

OK

to send it to the modem. When the modem is successfully unlocked, a message displays to reboot the modem.

Service activation

Services for the DCM-300 modem can be purchased from a Trimble store. Services include: l

VRS Now Ag correction service l

Sync data transfer

144

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

5   Connectivity settings DCM-300 Modem l

Dispatch asset tracking l

Wireless data plans (USA only)

Modem setup

Activate VRS for use. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

To use VRS corrections, the

GPS Setup tab must be configured with a

Correction type of Trimble VRS.

Note  – The display must be unlocked for RTK to use the Trimble VRS correction type.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

VRS and then tap

Setup

. The VRS Configuration screen displays.

2. From the

Device list, select the type of modem that is connected. The default is

DCM-300

.

3. Select the

VRS Server Setup tab. Enter the required settings, as provided by your Trimble VRS Now or Network RTK operator.

Setting

Server Name/Address

Server Port Number

Mount Point

User Name

Password

Explanation

RTK/VRS/CORS base station broadcast name

Base station port number

Base station mount point

Assigned username

Assigned password

4. If you are inside the USA and:

Subscribe to the AT&T or Verizon data plans and have a DCM-300G modem, tap

OK

. The

Configuration screen displays.

Supply your own SIM card and have a DCM-300G modem, enter the details of the SIM card from the card provider, then tap

OK

.

Note  – The DCM-300C modem for Verizon does not use the SIM card setup tab.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

145

DCM-300 Modem 5   Connectivity settings

146

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

6

Field feature mapping setup

In this chapter:

Field feature mapping settings

Mapping location setting

Recording with coverage

Field area feature settings

Line feature settings

Boundary feature settings

Point feature settings

148

150

151

151

152

152

154

You can place features on the screen that represent points, areas and lines in your field.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

147

Field feature mapping settings 6   Field feature mapping setup

Field feature mapping settings

You can place field features in the field while driving to define on the screen points of interest or areas to avoid. There are three types of field feature: l

Point: A single point in the field, such as a tree l

Line: A straight or curved line in a field, such as a fence l

Area: An area of land, such as a pond

You can customize: l

Which features display on the Mapping Guidance panel at the Run screen l

The settings of each feature

Access Feature Mapping settings

1. At the Home screen tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

System and tap

Setup

. The Display Setup screen displays.

3. Select

Feature Mapping and tap

Setup

. The Feature Mapping screen displays.

Assign feature buttons

To assign the feature buttons that will be available on the Mapping Guidance panel in the Run screenn:

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the

Selected Features section.

The Select Feature screen displays.

2. At the top left-hand list, choose the type of feature: Area, Line or Point. The options available to you for that feature type are listed below.

3. Select the feature option you want and tap

OK

.

148

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

6   Field feature mapping setup Field feature mapping settings

Create a field feature

To create a feature in your field:

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the

Selected Features section.

The Select Feature screen displays.

2. At the top left-hand list, choose the type of feature: Area, Line or Point.

3. Tap

New

. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.

4. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name screen displays.

5. Enter the name of the feature and tap

OK

. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen.

6. Complete the settings for the feature you have added. For specifics, see: l

Field area feature settings (page 151)

Line feature settings (page 152)

l

Point feature settings (page 154)

7. Tap

OK

. The Feature Mapping screen displays again, showing the button of the feature you just created.

Edit a field feature

To edit a feature you have placed in your on-screen field:

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the

Selected Features section.

The Select Feature screen displays.

2. At the top left-hand list, choose the type of feature: Area, Line or Point.

3. Tap

Edit

. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.

4. To edit the name: a. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name screen displays.

b. Enter the name of the feature and tap

OK

. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point

Feature screen.

5. Edit the settings for the feature you have added. For specifics, see: l

Field area feature settings (page 151)

Line feature settings (page 152)

l

Point feature settings (page 154)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

149

Mapping location setting 6   Field feature mapping setup

6. Tap

OK

. The Feature Mapping screen displays again, showing the button of the feature you just edited.

Mapping location setting

As you place features in your on-screen field, they are placed in relation to the: l

Center of the boom l

Right of the boom l

Left of the boom

Access these settings at the Feature Mapping screen.

1. At the Home screen tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

System and tap

Setup

. The Display Setup screen displays.

3. Select

Feature Mapping and tap

Setup

. The Feature Mapping screen displays.

4. Complete the settings for the

Mapping Location section and tap

OK

.

Setting

Point Features

Line/Area Features

Explanation

Point features should be placed in your on-screen field relation to: l

Boom Center: The center of the boom

Boom Right: To the right of the boom l

Boom Left: To the left of the boom

Line and area features should be placed in your on-screen field relation to:

Boom Center: The center of the boom l

Boom Right: To the right of the boom l

Boom Left: To the left of the boom

150

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

6   Field feature mapping setup Recording with coverage

Recording with coverage

You can choose to have line features be recorded when you have enabled coverage.

1. At the Home screen tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

System and tap

Setup

. The Display Setup screen displays.

3. Select

Feature Mapping and tap

Setup

. The Feature Mapping screen displays.

4. From the

Record Line with Coverage list, choose: l

None

: The line will not automatically record when you begin logging coverage.

As Applied

:  l

Fence

:

5. Tap

OK

.

Field area feature settings

You can use area features to define areas of land as productive or unproductive. If the sprayer passes into an area that is defined as unproductive, the boom sections turns off. This can be useful for setting exclusion zones that you do not want to spray (such as waterways).

Setting

Name

Color

Area Type

Trigger Warning

Remote Output

Expand by

Explanation

Name of the feature

Select the feature appearance color

Productive

: Choose this option if the area feature will be a section of land that can be included in area calculations.

Non-productive

: Chose this option if the area is unproductive land.

No Warning

: No warning displays.

Entering Area

: A warning displays while you are inside the area.

Leaving Area

: A warning displays while you are outside the area.

Set to

Enabled if a signal pin is attached to the system. This enables you to trigger a pulse to an external device when you enter or exit this area.

See

Remote Output setup (page 136)

and

Remote Output operation

(page 429)

.

Options are:

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

151

Line feature settings 6   Field feature mapping setup

Setting Explanation

l

1/2 swath width l

1 swath width

Line feature settings

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the

Selected Features section.

The Select Feature screen displays.

2. At the top left-hand list, choose the Line feature.

3. Tap

New

. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.

4. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name screen displays.

5. Enter the name of the line and tap

OK

. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen.

6. Complete the settings for the line:

Setting

Color

Trigger Warning

Remote Output

Explanation

Select the feature appearance color

Enabled

: Warning is enabled

Disabled

: No warning will be issued

Set to

Enabled if a signal pin is attached to the system. This enables you to trigger a pulse to an external device when you enter or exit this area.

See

Remote Output setup (page 136)

and

Remote Output operation (page 429) .

7. Tap

OK

. The Feature Mapping screen displays again, showing the button of the feature you just created.

Boundary feature settings

The FM-1000 Plus application includes the field boundary feature that enables you to map multiplebounded areas within a field.

Field boundaries create a separate boundary file that can be used to calculate area and control automatic section switching at the edge of the field.

152

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

6   Field feature mapping setup Boundary feature settings

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the Selected Features buttons. The Select Feature screen displays.

2. From the feature list, select

Area and then tap

New

.

3. From the list of features, select

Boundary and then tap

Edit

. The Edit Area Feature screen displays.

4. Set one or more of the following the attributes for the boundary features.

Setting

Name

Color

Draw as

Trigger Warning

Remote Output

Expand By

Explanation

Custom name that displays on the

Color of the boundary outline and also the infill color, if selected.

Outlined or Filled

Visual and audible warning when entering or leaving the boundary edge.

Feature Mapping tab.

Enabled

: Restricts remote output pulses from being triggered while outside the boundary.

Disabled

: Does not restrict remote output.

See

Remote Output setup (page 136) .

How the boundary is actually recorded:

Nothing

: Maps the boundary exactly at the recorded position.

l

½ Swath Width

: Expands the recorded boundary location by ½ the swath width after the boundary is closed.

l

1 Swath Width

: Expands the recorded boundary location by 1 additional swath width after the boundary is closed.

5. Tap

OK

. The Select Feature screen displays.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

153

Point feature settings 6   Field feature mapping setup

6. Tap

OK

. The Feature Mapping screen displays.

7. Tap

OK

. The Display Setup screen displays.

8. Tap

OK

.

Point feature settings

1. At the Feature Mapping screen, tap one of the four buttons under the

Selected Features section.

The Select Feature screen displays.

2. At the top left-hand list, choose the Point feature.

3. Tap

New

. The Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen displays.

4. Tap in the entry box for the name of the feature. The Enter Area/Line/Point Feature Name screen displays.

5. Enter the name of the line and tap

OK

. You are returned to the Edit Area/Line/Point Feature screen.

6. Complete the settings for the point:

Setting

Alarm Radius

Warning Radius

Average Position

Explanation

l

Displays as a solid red block when the vehicle comes within this radius of the feature

More serious than the warning radius. Set it to a shorter distance.

Distance around the feature that causes a warning message to appear l

Displays on the screen as an orange line

Improves the quality of the point feature position

Yes

: The FM-1000 Plus application calculates the average position of the feature over 30 seconds.

l

No

: The FM-1000 Plus application places the feature at the coordinates that the vehicle is at when you tap the button.

154

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

7

Implement setup

In this chapter:

Implement setup

Create an implement

Select an implement

Import an implement

Edit implement settings

Delete an implement

156

157

157

158

158

160

Before you can begin operations, you must select an implement that has been created and set up in the system.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

155

Implement setup 7   Implement setup

Implement setup

Settings for an implement vary depending on the implement type and the operation it will be performing.

Implement setup ensures the system can tell: l

Which type of implement is attached l

How much area it covers l

How far offset the implement is from the guidance line or pattern

Note  – Some configuration settings are unavailable when a field is open in the Run screen. To access these settings, return to the Run screen and then tap the Home button. When prompted to close the field, tap

Close

.

156

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

7   Implement setup

Create an implement

Create an implement

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap

Switch

next to the implement.

3. If necessary, enter the administrative password. See

FM-1000 Plus application Passwords (page

51) .

4. At the Implement Configuration screen, tap

New

.

5. The New Configuration Name screen displays with an on-screen keyboard.

6. Enter a name for the new implement and tap

OK

. The Select Active Plugins screen displays.

7. Select the optional features/plugins that will be used with this implement and then tap

OK

.

8. The Implement Setup wizard displays. See

Edit implement settings (page 158)

to complete the settings.

Note  – The information needed for implement setup depends on the plugins that you selected in the previous step.

9. Tap

OK

. Your current configuration now displays in the Configuration screen.

Select an implement

To select an implement that has been configured:

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap

Switch

next to the implement.

3. If necessary, enter the administrative password. See

FM-1000 Plus application Passwords (page

51) .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

157

Import an implement 7   Implement setup

1. At the Implement Configuration screen, select the implement you want to switch to and then tap

OK

.

Note  – If there is only one available implement, it is selected by default.

2. The currently selected implement is displayed in the Configuration Selection screen.

Import an implement

To import an implement:

1. Copy the implement file into the AgGPS folder on the USB drive.

2. Insert the USB drive into the FM-1000 Plus application and then turn on the display. Open the

FM-1000 Plus application.

3. At the Home screen, tap .

4. At the Current Configurations screen, tap

Setup

.

5. If necessary, enter the Administration password. See

FM-1000 Plus application Passwords

(page 51)

.

6. At the Configuration screen, select

System and then tap

Setup

.

7. Select

Data Files and then tap

Manage

.

8. Select

Implement from the list on the left of the screen and then tap

Copy

.

The implements from the FieldManager screen now display in the Implement Configuration screen.

Edit implement settings

At the Implement Setup screen, you can change: l

Implement Type : Primary task for the current implement

l

Measurements : Basic information required for guidance using an automatic steering system

l

Geometry

: More detailed implement dimensions required both with and without a GPS receiver on the implement l

Overlap

: Values required to apply or avoid overlap l

Switches

: Settings for switches tied to implement control system

Implement Type

In the

Implement Type tab, choose the type of implement you want to set up.

158

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

7   Implement setup Edit implement settings

Measurements

Note  – The screen is scaled to the swath or application width, whichever is larger. If any offset is greater than this, the tractor image may pass the edge of the screen.

Note  – This setting is used for navigation. At the Run screen, when you tap

Skip

to adjust the guidance line, the guidance line moves to the current location of the vehicle or can be moved by a user entered distance or number of rows. Row width is defined by the swath width divided by the number of rows.

Measurement

Swath Width

Application Width

Application Offset

Rows

Left/Right Offset

Explanation

Set the distance between guidance passes.

The applied width of the tool or boom, which sets the width of the coverage logging and mapping.

Measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the point on the implement where coverage logging will be mapped. The fixed axle varies depending on vehicle type: l

Rear axle on front steering tractor and self-propelled sprayer.

l

Front axle on a harvester and 4x4 tractor l

Center of tracks on a tracked tractor

Number of rows that are covered by the implement.

Measure from the center of the vehicle to the center of the implement or header. This measurement adjusts the tractor path so that an offset implement is centered on the guidance line.

Geometry

Set up the measurements required for accurate implement modeling.

Measurement

Type

Hitch to Ground Contact

Point

Explanation

Select the implement type. The antenna offsets are required when a

GPS antenna is mounted on the implement for TrueGuide and

TrueTracker.

Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point that the implement rotates about. For planters this is typically the seeding units or the midpoint of several rows of tools

Note  – For modeled implements, shortening this setting causes the implement to come online more quickly while lengthening the setting causes the implement to come online more slowly.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

159

Delete an implement 7   Implement setup

Overlap

When you map a headland, you create an inner boundary and an outer boundary. At this tab, set the Infill Boundary: l

Select

Inner to shut off sections when the implement reaches the inner boundary.

l

Select

Outer to shut off sections when the implement reaches the outer boundary.

Switches

1. At the

Switches tab, tap

Setup

.

2. At the Add / Edit Implement Lift Sensor screen, enter the appropriate settings.

Measurement

Status

Number of Switches

Minimum Changed

Switches

Explanation

On

: Select if you have one or more implement switches tied into your implements control system.

Off

: Select if you have no implement switches tied into your implements control system.

Select the number of implement switches that you have tied into your implement control system.

Enter the number of implement switches the system should recognize to determine if the implement is lifted.

Delete an implement

To delete an implement:

1. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap

Switch

next to the implement.

2. At the Implement Configuration screen, select the appropriate implement from the list.

3. Tap

Delete

.

4. When prompted, tap

Yes

to confirm the deletion.

160

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

8

Vehicle guidance setup

In this chapter:

Guidance settings

Manual guidance

Autopilot system

OnSwath settings

NextSwath settings

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

EZ-Steer assisted steering system

162

162

164

188

189

199

205

Setup for vehicle guidance includes choosing the type of guidance system that your vehicle is configured for.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

161

Guidance settings 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Guidance settings

l

Manual guidance (page 162)

: For systems without any automatic steering system l

Autopilot system (page 164)

l

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system (page 199)

l

EZ-Steer assisted steering system (page 205)

All guidance systems require GPS. See

GPS receiver settings (page 116) .

For operational information, see: l

Autopilot system operation (page 402)

l

EZ-Pilot system operation (page 416)

l

EZ-Steer system operation (page 419)

Manual guidance

To set up manual guidance, complete the settings and complete the

GPS receiver settings (page

116)

.

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

Manual Guidance and then tap

Setup

. The Manual Guidance Settings screen displays.

3. In the

Vehicle tab, complete the settings and tap

OK

.

Setting

Vehicle Type

Axle to Antenna Offset

Explanation

Type of vehicle

The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna.

162

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Manual guidance

Setting

Antenna Height

Wheelbase

Explanation

Measure the distance accurately (within 3 inches). An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.

Note  – Measure the offset distance as accurately as possible

(within 3"); an incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.

If the antenna is in front of the axle, enter a forward distance.

l

If the antenna is behind the axle, enter a back distance.

Measure the antenna height vertically, from the ground to the base of the antenna.

The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel.

Note  – Any changes you make to the vehicle settings remain, even if you replace the Manual Guidance option with the Autopilot option.

4. Complete the

GPS receiver settings (page 116)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

163

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Autopilot system

Note  – Autopilot system setup is typically done when the system is professionally installed.

For cabling information, see the XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

For operational information, see

Autopilot system operation (page 402)

.

The sequence of setting up the Autopilot system is:

1. Complete the

GPS receiver settings (page 116)

if you have not already done so.

2. Complete the settings for the Autopilot system.

3. Calibrate the Autopilot automated steering system for your vehicle. See

Autopilot calibration

(page 169)

.

Note  – The subsequent configuration steps are usually done when the system is professionally installed.

Begin setup

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

Autopilot (Vehicle) and tap

Setup

. The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays.

Vehicle settings for Autopilot system

Complete the settings in the

Vehicle tab.

164

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Setting

Connector

Current Selection

Explanation

Select Port A of the TM-200 Module.

Displays the current vehicle profile (.vdb) that is loaded.

To change this setting, see

Select a vehicle (page 168) .

Vehicle settings for Autopilot system

Complete the settings in the

Vehicle tab.

Setting

Connector

Current Selection

Explanation

Select Port A of the TM-200 Module.

Displays the current vehicle profile (.vdb) that is loaded.

To change this setting, see

Select a vehicle (page 168) .

Engage settings for Autopilot system

At the

Engage tab, complete settings related to the engagement of the Autopilot system.

Setting

Operator Timeout

Coverage Log

Explanation

The amount of time of inactivity before an operator timeout message displays.

How coverage logging occurs: l l

Manual

: Coverage logging only occurs when you tap .

When Engaged

: Coverage logging occurs when Autopilot steering is engaged, by tapping

359)

.

(yellow). See

Engage button (page

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

165

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Steering settings for Autopilot system

At the

Steering tab, complete the settings related to steering on the guidance line.

Setting

Nudge Increment

End of Row Warning Dist

AutoSense

Valve on Speed

Legacy Sensors

Explanation

The distance the Nudge buttons in the Run screen move to for the vehicle to line up with the guidance line.

The distance the vehicle is from the end of a row to trigger the endof-row warning.

On or off.

Note  – Most recent Autopilot systems use an AutoSense device require this setting to be On.

l

Normal

: Speed threshold >0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s). For normal operating speeds.

l

Low

: Speed threshold >0.1 m/s (0.3 ft/s). For vehicles operating and very slow speeds.

l

Ultra Low

: Speed threshold >0.2 m/s (0.7 ft/s). For vehicles operating and very slow speeds.

Note  – The NavController must have firmware version 5.10 or higher to support low and ultralow settings.

For older Autopilot systems that use the electrical system to measure vehicle status.

l

None l

Wheel Speed Only l

Gear Level Only l

Wheel and Gear

This list is only available when AutoSense is set to

Off

.

166

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Measurements for NextSwath

At the

Measurements tab, complete the settings for using the NextSwath feature. See

NextSwath settings (page 189)

and

NextSwath operation (page 405)

.

Setting

Fixed Axle to Tow Hitch

Explanation

Measure the distance from the center point of the drawbar hitch pin to the control point of the vehicle. Control points depend on the type of vehicle: l

MFWD: Rear axle l

Tracked tractor: Center of rotation l

Sprayer: Rear axle l

Combine/harvester: Front axle l

4WD/articulated: Rear axle

Note  – If you are using a 2-point hitch, measure from the fixed axle to the pivot point on the implement.

Fixed Axle to 3-Point Hitch Measure the distance from the rear axle of the vehicle to the location where the three point fixture attaches. Also use this measurement for fixed applications such as harvesting and spraying with a self-propelled sprayer.

Advanced settings for Autopilot system

Advanced settings are located in the

Advanced tab. For more information regarding the

Advanced tab settings, contact your local reseller.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

167

Autopilot system

Select a vehicle

8   Vehicle guidance setup

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

Autopilot (Vehicle) and tap

Setup

. The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays.

3. Tap

Edit

. The Edit Vehicle screen displays.

4. From the

Vehicle Profile Location list, select the source of the pre-configured vehicle profile you want:

Autopilot

controller : The majority of vehicle profiles are stored on the Autopilot controller.

l l

Vehicle profile

database

file: As additional profiles become available or are updated, they are added to a vehicle profile database. You can download the database and load profiles from it.

Saved file

: You can install an individual vehicle profile that you configured previously and saved. See

Save vehicle profile (page 186)

.

Then...

For Vehicle Profile

Location, if you choose...

From Controller (New)

From Database (new)

From Saved File

(existing) a. From the

Model list, select the make and model you want.

b. Tap

Use Vehicle

.

a. Tap

Browse

.

b. Select the .vdb file you want.

c. Tap

OK

.

d. Tap

Use Vehicle

.

a. Tap

Browse

.

b. Select the file you want.

168

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

For Vehicle Profile

Location, if you choose...

Then...

c. Tap

OK

.

d. Select Save Vehicle to save the new settings.

e. When a message displays that the profile you selected on the NavController, tap

OK

.

Note  – If you select a vehicle make and model but do not upload that configuration to the Autopilot controller, that make and model may not be loaded.

f. Tap

OK

when another message displays explaining the

NavController will be reinitialized.

Autopilot calibration

After you configure the vehicle make and model, calibrate the system for your vehicle. The calibration process records additional details about your vehicle which helps the system to steer the vehicle more accurately. For high accuracy systems, all settings must be correct.

All vehicle types

Four calibration items are required for all types of vehicles: l

Controller orientation (page 170) : Correctly associates the outputs of the Autopilot controller

sensors with the direction of the vehicle.

l

Manual Override Sensitivity calibration (page 171)

: Required for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function. Change the default only if the operation of the manual override function is acceptable.

l

Roll / antenna compensation calibration (page 177)

: Compensates for antenna height and static roll caused by minor variations in the Autopilot controller and the GPS receiver mounting.

l

Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration : How aggressively the vehicle approaches the

guidance line

Articulated and front-wheel-steered types

For articulated and front-wheel-steered vehicle types, additional calibrations are required: l

Steering angle sensor calibration (page 172)

: Converts the sensor output into commands for steering full left, full right and any position in between.

l

AutoSense calibration (page 172) : Orients Autosense.

l

Automated Deadzone calibration (page 173) : Required to learn the vehicle's steering deadzone.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

169

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup l

Proportional steering gain calibration (page 175)

: Required only if system steering performance is not satisfactory.

Tracked tractors

For tracked tractors, there are several calibrations required. See

Tracked tractor calibrations (page

183)

.

Begin calibration

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At theConfigurations screen, tap

Setup

next to the vehicle.

3. Select

Autopilot (Vehicle) and tap

Calibrate

. The Vehicle Calibration screen displays.

4. Select a calibration and tap

OK

.

Controller orientation

1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select

Controller Orientation and tap

OK

. The Autopilot Controller

Orientation screen displays. A graphic of the controller represents the current mounting orientation of the controller.

The image is shown as though:

You are looking down on the vehicle from above.

l

The top of the screen points to the nose of the vehicle.

2. Use the buttons to select the orientation of the controller.

If the controller is set at a sloped angle, the vehicle profile will set the NavController orientation.

Note  – Install the NavController as described in the vehicle install instructions. If custom angles are used, the on-screen image of the controller does not display.

3. Tap

OK

to accept the new orientation or tap

Cancel

to exit.

170

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Manual Override Sensitivity calibration

WARNING –

Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical safety feature to fall, resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle. Any adjustment to this setting must be made only by an authorized dealer.

Note  – Manual Override Sensitivity calibration is valid only for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function. The software automatically detects whether or not the vehicle configuration includes this type of sensor and provides this option if required.

Manual override is one method of disengaging the Autopilot system by turning the steering wheel.

When you turn the steering wheel, there is a voltage spike that then tapers off. This spike and decline occurs at different levels for different models of tractor.

The manual override sensitivity is the level that the voltage must spike to before the override occurs and the system disengages. The voltage must also taper below that level before automated steering can be engaged again. If you set a: l

High level of sensitivity, the system will disengage more quickly and you will have to wait longer before you can re-engage.

l

Low level of sensitivity, the system will take longer to disengage and you will be able to reengage more quickly.

Incorrect adjustment of the Manual Override Sensitivity calibration setting could cause this critical safety feature to fail, resulting in personal injury or damage to the vehicle. Any adjustment to this setting must be made only by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you perform this calibration only if the default sensitivity is unacceptable under all conditions. Do not to choose a sensitivity setting that is either too

sensitive or not sensitive enough. In either case, manual override may cease to function correctly.

On some platforms, you could set the sensitivity so low that the manual override function will not detect any steering wheel motion. It is vital that you avoid this.

Calibration steps

1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select

Manual Override and tap

OK

. The Autopilot Manual

Override Calibration screen displays.

2. Test the current manual override setting. Turn the steering wheel. The

Override Inactive

button changes color when the Override becomes active. With the system active, assess whether the manual override feature is at an acceptable level of sensitivity for: l

Speed of steering wheel turn

Distance of steering wheel turn

3. To adjust the manual override sensitivity setting, move the slider bar.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

171

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Slider Bar Direction

Left

Right

Sensitivity is...

Increased

Decreased

Manual Override is triggered...

More easily

Less easily

The value above the slider bar on the right is the current setting. The total range of the slider bar is 0.5 to 2.5 (where 0.5 is the most sensitive setting and 2.5 is the least sensitive).

4. To try the new setting, tap

OK

. The Vehicle Calibration screen displays.

5. Select

Manual Override again. The Autopilot Manual Override Calibration screen displays again.

6. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to test each new setting.

Note  – You can also evaluate the performance of the manual override feature under conditions of loading and/or activities which may affect the pressure of the hydraulic system. For example, you can turn on the auxiliary hydraulics while you evaluate the manual override sensitivity.

7. Tap

OK

to accept the new setting or tap

Cancel

to exit.

AutoSense calibration

1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select

Autosense Calibration and tap

OK

. The Autopilot AutoSense

Calibration screen displays.

2. From the

Location list, select the AutoSense position.

3. From the

Orientation list, select the AutoSense orientation.

4. Tap

OK

to confirm selections.

Steering angle sensor calibration

Note  – Perform the steering sensor calibration only if a rotary potentiometer is installed on the vehicle. If an

AutoSense device is selected as the steering angle sensor, the Steering Sensor screen does not appear.

Steering sensor calibration converts the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering angle measurement.

Note  – Complete this calibration before you attempt to calibrate the steering deadzone or roll correction procedures.

This calibration requires the vehicle to be in motion. Ensure that you: l

Perform this procedure on a hard, level surface that is free of obstructions.

l l

Maintain a tractor speed above 1.6 kph (1 mph).

Watch the

Sensor Angle value:

For a symmetrical angle reading at the steering extremes while you manually steer the wheels to full right and full left

172

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

To ensure that the angle reading is near zero while you manually steer the wheels straight ahead

Calibration steps

To run the steering sensor calibration:

1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select

Manual Override and tap

OK

. The Autopilot Steering

Sensor Calibration screen displays.

2. Move the tractor forward slowly.

3. Center the steering wheel and then tap

Next

.

4. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left and then tap

Next

. If the steering wheel is not turned completely to the left or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement, an error message displays.

The value for

Volts updates as you turn the steering wheel:

5. Turn the steering wheel completely to the right and then tap

Next

. If the steering wheel is not turned to the full right position or if the steering sensor requires adjustment or replacement, an error message displays.

6. At the next screen, center the steering wheel. While the wheel is at the center position, tap

Next

.

The value for

Volts updates as you turn the steering wheel.

7. Tap

OK

to accept the calibration.

Automated Deadzone calibration

WARNING –

During the Automated Deadzone calibration, the system moves the wheels that steer the vehicle. To avoid injury, be prepared for sudden vehicle movement and that the area around the vehicle (and implement, if applicable) are clear.

WARNING –

Obstacles in the field can cause collisions, which may injure you and damage the vehicle. If an obstacle in the field makes it unsafe to continue the Automated Deadzone calibration, stop the vehicle and turn the steering wheel to disengage the system.

1) Wait until the display prompts you that the phase is ready to begin.

2) Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn.

3) Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available.

4) Tap the button to begin the next phase.

The Automated Deadzone calibration runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to determine the point at which steering movement occurs.

In this test, the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the point at which wheel movement occurs.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

173

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup l

You must complete the Steering Angle procedure before you run this procedure.

l

To ensure optimal system performance, the hydraulic fluid must be at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure. On some vehicles with large reservoirs, it may take several hours for the fluid to reach operating level, especially if the implement circuit is lightly loaded. Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can be shown on a vehicle console.

l

If you perform the calibration while the system is still cold, repeat both the Deadzone and the

Proportional gain calibration procedures after the system is at operating temperature.

Calibration steps

Place the vehicle in a large field that is free of hazards. To minimize the effect of the ground conditions, the field should have smooth soil that is loose but firm.

At the Vehicle Controller Setup screen, select

Automated Steering Deadzone and tap

OK

. The Autopilot

Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.

1. Tap

Next

.

2. Tap

Next

in the two screens that display.

3. Follow all instructions. Tap the

Test Right

and

Test Left

buttons to perform the Deadzone calibration.

4. As ground conditions affect the results of this calibration, it is recommended that you perform the calibration at least three times, or until the average deadzone values change by less than about 0.5.

To minimize the total amount of space needed for the complete calibration, you can reposition the vehicle between the phases of the test. If the available flat, smooth space is extremely limited, re-align the vehicle after each segment of the calibration.

To reposition the vehicle: a. Wait until the software prompts you that the next phase is ready to begin.

b. Look at the screen to determine whether the next phase will require a left or right turn.

c. Reposition the vehicle so that the turn will use the space that you have available.

d. Tap the button to begin the next phase.

5. Reposition the vehicle and continue from the current test phase.

Automated Deadzone error messages

Error - ....

Manual Override Detected

Vehicle Moving Too Slow

Explanation

Manual override was detected before the calibration cycle could be completed. Retry.

The vehicle was moving too slowly for the calibration

174

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Error - ....

Explanation

cycle to successfully finish. Make sure the vehicle is moving at least 0.8 kph (0.5 mph) during each calibration cycle.

Steering Close To End Stops

Valve Connectors Could Be Swapped The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the opposite direction to what was expected. Retry, and if the problem persists either the valve connectors have been accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration was performed incorrectly.

No GPS A GPS receiver must be connected and outputting positions before the software can run the calibration procedure.

No Steering Response Detected

Before the calibration cycle could be completed, the measured steering angle approached the end stops.

Retry, and if the problem persists, instead of centering the steering at the start of each cycle, try turning the steering in the opposite direction to that which is being tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater range to test over.

Unable To Determine DZ: Try Again

During the calibration cycle, insufficient movement was sensed for the calibration to complete. If the problem persists, the hydraulic installation could be faulty.

A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone.

Retry, and if the problem persists, contact Technical

Support.

Software Problem Detected The software was unable to complete the calibration due to insufficient movement of the vehicle. If the problem persists, contact Technical Support.

Proportional steering gain calibration

WARNING –

The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden wheel movements.

Note  – Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration.

Perform the proportional steering gain calibration only when the Autopilot system performance is less than satisfactory.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

175

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

The Proportional Steering Gain (PGain) setting enables a balance between rapid steering response and stability. When you modify the PGain setting, two steering characteristics are affected: l

Slew Time: The amount of time that the front wheels take to move from the far left to the far right position and vice versa.

l

Overshoot: The percentage by which the front wheels exceed the commanded angle before they settle on the correct value.

To correct slight variations caused by valve current response, friction, and hydraulic fluid viscosity, alter the PGain value: l

High PGain value: Decreases the slew time and increase the overshoot. This provides rapid responses, but can cause the steering to exhibit signs of instability (for example, a tendency to excessively overshoot).

l

Low PGain value: Increases the slew time and decrease the overshoot. This improves the stability but can introduce significant delays in the steering response and can cause the vehicle to oscillate from side to side.

Perform the calibration: l

Immediately before you run the PGain calibration, even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past.

l

On a hard, level surface that is free of obstructions.

l

While maintaining a vehicle speed above 1.6 kph (1 mph)

Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs: l

Slew times no longer decrease (a low value is required) l

Overshoot exceeds 5 – 8% (depending on the vehicle) l

Wheels noticeably shake near end stops

Calibration steps

1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select

Steering Gain and tap

OK

. The Autopilot Steering Gain

Calibration screen displays.

2. Tap

Run Slew Test

. A warning message displays.

3. Tap

Next

.

WARNING –

The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the

Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden wheel movements.

4. Tap

Next

in the next two screens that display.

176

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

5. Test various gain settings while you monitor the vehicle performance and the values for

Slew

Time and

Overshoot for the Turn Left phase.

a. Adjust the

New Gain

(if required).

b. Turn the front wheels completely to the right to begin the test. (The test is for the stop-tostop position.) c. Tap

Turn Left

. Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.

Note  – The optimum gain setting has short slew time (short millisecond reading) and low overshoot percentage (less than 5–8%).

6. Repeat Step 5 with

Turn Right

. Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.

7. When you locate the best gain value, either:

Tap

OK

to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory.

l

Tap

Cancel

to restart the calibration procedure.

Roll / antenna compensation calibration

Note  – Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed directly over the working point of the implement. It is recommended that these offsets are minimized whenever possible.

At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select

Roll/Antenna Correction and tap

OK

. The Autopilot Roll/Antenna

Compensation screen displays.

Precalibration

Before configuring the antenna compensation, make sure that: l

The Autopilot system is completely and correctly set up.

l

GPS corrections are set up.

l

You read this section carefully.

l

If multiple GPS technologies will be used (for example, RTK and SBAS), use the technology with the highest accuracy when you perform the Roll Correction calibration.

Calibration steps

1. Set the antenna height above the ground.

a. Place the tractor on a flat, level surface.

b. Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the GPS receiver (or antenna).

c. Enter this value for

Antenna Height Above Ground

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

177

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

2. Set the antenna distance from the fixed axle.

a. Place the tractor on a flat, level surface.

b. Measure the distance from the fixed axle to the center of the GPS receiver (or antenna).

c. Enter this value into the

Antenna Distance from Fixed Axle entry box. Enter a negative value if the

GPS receiver antenna is to the rear of the fixed axle. The nose of the vehicle is considered the forward direction.

3. Configure the roll offset correction.

Use one of the following methods to calculate the roll offset and then enter the roll offset correction to compensate for it: l

Tire track offset method

Flag offset method

Choose the method which best matches the conditions.

4. Enter the roll offset value for roll offset.

5. Select one of the offline direction options, depending on whether the roll offset distance is to the right or left.

Tire track offset method for roll offset

Note  – Use a highly repeatable GPS correction mode for roll correction. For best results, use a RTK mode or

OmniSTAR HP signal that has been converged for at least twenty minutes. If you do a roll calibration with less accurate GPS correction modes, repeat the measurements at least four times to ensure a more consistent result.

1. Remove any implement from the vehicle.

2. Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can complete passes of at least 400 m (1320 ft) in length.

3. Reset the roll offset value to 0 (zero).

4. Create an AB Line.

5. Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field. To do this, start a new pass away from the area where the AB Line was created. When the system is stable, engage automatic steering mode and allow the Autopilot system to complete the pass.

6. At the end of the pass, turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction.

7. Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass.

8. In the middle of the return pass, stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is directly on the AB Line. This ensures there is no cross track error.

9. Park the tractor and exit the cab. Evaluate the tire track pattern between the first and return paths.

178

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

10. Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance. Also note whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.

Note  – The offset should be consistently to the left or right.

11. Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs.

Offset distance Offset direction Test

Run

1

2

3

Total =

Total / 3 (average offset value) =

Flag offset method for roll offset

1. Remove any implement from the vehicle. The vehicle draw-bar must be centered.

2. Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m

(1320 ft) in length.

3. Reset the Roll Offset value to 0 (zero) on the Roll Correction screen. See

Roll / antenna compensation calibration (page 177)

.

4. Create an AB Line.

5. Start a new pass. Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable. Stop the tractor midway through the pass. Confirm that there is no cross track error: the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

179

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

6. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a flag in the ground to mark the vehicle center-line for this pass.

7. Complete the pass. Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction.

8. Engage automatic steering mode. Stop the vehicle midway down the pass with the drawbar pin location very close to the marker flag. Confirm that there is no cross track error: the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line.

9. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Use the hitch pin hole in the drawbar as a guide to insert a second flag in the ground to mark the tractor centerline for this pass. Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass.

10. Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance. Also record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.

Note  – The offset should be consistently to the left or right The following graphic shows an example of a right offset. Measure the distance between the flags.

11. Repeat Steps 5 to 10 two more times for a total of three test runs. Use the following table to record the offset distance and the left or right direction of offset for each test run.

12. Average the results of the three runs. (Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three). Repeat Step 5 through Step 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs.

Offset distance Offset direction Test

Run

1

2

180

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Test

Run

3

Offset distance Offset direction

Total =

Total / 3 (average offset value) =

Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration

1. At the Vehicle Calibration screen, select

Line Acquisition and tap

OK

.

2. At the

Classic tab, choose whether you want to use the classic method of line acquisition or the

OnSwath method. For more information about OnSwath, see

OnSwath settings (page 188) .

3. Complete the settings on all other tabs.

The following instructions apply to the OnSwath mode.

Steering Angle tab

The steering angle (or turn radius) is used when acquiring a guidance line. A wider angle creates a sharper turn.

OnSwath Mode Settings

Maximum steering angle

(nominal)

Explanation

How sharply the vehicle turns during line acquisition at low speeds.

Sets the desired steering angle (turn radius) the system will use during line acquisition. This is not a hard limit and may be exceeded.

The value must be set to less than the physical maximum steering angle of the vehicle. A good starting point is 50-75% of the physical maximum. The default values for the vehicle profile are in this range.

Note  – Do not set this too high. Too high of a value will cause poor performance.

Note  – This setting affects the sharpest angle between the vehicle and a towed implement.

Maximum steering angle at

How much the Autopilot will reduce the steering angle used at

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

181

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

OnSwath Mode Settings

high speed

Explanation

higher speeds. The speed noted below the slider indicates when a reduction in steering angle will start to occur.

l

Lower aggressiveness values: Autopilot will limit the sharpness of high speed turns more, to maintain smoother, more stable operation.

l

Higher aggressiveness values: Autopilot will use the nominal maximum steering angle until the indicated speed is reached.

Slew Rate tab

The slew rate is how quickly the vehicle steers. The maximum slew rate (nominal) is the slew rate the

Autopilot system will assume the system is capable of and will plan for during line acquisition.

OnSwath Mode Settings

Maximum slew rate

(nominal)

Steering slew rate at high speed

Explanation

Adjust how quickly the steering changes during line acquisition at low speeds.

Note  – This must be set lower than the physical capacity of the vehicle or instability may occur. Lowering this value may help with vehicle jerk and oscillations.

A value that is: l

Lower: Is better for vehicles with poor hydraulic performance.

l

Higher: Reduces the slew rate at high speeds less. The speed noted below the slider indicates where the slew rate reduction will begin.

The Autopilot system will reduce the slew rate at speeds above the displayed value.

Note  – Lowering this value may help with vehicle jerk and oscillations.

A value that is: l

Lower: Reduces the slew rate at high speeds more. This leads to smoother and more stable operation.

l

Higher: Reduces the slew rate at high speeds less. The speed noted below the slider indicates where the slew rate reduction will begin.

Approach Angle tab

The slew rate is how quickly the vehicle steers. The maximum slew rate (nominal) is the slew rate the

Autopilot system will assume the system is capable of and will plan for during line acquisition.

182

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

OnSwath Mode Settings

Maximum approach angle

(nominal)

Explanation

 The desired approach angle that the Autopilot system will drive to the line if adequate space is available. If space is not available, the angle may not be achievable.

The following graphic shows possible paths to the line based on different approach angles.

Initial Turn Aggressiveness

Adjusts how sharp or smooth the initial turn toward to the line will be in comparison to the final turn onto the line. This affects only the initial turn towards, while the final turn onto the line is not affected.

If the value is: l

Lower: The initial turn will be smoother and more gradual.

l

Higher: The initial turn will be harder and sharper toward the line.

Tracked tractor calibrations

If you selected a tracked tractor as the make and model, the

Track Spacing option displays on the calibration list. (This option is not shown in the Vehicle Calibration screen.)

Track Spacing value

At the Autopilot Track Spacing Calibration screen, enter the distance between the center of the tracks. The width of the vehicle tracks is the distance from halfway across the width of the left track to halfway across the width of the right track.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

183

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Hydraulically-steered tracked tractor

If you selected a hydraulically-steered tracked tractor as the make and model, Engine Speed displays on the calibration list.

This group of vehicles includes the CAT/AGCO Challenger Tracked family.

No calibration is required if the system is installed on a CAT MT 700/800 series equipped with the ISO option. This also includes John Deere tracked vehicles.

Autopilot RPM Sensor Calibration screen

The Autopilot RPM Sensor Calibration screen enables you to verify that the RPM sensor output is correct.

If the Engine RPM value is not close to the actual engine RPM, follow the onscreen instructions to adjust the sensor output.

Autopilot Hydraulic Pump Response Time Calibration screen

The Autopilot Hydraulic Pump Response Time Calibration screen verifies and optimizes the response of the hydraulic steering pumps. Follow the onscreen instructions to perform the calibration.

Autopilot Steering Pump Knees Calibration screen

This calibration determines the compensation required for dead-band in the steering pumps.

WARNING –

The vehicle needs to move during the Hydraulic Tracked Pump Knees calibration procedure. To avoid injury, be prepared for vehicle movement.

The instructions for this calibration test include several screens. Follow the instructions on each screen.

Tracked vehicle steering wheel calibration

1. Turn off the engine, but keep the ignition key in the run position.

2. At the Autopilot Calibration screen, select

Steering Interface Calibration

.

3. Keep to the suggested time interval and follow the on screen instructions to turn the steering wheel right and left, full lock.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions until

Calibration Complete displays on screen.

184

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

Row Guidance

Note  – The Autopilot system with a supported vehicle is required for Row Guidance. For the list of supported vehicles, please refer to the RG-100 Supported platforms list.

When Row Guidance has been activated on the FM-1000 Plus application, the Autopilot system will follow curved or hillside corn rows that do not exactly match the guidance line.

Row Guidance setup

Before setup, make sure you have activated Row Guidance for use. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Row Guidance and then tap

Setup

.

2. The Row Guidance Configuration screen displays. Complete the settings and tap

OK

.

Note  – Verify the measurements are accurate for your vehicle. Measurements can differ due to vehicle variations. Measure distances with the header at the approximate operation height. Inaccurate measurements will result in a degraded performance.

Setting

Header

Feeler to Axle Offset

Cutter Bar to Axle Distance

Feeler Left/Right Offset

Engage Delay

Clear Nudge When Disengaged

Explanation

Header model attached to your combine.

Distance from the pivot point of the feeler to the front axle. This measurement must be accurate to within an inch, otherwise the performance will be degraded.

Distance from the front of the cutter bar or point where the crop enters the snapper rollers to the center of the front axle. This measurement must be accurate, otherwise the performance will be degraded.

Distance of the center of the row crop feelers to the centerline of the vehicle.

This delay in seconds (0 - 10) will be used when the system is engaged. The system will wait the entered time until inputs are recognized to start row guidance.

Use this setting to keep the system from mistaking random stalk strikes on headlands as inputs for steering.

Yes

: Clears the AutoPilot nudges when the system is disengaged.

No

: Keep the AutoPilot nudges when the system is

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

185

Autopilot system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Setting Explanation

disengaged.

3. At the Configuration screen, tap

Item

Offline Distance

Status

Enable

/

Disable

Voltage

Voltage status

Row Guidance and then tap

Diagnostics

.

Explanation

Status of the sensor

Tap to enable or disable sensors

Voltage for the left and right sensor

Status for the left and right sensor

Implement setup for Row Guidance

Before starting the Row Guidance setup, ensure that: l

All cables and components of the system are installed on the vehicle.

l

The Autopilot system has been installed and configured with the NavController firmware.

l

When setting up Autopilot for use with the RG-100 system, ensure that: l

A vehicle profile that ends in

RG-100 is selected at the Vehicle Controller Setup screen

The XML header file in the latest release of the vehicle database (.vdb) has been added to the vehicle profiles on the FM-1000 Plus application. Firmware versions after v 6.63 contain an XML file. For instructions on updating the XML file, refer to the support note Autopilot

System: Installing the VDB File (v6) .

l

Row Guidance has been added (activated) for the FM-1000 Plus application.

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration Selection screen displays.

2. Tap

Edit

next to

Implement

. The Configuration screen displays.

3. Tap

Add/Remove

to add Row Guidance to the configuration.

Save vehicle profile

Note  – From Autopilot firmware version 3.0 and later, the vehicle profile location defaults to “From

Database”.

186

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup Autopilot system

After you configure and calibrate the Autopilot system for your vehicle, you can save that information for later use. This can be useful if you want to adjust the settings or if you move the display from one vehicle to another.

To save a vehicle profile:

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. Select Autopilot and then tap

Setup

. The Vehicle Controller Setup screen displays.

3. On the

Vehicle tab, tap

Edit

. The Edit Vehicle screen displays.

4. Tap

Save Vehicle

.

5. At the Save Vehicle Configuration screen, tap in the

Filename entry box.

6. At the Enter Save Filename screen, enter a name for the current vehicle profile and tap

OK

.

7. At the Edit Vehicle screen, tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

187

OnSwath settings 8   Vehicle guidance setup

OnSwath settings

With OnSwath, you can customize line acquisition to the vehicle, operation and operator preference. With OnSwath, vehicle behavior during line acquisition is more controlled, more predictable, and more repeatable.

Choose the OnSwath option when calibrating the Line Acquisition Settings for the Autopilot system.

See

Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration (page 181)

.

The benefits of OnSwath include: l

Up to 50% faster line acquisition l

Separate tuning for online and line acquisition l

More repeatable performance l

Consistent performance over entire speed range.

l

Cab shake eliminated on articulated machines l

Limited turn rates reduce impact on field for tracked machines l

Front axle/nose overshoots more, so that the l

Rear axle on the guidance line faster due to front axle/nose overshooting more

OnSwath requires Autopilot firmware 6 and higher.

188

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup NextSwath settings

NextSwath settings

The optional NextSwath feature/plugin works with Autopilot to enable you to: l

Set up automatic turns to occur between swaths. See

Automatic turn settings (page 190)

and

Automatic turn (page 406) .

l

Better acquire the guidance line when pulling an implement. See

TrueSwath operation (page

413)

.

l

Extend the point for the automatic turn to compensate for larger pulled implements and enable proper coverage. See TrueSwath under

Automatic turn settings (page 190) .

l

Set up automated headlands management to use automated functions you have programmed in your vehicle. See

Automated headlands management settings (page 194)

.

l

Set up reminders to occur before you begin or end a swath. See

Automated headlands management settings (page 194) .

Requirements

NextSwath requires: l

The Autopilot steering system. See

Autopilot system (page 164)

.

l

One of the following GNSS correction sources: l

Omnistar XP

Omnistar HP l

RangePoint RTX l

Centerpoint RTX (SS, FS, SC) l

Centerpoint RTK

See

GPS receiver settings (page 116) .

l

OnSwath selected and properly set up for line acquisition. See

OnSwath settings (page 188) .

l

Supported vehicles as defined by the supported platforms list. The vehicle profile in the version

11.00 Vehicle Database (VDB) will enable NextSwath if it is supported. Unsupported VDB files will not allow setup or enabling of NextSwath.

l

To use the automated headlands management functions (vehicle integration), a NavController

III. See

Automated headlands management settings (page 194) .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

189

NextSwath settings 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Restrictions

NextSwath cannot be used in with: l

TrueTracker l

Row Guidance RG-100 l

FieldLevel II l

WM-Drain

Automatic turn settings

Note  – To use NextSwath automatic turn, see

Automatic turn (page 406) .

The value for end-of-row warning distance is set in the Steering tab. See

Steering settings for

Autopilot system (page 166) .

To set up NextSwath automatic turn capability:

1. Complete the setup for the Autopilot system and the implement. NextSwath uses the following in settings for calculating automatic turns: l

Swath width. See

Measurements for NextSwath (page 167)

under Autopilot setup.

Application offset. See

Measurements for NextSwath (page 167)

under Autopilot setup.

l

Hitch to ground contact point. See Geometry tab under

Edit implement settings (page

158)

.

CAUTION – Always verify implement and NextSwath settings, and verify performance for each implement you use for NextSwath. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.

2. Make sure OnSwath is chosen as the method for the vehicle to acquire the line in the Autopilot setup. See

OnSwath settings (page 188)

and

Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration (page

181) .

3. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

4. Select

NextSwath and then tap

Setup

.

5. Complete the settings on the following tabs.

190

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup

Turn Pattern tab

Measurement

Type of path

Turn Pattern

Swath Change Limit

NextSwath settings

Explanation

l

Shortest (sharper turn)

(default): The path of the turn will be sharper and as short as possible. To determine this path, the system uses: l

Swath width

Steering angle and slew rate settings for OnSwath l

Turn speed l

The Turn Pattern option you have chosen l

Smoothest (rounder turn)

: The path of the turn will be smoother and gentler (with a constant curve), and likely longer.

Use this setting for large applications such as wide spraying. If you change to a swath which causes the vehicle to skip a larger number of swaths for a turn, the radius for this turn will increase.

When the limitations of the steering system and the width of the swath do not allow a turn to be completed within the distance between swaths, the turn must extend beyond the swath lines.

Choose which pattern to use in such a case.

l

Keyhole

: An equal amount of turning outside the swath region occurs on each side of the turn.

l

Turn wide at start

: The turn extends widely beyond the existing line to be able to line up accurately to the next swath. The turning occurs outside of the swath at the beginning of the turn.

l

Turn wide at end

: The turn begins on the existing line and extends widely beyond the next swath. The turning occurs outside of the next swath at the end of the turn.

Enter the maximum number of swaths the operator can move to, up to 10 swaths (up to 500 feet/152.4 meters).

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

191

NextSwath settings 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Turn Point tab

Measurement

Shorten or Extend Swath

Explanation

l

Maximize infill coverage (extend)

: The turn starts at the boundary between the headland and infill. All of the turn occurs outside of the infill.

Note  – When your boundaries are not regular, the turn point may be out of the boundary.

Turn Point Inside/Outside boundary l

Minimize headland usage (shorten)

: The turn may start inside the infill to attempt to keep the turn inside the headland region.

If you have a boundary without headlands, set the location of the turning point in relation to the boundary, such as 10 feet (3.05

meters) outside the boundary or 10 feet (3.05 meters) inside the boundary. This setting only applies to Productive Area Feature Field

Boundaries, and does not apply to headland infill boundaries.

Note  – When your boundaries are not regular, the turn point may be out of the boundary.

192

WARNING –

Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup NextSwath settings

Measurement Explanation

TrueSwath Swath Extension When TrueSwath is enabled on the Run screen, the system will extend the original turn point. The additional distance delays the vehicle turn and enables the implement to fully cover the swath.

Tap

Calculate

to obtain this value. The system uses several values to complete this calculation, including the distance of: l

The rear axle of the vehicle to the hitch of the implement l

The hitch-to-ground contact

Change this value when you change to a different implement.

See

TrueSwath operation (page 413) .

Parameters tab

Measurement

Turn Speed

Minimum Turn Radius

Remote Engage Confirms

Auto Turn

Explanation

All automated turns are optimized for this speed. If the vehicle is traveling faster than this speed, the Autopilot system will not start the turn. If the vehicle speed is increased during the turn and exceeds this speed, the system will post a warning to the operator.

If speed does not reduce within two seconds, the turn will be disengaged. It is recommended that this value be set to the highest speed for which turns will be made.

Note  – Settings for OnSwath that have an affect on the path of the planned turn are: Maximum nominal steering angle, maximum nominal steering slew rate and aggressiveness. See

Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration (page 181)

.

The smallest radius for the automatic turn. To calculate the value, drive the vehicle/implement combination in the tightest turn desired. Then measure the radius of this turn.

Note  – This setting applies for turns with or without TrueSwath. It does not apply to line acquisition. Settings for OnSwath and turn speed may cause the system to use a larger turn radius for regular and TrueSwath automated turns.

Choose

Yes if you want the option to use the Remote Engage button as well as the touchscreen to confirm an automatic turn.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

193

NextSwath settings 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Automated headlands management settings

Note  – For operation, see

Using automated headlands management (page 415)

.

The automated headlands management capability of NextSwath enables you to: l

Have your vehicle and implement perform certain operations automatically after you have programmed these functions into your vehicle. For example, you may want the implement automatically raise at the end of a swath and automatically lower at the beginning of the swath.

l

Set up reminders to prompt you to perform an action at the appropriate time whether you have a programmable vehicle or not

To set up NextSwath automated headlands management:

1. Complete the setup for the Autopilot system and the implement. NextSwath uses the following in implement setup for calculating automatic turns: l

Swath width. See

Measurements for NextSwath (page 167)

under Autopilot setup.

Implement offset. See

Measurements for NextSwath (page 167)

under Autopilot setup.

l

Hitch to ground contact point. See Geometry tab under

Edit implement settings (page

158)

.

CAUTION – Always verify implement and NextSwath settings, and verify performance for each implement you use for NextSwath. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.

2. Make sure OnSwath is chosen as the method for the vehicle to acquire the line in the Autopilot setup. See

Line acquisition aggressiveness calibration (page 181) .

3. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

4. Select

NextSwath and then tap

Setup

.

5. Complete the settings on the tabs: l

Turn Pattern

Turn Point l

Parameters

See

Automatic turn settings (page 190)

.

6. Complete the settings on the following tabs and screens.

Swath Start Events tab

Tap a row to add an event that will occur before or during the swath start. The system displays the

Edit Start of Swath Event screen.

194

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup

Version 3.0, Revision A

NextSwath settings

Column Heading

Event

Distance or Time

Occurs Before/After

Sound alert

Text alert

Explanation

The name of the event.

The event will occur in reference to a certain distance or a certain time to the turn point.

Whether the event will occur before or after the start/end of the swath.

Whether an alert will sound to alert you of the event.

Whether a message will display to alert you of the event.

Edit Start of Swath Event screen

The event you create here will be one that occurs at the start of the swath.

Item

Event

Distance or time

Occurs before/after

Sound alert

Text alert

Explanation

Choose the event you want from the list: l

Start application: A reminder to start the application l

Stop application: A reminder to stop the application l

Lower implement: A reminder to lower the implement l

Raise implement: A reminder to raise the implement l

Adjust speed for turn: A reminder to adjust your speed for the turn l

Adjust speed to operating speed: A reminder to adjust your speed to the operating speed l

Perform Sequence A: A reminder or command to start the automated operations previously recorded on your vehicle.

l

Perform Sequence B: A reminder or command to start the automated operations previously recorded on your vehicle.

Choose whether you want to use distance or time to define when the event occurs.

Choose whether the event will occur before or after the start of the event.

Choose Yes if you want the system to alert you with a sound when the event is about to occur.

Choose Yes if you want the system to display a message reminding you of the start of the event.

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

195

NextSwath settings 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Swath End Events tab

Tap a row to add an event that will occur before or during the swath end. The system displays the

Edit End of Swath Event screen.

Column Heading

Event

Distance or Time

Occurs Before/After

Sound alert

Text alert

Explanation

The name of the event.

The event will occur in reference to a certain distance or a certain time to the turn point

Whether the event will occur before or after the start/end of the swath.

Whether an alert will sound to alert you of the event.

Whether a message will display to alert you of the event.

Edit End of Swath Event screen

The event you create here will be one that occurs at the end of the swath.

Item

Event

Distance or time

Occurs before/after

Explanation

Choose the event you want from the list: l

Start application: A reminder to start the application l

Stop application: A reminder to stop the application l

Lower implement: A reminder to lower the implement l

Raise implement: A reminder to raise the implement l

Adjust speed for turn: A reminder to adjust your speed for the turn l

Adjust speed to operating speed: A reminder to adjust your speed to the operating speed l

Perform Sequence A: A reminder or command to start the automated operations previously recorded on your vehicle.

l

Perform Sequence B: A reminder or command to start the automated operations previously recorded on your vehicle.

Choose whether you want to use distance or time to define when the event occurs.

Choose whether the event will occur before or after the start of the event.

196

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup NextSwath settings

Item

Sound alert

Text alert

Explanation

Choose Yes if you want the system to alert you with a sound when the event is about to occur.

Choose Yes if you want the system to display a message reminding you of the start of the event.

Vehicle Integration tab

WARNING –

Do not use automated implement functions to: 1) control hazardous materials (including NH3) or 2) operate implements near ground laborers. Failure to follow these restrictions could result in serious injury or death.

The settings on this tab only apply if your vehicle has been programmed for automated headlands management (vehicle/implement performing functions automatically in a specific sequence). The signal issued from the third solenoid of the NavController III starts the automatic operations you have created and saved on the vehicle. Any timing for each event in the sequence must be set up from the vehicle interface. Refer to the appropriate tractor operator manual.

Note  – Automated functions do not work with on vehicles that use the third solenoid output for the “On when engaged” function.

Requirements

To set up and use the automated functionality, you must have: l

The automated headlands management (Vehicle Integration) feature/plugin that is unlocked and activated l l

A vehicle that is supported by a platform kit which offers automated functions

A NavController III (to output the signal for operation from the third solenoid)

Note  – There is only one solenoid output on the NavController III, meaning only one button can be triggered.

Column Heading

Sequence A Trigger

Sequence B Trigger

Explanation

Choose which operation will trigger the sequence: l

Manual: Operator taps a button on the tractor to begin the automated functions l

Third solenoid: Signal is sent from the NavController to begin the automated operations

Choose which operation will trigger the sequence:

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

197

NextSwath settings

Column Heading

8   Vehicle guidance setup

Explanation

l

Manual: Operator taps a button on the tractor to begin the automated functions l

Third solenoid: Signal is sent from the NavController to begin the automated operations

198

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

The EZ-Pilot assisted steering system uses GPS to provide automatic vehicle guidance.

For cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

For operational information, see

EZ-Pilot system operation (page 416)

.

To set up the EZ-Pilot system:

1. Complete the

GPS receiver settings (page 116)

.

2. Complete the EZ-Pilot settings.

3. Calibrate the EZ-Pilot system.

Vehicle settings for EZ-Pilot system

1. At the Configuration screen, select displays.

EZ-Pilot and tap

Setup

. The EZ-Pilot Settings screen

2. On the

Vehicle tab complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting

Vehicle Type

Axle to Antenna

Offset

Explanation

Type of vehicle

The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna. Measure the distance accurately (within 3 inches). An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.

Take the measurement from the antenna to the correct point of your vehicle: l

From the rear axle for MFWD, Sprayer, Floater, Truck

From the front axle for 4WD tractor, Combine, Swathers (For swathers, it is recommended that you place the antenna directly

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

199

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Setting

Antenna Height

Wheelbase

Explanation

l over or ahead of the front axle.)

From the tracked center for tracked vehicles

If the antenna is:

In front of the axle, enter a forward distance.

l

Behind the axle, enter a back distance.

The distance between the ground and the top of the GPS antenna.

The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel.

Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system

On the EZ-Pilot Settings screen at the

Steering tab, complete the settings for steering.

Setting

Nudge Increment

Angle Per Turn

Freeplay Left

Freeplay Right

Motor Speed

Online Aggressiveness

Approach Aggressiveness

Explanation

The distance the Nudge button on the Run screen moves when you tap it.

The angle the wheels turn during one full rotation of the steering wheel. If the setting is too: l

Low

: The system will turn the wheel too much and the vehicle will perform S-turns.

l

High

: The system will turn the wheel too little and the vehicle will not hold the line.

Adjust if the vehicle drives consistently to the right of the line.

Adjust if the vehicle drives consistently to the left of the line.

The maximum rate at which the SAM-200 will operate.

How aggressively the EZ-Pilot system corrects the deviations from the current guidance line. A setting that is: l

Very high

: Will correct deviations quickly, but the vehicle may steer erratically.

l

Very low

: Will allow a smoother drive down the swath, but the vehicle may go further offline before the deviation is corrected.

How quickly the EZ-Pilot system steers the vehicle onto the

200

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

Setting Explanation

current guidance line. A setting that is: l

Very high

: Steers the vehicle quickly, but the steering correction may be too severe.

l

Very low

: Steers the vehicle very slowly, but the vehicle may overshoot and travel too far down the swath before reaching the guidance line.

Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system

At the EZ-Pilot Settings screen on the

Engage tab, you can edit the system’s engage and disengage behavior if you need to change the settings.

Setting

Operator Time Out

Minimum speed

Maximum speed

Maximum angle

Engage offline

Disengage offline

Coverage log

Explanation

If the steering system is engaged and there has been no operator interaction with the FM-1000 Plus application for longer than the operator timeout period, a message displays on the screen. If you acknowledge the message within 30 seconds, the system does not disengage. Otherwise, the EZ-

Pilot system steering disengages.

Minimum speed at which the system can engage. If the system is engaged and the speed drops below this limit, the system disengages.

Maximum speed at which the system can engage. If the system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit, the system disengages.

Maximum angle at which the system can engage. If the vehicle approaches the swath at an angle greater than this limit, it cannot be engaged.

Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can engage. If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance greater than this limit, it cannot be engaged.

Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can remain engaged. If the vehicle drives offline greater than this limit, the system disengages.

Displays on the Run screen to show what areas have been applied.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

201

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Setting

Override sensitivity

Explanation

l

Select

When Engaged to automatically show coverage logging when the system is engaged. See

Engage button

(page 359) .

l

Select

Manual to show coverage logging only when you tap

.

Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually before the system disengages.

EZ-Pilot system calibration

To calibrate the EZ-Pilot system to work with the FM-1000 Plus application, you must complete the following:

1. Enter the vehicle settings.

2. Complete calibration for T3™ roll compensation. See

T3 roll compensation calibration (page

204) .

3. Calibrate the EZ-Pilot system:

Angle per turn. See

SAM-200 calibration (page 202)

.

l

Aggressiveness and Freeplay offset. See

Steering performance calibration (page 203)

).

4. Confirm the calibration settings.

Note  – You may have to perform the EZ-Pilot calibration more than once to achieve optimal results.

SAM-200 calibration

Note  – You must calibrate the IMD-600 before you calibrate the SAM-200.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Calibration screen displays.

EZ-Pilot and then tap

Calibrate

. The EZ-Pilot Steering

202

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Pilot assisted steering system

2. Select

SAM-200 and tap

OK

.

3. Ensure that you are operating the vehicle in an open field with ample area for the vehicle to make right and left turns.

4. For best results, operate the vehicle at between 2 and 4 mph.

5. To calibrate the right turn angle: a. Drive straight forward until (yellow) displays.

b. Tap

. Allow the system to operate for 20 seconds until you receive a message that the calibration is complete.

WARNING –

Auto guidance systems cannot avoid items in the field such as obstacles. Make sure you are adequately trained to operate the auto guidance system.

6. Repeat the steps to calibrate the left turn angle.

Steering performance calibration

To calibrate the EZ-Pilot system and set the correct steering performance parameters, the following steps must be completed with the vehicle moving forward along an A-B line.

1. At the EZ-Pilot Steering Calibration screen, select

Steering Performance

. The EZ-Pilot Steering

Performance screen displays.

2. Tap the

Override Sensitivity tab.

3. Adjust the force required to manually override EZ-Pilot.

4. Tap the

Aggressiveness tab. The aggressiveness setting controls the amount of force that required to disengage the system and how aggressively the system holds the line. If the setting is: l

Too low, the vehicle will not hold the line

Too high, the vehicle may over-correct and make S-turns

5. Adjust the

Aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going into S-turns. To make turns: l

More aggressive: Increase the aggressiveness value.

Less aggressive: Decrease the aggressiveness value.

6. Tap the

Free Play tab.

7. Adjust the freeplay offset if the steering has greater freeplay in one direction than the other, causing it to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line. To make this adjustment: a. Engage the on an AB line.

b. If the vehicle is offline to the left, increase the freeplay offset to the right.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

203

EZ-Pilot assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup c. If the vehicle is offline to the right, increase the freeplay offset to the left.

d. Enter the parameters and then tap

OK

. The EZ-Pilot Steering Calibration screen displays.

Note  – If you are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle, you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to

Auto Low.

Note  – The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available. To access these options, select EZ-Pilot

Diagnostics from the main Configuration screen.

8. Tap

OK

. The Configuration screen displays.

T3 roll compensation calibration

The EZ-Pilot system contains sensors that use T3 terrain compensation technology to provide roll compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump. For roll compensation to work correctly, the IMD-600 must be calibrated.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Calibration screen displays.

EZ-Pilot and then tap

Calibrate

. The EZ-Pilot Steering

2. Select

IMD-600 Orientation and tap

OK

. The EZ-Pilot Roll Calibration screen displays.

Note  – For best accuracy, install the IMD-600 as shown in the installation instructions for the supported platform in which it is being installed. Make sure the IMD-600 is installed at right angles to the center line of the vehicle. Non-orthogonal angles will cause performance degradation.

3. From the

Orientation list, select the orientation of the IMD-600 module and then tap

Next

.

4. Park the vehicle, mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap

Next

.

The FM-1000 Plus application records the roll offset in the first direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds. Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.

5. Turn the vehicle around, ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in step 4 and then tap

Next

.

The FM-1000 Plus application records the roll offset in the second direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds. Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.

The T3 calibration results display in the

Roll Offset section of the screen. The roll offset value should be between 0° and 4°.

6. Tap

OK

. The EZ-Pilot Steering Calibration screen displays.

204

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Steer assisted steering system

EZ-Steer assisted steering system

The EZ-Steer assisted steering system uses GPS to provide automatic vehicle guidance.

For cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

For operational information, see

EZ-Steer system operation (page 419) .

To set up the EZ-Steer system:

1. Complete the

GPS receiver settings (page 116)

.

2. At the Configuration screen, select displays.

3. Complete the settings as appropriate.

EZ-Steer and tap

Setup

. The EZ-Steer Settings screen

Setting

Vehicle Type

Axle to Antenna

Offset

Antenna Height

Wheelbase

Explanation

Type of vehicle

The horizontal distance between the axle and the antenna. Measure the distance accurately (within 3 inches). An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.

Note  – Measure the offset distance as accurately as possible (within 3"). An incorrect offset may cause poor steering performance.

l

If the antenna is in front of the axle, enter a forward distance.

If the antenna is behind the axle, enter a back distance.

Measure the antenna height vertically, from the ground to the base of the antenna.

The horizontal distance between the center of the front wheel and the center of the back wheel.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

205

EZ-Steer assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

Note  – The Engage, Steering, and Advanced tabs on this screen are completed automatically with starting values, based on the vehicle type selected.

4. Tap

OK

. The Configuration screen displays.

Engage settings for EZ-Steer

To edit the EZ-Steer system engage settings:

1. At the EZ-Steer Settings screen, select the

Engage Options tab and complete the settings.

Setting

Minimum speed

Maximum speed

Maximum angle

Engage offline

Disengage offline

Engage on A-B

Override sensitivity

EZ-Steer external switch

Explanation

Minimum speed at which the system can engage. If the system is engaged and the speed drops below this limit, the system engages.

Maximum speed at which the system can engage. If the system is engaged and the speed increases above this limit, the system disengages.

Maximum angle at which the system can engage. If the vehicle approaches the swath at an angle greater than this limit, it cannot be engaged.

Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can engage. If the vehicle approaches the swath at a distance greater than this limit, it cannot be engaged.

Maximum distance from the swath at which the system can remain engaged. If the vehicle drives offline greater than this limit, the system disengages.

Set up whether the system can or cannot be engaged on the master A-B line.

Amount the steering wheel must be turned manually before the system disengages.

Set up the behavior of a seat or foot switch.

2. Tap

OK

. The Configuration screen displays.

Advanced settings for EZ-Pilot

At the EZ-Pilot Settings screen on the

Advanced tab, complete the settings as appropriate.

206

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Steer assisted steering system

Setting

Roll Offset Angle

Estimate Steering Angle Bias

Dynamic Approach Angle

(Heading)

Steering Slew Limit

Steering Acceleration Limit

Explanation

Fine-tunes the roll calibration value after it has been determined in the initial calibration process.

Note  – This value is in roll degrees, not distance (inches, cm, and so on) offline.

For long, straight passes, helps drive the lingering cross track error due to erroneous steering angle measurements to zero.

When enabled: l

Allows for a steeper approach path to the AB line when further away l

Reduces the path angle as the vehicle approaches the line

Note  – This setting does not increase the angle at which the system can be engaged from the line, but does increase the approach angle after engagement.

Controls the maximum sustained rate that the steering will respond.

l

Lower value: Steering is smoother and slower.

Note  – A value that is too low may cause vehicle instability.

l

Higher value: Steering is quicker and more responsive.

Controls the rate at which the EZ-Pilot system switches from no steering movement to the full steering slew rate.

l

Lower value: Steering is smoother.

Note  – A value that is too low may cause vehicle instability. Set the value to zero to disable the setting.

l

Higher value: Steering is more aggressive.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

207

EZ-Steer assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

EZ-Steer system calibration

Before you calibrate the vehicle: l

Ensure that the vehicle’s hydraulic oil is up to operating temperature. Refer to the vehicle documentation.

l

Ensure that the tire pressure is correct.

l

Perform initial calibration without an implement or with the booms folded in on a highclearance sprayer. After initial calibration is completed, you can fine tune the settings with the implement or booms folded out.

l

Choose a field with the smoothest possible surface and perform calibration at the normal operating speed for the vehicle.

l

Have a straight AB line available. If you do not create an A–B line before you begin the calibration, the system will prompt you to open a field and create one.

To calibrate the EZ-Steer system:

1. Complete the

T2 roll compensation calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 210) .

2. Calibrate the EZ-Steer system.

l

Angle per Turn calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 209)

Aggressiveness calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 208)

l

Freeplay Offset calibration for EZ-Steer system (page 209)

3. Confirm the calibration settings.

Note  – You may have to perform the EZ-Steer calibration more than once to achieve optimal results.

Aggressiveness calibration for EZ-Steer system

The aggressiveness setting fine-tunes how aggressively the system holds the line. If the setting is too low, the vehicle will not hold the line. If the setting is too high, the vehicle may over-correct and make S-turns.

To configure the aggressiveness settings, at the EZ-Steer Steering Performance screen select the

Step

2 tab.

Adjust the aggressiveness setting to get the vehicle as close to the line as possible without going into S-turns. To make: l

More aggressive turns, increase the aggressiveness l

Less aggressive turns, decrease the aggressiveness

208

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

8   Vehicle guidance setup EZ-Steer assisted steering system

Angle per Turn calibration for EZ-Steer system

Angle per Turn is a course adjustment of the angle that the wheels turn through during one full rotation of the steering wheel. If the setting is too low, the system may require several attempts to reach the line.

To calibrate the EZ-Steer system, and set the correct steering performance parameters, complete the following steps with the vehicle moving forward along the A-B line.

Note  – Use the Cross Track Error history plot on the top right of the page and the Average Offline distance to optimize EZ-Steer performance for each step in the calibration.

1. At the EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen, select

Steering Performance

. The EZ-Steer Steering

Performance screen displays.

2. Select the

Step 1 tab.

3. With the vehicle moving forward along the A–B line: a. Nudge the vehicle left or right 1 m (3') from the A–B line.

b. Engage the EZ-Steer system.

4. Adjust the

Angle per Turn value so that when the system is engaged, the vehicle moves close to the guidance line. To make: l

More aggressive turns, decrease the value for angle per turn

Less aggressive turns, increase the value for angle per turn

Freeplay Offset calibration for EZ-Steer system

Add a Freeplay Offset if the steering has greater freeplay in one direction than the other, causing it to drive consistently to one side of the guidance line.

Note  – If you are calibrating a 4WD articulated vehicle, you may need to set the Motor Speed setting to Auto

Low.

Note  – The Advanced Calibration tab is currently not available. To access these options, select the EZ-Steer

Diagnostics

from the main Configuration screen.

1. To adjust the Freeplay Offset settings, at the EZ-Steer Steering Performance screen select the

Step 3 tab.

2. Engage the system on the A–B line. If the vehicle is offline: l

To the left, increase the freeplay offset to the right

To the right, increase the freeplay offset to the left

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

209

EZ-Steer assisted steering system 8   Vehicle guidance setup

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

3. Enter the parameters and then tap

OK

. The EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen displays.

4. Tap

OK

. The Configuration screen displays.

T2 roll compensation calibration for EZ-Steer system

The EZ-Steer system contains sensors that use T2™ terrain compensation technology to provide roll compensation when the vehicle is on a slope or drives over a bump. For roll compensation to work correctly, the controller must be calibrated.

1. Select

EZ-Steer and then tap

Calibrate

. The EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen displays.

2. Select

Controller Orientation and tap

OK

. The next step in calibration displays.

3. From the

Orientation list, select the orientation of the steering control module and then tap

Next

.

The next step in calibration displays.

4. Park the vehicle, mark the inside position of both sets of wheels and then tap

Next

. The FM-

1000 Plus application records the roll offset in the first direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds. Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.

5. Turn the vehicle around, ensure the wheels are parked over the marks created in the previous step and then tap

Next

. The next step in calibration displays.

The FM-1000 Plus application records the roll offset in the second direction. This takes approximately 20 seconds. Do not move the vehicle while the offset is being read.

The T2 calibration results will be listed in the

Roll Offset section. The

Roll Offset value should be between 0° and 4°.

6. Tap

OK

. The EZ-Steer Steering Calibration screen displays.

210

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

9

Field-IQ system setup

In this chapter:

Field-IQ system functionality

Pressure limiting

General setup information

Implement setup for Field-IQ

Field-IQ system setup

Material setup

Control setup

Rate Control tab

Rate control module setup

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

219

222

230

232

239

212

214

215

215

218

When the Field-IQ system is installed, the

FM-1000 Plus application can control: l

Planters l

Sprayers l

Air seeders l

Liquid strip-till tool-bars l

Spinner spreaders

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

211

Field-IQ system functionality 9   Field-IQ system setup

Field-IQ system functionality

The Field-IQ system can perform automatic section control using: l

Tru Count Air Clutch® l

Boom valves l

LiquiBlock™ l

Various section control devices

While performing automatic section control it can control rates using a prescription with: l

Rawson™ drives l

Servo valves l

PWM valves l

Various flow control devices

The Field-IQ system can be configured to perform different functions.

Application

Planter

Sprayer

Strip-till (liquid)

Main functions

l

Seed Section Control of up to 48 individual rows (Field-IQ system section control module(s) needed) using Tru Count Air Clutches l

Seed Rate Control using up to 4 Rawson drives to change seed population l

Seed Rate control using up to 6 PWM drives to change seed population l

Liquid Fertilizer Control of up to 48 individual liquid nozzles (Field-IQ section control module(s) needed) using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves l

Variety tracking l

Liquid Rate Control, using either a PWM or Servo control valve l

Liquid Section Control of up to 48 individual spray nozzles (Field-IQ

Section Control Module(s) needed) using existing boom shutoff valves or

Tru Count LiquiBlock valves l

Pressure limiting (page 214)

l

Liquid Section Control of up to 48 sections or individual sections (Field-IQ

Section Control Module(s) needed) using Tru Count LiquiBlock valves l

Liquid Rate Control using up to 2 Rawson drives connected to fixed

displacement pumps, such as CDS-John Blue piston pumps, to change liquid rate (Field-IQ Rawson Control Module(s) needed)

212

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Field-IQ system functionality

Application

Spreading

Air seeder

Main functions

l

Liquid Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve and flow meter l

Spreading Rate Control using a Rawson Drive (Field-IQ Rawson Control

Module(s) needed) l

Spreading Rate Control using either a PWM or Servo control valve and application rate sensor l

Section Control of up to 96 rows of blockage sensors l

Section Control of multiple materials simultaneously with manual rate or prescription l

Control existing PWM, linear actuators, or servo systems l

Auxiliary sensors can read fan speed, bin level, air pressure, and implement switches

For installation and cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

213

Pressure limiting 9   Field-IQ system setup

Pressure limiting

To control rate the application rate on a sprayer, two factors must be adjusted in relation to forward speed to keep the application constant: l

Control flow in relation to speed

l

Pressure limiting

Pressure limiting supports these valve/drive types: l

PWM l

Bypass Servo l

Pump Servo

Flow control

Application rate control on a sprayer is maintained by controlling the flow of material directed to the boom. The volume of material sent to the boom is determined by the: l

Number of sections that are open l

Forward speed l

Target rate

The pressure will vary within the sprayer depending on such factors.

When speed drastically changes, such as when the vehicle slows before a turn or to avoid an obstacle, pressure can drop or rise above the recommended pressure for the tip and create an incorrect spray pattern.

Pressure limiting

While the pressure will vary within the boom depending on its operation, good canopy penetration depends on maintaining a consistent spray pattern. Nozzle pressure must be within a working range for a consistent pattern.

Pressure limiting is used to limit the pressure during operation between a minimum and maximum pressure. The system operates with flow control (the flow meter) until it reaches either the maximum or minimum pressure limit. After reaching the limit, the system holds at the specific limit.

The pressure will adjust to the high or low limit until commanded to return to normal flow control.

By limiting the pressure, the psi or kpa stays within an acceptable range when the sprayer speed decreases or increases. Pressure limiting ensures a sufficient but not excessive flow through the nozzle to maintain a good spray pattern.

Pressure limiting works only when sections are on. When sections are off, the system will use standby pressure if you are using a bypass or PWM valve.

214

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup General setup information

Low pressure example

During normal operation, all sections are closed but one and the system is running a low rate. To keep the nozzles from pulsing or fluctuating, the system will switch to the low pressure limit.

High pressure examples

In the field during a high flow if you shut the sections off, there will be a spike in pressure. Pressure limiting protects the system from these spikes.

If the vehicle speed is too fast or the rate is too high for the tip size, pressure limiting prevents over pressurization of the system.

Setup

The pressure limiting settings begin at the

Rate Control tab (page 230)

.

General setup information

Before starting the Field-IQ system setup, ensure that: l

All components of the system are installed on the vehicle and implement.

l

Field-IQ has been activated for use. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60)

.

l

The implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation, such as planting or spraying. See

Implement setup for Field-IQ (page 215)

.

For cabling information, see the XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

For operational information, see

Field-IQ operation (page 389) .

Implement setup for Field-IQ

The implement type defines the set up options for the Field-IQ system.

For example, if the material is set to granular fertilizer and the implement is set to sprayer, the system will not allow you to enter a gate height setting.

When running a fertilizer cart, set the implement type to air seeder. This will allow the user to not have to enter gate dimensions.

1. Navigate to the Implement Setup screen.

2. On the

Implement Type tab: a. From the

Operations list, choose the operation.

b. Tap

Edit

. The Select Implement Layout screen displays.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

215

Implement setup for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup c. Tap the appropriate layout and then tap

OK

.

Operations

Spreading

Spraying

Planting

Seeder

Tillage

Other

Layouts

Pull-type spreader

Self-propelled spreader

Self-propelled, front boom

Self-propelled, rear boom

Pull-type sprayer

Standard

Front split

Rear split

Center offset

None

None

None

3. On the

Measurements tab, enter the measurements for the implement.

These measurements are crucial to the performance of the vehicle and implement in the field.

Measurement

Swath Width

Application Width

Application Offset

Explanation

The distance between guidance lines. This is typically the working width of your implement, vehicle, or header.

The width of a pass including any overlap. This measurement is reflected by the FM-1000 Plus application's coverage map.

The distance between the tractor and the implement:

Guidance Only

: This is measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the location where the coverage will be mapped. Used to reference from the vehicle to the implement / application point.

l

Field-IQ

: Measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the implement tool bar.

The offset is measured from the fixed axle of the vehicle to the point on the implement where coverage logging will be mapped.

The fixed axle varies depending on vehicle type:

Rear axle on front-steering tractors and self-propelled sprayers l

Front axle on 4 x 4 articulated tractors

216

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Implement setup for Field-IQ

Measurement

Rows

Left/Right Offset

Explanation

l

Center of tracks on tracked tractor

Note  – If you set Application Offset to zero, you will not be able to select

Drawbar for the Type in the Geometry tab.

Number of rows that are covered by the implement.

This measurement adjusts the tractor path so that an offset implement is centered on the guidance line. It is measured from the center of the vehicle ot the center of the implement or header.

4. On the

Geometry tab: a. Select the type, which controls how the implement is modeled: Either Hitch / 3 pt or

Drawbar.

Note  – If

Application Offset

is set to zero in the

Implement Type

tab, you cannot select

Drawbar

.

b. Enter the appropriate measurement. Some measurements are only available if Implement

Monitoring, TrueGuide, or TrueTractor is active.

Measurement

Hitch to Ground

Contact Point

Antenna Front/Back

Offset

Measured from the implement working point to the center of the

GPS antenna. This is used only when an GPS antenna is mounted on the implement.

When using the TrueGuide system, minimize the antenna offset position. If an antenna offset is required, set the left/right offset first, then limit the offset to the forward distance of 2 m / 80” or less.

Back offsets with the TrueGuide system are not accepted.

Antenna Left/Right

Offset

Explanation

Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point that the implement rotates about.

For planters this is typically the seeding units or the midpoint of several rows of tools.

Antenna Height

Measured from the center of the implement to the center of the

GPS antenna. This is used only when the GPS antenna is mounted on the implement.

When using the TrueGuide system, minimize the antenna offset positions, They should not exceed 1 m or 40”.

The working height of the GPS antenna on the implement. This is used only when the GPS antenna is mounted on the implement.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

217

Field-IQ system setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

5. On the

Overlap tab, choose the correct option for the infill boundary:

Outer

: Uses the field boundary as the infill boundary l

Inner

: When running a Headland setting, this moves the boundary to the inside of the last headland pass. This allows you to run the inside patterns first before running the headland and then use the inner boundary for section / rate shutoff.

6. On the

Switches tab, enable any implement switches that are connected to the Field-IQ system.

Tap

Setup

. The Add/Edit Implement Lift Sensor screen displays.

Setting

Status

Explanation

Off

: No Switches are attached to the Field-IQ system.

On

: One or more implement switches are attached to the Field-IQ system.

Number of Switches Select the number of implement switches that are attached to the

Field-IQ system. The maximim is 3.

Minimum Changed

Switches

Enter the number of implement switches the system should recognize to determine if the implement is lifted.

For example, if the total number of switches is 2, and the Minimum

Changed Switches is 2, both switches must show raised before determining the implement is in the raised position.

Field-IQ system setup

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Field-IQ and then tap

Setup

.

2. Tap the appropriate button to continue setup.

Button

Material Setup

Control Setup

Material Assignment

Tap to...

Set up a predefined list of materials to use in the Control Setup or

Material Assignment screens.

See

Material setup (page 219) .

Set up control locations and assign Field-IQ system modules.

See

Control setup (page 222)

.

Assign materials that were set up in the Material Setup screen to the

Locations that were set up in the Control Setup screen.

218

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Material setup

Material setup

When you select a material from the

Available Materials list, some of its specific settings appear on the right-hand side of the screen. This allows you to check some of the settings needing to view the material.

Add or edit a material

Enter information about the material.

1. At the Material Setup screen, tap

Add

. The Material Details screen displays.

2. At the

Material tab, enter the appropriate settings and tap

Next

. See

Material tab (page 222) .

3. At the

Alarms tab, enter the alarm information and tap

Next

. See

Alarms tab (page 219)

.

4. At the

Operation tab, complete the settings and tap

Next

. See

Operation tab (page 220) .

5. At the

Coefficient tab, enter the calibration value with the material. The material may have different calibrations for different locations. This means that you will need to make a different material for each location and name them in such a way (for example, Wheat Front Bin, Wheat

Rear Bin) that you will know which location to use them in. When you have entered the coefficient, tap

OK

.

See

Coefficent tab (page 221) .

Delete a material

1. At the Material Setup screen, tap

Delete

.

2. To remove the material, tap

Remove

. A message displays prompting you to tap either: l

Remove

to remove the material.

Cancel

to return to the Material Setup screen.

Alarms tab

Setting

High Alarm

Low Alarm

Singulation Low

Seeds When Off

Alarm triggers when...

The rate reaches the selected percentage above the target for longer than the delay setting

The rate drops the below the target for longer than the delay setting for the selected percentage

The singulation reaches a percentage lower than 100% for longer than the delay setting

This percentage of seeds is detected while the sections are off

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

219

Material setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Setting

No Seeds When On

Blockage Sensitivity/Alarm

Multiples Threshold

Skips Threshold

Averaging Sample Size

Misplaced Seeds Threshold

Alarm triggers when...

for longer than the delay setting

This percentage of seeds is not detected for longer than the delay setting

When less than this amount of material is sensed for the number of seconds given. When no pulses are sensed for this amount of time the alarm triggers.

When two seeds fall within this percentage of seed spacing

(this is considered a double). Lowering this number requires seeds to be closer together to be reported as a double.

If two seeds fall outside of this percentage of seed spacing (this is considered a ). Raising this number requires seeds to be further apart to be a skip.

The number of seeds used to calculate the average. Increasing this amount makes the response slower but more stable.

If a seed falls outside this percentage of seed spacing then it is considered misplaced and reduces the spacing quality.

Operation tab

Setting

Jump Start Speed

Jump Start Timeout

Shutoff Speed

Minimum Override Speed

Note  – Not available if pressure limiting is enabled.

Explanation

The speed to be used when the master switch on the Field-IQ system master switch box is put in the jump start position.

This manual override option can be used to operate the system when the vehicle is stationary. Jump start is also used when GPS has become unavailable.

Time that Jumpstart speed will be active. A timeout setting for the Jump Start Speed, which allows you to run the jump start for a specified amount of time.

Auto control resumes if Jump Start Speed is exceeded by

Ground Speed.

This setting will shut the control system down when the vehicle reaches a minimum speed.

Setting used to hold the operating speed at a preset minimum to prevent the control system from operating out of a controllable range. Maintains the application rate when the implement's actual speed drops below the value entered. It is

220

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Material setup

Setting

Apply Latency to Boundary

Note  – Only applies to fields that have a boundary.

Rate Snapping

Explanation

used to ensure consistent material flow during slow speeds.

This setting is also applied when you exit an exclusion zone and return to the workable area of the field.

l

Yes

: The system starts when needed to begin applying immediately when crossing a boundary.

l

No

: The system starts when the boundary is reached and any mechanical delay could leave a gap between the boundary and where the product is applied. When GPS accuracy is low, this is the preferred selection.

Due to pump constraints, liquid flow generally is inconsistent with the information on the FM-1000 Plus application.

Enabling this setting gives you a more steady reading of the applied rate. If you are with in the allowable error, you will see the applied rate just show your target rate.

Coefficent tab

The material may have different calibrations for different locations. This means that you will need to make a different material for each location and name them in such a way (for example, Wheat Front

Bin, Wheat Rear Bin) that you will know which location to use them in.

1. Enter the coefficient.

2. Tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

221

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Control setup

The first time you tap

Control Setup

, the Control Setup screen is blank and you can only add a location.

After you have added a location, you can select it from the Location list on the right-hand side of the screen to see the assigned modules.

Button

Add

Edit

Delete

Tap to...

Add and set up a new control location. This opens the Control Details screen, which contains the following tabs: l

Material tab (page 222)

l

Layout (page 224)

l

Section Control tab (page 225)

l

Rate Control tab (page 230)

l

Row monitoring (page 237)

l

Sensor tab (page 237)

View or edit the details of an existing control location.

Delete an existing location.

A message displays prompting you to tap either: l

Remove

to remove the material l

Cancel

to return to the Control Setup screen

Material tab

1. On the

Material tab at the

Available Materials list, select the material that will be set up in this location.

222

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

Setting

Material Type

Material Name

Material Units

Seeds Per Pound

Target Rate 1

Target Rate 2

Rate Increment

Manual Rate

Increment

Minimum Rate

Explanation

Select the type of material being applied:

Row Crop Seed l

Liquid l

Granular Seed l

Granular Fertilizer l

Anhydrous

Name of the material

Units to use with the selected material

Number of seeds per pound

Preset volume that the implement supplies when the rate switch is in position 1.

Note  – For liquid, granular fertilizer, NH3, and Granular seed, enter the desired amount of material that you would like to apply. For Row Crop seed, the target rate for row crop seed is entered as Ks/a. 1 Ks/a equals 1000 seeds per acre. When entering a target rate of 25500 into the FM-1000 Plus application, type it as 25.5.

Present volume that the implement supplies when the rate switch is in position 2.

Note  – For liquid, granular fertilizer, NH3, and Granular seed, enter the desired amount of material that you would like to apply. For Row Crop seed, the target rate for row crop seed is entered as Ks/a. 1 Ks/a equals 1000 seeds per acre. When entering a target rate of 25500 into the FM-1000 Plus application, type it as 25.5.

This setting adjusts the increment that the target rate will adjust by when in rate 1 or 2.

Controls the aggressiveness of the rate adjustment switch when in manual rate.

If the valve is over active when in manual rate you need to lower the manual rate increment.

l

If the valve is slow to respond when in manual rate you need to increase the manual rate increment.

Sets the minimum rate increment.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

223

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Setting

Maximum Rate

Explanation

Sets the maximum rate increment.

Note  – If you don’t want the system to be capable of applying more than

100 units, set the maximum rate to 100 units.

2. If no materials are listed, create a material that you can assign. See

Material setup (page 219)

.

Note  – You can also assign the correct material later using the Material Assignment option, see

Material assignment (page 396)

.

3. Tap

Next

to go to the

Layout (page 224)

.

Layout

At the

Layout tab, enter information about the implement that will be used to apply the material.

Setting

Location Name

Bin/Tank Setup

Explanation

Add a name to the

Control Location

, for example, Hoppers, Front Bin, Rear

Bin, Left Saddle Tanks.

The system tracks how much material is left in the bin/tank, and provides a warning when the bin/tank needs to be refilled. Adjust the settings for: l

Status

: l

On

: The system tracks the bin/tank level and provide warnings.

l

Off

: The system will not track the bin/tank level or provide warnings.

Density

: (Granular and granulated material only.) Used in system setup and calibration to ensure accuracy in applying product. When changing material this setting must be updated.

l l

Capacity Units

: Select Default Units or Bushels. Default units will vary according to the type of material that is being applied.

Bin Capacity

: The amount the tank/bin holds when full.

Note  – Markings on tank/bin may not be accurate.

l

Current Volume

: Current volume of the product in the tank.

l

Partial Refill

: The amount of material that will be added to the bin/tank during a partial refill.

l

Warning Level

: Setting that triggers a low bin warning. The level at which a warning displays on the screen when your bin/tank reaches a set threshold.

224

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

Setting Explanation

l

Spinner Pulses Per Revolution

: Enter the number of magnetic pick up points per revolution of the spinner.

l

Refill Tank/Bin

: Refills the tank/bin to capacity.

l

Partial Refill Tank/Bin

: Refills the tank/bin to the

Partial Refill amount.

Row Offset Setup

Provides additional tuning by detailing where the material will be applied in relation to the vehicle. Increase coverage accuracy by selecting one or two offsets.

Row offsets are measured from the

Application Offset value entered in the

Measurements tab of the Implement Configuration wizard.

l

Number of row offsets

: Use 1 row offset when coverage is applied at a single location. Use two row offsets when planting singulated seed with staggered implements.

l

Row Offset (1 row offset)

: Enter the distance between the Application

Offset and the row.

l

Rear Row Offset (2 row offset)

: Enter the distance between the Application

Offset and the rear row.

l

Front Row Offset (2 row offset)

: Enter the distance between the

Application Offset and the front row.

Material Controlled By You are controlling the material with: l

Switch Boxes l

On Screen

Section Control tab

With section control, you can avoid double coverage and eliminating wasted inputs using automatic or manual section control. Section control: l

Automatically control up to 48 rows individually l

Enables you to see where you have been and what you have done with overlap detection l

Eliminates overlap by adding Tru Count Air Clutches® and Tru Count LiquiBlock™ valves

At the Section Control tab, you can set up section control as: l

Rate as Section : To use rate control drives as section shutoffs

l

Material linking: To link primary and secondary materials l

Automatic Section Control: Automatic section control with various section control devices

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

225

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Rate as Section

The Field-IQ system can use the rate control drives as section shutoffs. For example, when going into a nonproductive or covered area the rate control drives will be commanded to zero rate.

1. To set up rate as sections, at the

Section Control tab, complete these settings.

Setting

Section Control

Section Control

Explanation

Select Rate as Section.

Tap

Setup

to adjust latency and overlap values.

2. Select the

Rate Control tab and then set up rate control.

Material linking

The Field-IQ system can link primary and secondary materials, where the secondary material uses the output of the primary material. For example, LiquiBlock valves can be linked to use the output of Tru Count Air Clutch systems.

When planting, seeding, or strip-tilling, you can link the following together: l

Liquid l

Granular seed l

Granular fertilizer

Note  – Anhydrous cannot be linked.

When the system is in diagnostics mode: l

The secondary material is not functional.

l

You can only operate a linked material when you also open the sections of the primary material.

1. To link materials, at the

Section Control tab, complete these settings.

Setting

Section Control

Linked Material

Explanation

Select

Link to Material

.

Select the primary material you want to link to.

2. Select the Rate Control tab and then set up rate control.

For more information, see the sections for each type below.

226

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

Automatic Section Control

The Field-IQ system can perform automatic section control using: l

Air clutch (such as Tru Count Air Clutch) or electric clutch: Used for TC and John Deere row command clutches that require inverted switching. (Signal to shut row off) l

Boom valves: Used for 3 wire boom valves and 2 wire solenoid valves that require a 12v signal to open.

l

LiquiBlock valves (such as Tru Count LiquiBlock valves): Used for Liquiblock valves that require inverted switching.

l

Various section control devices

1. At the Field-IQ Setup screen on the

Section Control tab, for: a.

Section Control

: Select

On

.

b.

Section Control Module Location

: Tap

Setup

. The Section Control Module Setup screen displays.

2. Complete the settings for: l

Number of Modules

: The total number of modules that will be used on the current control location.

Module

: Assign the serial numbers of the modules to their location on the current control location.

Note  – Sections start from left to right in their numbering. This means that Section 1 is on the far left and numbers increase to the right.

l

Number of Sections

: The number of sections physically wired into the selected module serial number.

3. If you have a row crop, tap Section Grouping. Otherwise tap Section Widths.

4. Set up the section widths.

Note  – Both of these setups allow you to set the section widths. Section Grouping does it by grouping rows together in a section and Sections Widths allows you to enter an actual measurement.

a. For section grouping, at the Section Grouping screen: Complete each row from the left and to right in sequence until all the rows are grouped correctly and then tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

227

Control setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

For section widths, at the Section Widths screen: Enter the section width for each section from left to right in sequence.

b.

When you are finished, tap OK.

5. At the Section Control Module Setup screen, tap

Advanced Wire Assignment

.

Note  – This button is only available for specific cases, so may not be visible.

Assign the rows to the correct module and wire location. To assign a wire ID to a row, tap the module icon, select the number of the wire you want to assign from the drop-down list. and then tap on the row to assign that module and wire. It is recommended that you work from left to right:

228

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Control setup

Latency

Setting

On Latency

Off Latency

Explanation

By default, this is set to 0.0 seconds. Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve (this can happen on larger systems). In this case, increase the On Latency value to compensate the delay, and the system will turn on in advance.

By default, this is set to 0.0 seconds. Use this setting unless you are experiencing a long response time from your clutch or valve (this can happen on larger systems). In this case, increase the Off Latency value to compensate for the delay, and the system will turn off after the set number of seconds.

Overlap

Setting

Start Overlap

End Overlap

Coverage Switching

Overlap

Boundary Switching

Overlap

Explanation

Distance of intentional swath overlap when entering a previously applied area. The higher the number, the greater the overlapped area.

Distance of intentional swath overlap when exiting a previously applied area. The higher the number, the greater the overlapped area.

Percentage of the section width for intentional swath overlap. The higher the number, the greater the overlapped area before the section is turned off.

Percentage of the section width for intentional overlap of a boundary.

The higher the number, the greater the overlapped area into the boundary area.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

229

Rate Control tab

Rate Control tab

9   Field-IQ system setup

At the

Rate Control tab, complete the settings based on your configuration.

230

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Rate Control tab

Setting

Rate Control

Rate Control Module Location

Drive Setup

Number of Nozzles

No/Low Flow Timeout

Explanation

Select

ON to have the Field-IQ system operate a rate control component. The system sets the target rate.

Select

OFF for no rate control. Section switching only.

Tap

Setup

to configure the rate control module(s), their location on the implement, and the width they will control. See

Rate control module setup (page 232)

Tap to set up the drive. The

Drive Setup screen (page 233)

displays. Complete the settings on each tab.

The number of nozzles on the implement.

This is the time for which the system will attempt to control the rate. Should no response be seen, the control system will shut the channel off.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

231

Rate control module setup

Rate control module setup

9   Field-IQ system setup

Click

Setup

next to

Rate Control Module Location

. The Section Control Module Setup screen displays.

Setting

Number of Modules

Module

Number of Sections

Section Widths

Explanation

The number of modules

Select the module to configure

The number of sections for the module.

Tap to open the

Section Widths screen .

Section Widths screen

At the Section Widths screen enter the width of each section.

232

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Rate control module setup

Drive Setup screen

Valve Setup tab

Setting

Valve Type

Plumbing

Valve Behavior When

Sections Closed

Option

Available with Valve

Types:

N/A

Explanation

Servo

Fast Servo

Pump Servo

Hardi % Bypass

All

All

PWM

Servo

: 2-wire standard servo valve that turns a ball or butterfly valve to adjust product flow

Fast Servo

: 4-wire servo valve motor that turns a ball or butterfly valve to adjust product flow

PWM

: 2-wire PWM valve. An electric solenoid valve that adjust hydraulic flow to a motor. The valve adjusts application rate indirectly.

Pump Servo

: An electric solenoid valve that adjust hydraulic flow to a motor. The valve adjusts application rate indirectly.

Linear Actuator

: A valve that creates a linear motion (as opposed to a rotary motion)

Electric over Hydraulic

: A valve that uses electric current to control the hydraulic valve output

Hardi % Bypass

: Specific system type for Hardi control systems which has a boom line leak back to tank.

Inline

: Valve is in the solution line going to the boom. The valve opens to increase the application rate.

Bypass

: Valve is in the return-to-tank line. The valve closes to increase the application rate.

If you chose this option,

Lock In Standby Pressure

is available to enable.

Close

: When all sections are off, the control valve returns to the closed position.

Lock in Last Position

: When all sections are off, the control valve remains in the last position. This setting allows the system to return to the target rate faster. The valve will remain locked in the position it was in when the boom sections were closed.

Lock in Minimum

: The valve will lock into a minimum position that is configured in setup. With this option, enter the

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

233

Rate control module setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Setting Option

Available with Valve

Types:

Explanation

Servo

Fast Servo

Pump Servo

PWM

Hardi % Bypass

Minimum Preset Position

.

Lock in Standby Pressure

: Used for maintaining a minimum operational pressure which enables a quicker response when activating sections. When sections are closed, this option can be used.

If you choose this option, enter the

Standby Pressure later.

Pressure limiting (page

214)

Auxiliary Valve

Pump Disarming

Switch

Minimum Preset

Position

Standby Pressure

All

All

All

PWM

Servo

Fast Servo

Pump Servo

PWM

Hardi % Bypass

Enable

: Pressure limiting is enabled. With this option, the

Pressure Feedback Setup

tab is available.

Disable

: Pressure limiting is not enabled. Use when no auxiliary valve is installed.

See

Pressure limiting (page 214) .

Note  –

Pressure limiting (page 214)

only works when the sections are on.

Master

: Valve closes when the system is turned off.

Dump

: Valve opens to dump flow-to-return line when the system is turned off.

Disable

: Auxiliary valve not used or disabled.

Enable

: Select if you have a pump disarming switch installed.

Disable

: Select you do not have a pump disarming switch installed.

Only available if you have chosen PWM for the valve type and

Lock in Last Position

for

Valve Behavior on Sections Closed

.

Enter the psi. When you exit a boundary, nonproductive exclusion zone or previously covered area, the system will hold the desired pressure. When you enter a productive area again that you want to spray, there will be adequate pressure to keep a good nozzle spray pattern.

Required if you selected

Lock in Standby

for

Valve Behavior on

Sections Closed

.

234

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Rate control module setup

Servo, Fast Servo, Pump Servo or Hardi % Bypass valve setting options

If you choose

Bypass for

Plumbing

,

Lock In Standby Pressure is an available option for

Valve Behavior when sections closed when sections closed. If you choose

Lock In Standby Pressure for

Valve Behavior when sections closed

, enter the

Standby Pressure

.

PWM valve setting options

If you choose: l

Lock in Minimum for

Valve Behavior when sections closed

, enter the

Minimum Preset Position later l

Lock In Standby Pressure for

Valve Behavior when sections closed

, enter the

Standby Pressure later

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

235

Rate control module setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Feedback Setup tab

Setting

Shaft Encoder

Constant

Gear Ratio

Gear Ratio

Seeds Per Disk

Explanation

Pulses per revolution.

Actual ratio of the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM.

This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter.

The

Gear ratio allows the system to properly figure the meter RPM.

l

Calculate the gear ratio from the encoder to the metering point of the material.

l

Rawson gear ratio should be calculated from the motor to the metering point of the material

If the gear ratio is calculated incorrectly, the system may over or under apply even though it is showing the correct rate on the screen. You may also have issues in the Drive Calibration screen.

Use the calculator (tap

Gear Ratio Calculator

) to determine your gear ratio.

The number of seed openings per disk plate.

Liquid Feedback Setup tab

Setting

Flow Meter Type

Explanation

Select the type of flow meter you are using.

Flowmeter Calibration Enter the number for the flow meter calibration.

Minimum Flow

If you have enabled pressure limiting on the

Valve setup tab, pressure limiting takes precedence over this setting.This may result in the system operating below minimum flow.

Pressure Feedback Setup tab

Setting

Pressure Sensor Input

Location

Sensor Name

Explanation

Select either

Pressure 1 or

Pressure 2

.

Optional name for the pressure sensor.

236

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Rate control module setup

Setting

Sensor Slope

Low Pressure Limit

High Pressure Limit

Maximum Pressure

Explanation

This option is only available if you enabled

Pressure Limiting

at the

Valve Setup tab.

This option is only available if you enabled

Pressure Limiting

at the

Valve Setup tab.

Row monitoring

Setting

Row Monitoring

Setup

Explanation

l

Disabled

: Row monitoring is turned off.

l

Blockage

: Select when using an air seeder or when applying granular material.

l

Seed Count

: Select for precision seeding.

l

Row Sensor Enable

: Turn individual row sensors on or off.

l

Row Sensor Wiring

: Select which wire each row sensor is wired to.

Sensor tab

At the

Sensor tab, you can add alarm functionality to a sensor. You can also access the Sensor Setup screen, where you can add, edit, or delete sensors.

Setting

Sensor Type

Name

Alarm

Warn if below

Warn if above

Warn after

Explanation

The required sensor for which you want to create an alarm.

Displays after you have selected the sensor type. You can enter a name for the sensor.

Enabled: Alarm is enabled

Disabled: There is no alarm

If less than this threshold and longer than the delay time, the alarm will display.

If more than this threshold and longer than the delay time, the alarm will display.

Delay time for the threshold values:

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

237

Rate control module setup 9   Field-IQ system setup

Setting

Sensor Setup

Explanation

l

Warn if below l

Warn if above

Tap to access the

Sensor Setup

screen.

Sensor Setup screen

At the Sensor Setup screen, you can add, edit or remove a sensor.

When adding or editing a sensor, enter the following information.

Setting

Sensor Type

Name

Sensor Setup

Alarm

Explanation

l

Air pressure/vacuum l

Liquid pressure l

NH3 pressure l

Bin level l

RPM l

Gate Height

Enter a name for the sensor

Field-IQ module

: The Field-IQ system module that is controlling this sensor.

Input location

: Which wire is controlling the sensor. (Not required for gate height.)

Alarm settings

238

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Calibrate the equipment for your setup: l

Anhydrous calibration (page 240)

l

Air Seeder calibration (page 239)

l

Planter calibration (page 242)

l

Sprayer calibration (page 246)

l

Spreader calibration (page 251)

Air Seeder calibration

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

To calibrate an air seeder calibrate the implement lift switch, then the modules.

For a spreader or seeder: Minimum and maximum motor RPM are used to keep the motor within the manufactures recommended operating range. Rawson specs are 150 and 500 RPM.

Implement lift switch calibration

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select

Implement Lift

.

2. Raise the implement and then tap

Next

.

3. Lower the implement and then tap

Next

.

4. Tap

OK

to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

Modules calibration

Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require.

Note  – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.

The Field-system Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one

Field-IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Field-IQ and then tap

Calibrate

.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the operation listed under the module that you want to calibrate. The message

Not calibrated displays at the end of the modules that need calibration.

Note  – Calibration screens will vary slightly if you are using a linear actuator.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

239

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

Note  – Before priming the system, the Automatic / Manual Switch on the master switch box must be in the manual position.

3. Tap Drive Calibration and then tap

OK

. The Drive Calibration screen displays. Enter the appropriate settings.

Tab

Drive Limits

Auto-Tuning

Drive Settings

Info

Explanation

Enter the minimum and maximum flow values.

Moving parts during this operation. Ensure that the implement is safe to operate.

Follow the on-screen instructions to auto-tune the system.

Do not perform the auto-tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file. Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle.

Turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Adjust values if needed.

Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration.

4. Select

Flow Calibration and then tap

OK

. The Flow Calibration screen displays.

Anhydrous calibration

WARNING –

NH3 is an irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, respiratory tract and mucous membranes, and is dangerous if not handled properly. It may cause severe burns to the eyes, lungs, and skin. Skin, and respiratoryrelated diseases could be aggravated by exposure. It is recommended that protective gloves, boots, slicker and/or pants and jacket, and chemical-splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times.

WARNING –

Anhydrous valve and flow calibrations require the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground (the implement lift switch must be down). Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.

To calibrate anhydrous, first calibrate the implement lift switch. Then calibrate the modules to ensure your system performs at the level you require.

Implement lift switch calibration

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select

Implement Lift

.

2. Raise the implement and then tap

Next

.

3. Lower the implement and then tap

Next

.

4. Tap

OK

to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

240

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Module drive calibration

The anhydrous valve calibration requires the vehicle and implement to be moving and the implement must be in the ground (the implement lift switch must be down). Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.

The Field-IQ system

Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field-IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Field-IQ and tap

Calibrate

.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the operation under the Module that you would like to calibrate. The message "Not calibrated" displays at the end of the modules that need calibration.

Note  – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.

3. Select

Drive Calibration and tap

OK

. The Drive Calibration screen displays.

4. At the

Drive Limits tab, enter the minimum and maximum flow valves and tap Next.

5. At the

Drive Settings tab, turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Adjust the values if needed. Enter the values for: l

Allowable Error

Integral Gain l

Minimum Response

6. Tap

Next

and enter the following values for: l

Allowable Error

Gain l

Minimum Response

Note  – For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer, refer to the support note Field-IQ crop Input Control System: For Sprayers and Spreaders.

Module flow calibration

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select

Flow Calibration and tap

OK

.

2. At the Rate and Section Control Flow Calibration screen, enter values for: l

Flow Meter type

Flow Meter Calibration l

Minimum Flow

3. Tap

Run Calibration

and follow the on-screen instructions.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

241

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

Planter calibration

The calibration process for a planter includes: l

Implement lift switch calibration (page 242)

l

Rawson modules calibration (page 242)

l

Hydraulic test (page 243)

l

PWM valves calibration (page 244)

Implement lift switch calibration

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Make sure that the implement is safe to operate.

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select

Implement Lift

.

2. Raise the implement and then tap

Next

.

3. Lower the implement and then tap

Next

.

4. Tap

OK

to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

Rawson modules calibration

Note  – If you have an implement lift switch,

calibrate it first .

Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require.

Note  – You must have at least one Field-IQ system Rawson control module or Rate control module set up to control the rate before the Field-IQ

Calibrate

button will display on the Configuration screen.

1. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays.

Field-IQ and tap

Calibrate

. The Field-IQ Calibration

2. Select the first module that you want to calibrate. The Planter Calibration screen displays.

Note  – If a Rawson module was configured, the correct calibration is selected automatically.

3. Complete the settings.

Setting

Seeds Per Disk

Gear Ratio

Explanation

The number of seed openings per disk plate

Tap

Calculate

to determine the gear ratio.

Allows the system to properly figure the meter RPM. The number of revolutions that the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter.

242

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup

Version 3.0, Revision A

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Setting Explanation

Calculate the gear ratio from the encoder to the metering point of the material.

Calculate the Rawson gear ratio from the motor to the metering point of the material.

Note  – If the gear ratio is figured incorrectly, the system may over or under apply, even if it is showing the correct rate on the screen. You may also have issues in the drive calibration screen.

Calibration Constant A calculated value the system determines during calibration. To begin, leave the value at 1.000. After the calibration test, the system may adjust this value.

4. Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds dispensed during the calibration.

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

5. Tap

Test

.

6. The system asks if you would like to prime the system. Tap

Yes

. To to ensure that the seed disk is full, the system turns the seed disks one revolution.

7. Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on-screen, turn off the master switch.

8. For

Number of Seed Meter Revolutions

, enter a value and tap

Start

. The higher the number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration. Five to 10 revolutions is recommended.

9. Follow the on-screen prompts of operating the master switch. After the system turns the specified number of revolutions, enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap

Continue

.

10. The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified. Tap

OK

and then either press

Test

to repeat the calibration or tap

OK

to continue.

11. Select the

Limits tab to view a listing of the limits that are set.

12. Tap

OK

.

13. Repeat the previous steps for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration.

Hydraulic test

The purpose of this test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow to run the system. The Rawson hydraulic test is used to make sure the drive will turn. After entering a desired RPM the master switch is turned on and the drive should begin to turn.

If the drive does not turn, check all electrical connections. If the motor is plugged in properly, it will make a hissing or whining noise.

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

243

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

1. Check that there is hydraulic flow to the Rawson.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, tap

Hydraulic Test

.

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

3. Tap

Next

.

4. Enter the initial motor RPM. The default setting is 300. It is recommended that you test the motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds.

5. Tap

Start

. The next screen provides the status of each motor: l

No Error

: The test was successful.

Motor Stalled

: The motors did not have sufficient oil flow. Ensure the correct orifice size is installed for each motor. For more information, refer to the Rawson System Installation

Instructions.

l

Disconnected:

The Rawson Control Module cannot communicate with the motor.

6. Tap

Stop

to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

PWM valves calibration

Drive Calibration

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select

Drive Calibration

. The Field-IQ Drive Calibration screen displays.

2. On the

Drive Limits tab, enter the values for:

Minimum Seed Disk RPM l

Maximum Seed Disk RPM

Tap

Next

.

3. On the

Auto Tuning tab, follow the instructions to auto tune the system.

Note  – Do not perform the auto tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file. Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle.

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

During the auto tuning process the system tries to control the drive with in the specified RPM limits.

If the calibration fails, the drive may have not been able to meet the limits you entered on the

Drive Limits tab.

For a liquid system, it may be helpful to remove all orifices or nozzles to let the system flow freely.

244

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

4. When the auto tuning is finished, tap

Next

.

5. On the

Drive Settings tab, turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Then adjust the values on this tab, if necessary.

6. Tap

Next

. On the

Info tab, the results and drive limits of the calibration are listed. This screen is used to show the applicators operating range. If the speeds that are displayed are not logical, there is a setting issue. You may also need to perform a catch test for these numbers to be accurate.

Flow Calibration

WARNING –

During flow calibration, the machine will become operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.

Flow calibration is used to check the accuracy of the: l

Gear ratio (if applicable) l

Gate settings (if applicable) l

App rate sensor

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

This is done by performing a catch test.

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select

Flow Calibration under the valve you want to caibrate.

The Planter Calibration screen displays.

2. On the

Calibrate tab, complete the settings.

Setting

Seeds Per Disk

Explanation

The number of seed openings per disk plate.

Shaft Encoder

Constant

Pulses per revolution.

Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration.

This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters.

To start out, leave the value at 1.000. After the calibration test, the system may adjust this number.

3. Tap

Test

and follow the instructions to test the settings you entered.

4. On the

Limits tab, you can view an overview of the limits that are set.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

245

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

Sprayer calibration

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

To calibrate a sprayer calibrate the implement lift switch, then the modules.

Implement lift switch calibration

1. From the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select

Implement Lift

.

2. Raise the implement and then tap

Next

.

3. Lower the implement and then tap

Next

.

4. Tap

OK

to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

Spraying modules calibration

Calibrate the modules to ensure that your system performs at the level you require.

The option to calibrate the Field-IQ system only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field-IQ system Rate and Section control module installed.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Field-IQ and then tap

Calibrate

.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the Rate and Section Control module you want to calibrate.

Note  – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.

Drive Calibration

At the Field-IQ Drive Calibration screen, complete the settings on each tab.

Drive Limits tab

Settings

Maximum Flow

Maximum Pressure

Note  – Displays if

Pressure limiting (page

214)

is enabled.

Explanation

Set the maximum flow on your system to prevent it from operating outside its capability. If you do not know the maximum limit of the system, leave this set to zero to ensure accurate auto tune limits are calibrated.

The system shows the Maximum Pressure Limit set in the Drive Setup screen (launched from the

Rate Control tab) on the

Pressure Feedback Setup tab. See

Rate Control tab (page 230)

. Any changes you make to this value will also be changed on the

Pressure Feedback Setup tab.

246

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Auto-Tuning tab

At this tab, turn the master switch on to begin the auto calibration process. When the progress bar has completed, turn the master switch off, and tap 

Next

. All rows and sections will be commanded fully open during this process.

If you need to shut down the drive at any time, switch the master switch to the off position and adjust the rate and speed parameters on the

Drive Limits tab

as necessary.

If pressure limiting is: l

Disabled: The calibration process will show the status of the master switch and the current flow.

l

Enabled: The calibration process will show the status of the master switch, the current flow and the current pressure.

Drive Settings tab

Settings

Target Speed

Explanation

Enter the test speed to use during calibration. The system will apply material at the rate required to reach the Target Rate if the vehicle travels at this speed.

Target Rate

Applied Rate

Master Switch

Current Pressure

Display only.

The applied rate for comparison to the Target Rate.

Status of on or off. Display only.

Available if

Pressure limiting (page 214)

is enabled or if

Lock in Standby

Pressure is chosen for 

Valve Behavior when sections closed in the Drive Setup screen (launched from the

Rate Control tab) on the

Pressure Feedback Setup tab. See

Rate Control tab (page 230) .

Proportional Gain

Minimum Response

If the drive is slow to come up to rate, increase the Proportional Gain and turn on Boost (Feed Forward). If the applied rate is erratic, decrease the Proportional Gain.

If the drive is not responding, increase the Minimum Response. If the system has large fluctuations in applied rate, decrease the minimum response.

Allowable Error If the Applied Rate is less than this amount away from the target rate, the system will not send commands to adjust the rate.

Boost (Feed Forward)

If the drive is slow to come up to rate, increase the Integral/Proportional

Gain and turn on Boost (Feed Forward).

Advanced Parameters Tap to launch the advanced parameters.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

247

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

Advanced parameters

Advanced Tuning tab

Settings

Target Speed

Target Rate

Applied Rate

Explanation

Enter the test speed to use during calibration. The system will apply material at the rate required to reach the Target Rate if the vehicle travels at this speed.

Display only.

Display only.

Status of on or off. Display only.

Master Switch

Current Pressure

Integrator Upper

PWM Limit

Process Gain

Smoothing Factor

Display only.

Change only if requested by support.

Integrator Lower

PWM Limit

Comparator Limit

Integral Gain

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

Ramp Limit Change only if requested by support.

Boost (Feed Forward)

If the drive is slow to come up to rate, increase the Integral/Proportional

Gain and turn on Boost (Feed Forward).

Proportional Gain If the drive is slow to come up to rate, increase the Proportional Gain and turn on Boost (Feed Forward). If the applied rate is erratic, decrease the Proportional Gain.

Change only if requested by support.

Differential Gain

Minimum Response

Change only if requested by support.

If the drive is not responding, increase the Minimum Response. If the system has large fluctuations in applied rate, decrease the minimum response.

Allowable Error If the Applied Rate is less than this amount away from the target rate, the system will not send commands to adjust the rate.

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

248

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Settings

(Flow Filter Time

Constant)

Pre Position Open

Pre Position Stop

Explanation

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

Advanced PWM tab

This tab is only available if PWM has been selected as the valve type in the Drive Setup screen

(launched from the

Rate Control tab) on the

Valve Setup tab. See

Rate Control tab (page 230) .

Settings

Target Speed

Explanation

Enter the test speed to use during calibration. The system will apply material at the rate required to reach the Target Rate if the vehicle travels at this speed.

Display only.

Target Rate

Applied Rate

Master Switch

Current Flow

Display only.

Status of on or off. Display only.

Display only.

Base PWM Frequency Change only if requested by support.

Dither Frequency Change only if requested by support.

Dither Amplitude

Dither Control

PWM Upper Limit

PWM Lower Limit

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

Advanced Pressure tab

This tab is only available if

Pressure limiting (page 214)

is enabled.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

249

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

Settings

Target Speed

Target Rate

Current Flow

Applied Rate

Master Switch

Integrator Upper

PWM Limit

Integrator Lower

PWM Limit

Comparator Limit

Ramp Limit

Proportional Gain

Explanation

Enter the test speed to use during calibration. The system will apply material at the rate required to reach the Target Rate if the vehicle travels at this speed.

Display only.

Display only.

Display only.

Status of on or off. Display only.

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

Integral Gain

Differential Gain

Minimum Response

Allowable Error

Process Gain

Smoothing Factor

(Flow Filter Time

Constant)

Hysteresis Up

Hysteresis Down

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

If the drive is slow to come up to rate, increase the Proportional Gain and turn on Boost (Feed Forward). If the applied rate is erratic, decrease the Proportional Gain.

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

If the drive is not responding, increase the Minimum Response. If the system has large fluctuations in applied rate, decrease the minimum response.

If the Applied Rate is less than this amount away from the target rate, the system will not send commands to adjust the rate.

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

Change only if requested by support.

250

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Spreader calibration

To calibrate a spreader, first calibrate the implement lift switch. Then calibrate the modules to ensure your system performs at the level you require.

1. Implement lift switch calibration

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the

Implement Lift option.

3. Raise the implement and then tap

Next

.

4. Lower the implement and then tap

Next

.

5. Tap

OK

to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

Rawson modules calibration

The Field-IQ system Calibrate option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field-IQ system Rawson control module or rate control module set up to control the rate.

Note  – If you have an implement lift switch, calibrate it first.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Field-IQ and then tap

Calibrate

.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the module you want to calibrate.

3. Select the first module to calibrate. The Planter Calibration screen displays.

Note  – If a Rawson module was configured, the correct calibration is selected automatically.

Setting

Gear Ratio

Explanation

Specifies the actual ratio from the application rate sensor to the seed meter shaft RPM. This is the number of revolutions the application rate sensor turns for each revolution of the seed meter.

Gear Ratio Calculator Use the calculator to determine your gear ratio.

Calibration Constant A calculated value that the system determines during calibration.

This field allows you to adjust for inconsistencies in the seed meters.

To start out, leave the value at 1.000. After the calibration test, the system may adjust this number.

4. Place a clean empty container under the rows that contain seeds to capture the seeds dispensed during the calibration.

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

5. Tap

Test

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

251

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

6. The system asks if you would like to prime the system. Tap

Yes

. To to ensure that the seed disk is full, the system turns the seed disks one revolution.

7. Turn on the master switch to prime the system and then when prompted on-screen, turn off the master switch.

8. In the

Number of Seed Meter Revolutions entry box, enter a value and then tap

Start

. The higher the number of revolutions the more accurate the calibration. Five to 10 revolutions is recommended.

9. Follow the on-screen prompts of operating the master switch. After the system turns the specified number of revolutions, enter the number of seeds dispensed per row and then tap

Continue

.

10. The next screen shows the minimum and maximum speeds for the target rate specified. Tap

OK

and then either press

Test

to repeat the calibration or tap

OK

to continue.

11. Tap the

Limits tab to show an overview of the limits that are set for

Target Rate 1

,

Target Rate 2 and

Jump Start

.

12. Tap

OK

.

13. Repeat steps 1 through 10 for other Rawson Control Modules that need calibration.

Hydraulics test

The purpose of the hydraulics test is to exercise the hydraulics to establish whether there is sufficient oil flow to run the system.

1. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen tap

Hydraulic Test

.

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Make sure that the implement is safe to operate.

2. Tap

Next

.

3. Enter the initial motor RPM. The default setting is 300. It is recommended that you test the motor RPM at 100 to ensure that the drive runs smoothly at slow speeds.

4. Tap

Start

. The next screen provides the status of each motor.

Status

No Error

Motor Stalled

Disconnected

Explanation

The test was successful.

The motors did not have sufficient oil flow; ensure the correct orifice size is installed for each motor. For more information, refer to the

Rawson System Installation Instructions.

The Rawson Control Module cannot communicate with the motor.

5. Tap

Stop

to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

252

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

PWM valves calibration

Drive calibration

From the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select

Drive Calibration under the valve you want to calibrate.

Enter the appropriate settings on each tab.

Tab

Drive Limits

Auto-Tuning

Drive Settings

Info

Explanation

Enter the minimum and maximum flow values.

Moving parts during this operation. Ensure that the implement is safe to operate.

Follow the on-screen instructions to auto-tune the system.

Do not perform the auto-tuning function if you have loaded a preset configuration file. Use the predefined configuration settings appropriate for your vehicle.

Turn the master switch on and vary the rates. Adjust values if needed.

Shows the results and drive limits of your calibration.

Flow calibration

WARNING –

During flow calibration, the machine will become operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or death.

The Field-IQ system Calibration option only displays on the Configuration screen if you have at least one Field-IQ system Rate and Section control module installed.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Field-IQ and then tap

Calibrate

.

2. At the Field-IQ Calibration screen, select the Rate and Section Control Module to be calibrated.

(The message

Not calibrated displays at the end of the modules that need calibration.) The Field-IQ

Calibration screen displays that includes the serial number of the rate and section control module you just selected.

3. Select

Flow Calibration

. The Rate and Section Controller Valve Calibration screen displays.

4. Select the

Control tab and complete the settings for: l

Allowable Error

Gain l

Minimum Response

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

253

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

Note  – For information about the appropriate values for your sprayer, see the Support Note - Field-IQ

Crop Input Control System: For Sprayers and Spreaders.

5. Tap

OK

to return to the Field-IQ Calibration screen.

6. Select

Flow Calibration

. The Granular Calibration screen displays.

7. At the

Calibrate tab, complete the settings.

Setting

Gate Height Setting

Explanation

Current height of the gate opening.

If you entered a gate height measurement during setup, you must enter a measurement here.

Staff Encoder Constant

8. Tap

Calculate

to calibrate the constant. The Calibration Constant Calculator screen displays.

9. Complete the settings.

Setting

Gate Width

Drag Chain Distance Per Rev

Explanation

Width of the gate opening

The length of the drag chain per turn of the drag shaft.

To figure the drag chain length, you can either:

Multiply the diameter of the drag shaft by 3.14.

l

Mark the belt and measure the distance the mark moved after 1 revolution of the drag shaft.

If these numbers are not correct, you will have issues calibrating the spreader. If any of these settings physically change in the implement, they need to be adjusted in the

FM-1000 Plus application to maintain accuracy.

The system calculates the calibration constant. This value represents the liters of material dispensed from the spreader per revolution of the drag shaft assuming the gate height is 1 meter. The actual gate height is factored in later. The FM-1000 Plus application will automatically come up with this value.

10. Tap

OK

to return to the Granular Calibration screen.

11. Place a clean empty container under the spreader to capture the material dispensed during the calibration, and then tap

Calibrate

. The Granular Calibration screen displays.

WARNING –

Moving parts during this operation. Ensure the implement is safe to operate.

12. Complete the settings.

254

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

9   Field-IQ system setup Equipment calibration for Field-IQ

Setting

Amount of Material to be

Dispensed

Target Rate

Target Calibration

Explanation

The amount to be dispensed during the calibration.

13. To begin calibration, tap

Start

and follow the on-screen instructions.

14. Select the

Info tab to view the system’s operational limits (based on the RPM limits, target rates, and application width).

15. Tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

255

Equipment calibration for Field-IQ 9   Field-IQ system setup

256

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

10

GreenSeeker setup

In this chapter:

GreenSeeker functionality

Care and maintenance

Field preparations for nitrogen application

258

258

259

Field setup 260

Field preparations for user defined rate 261

Delivery system and liquid control 261

GreenSeeker sensors shines a calibrated light wave spectrum to measure the returned reflective light spectrum from plants, and analyzes the data to determine the plants' needs for nitrogen

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

257

GreenSeeker functionality 10   GreenSeeker setup

GreenSeeker functionality

As you travel the field, in real-time the GreenSeeker RT200 system: l

Sensors emit light at two specific wavelengths to measure the light reflected by plants.

l

Analyzes the reflected light and determines the nitrogen level (NDVI - normalized difference vegetation index) of the plants below l

Sends the data to the FM-1000 Plus application

The FM-1000 Plus application sends the correct application rates to either: l

The applicator's rate controller (using Serial Rate Control) l

The Field-IQ system

The required amount of fertilizer is applied as you pass over the crop.

As materials are applied, the system logs the: l

NDVI l

Target rate l

Applied rate

Note  – Some rate controllers connected via serial cable to the display do not respond with an 'As Applied' value.

For operational information, see

GreenSeeker operation (page 422) .

Care and maintenance

To maintain the high performance of your GreenSeeker RT200 variable rate application and mapping system: l

Each day or during applicator re-fill, check the GreenSeeker sensor detector and light source windows for dust and dirt, and wipe clean with a soft rag.

l

Do not leave the GreenSeeker system outdoors during extreme weather conditions. Wide temperature variations are hard on electronics and fluid seals, and may reduce the operating life of the system.

l

DO NOT store a GreenSeeker system with the sensors facing upward. Doing so may allow water to collect around the windows and gaskets, causing seal failures in those areas. Also direct sunlight can in some cases focus enough energy into the sensor to damage the detector.

Note  – There are no field serviceable components of the electronic system; do not attempt any field repair of a malfunctioning interface module or sensors. If you experience operating problems, contact your local dealer.

258

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

10   GreenSeeker setup Field preparations for nitrogen application

Field preparations for nitrogen application

Note  – The following instructions apply to the most common nitrogen applications. Check algorithms for specific instructions. For updated specific algorithm instructions, visit

www.GreenSeeker.com

.

Before you can use the GreenSeeker applicator to apply nitrogen across a field, before or shortly after planting you must establish a nitrogen rich reference strip (NRS) or "calibration" area. The rest of the field is referred to as the Non-Reference (Non-Ref) portion (or as the N-limited area or farmer practice region).

The NRS reference strip is used to determine the: l

Amount of nitrogen being made available to the plant by the environment (such as mineralization) l

Current year's expected maximum yield potential and response to additional nitrogen

An ideal NRS runs the length of the field, but must be at least 400 feet long.

1. Establish the NRS in a representative reference portion of the field (in other words, not in high spot or low spot). Use a permanent land marker or temporary marker to ensure that the NRS can easily be found later in the season. You may also want to establish the location of the NRS by noting it as an A-B line or flag on the screen.

The rate of nitrogen necessary to establish a NRS:

Is crop and region dependent l

Should be the highest rate necessary to satisfy crop needs throughout the growing season

2. Use the sensor mounted booms of the RT200 system with RT Commander or the GreenSeeker

Hand Held sensor.

If past practice was a 100% pre-plant application of nitrogen, decrease pre-plant nitrogen application rate of the field to a level at least half of previous total nitrogen applied during non-

GreenSeeker management practice.

Crop

Spring or winter wheat

Corn

Explanation

If application rate has historically been 100 lbs N/acre, decrease the rate to 50 lbs nitrogen per acre.

Note  – Sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N application to maintain the NRS as a non-limiting reference area.

If application rates have historically been 200 lbs nitrogen per acre decrease to 75 to 125 lbs N/acre.

Note  – Sandy soil type or heavy rainfall may require additional N application to maintain the NRS as a non-limiting reference area.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

259

Field setup 10   GreenSeeker setup

For best results, use the RT200 to "read" the NRS and apply N at growth stages dependent upon the crop algorithm used. For most supplied algorithms this is typically: l

Wheat: Feekes growth stage 4-6

Corn: V8-V12

For updated specific algorithm instructions, see www.GreenSeeker.com

. Plant coverage should be at least 50% for the sensors to accurately determine NDVI for topdressing (or sidedressing).

To collect sensor readings, pass the boom mounted sensor (or handheld sensor) over the crop at 32 -– 48" above the canopy. Sense a large area of the NRS and nonreference portion of the field to accurately determine their respective NDVI values.

3. Apply an applicators width swath of N. The rate of N applied should be high enough to satisfy crop N needs in a good year.

4. Enter the values into GreenSeeker on the FM-1000 Plus application:

Automatically with the boom mounted sensors l

Manually with the GreenSeeker handheld

5. If the response is variable across the field, select an area where the difference between the reference and the non-reference areas are most apparent. This assures that the algorithm will determine a rate that utilizes the highest yield potential prediction and maximum response to

N for that year.

To estimate yield potential, most algorithms utilize an environmental factor (Growing Degree

Days or Days From Planting), which takes into account the weather and length of time that has passed since planting.

Different GDD variations are used for different crops. You must know the planting date and sensing date to obtain the GDD value.

Field setup

To prepare a reference area, do the following:

1. Make certain to use a permanent land marker or temporary marker to ensure that the NRS can easily be found later in the season. You may also want to establish the location of the NRS by noting it as an A-B line or flag on the FM-1000 Plus application.

The ideal NRS would run the length of the field, but it should at least be 400 feet long.

2. At appropriate crop growth stage, take readings of the NRS and an adjacent part of the field yet to be fertilized. For most supplied algorithms the following is typical: l

Wheat: Feekes growth stage 4-6

Corn: V8-V12.

3. Find the area where the nitrogen rich strip is most apparent in comparison to the rest of the field (this indicates greatest potential for the crop).

260

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

10   GreenSeeker setup Field preparations for user defined rate

4. Take sensor readings with RT200 or Hand Held sensor for input to your selected Crop

Algorithm.

5. Be sure to match nozzles and/or rate control system to maximize response time and performance for each field's requirements.

For more information, see

Field preparations for nitrogen application (page 259)

for more details, and be sure to consult your application equipment and rate control systems manuals as applicable.

Field preparations for user defined rate

The RT200 system can be used to apply other materials than nitrogen. GreenSeeker permits a custom algorithm to be entered (which is a table of product values) instead of the NDVI value. These values are entered into the Custom Formula Application table. See

Create a custom table (page

423) .

Note  – The grower/consultant must develop these rates. Also be aware of the rate range ability of your specific rate controller and nozzles used to achieve these results.

Field calibration

You can use a GreenSeeker hand-held to measure the NDVI of a crop if you know the approximate desired rate for the crop.

Note  – You can also measure NDVI using the GreenSeeker RT200 by observing NDVI values on the

GreenSeeker panel or by using the calibration function.

Delivery system and liquid control

As with any variable rate system, the minimum and maximum rates obtainable are dependent upon the delivery system. The RT200 interface module is capable of "requesting" any rate, but the actual rates delivered are dependent upon the rate controller and its components. Most liquid rate control systems control or "throttle" the pressure of the system to affect flow and application rate.

When using the RT200 with a typical liquid delivery system, it is important to match nozzle sizes to expected delivery rates. After the appropriate reference strip readings, GDD, and selection of crop type are input into RT Commander, the application graph can be accessed to show the prescription rates at various sensor NDVI readings. Depending upon what delivery system is used, there will be actual minimum and maximum rates obtainable. These will be dependent upon components like the pump, control valve, nozzles, and boom plumbing sizes.

GreenSeeker has features that allow for minimum and maximum rates to be set, regardless of the crop algorithm prescription. After a nozzle set is chosen, the minimum should be set at the lowest rate the nozzles will still give adequate pattern/performance. Maximum rates may be limited by rates that lessen atomization or drift.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

261

Delivery system and liquid control 10   GreenSeeker setup

Select a nozzle

It is usually best to match nozzles to the lower mid-range of the typical rates shown on the application graph. Ultimately, it is up to the grower or crop consultant to determine the minimum or maximum rates and nozzles which are most appropriate.

If most of your NDVI readings (in the area of the field, not in the NRS) are around 0.53, and your review the application graph shows at 0.53 NDVI you should be applying 15GPA, then you should choose a nozzle that will have the ability to change rates above and below this NDVI reading.

You might choose a nozzle that puts out 12.5GPA at its lowest pressure (such as 20psi) and 21GPA at its highest pressure (such as 60psi). Since the penalty to under-fertilize (harm yield) is usually greater than to over-fertilize (waste fertilizer), it may be best to choose a strategy similar to the one shown here. You will need to modify your values to fit your circumstances and meet the local field and delivery system conditions.

262

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

11

ISOBUS setup

In this chapter:

ISOBUS settings

Virtual Terminal setup

Task Controller setup

GPS output settings

Equipment setup

264

264

264

265

266

ISOBUS is a global set of software and hardware standards that makes possible the communication between equipment made by different manufacturers.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

263

ISOBUS settings 11   ISOBUS setup

ISOBUS settings

To set up ISOBUS features:

1. Connect the CAN bus to the FM-1000 Plus application.

2. Activate the feature/plugin you want to use. See

Optional features/plugins (page 48)

.

3. If you are using Task Controller, unlock the feature.

4. Set up the feature you are using. See

Virtual Terminal setup (page 264)

or

Task Controller setup

(page 264)

.

5. Set up GPS speed output. See

GPS output settings (page 265) .

6. Set up the specific virtual terminal for your equipment. See

Equipment setup (page 266)

.

For operational information, see

ISOBUS operation (page 427) .

Virtual Terminal setup

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, select

Virtual Terminal and tap

Setup

.

3. At the Virtual Terminal Dialog screen, select the appropriately configured CAN port on the TM-

200 Module.

4. Tap

OK

to return to the Configuration screen.

5. Tap

OK

to return to the Home screen.

For operational information, see

Virtual Terminal operation (page 428)

.

Task Controller setup

Make sure you have: l

Connected the CAN bus to the display l

Unlocked the ISOBUS Task Controller functionality l

Activated Task Controller

1. On the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. At the Configuration screen, select

Task Controller and then tap

Setup

.

264

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

11   ISOBUS setup GPS output settings

3. At the Task Control Setup screen in the

Rates tab, enter the settings.

Setting

Target Rate 1

Target Rate 2

Rate Increment

Minimum Rate

Maximum Rate

Explanation

The first target rate for the volume supplied by the implement

The second target rate for the volume supplied by the implement

When you increment/decrement

Rate 1 or

Rate 2 on the Run screen, the current application rate increases or decreases by this amount.

Minimum rate to be applied

Maximum rate to be applied

4. In the

Boom tab, enter the

Valve On Latency and

Valve Off Latency

. These values are the measured times that it takes the implement to start coverage after the command is given.

5. Tap

OK

to return to the Configuration screen.

6. Tap

OK

to return to the Home screen.

For operational information, see

Task Controller operation (page 427)

.

GPS output settings

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

GPS Receiver and then tap

Setup

.

3. On the

Settings tab, tap

GPS Output

.

4. On the

CAN GPS tab, set: a. The Message Rate to 5 Hz b. The Output Port to be the CAN attached to the ISOBUS for the implement

5. Tap

OK

until you are back at the Home screen.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

265

Equipment setup 11   ISOBUS setup

Equipment setup

Make sure that you have set up the Virtual Terminal and/or Task Controller before completing the rest of this procedure.

For cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

Virtual Terminal then tap

Diagnostics

. The Virtual Terminal for the equipment you have connected displays.

For Kinze:

Type

Planter

Models Set...

Virtual

Terminal

x

Task

Controller

x 3110, 3140, 3200,

3500, 3600, 3660,

3700, 3800

Current Ground Speed Source to

GPS Speed

.

Population Option to

Prescription.

x

For Kuhn:

Type Models Set...

Seed Drill

Virtual

Terminal

x

Task

Controller

x

Spreader

Spreader

Moduliner (HR 6004

ML)

AXIS-H-EMC (40.1 &

50.1)

Simulated Speed to the speed you will drive.

Task Control to

On

.

GPS Control to

On

.

Set

VariSpread to

On

.

Set Change Disc Speed to

On

.

AXIS-W (40.1 & 50.1)

Manual Speed to the speed you will drive.

GPSC to

On

.

x x x x x x x x

266

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

11   ISOBUS setup Equipment setup

For Kverneland:

Type

Spreader

Drill

Drill

Models Set...

Exacta TL GEOspread

Driving Speed Signal to

GPS

J1939

.

Task Controller to

On

.

Accord Optima

Precision Drill

Driving Speed to

GPS J1939

.

Monopill SE

Task Controller to

On

.

Driving Speed Signal to

GPS

J1939

.

Task Controller to

On

.

Virtual

Terminal

x x x

Task

Controller

x x x x x x

For Rauch:

Type

Spreader

Spreader

Models Set...

AXIS-H-EMC (40.1 &

50.1)

Task Control to

On

.

GPS Control to

On

.

VariSpread to

On

.

Change Disc Speed to

On

.

AXIS-W (40.1 & 50.1)

Manual Speed to the speed you will drive

GPSC to

On

.

Virtual

Terminal

x x

Task

Controller

x x x x x x

For Vicon:

Type Models Set...

Virtual

Terminal

x

Task

Controller

x

Spreader RO-EDW GEOspread

Driving Speed Signal to

GPS

J1939

.

Task Controller to

On

.

x

3. Refer to the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions for how to change the settings.

4. If you are using the Task Controller, verify that the equipment recognizes it. For more information, refer to the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

267

Equipment setup 11   ISOBUS setup

268

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

12

Serial Rate Control setup

In this chapter:

Supported variable rate controllers

Variable rate controller setup

Vaderstad Control Station

Additional controller setup

270

271

277

277

By using a serial connection, serial rate control enables you to use the FM-1000 Plus application with non-Trimble variable rate controllers. A simple variable rate serial cable provides a link between your display and variable rate application controller.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

269

Supported variable rate controllers 12   Serial Rate Control setup

Supported variable rate controllers

The FM-1000 Plus application can send control signals to vary only one channel at a time.

Variable rate controller

Amazone Amatron + (page 272)

Bogballe Calibrator (page 272)

Hardi 5500 and 6500 (page 273)

LH Agro

See

LH5000 (page 274)

.

New Leader

See

Rawson and New Leader (page 276) .

Raven (page 274)

Supported Models

Amatron+

Calibrator Zurf

5500, 6500

LH5000

Mark III and Mark IV

SCS 440, 440DB, 450, 450DB, 460, 660, 661, 700,

710, 750, 760

Accu-Plant and Accu-Rate

Rawson

See

Rawson and New Leader (page 276) .

Tyler

See

Flex-Air setup (page 272) .

Vaderstad Control Station (page 277)

Flex-Air

Control Station

270

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

12   Serial Rate Control setup Variable rate controller setup

Variable rate controller setup

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Rate Controller settings screen displays.

Serial Rate Control and then tap

Setup

. The Edit Variable

2. At the

Comm tab, complete the settings.

Note  – The fields that appear on the screen depend on which controller you selected.

Setting

Controller

Port

Active Channel

Send Rate as

Explanation

The make of the controller.

The port configured and assigned to the EXP-100 that the controller is connected to.

If displayed, enter the channel name.

Unit of measure.

3. Select the

Rates tab and enter the settings.

Setting

Default Rate

Step Size

Rate Snapping

Explanation

The increment for adjustment

Enabled, disabled

4. Select the

Sections tab.

5. Enter the number of sections. Then tap

OK

.

After you have selected a type of variable rate controller, the FM-1000 Plus application initiates communications with the controller each time you open a field. Communications are terminated when you close the field.

If the FM-1000 Plus application cannot communicate with the controller: l

A message displays identifying the problem. If the controller type you chose has a configurable baud rate, the error message includes details of the baud rate that required.

l

The applied rate does not display on the Run screen.

l

Variable rate logging is suspended while the controller is disconnected.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

271

Variable rate controller setup 12   Serial Rate Control setup

Amazone Amatron +

1. Connect the XCN-2050 display to the Amazone Amatron + by either: a. Connecting the special adapter cable (P/N 59043) to connect to the display cable (P/N

67091) that is connected to the port configured and assigned to the EXP-100.

Note  – Connect the cable to the pinned connector on the lower left side of the Amatron + controller.

b. Connecting the display to the controller with an extension (straight through) serial cable.

2. Set up the controller: a. Press

Shift

+

Page / Setup / Page 2.

b. Set RS232 to 57600 baud.

Bogballe Calibrator

To use the Bogballe Calibrator, you need a special adapter cable (P/N 59043) to connect to the cable

P/N 67091. Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to the configured and assigned EXP-100.

Note  – The standoff nuts on the Bogballe rate controller may prevent the pins in the cable connector from making a connection. In this case, remove the standoff nuts.

Controller setup

To set up the controller to operate correctly with the FM-1000 Plus application, tap:

1.

2.

Return

Return

3.

4.

Fertil.-Distrib

Select Type

5.

Bogballe E/EX

6.

Accept

Flex-Air setup

The FM-1000 Plus application can send rates to the Tyler Flex-Air variable rate controller. The controller can have four channels l

Main l

Liquid l

Co-applicator l

Supplemental

272

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

12   Serial Rate Control setup Variable rate controller setup

Rates from all channels are recorded in the variable rate logging .dbf file, but the FM-1000 Plus application can send rates to only one channel at a time: the active channel.

The Tyler Flex-Air controller uses the GPS speed sent by the FM-1000 Plus application.

Operation

Statistics for the active channel are recorded in: l

The

Total_Qty value in the variable rate logging .dbf file l

The

Avg_Rate field in the EventHistory .dbf file

If you want to use these statistics, start a new event before you change the active channel.

Application width

You can individually configure the widths of the boom sections on the controller. The FM-1000 Plus application draws coverage logging at the width of the sum of all the boom sections. If you turn boom sections off, the FM-1000 Plus application varies the width of the coverage polygons according to which boom sections are on.

Hardi 5500 and 6500

1. To connect the Hardi 5500 or 6500 controller, you need a special adapter cable (P/N 59043) to connect to the cable P/N 67091. Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to the configured and assigned EXP-100.

a. Connect the cable to serial port 1 on the Hardi controller.

b. On the Hardi 6500, use terminal version 1.55 or later and Jobcom version 1.55 or later.

c. Set the Hardi 6500 to metric units.

2. Set up the controller: a. Turn on the controller while holding the

ESC

 button.

b. In the extended menu, use the arrow keys to select the

E.4 Data Exchange menu.

c. Enter the COM 1 setup and complete the settings.

Setting

Equipment type

Protocol

Baud Rate

Enter...

VRA/remote

Hardi VRA

9600

3. Turn off the controller and turn it on again.

4. Go to

Menu 2.3

and select

VRA/Remote Control Enable

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

273

Variable rate controller setup 12   Serial Rate Control setup

LH5000

To use the LH 5000 controller, you need a special adapter cable (LH Agro P/N 198-701) to connect to the cable P/N 67091.

1. Connect the XCN-2050 display to the LH5000 by either: a. Connecting the special adapter cable (LH Agro P/N 198-701) to connect to the display cable

(P/N 67091). Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to the configured and assigned EXP-100.

b. Connecting the display to the controller with an extension (straight through) serial cable.

2. Set up the controller, press: a.

Return

b.

Return

c.

Fertil.-Distrib

d.

Select Type

e.

LH5000

f.

Accept

Raven

To use a Raven controller with the FM-1000 Plus application, the controller must: l

Be GPS-ready l

Use Raven’s latest communications protocol (which was introduced in 1996).

If your controller is not GPS-ready or does not use the latest protocol, contact Raven for an upgrade pack.

Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to the configured and assigned EXP-100. Cable P/N 6709 will be connected to the configured and assigned EXP-100.

274

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

12   Serial Rate Control setup Variable rate controller setup

Configure the controller

Screen or

Setting Type

Settings

Data Menu l

BAUD: 9600 l

GPS: Inac l

DLOG: ON l

TRIG: 1 l

UNIT: Sec

Implement

Boom Setup

Application width: l

First boom section width must be greater than 0, otherwise the

FM-1000 Plus application will not communicate with the controller.

l

Total boom section width must match the

Application Width setting in the Implement Boom Setup screen.

Channel setting

To allow rates sent by the FM-1000

Plus application to be used by the

Raven controller, set channel to either: l

Rate 1 (SCS4XX, SCS6XX) l

Product X Auto (SCS7XX)

Baud Rate 9600

Additional Information

Some Raven controllers may lose the settings if power is disconnected. You must then reconfigure the controller.

The FM-1000 Plus application varies the width of the coverage polygons according to the number of boom sections, but it does not know the absolute width of each boom section. It only knows the relative width of each boom section with respect to the total boom section width.

When recording coverage polygons, each section is considered to be a percentage of the application width set in the Implement

Boom Setup screen. For example, if you create an intentional overlap to avoid gaps in the application coverage by making the application width greater than the swath width. This proportionally changes the recorded width of each boom section.

If the controller is set to

Rate 2 or

Manual

, the controller ignores the rates being sent, but the FM-1000 Plus application still records the applied rates.

Some older controllers are only capable of

1200 baud. Such controllers must be upgraded.

CAUTION – Some Raven controllers do not support zero rates. If the target rate is zero, and spray is still being applied, you must turn off the boom sections manually.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

275

Variable rate controller setup 12   Serial Rate Control setup

Rawson and New Leader

The Rawson and New Leader controllers use a nominal flow rate (Yield) and a step size to describe rates.

If you have a dual-channel Rawson Accu-Rate controller, see

Rawson and New Leader (page 276)

.

1. At the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen, set the default rate to match the yield value (or nominal flow rate) in the Rawson controller.

Any non-zero rate will be adjusted to the nearest value that the controller can select. A rate of zero turns off the hydraulic drive.

Note  – For best result when creating prescriptions, use rates in 2%, 4%, or 6 

2

/

3

% increments of the default rate. Select the percentage used on the FM-1000 Plus application.

2. Put the controller into GPS mode. This allows the FM-1000 Plus application to change the rates on the controller. (Without GPS mode, the FM-1000 Plus application will log only the rates being used.) a. Turn on the controller.

b. Tap the

MODE

button twice.

c. Tap the

SET

button to switch the controller between GPS and non-GPS.

3. Set up communication between the FM-1000 Plus application and the controller: a. Connect the display to the controller with Rawson cable (P/N 69730) and cable (P/N 67091).

b. Set the controller baud rate to 9600.

Using the controller

When in GPS mode, the hydraulic drive operates only when both the switch and the FM-1000 Plus application allow the drive to be on. Set the hydraulic drive switch on the controller to the ON position. If you need to quickly turn off the hydraulic drive, use the switch on the controller.

Non-GPS mode

The FM-1000 Plus application sends commands to the controller. If communication cannot be established, it may be because the controller is set to Non GPS mode. A message displays and gives you the option to continue in Non GPS mode.

If the controller is set to Non GPS mode, the FM-1000 Plus application still shows and records asapplied rates. If a prescription is loaded, target rates appear for reference, but these are not used by the controller. In this mode, you must vary rates manually on the controller.

Loss of communication

In GPS mode, if communication with a Rawson controller is lost, the FM-1000 Plus application does not report an error until you cross into a region of the prescription that specifies a different rate.

276

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

12   Serial Rate Control setup Vaderstad Control Station

In Non GPS mode, the FM-1000 Plus application has no way of knowing when communication with a

Rawson controller is lost.

Special note on using a Rawson Accu-Rate controller

The FM-1000 Plus application can send rates and record coverage for the Rawson Accu-Rate controller for only one drive at a time: Drive A or Drive B.

To correctly send rates to the controller and log coverage based on the drive master switch:

1. To operate both drives, set the drive that is not being controlled by the FM-1000 Plus application to

Non GPS mode

.

2. Connect the display Variable Rate cable to the COM port that matches the drive: l

To control Drive A, connect to COM A.

To control Drive B, connect to COM B. When you use Drive B, set the COM port to COM B.

Drive A does not have a configuration for this and will always use COM A.

3. Set Bit 7 mode to off. Bit 7 mode sends two prescriptions and is not supported by the FM-1000

Plus application.

Vaderstad Control Station

1. Connect the XCN-2050 display to the Vaderstad Control Station: a. Connect the special adapter cable (P/N DCA6219) with a crossover serial cable (null modem) to the Vaderstad program cable (Vaderstad P/N 428017).

b. Plug the Vaderstad cable into the GPS port on the back of the Control Station controller.

2. Set up the controller: a. Press the

?

button and hold it down while turning on the controller.

Note  – Pressing

?

and selecting Info will not work if the unit is communicating with the FM-1000

Plus application.

b. In the Setup screen, scroll to

GPS and then select

No

.

Additional controller setup

You can also set additional features on variable rate controllers, including: l

Coverage mapping (page 278)

l

Target and applied rates (page 278)

l

Units (page 278)

l

Alarms (page 278)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

277

Additional controller setup 12   Serial Rate Control setup

Alarms

If you want low limit and target rate alarms, set these on the variable rate controller. You can also set a default rate to be used if you go off the prescription or do not have a prescription. For more information, refer to the documentation provided with your variable rate controller.

Coverage mapping

The FM-1000 Plus application receives the applied rate and can also receive the number of active boom sections from a variable rate controller. It does not receive any information about the swath or application width.

To accurately record coverage maps, if your controller does not send the number of active boom sections, set the application width to match the agricultural equipment that you are using (for example, the width of the spray boom).

Prescriptions

You can define variable rate controller setup data, and load prescription files that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field. This information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller. Applied rates are received from the controller, and both target and applied rates are shown on the screen. In addition, data relating to the variable rate application may be logged to the card.

The information describing prescriptions for the Field-IQ system also applies to non-Trimble variable rate controllers.

Target and applied rates

The FM-1000 Plus application can control only a single channel at any one time. This active channel is specified in the Edit Variable Rate Controller settings screen. The target and applied rates shown on the Run screen are specific to this active channel.

Units

Most controllers can be configured to use either US Imperial or metric units of measurement. Each channel can be configured to use different types of units (for example, lb/ac, oz/ac, or gal/ac.).

When constructing prescription maps, make sure that the maps use the same units that the controller is configured for.

278

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

13

TrueGuide setup

In this chapter:

TrueGuide system

Implement setup and selection

TrueGuide setup

TrueGuide calibration

280

281

282

283

The TrueGuide implement guidance system works with the Autopilot system.

TrueGuide employs passive implement control and uses the second GPS antenna on the implemen to achieve implement location accuracy.

TrueGuide setup includes: l

Implement setup l

TrueGuide system setup l

Implement guidance calibration

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

279

TrueGuide system 13   TrueGuide setup

TrueGuide system

The working implement behind the tractor is where precision counts, and the only way to directly influence the implement is to measure where it is and control it.

While you steer the vehicle, TrueGuide passively controls the implement to steer itself to the guidance line.

The TrueGuide™ implement guidance system: l

Is used in conjunction with the Autopilot system l

Measures the position of the implement with a second GPS receiver placed on the implement.

The Autopilot system can then adjust the position of the tractor to pull the implement on the guidance line.

TrueGuide works with towed implements for front-steered, tracked, and articulated tractors.

For operation information, see

TrueGuide operation (page 437) .

Benefits

With TrueGuide, you can: l

Reduce the uncontrolled drift of the implement.

l

Control large implements and minimize the effects of draft (due to varying soil conditions and ground moisture) with no additional steering hardware.

l

Guide the implement to the line, even in the most difficult field patterns.

l

Tow your implement online when its natural tendency is to pull through curves.

l

Prevent unpredictable implement movements due to rolling terrain by adjusting on the go.

l

Minimize the effect of downdraft on severe hillsides by having the Autopilot system pull the implement up the hill and hold the line.

To achieve the highest performance from TrueGuide implement guidance, the Autopilot system on the tractor must have a good calibration. An Autopilot system that is calibrated very aggressively may need to be set up with a more neutral calibration when used with TrueGuide implement guidance.

Requirements

To set up and operate, TrueGuide system must have: l

The Autopilot automated steering system installed and configured. See

Autopilot system (page

164) .

280

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

13   TrueGuide setup Implement setup and selection l

Stable implements. (Implements that are unstable, such as sprayers with large flotation tires, will cause rocking in the antenna that will be greater than the performance improvements on the ground.) l

Both Autopilot and TrueGuide activated for use. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

l

An additional GPS receiver on the implement.

For cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

For operational information, see

TrueGuide operation (page 437) .

Implement setup and selection

Before you use the FM-1000 Plus application with the TrueGuide system, set up and select a new or existing implement. See

Implement setup (page 156) .

Note  – You can update existing (saved) implements with implement geometry to support TrueGuide guidance.

Note  – Antenna offsets are provided when the antenna cannot be placed directly over the working point of the implement. These offsets should be minimized whenever possible.

Antenna offsets (Geometry tab)

As part of implement setup, settings on the Geometry tab are required for implement modeling.

When configuring an implement for the TrueGuide system, the following antenna offsets are required:

Offset

Hitch to ground contact point

Antenna front/back

Antenna left/right

Antenna height

Explanation

Measured from the tractor hitch pin to the soil engagement point that the implement rotates around.

Measured from the implement working point to the center of the

GPS antenna (if mounted).

Measured from the center of the implement to the center of the

GPS antenna (if mounted)

The working height of the GPS antenna

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

281

TrueGuide setup 13   TrueGuide setup

TrueGuide setup

1. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays.

2. Enter the required settings.

TrueGuide and then tap

Setup

. The TrueGuide Setup

Setting

Roll compensation

Explanation

l

On: Applies roll corrections from the tractor.

Off: Applies no roll corrections.

CurveGuide l

Off: The system does not anticipate curves.

TrueGuide only: Enables the system to anticipate curves to make corrections for TrueGuide guidance only.

l

Always On: Keeps CurveGuide on at all times.

TrueGuide Aggressiveness The default aggressiveness. The recommended aggressiveness is

100%. See

System aggressiveness settings .

Fixed axle to hitch point The distance between the rear axle for conventional tractors (or the center of rotation for tracked tractors) and the draw bar.

3. Tap

OK

. The Configuration screen displays.

System aggressiveness settings

Aggressiveness affects the response of the implement to move to the guidance line. When aggressiveness is: l

Increased: The response to move the implement back to the guidance line is increased.

l

Decreased: The response to the implement moving offline is smoothed.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the TrueGuide panel.

2. Use + or - to increase or decrease the aggressiveness.

For...

Steep slopes (10% - +30%)

Slow speed operations

Use the default setting...

150%

125%

282

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

13   TrueGuide setup TrueGuide calibration

For...

Normal operation

High speed applications (> 8 mph or 12.8 kilometers per hour)

Use the default setting...

100%

33%

TrueGuide calibration

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

To calibrate the TrueGuide system, you must have a field open in the Run screen with an AB line configured. See

Fields (page 361)

and

Guidance pattern use (page 365) .

At the Run screen:

1. Tap

. Without closing the field, the Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

TrueGuide and tap

Calibrate

. The TrueGuide Calibration screen displays.

3. Tap

Next

and follow the on-screen instructions.

4. Complete the test at least four times and tap

OK

.

5. At the Calibration screen, tap

OK

to return to the open field.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

283

TrueGuide calibration 13   TrueGuide setup

284

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

14

TrueTracker setup

In this chapter:

TrueTracker

Setup process

Implement controller setup for

TrueTracker system

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 292

286

287

287

The TrueTracker feature/plugin works with the Autopilot system. TrueTracker uses active implement control, enabling the vehicle as well as the implement to guide to the line.

This improves accuracy and product placement.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

285

TrueTracker 14   TrueTracker setup

TrueTracker

The TrueTracker implement steering system is an optional upgrade for the Autopilot automated steering system. When the TrueTracker system is added to the Autopilot system, the implement receives separate guidance and steering to increase accuracy.

Implement steering actively steers the implement being towed by the vehicle. This prevents the implement from pulling to one side (called implement draft): l

On extremely sloped ground l

In variable soil conditions l

On curved guidance patterns

TrueTracker supports: l

Steering in reverse l

Straight and curved guidance patterns l

Independent implement offset l

Independent aggressiveness control for the implement l

Zero steering to center the coulters

The system has two parts: l

Additional hardware installed on the implement (which requires professional installation) l

Additional FM-1000 Plus application software provided by TrueTracker

For operation information, see

TrueTracker operation (page 439) .

Requirements

TrueTracker requires: l

An Autopilot system l

An unlock code l

AG-815 integrated radio with secondary receiver l

Second antenna l l

EXP-100 port expander cable

Platform kit for the implement actuation type l

Implement NavController and cabling

For information on TrueTracker cabling, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

For operation information, see

TrueTracker operation (page 439) .

286

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

14   TrueTracker setup Setup process

Setup process

To set up the TrueTracker system:

1. Activate TrueTracker. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

2. Complete the implement controller settings. See

Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system (page 287) .

3. Set up the implement so that the system can tell:

Which type of implement is attached l

How much area it covers l

How far it is offset

Make sure you are measuring the offsets from the antenna to the ground interaction point of the implement. See

Implement setup (page 156)

.

Note  – When you enter the number of implement sections, if the implement does not have sections, enter

1

.

4. If necessary, edit the vehicle profile. See

Vehicle settings for Autopilot system (page 165)

.

5. Calibrate the implement. See

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system (page 292)

.

Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

287

Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration Selection screen displays.

2. Tap

Edit

next to the implement.

3. At the Configuration screen, select

Setup screen displays.

4. Complete the:

TrueTracker and tap

Setup

. The Implement Controller l

Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system (page 288)

Engage settings for TrueTracker system (page 290)

l

Steering settings for TrueTracker system (page 291)

Vehicle settings for TrueTracker system

Note  – Your vehicle make and model were selected when your TrueTracker system was installed. If your vehicle data is correct, there is no need to edit the vehicle settings. If your vehicle data is not correct, edit the implement controller.

At the Implement Controller Setup screen's

Vehicle tab, complete the settings.

Setting

Connector

Current Selection

Explanation

TrueTracker connects to the port replicator connector on the EXP-

100 and uses the secondary GPS connector of the AG-815 integrated radio. (Autopilot connects to Port A of the TM-200 Module.)

Tap

Edit

if you need to change the: l

Vehicle profile

l

Implement model

When you tap

Edit

, the Edit Implement Controller screen displays.

Edit vehicle profile

At the Edit Implement Controller screen, change the settings as appropriate.

Choose new vehicle make/model

To select a new make and model from a database of vehicles (.vdb) on the FM-1000 Plus application:

Setting

Vehicle Profile Location

Model

Explanation

Select

From Database (new)

.

1. Tap

Browse

and select the required .vdb file.

288

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

14   TrueTracker setup Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system

Setting Explanation

2. Tap

OK

.

After calibrating a TrueTracker implement NavController, it is recommended to save the configuration:

1. Tap

Edit

and then

Save Implement to file

.

2. Enter the file name and tap

OK

.

Note  – This is the only method by which to save an implement

TrueTracker NavController configuration.

Choose existing vehicle

To select an existing vehicle from a previously saved file on the FM-1000 Plus application:

Setting

Vehicle Profile Location

Model

Explanation

Select

From Saved file (existing)

.

1. Tap Browse and select the required .vdb file.

2. Tap Open.

3. Tap

Change/Restore Implement

. The following message displays:

The specified implement model will now be selected on the Autopilot controller.

This will cause the Autopilot controller to be reset. Do you want to continue?

4. Tap OK to load the new configuration. A message displays information you the Autopilot controller will now be reinitialized.

5. Tap OK. Read the warnings and tap OK. The file is now loaded.

Change or restore implement

The

Change or Restore Implement

button is only active when you have selected either a new .vdb or a saved configuration. Until then it is not available for use.

The button is used to acknowledge and apply/load the desired .vdb or .config.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

289

Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

Engage settings for TrueTracker system

At the Implement Controller Setup screen's

Engage tab, complete the settings as appropriate.

Setting

Operator Timeout

Coverage Log

Two State Engage

Explanation

Amount of time allowed before the operator receives an alert for lack of activity. If the operator fails to respond to the alert, the vehicle begins to drive in a tight loop.

Manual

: Coverage logging starts only after you tap .

When Engaged

: Coverage is logged when the Autopilot system is engaged if no other system is controlling logging (such as Field-IQ or Yield

Monitoring). This setting can be edited in both the vehicle and implement setup. A change in one setup location will show up in the other setup location.

Off

: The

Engage

button engages with one tap: l

First tap: Engages implement and vehicle steering l

Second tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle steering

Implement First

: The

Engage

button engages with one tap: l

First tap: Engages the implement steering l

Second tap: Engages the vehicle steering l

Third tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle steering

Vehicle First

: The

Engage

button engages with one tap: l

First tap: Engages the vehicle steering l

Second tap: Engages the implement steering l

Third tap: Disengages both implement and vehicle steering

290

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

14   TrueTracker setup Implement controller setup for TrueTracker system

Steering settings for TrueTracker system

At the Implement Controller Setup screen's

Steering tab, complete the settings.

Setting

Nudge Increment or

Trim Increment

Explanation

Set the amount by which the Nudge or Trim buttons move the line back to the correct path, or by which the

Trim

buttons move the vehicle position.

The guidance line can move off target (requiring

Nudge

) as a result of: l

GPS position drift when you return to the field for guidance, for example after you pause or turn off the system l

GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field

The vehicle can steer offline (requiring

Trim

) as a result of: l

Uneven drag on a vehicle from an unbalanced implement.

l

Uneven drag on a vehicle from soil conditions.

End of Row Warning

Distance before the end of row warning occurs.

Note  – Longer vehicles that take longer to turn need an earlier warning and a greater distance.

Autosense

Valve on Speed

On or Off

For vehicles operating at speeds that are: l

Normal: Select

Normal > 0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s)

. Additional settings are supported only with NavController firmware versions 5.10 and later.

l

Slow: Select

Low > 0.1 m/s (0.3 ft/s) or

Ultra low > 0.02 m/s (0.07 ft/s)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

291

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

The auto steering system must be calibrated for the implement you are using.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

TrueTracker and then tap

Calibrate

. The Implement

Controller Calibration screen displays with a list of items to calibrate.

2. Select each item and tap

OK

.

3. Complete the calibration.

Controller orientation setup

1. At the Implement Controller Calibration screen, select

Controller Orientation and tap 

OK

. The

Autopilot Controller Orientation screen displays with a graphic that represents how the controller is oriented in the cab. (If the controller is in an orthogonal orientation, a graphic of it displays. If it is not in this orientation, no graphic will be displayed.)

The graphic of the controller is shown as though:

You are looking down on the vehicle from above.

l

The top of the screen points to the front of the vehicle.

2. Tap the buttons to select the orientation of the controller. The graphic of the controller will change as you tap the buttons.

3. If the controller is set at a sloped angle, tap the

Direct Entry tab. Then enter the yaw, pitch, and roll angles of the controller.

Note  – If you use direct entry to enter custom angles, the on-screen image of the controller does not display.

4. Tap

OK

to accept the new orientation or tap

Cancel

to exit.

Proportional Steering Gain calibration

WARNING –

The wheels can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the Autopilot system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury to occupants of the vehicle. Be prepared for sudden wheel movements.

Note  – Complete this calibration

only

:

- When the TrueTracker system's performance is less than acceptable

- After you complete

Implement Steering Sensor calibration (page 294)

The proportional steering gain (PGain) setting enables you to reach a compromise between rapid steering response and stability. Modifications to the PGain setting affect two steering characteristics:

292

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

14   TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system l

Slew Time: The amount of time the steering coulters take to move from the far left to the far right position and from the far right to the far left position.

l

Overshoot: The percentage by which the steering coulters exceed the commanded angle before they settle on the correct value.

Prior to completing this calibration: l

Complete the steering sensor calibration before you perform the proportional gain calibration.

l

Perform the Automatic Deadzone calibration immediately before you run the PGain calibration, even if the Automatic Deadzone calibration has been performed in the past.

l

Perform this calibration on a level surface, that is free of obstructions.

l

Run the engine at full throttle.

l

Raise the implement.

To correct slight variations caused by valve current response, friction, and hydraulic fluid viscosity, alter the PGain values: l

High PGain values: Decrease the slew time and increase the overshoot. This provides rapid responses, but can cause the steering to exhibit signs of instability (for example, a tendency to excessively overshoot).

l

Low PGain values: Increase the slew time and decrease the overshoot. This improves the stability but can introduce significant delays in the steering response and can cause the vehicle to oscillate from side to side.

Increase the proportional gain up to the point just before any one of the following occurs: l

Slew times no longer decrease (a low value is required) l

Overshoot exceeds 10% (depending on the Tracker unit) l

Steering coulters noticeably shake near end stops

Calibration steps

1. At the Implement Controller Setup screen, select

Steering Gain and tap 

OK

. The Autopilot Steering

Gain Calibration screen displays.

2. Tap

Next

to continue. The second Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.

3. Tap

Next

for the next two screens that display.

4. Follow the instructions. The system will automatically move the coulter wheels in both directions several times.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

293

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

WARNING –

The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury. Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements.

5. Tap

Start

. The system engages and performs the calibration.

6. Tap

Run Slew Test

. A warning message displays.

7. Tap

Next

.

8. Tap

Next

in the two screens that display next.

9. Test various gain settings while you monitor the implement steering performance and the values for

Slew Time and

Overshoot during the Turn Left phase.

10. Adjust the

New Gain value (if required).

11. Tap

Turn Left

. Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.

Note  – The optimum gain setting has short slew time (short millisecond reading) and overshoot percentage less than 10%.

12. Repeat Step 11 with

Turn Right

. Both turn buttons are unavailable while the wheels slew.

13. When you reach the best gain value, tap

OK

to save the value in the Autopilot controller memory.

14. If you want to restart the calibration procedure, tap

Cancel

.

Implement Steering Sensor calibration

Note  – Complete this calibration before you calibrate the Automated Steering Deadzone or Antenna Roll

Correction.

This calibration converts the voltage output of the steering sensor into an equivalent steering angle measurement.

Note  – This calibration is only available for implements that have a steering sensor providing feedback for the steering mechanism location. Sideshift hitches do not use this calibration.

Make sure that you: l

Perform this procedure on a level surface that is free of obstructions.

l

Follow the instructions on each page.

l

Run the engine at full throttle.

l

Raise the implement.

294

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

14   TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

Calibration steps

1. At the Implement Controller Calibration screen, select

Implement Steering Sensor Calibration

. The

Implement Steering Sensor Calibration screen displays.

2. For vehicles with coulters, make sure they are raised out of the ground. For other articulation methods, make sure the vehicle is slowly moving forward in a wide open space to allow free movement of the steering mechanism.

3. Tap

Start

.

4. Perform the calibration. The system will automatically steer to the right and to the left. The value for

Volts updates as the wheels are steered.

Implement Automated Deadzone calibration

The Automated Deadzone calibration for the implement runs a series of tests on the valve and steering hydraulics to determine the point at which steering movement occurs. In this test, the system independently opens and closes each side of the steering system while determining the point at which wheel movement occurs.

WARNING –

During the Implement Automatic Deadzone calibration, the system moves the wheels that steer the implement. To avoid injury, make sure that the area around the vehicle and implement is clear.

Before you begin calibration: l

Complete the

Implement Steering Sensor calibration (page 294)

.

l

Make sure the hydraulic fluid is at normal operating temperature when you run this procedure

(to ensure optimal system performance). On some vehicles with large reservoirs, it may take several hours for the fluid to reach operating level, especially if the implement circuit is lightly loaded. Consult the vehicle documentation to determine if the hydraulic fluid temperature can be shown on a vehicle console.

If you perform the calibration while the system is still cold, repeat both the Deadzone and the

Proportional gain calibration procedures after the system is at operating temperature.

Calibration steps

1. Place the vehicle in an area that is free of hazards.

2. Raise the implement.

3. At the Implement Controller Setup screen, select

Implement Automatic Deadzone and tap 

OK

. The

Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.

Note  – Read the onscreen instructions on each page.

4. Tap

Next

to continue. The second Autopilot Automated Deadzone Calibration screen displays.

5. Tap

Next

in the two screens that display next.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

295

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

6. Follow the instructions. The system will automatically move the coulter wheels, steering wheels or other mechanism in both directions several times.

7. Tap

Start

. The system engages and performs the calibration.

Automated Deadzone error messages

If a calibration cycle is unable to complete successfully, an error message will display.

Message: Error - .....

Steering Close To End Stops

Explanation

Before the calibration cycle could be completed, the measured steering angle approached the end stops.

Retry, and if the problem persists, instead of centering the steering at the start of each cycle, try turning the steering in the opposite direction to that which is being tested so that the calibration procedure has a greater range to test over.

Valve Connectors Could Be Swapped The calibration test sensed the steering turning in the opposite direction to what was expected. Retry, and if the problem persists either the valve connectors have been accidentally swapped or the steering sensor calibration was performed incorrectly.

No GPS

No Steering Response Detected

Unable To Determine DZ: Try Again

A GPS receiver must be connected and outputting positions before the software can run the calibration procedure.

During the calibration cycle, insufficient movement was sensed in order for the calibration to complete. If the problem persists, the hydraulic installation could be faulty.

A problem occurred when trying to compute dead zone.

Retry, and if the problem persists, contact Technical

Support.

Antenna position and roll offset correction

Before configuring the antenna compensation, make sure that: l

TrueTracker is completely set up.

l

The Autopilot system is properly configured. See

Autopilot system (page 164) .

l

The correct GPS corrections are enabled. See

GPS receiver settings (page 116) .

296

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

14   TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

1. At the Implement Controller Setup screen, select

Roll/Antenna Compensation and tap 

OK

. The

Autopilot Roll/Antenna Compensation screen displays.

2. Enter the appropriate settings and tap

OK

. Make sure the value entered for antenna height and distance from centerline match those entered under

Implement Geometry

.

Setting

Antenna Height Above

Ground

Antenna Distance from centerline

Roll Offset

Implement Position

Explanation

a. Place the tractor and implement on a flat, level surface.

b. Measure the distance from the ground to the base of the

GPS receiver (or antenna).

c. Enter this value in the

Antenna Height Above Ground entry box.

a. Place the tractor and implement on a flat, level surface.

b. Measure the distance from the centerline of the implement to the center of the GPS receiver (or antenna).

c. Enter this value into the

Antenna Distance from centerline entry box and indicate whether it is left or right of the centerline.

Note  – Values to the left of the centerline are displayed as negative numbers. The nose of the vehicle is considered the forward direction.

a. Choose the method that best matches the conditions to

calculate the roll offset:  Coulter wheel track offset method

(page 297)

or

Flag offset method (page 298) .

b. Enter the average offset value in the

Roll Offset entry box.

Select the offline direction, depending on whether the roll offset distance is to the left or right.

Coulter wheel track offset method

WARNING –

The steering coulters can move abruptly during the Proportional Steering Gain procedure while the

TrueTracker system tests the hydraulic response to the steering commands. These sudden movements can cause collisions with nearby obstacles or cause injury. Be prepared for sudden steering coulter movements.

1. Drive the tractor to a relatively flat field where tire impressions are visible and where you can complete passes of at least 400 m (1320 ft) in length.

2. Reset the roll offset value to 0 (zero).

3. Start a new field.

4. Create a straight AB Line.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

297

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

5. Create a clean set of tire tracks in the field. To do this, start a new pass away from the area where the AB Line was created. When the system is stable, engage automatic steering mode and allow the Autopilot and TrueTracker systems to complete the pass.

6. At the end of the pass, turn the tractor around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction.

7. Engage automated steering mode and allow the system to complete the pass.

8. In the middle of the return pass, stop the tractor and confirm that the current position is directly on the AB Line. This ensures there is no cross track error.

9. Park the tractor and exit the cab. Evaluate the coulter wheel track pattern between the first and return paths.

10. Measure the difference between the track passes and record the distance. Also note whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.

Note  – The offset should be consistently to the left or right.

Offset distance Offset direction Test

Run

1

2

3

Total =

Total / 3 (average offset value) =

11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs. Average the results of the three runs. (Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three). Use the table in step 10 to record your results.

Flag offset method

1. Drive the vehicle to a relatively flat area where you can complete passes that are at least 400 m

(1320 ft) in length.

2. Reset the

Roll Offset value to 0 (zero) on the Roll Correction screen.

3. Start a new field.

4. Create a straight AB Line.

298

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

14   TrueTracker setup Implement calibration for TrueTracker system

5. Start a new pass. Engage automatic steering mode when the system is stable. Stop the tractor midway through the pass. Confirm that there is no cross track error: the current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line.

6. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Insert a flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline for this pass.

7. Complete the pass. Turn the vehicle around to return along the same pass from the opposite direction.

8. Engage automatic steering mode. Stop the vehicle midway down the pass very close to the marker flag. Confirm that there is no cross track error. The current vehicle position should be directly on the AB Line.

9. Park the vehicle and exit the cab. Insert a second flag in the ground to mark the implement centerline for this pass. Note whether the second pass is to the left or the right of the first pass.

10. Measure the difference between the flags for the two passes and record the distance. Also record whether the return pass is to the left or the right of the original pass. Record the results.

Note  – The offset should be consistently to the left or right.

Offset distance Offset direction Test

Run

1

2

3

Total =

Total / 3 (average offset value) =

11. Repeat steps 5 through 10 two more times, for a total of three test runs. Average the results of the three runs. (Total the offset distances from the three passes and divide by three). Use the table in step 10 to record your results.

Line Acquisition Aggressiveness calibration

1. Atthe Implement Controller Setup screen, select

Line Acquisition and tap 

OK

. The Autopilot Line

Acquisitioncreen displays.

2. Adjust the line acquisition aggressiveness slider.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

299

Implement calibration for TrueTracker system 14   TrueTracker setup

The slider controls how aggressively the implement approaches the guidance line, using a scale from 50% to 150%. The optimal value for each profile is not necessarily 100%. It varies for different implement profiles.

300

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

15

Vehicle Sync setup

In this chapter:

Vehicle Sync

Setup steps

302

302

Vehicle Sync integrates with the Field-IQ crop input control system, Tru Count clutches and the Yield Monitoring system.

Multiple users can share coverage maps, providing section control for minimized overlap and seed savings during planting season.

In conjunction with the Field-IQ system and

Yield Monitoring, Vehicle Sync can influence seed placement as well as the header for increased accuracy.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

301

Vehicle Sync 15   Vehicle Sync setup

Vehicle Sync

Vehicle Sync supports up to six vehicles within range of approximately 325 yards (300 m) and in direct line of sight with each other.

Requirements

For Vehicle Sync, you need: l

FM-1000 Plus application l

Vehicle Sync unlock l

DCM-300 Modem (page 144)

l

High-gain Wi-Fi antenna kit

For operational information, see

Vehicle Sync operation (page 442)

.

Setup steps

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

Vehicle Sync and tap

Setup

. The Vehicle Sync Configuration screen displays.

3. On the

Setup tab, enter the appropriate settings.

Setting

Channel

Static IP

Explanation

Make sure that the channel that is selected is the same on all the vehicles that you want to link. You can link up to six vehicles.

Must be unique for each vehicle being synced. If two vehicles have the same IP address, tap

Generate New

for one of the displays.

CAUTION – Do not remove power from the display or the DCM-300 modem for 10 minutes after you tap the Generate New button.

Display Name

Enter a descriptive name that will be easy to recognize and select when you join the vehicles.

Note  – If you already have Office Sync, this item is populated with the vehicle name that you set up earlier.

4. On the

Data tab, complete the settings and tap

OK

.

302

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

15   Vehicle Sync setup Setup steps

When there is excessive data transfer, the FM-1000 Plus application may slow down. To help with this, it may be useful to limit the amount of data sent back and forth between displays two FM-1000 Plus application.

The

Coverage and

Comms Strategy settings enable you to limit the amount of data the FM-1000

Plus application sends out. For this to be effective, it is recommended that you limit the data sent out for all displays FM-1000 Plus application in the group .

Setting

Coverage

Comms Strategy

Explanation

l

All Layers: This transfers all applied layers for the Field-IQ system.

Layer 1 only: This setting limits transfer and receiving of data to only the first product.

Original: All displays always broadcast data. Every display in the workgroup is talking always and at the same time. This slows down communication traffic across the DCM and is used for heavy traffic workgroups.

l

Round-Round Robin: Each display takes turns communicating information to the rest of the work group. Displays talk one at a time instead of the original format.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

303

Setup steps 15   Vehicle Sync setup

304

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

16

Water Management setup

In this chapter:

Water Management features

FieldLevel II Survey/Design

FieldLevel II Leveling

Tandem / dual scraper setup

WM-Drain setup

306

307

310

317

320

Water Management functionality includes survey, design, leveling and WM-Drain functions.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

305

Water Management features 16   Water Management setup

Water Management features

Water Management includes: l

Survey: Creating surveys of areas. You use a high-accuracy GPS receiver on the water management implement to create a topographic survey of the layout of your field. The threedimensional data shows the surface topography of the land.

Note  – If you are working in a field that has already been leveled, you may not need to perform a survey and you can go straight to leveling with the FieldLevel II system or installing tile using WM-Drain.

l

Design: After you complete the survey, you can use it to design the optimum drainage slope that can be graded with minimal dirt movement.

l

Leveling: After you create a survey of the field and a design for how to modify it, you can use

FieldLevel II to control a land-leveling implement on your vehicle and to adjust the land to an optimal slope.

l

WM-Drain: Surface and subsurface drainage installation

Water Management system enables you to: l

Conserve precious water resources and help control the water table.

l

Reduce erosion and conserve topsoil.

l

Perform touch-up leveling each year.

l

Use technology with a larger operating range than a laser and no vertical limit.

l

Work with your existing agriculture guidance products to manage your fields with one collective system. For example, you can connect the Autopilot system to the FM-1000 Plus application at the same time as the implement.

Requirements

The Water Management system requires: l

An FM-1000 Plus application, with or without the Autopilot system l

A platform kit to suit your vehicle and valve type (P/N 55045-xx) l

An unlock code for the water management functionality l

A leveling or drainage implement

306

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup FieldLevel II Survey/Design

FieldLevel II Survey/Design

Benchmarks

Before you can create a survey, you must set a point at a known location called a benchmark. When you create a benchmark, the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base station for that specific point in your field.

When you are leveling, you use benchmarks to: l

Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re-calibrate your exact position. This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling.

l

Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point.

The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag labeled MB . Field coordinates are calculated from this point.

Subsequent benchmarks display as orange flags labeled with their corresponding number .

When you tap a button to create a benchmark, a countdown timer runs for 30 seconds and then the system creates the benchmark. To stop the averaging during the countdown, tap

Bench

again.

Rebenching

If you plan to shift the location of the base station each time you use the survey data, you can configure the system to force a re-bench. The system will not allow you to engage automatic control until the system has been re-benched.

When you are within the circle around an existing benchmark, a message displays on the Run screen telling you how close you are to that benchmark.

If you tap the

Rebench

button when the receiver is within the circular radius of a benchmark, the receiver is calibrated over the existing benchmark.

When you re-bench, the system automatically selects the benchmark closest to you but allows you to select the benchmark you want to use.

Settings

1. Activate FieldLevel Survey/Design for use. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

2. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays. Complete the settings.

FieldLevel Survey/Design and tap

Setup

. The Survey Setup

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

307

FieldLevel II Survey/Design 16   Water Management setup

Setting

Survey Height Offset

Survey Point Density

Cut/fill Color Range

Explanation

Represents the difference between the height of the blade when surveying, and the height of the blade when moving dirt.

To measure this value, park the implement on a flat surface and raise the blade up to its highest limit and then measure the distance from the bottom of the blade to the surface of the ground. The

Survey Height Offset will be applied to all surveys to avoid the need to re-bench between

Survey mode and moving dirt.

When you create a survey of a field, this setting determines the distance between the collected survey mapping points. The approximate distances between points are: l

Coarse: 7.8 m (25 ft)

Medium: 3 m (10 ft) l

Fine: 1.5 m (5 ft)

Defines the vertical range in which the colors are spread over the cut/fill map.

The cut/fill map displays only after you have surveyed the field and defined a design plane. The range is displayed from the highest cut value to the highest fill value.

For example: If your highest cut value is 1 foot and your highest fill value is 1 foot, and you set your Cut/fill color range to 2 feet, then the colors will be spread evenly across your cut/fill map. If you change the cut/fill color range to 1 foot, the colors will become more focused around the neutral area, providing more detail closer to the grade.

3. Select the

Relative Heights tab and complete the settings.

By default, coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark. Setting relative positions establishes the coordinates of the master benchmark when it is set. These coordinates are then used for field leveling and topographic mapping every time the field is opened.

308

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup FieldLevel II Survey/Design

Setting

Relative Heights

Relative X

Relative Y

Height Offset

Force Re-bench

Explanation

Select

Enabled from the list.

By default, coordinates are recorded relative to the master benchmark. Setting the relative positions establishes the coordinates of the master benchmark when it is set. These coordinates are then used for field leveling and topographic mapping every time the field is opened.

X-axis coordinate (Relative X)

Y-axis coordinate (Relative Y) height (Height Offset)

Whether the system will force you to re-bench each time that you reload the field.

Note  – If you choose No, the RTK base station must be placed in exactly the same position for the field to be correct.

4. Tap

OK

to return to the Survey Setup screen.

Tip  – To view relative offset values on the Run screen, set the offsets as status text items on the slide-out tab.

For operational information, see

Create / save a design (page 449) .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

309

FieldLevel II Leveling 16   Water Management setup

FieldLevel II Leveling

The FieldLevel II system: l

Uses a high-accuracy GPS receiver with an antenna mounted on the implement blade to measure and control its elevation l

Defines the three-dimensional height for the field and controls how the implement reshapes the ground l

Automatically raises and lowers the blade on the implement to match the design height anywhere in the field l

Includes a color cut/fill map, simple on-screen adjustments, and automatic blade control makes leveling easy l

Supports tandem or dual scraper implements

With a tandem system, the second scraper is also controlled by GPS. You can work in areas requiring cuts and fill two scraper buckets before you have to empty the scrapers.

l

With a dual system, an antenna on each side of the scraper controls two independent cylinders. This creates a more accurate surface by controlling the height of both ends of the scraper.

l

Supports the EZ-Remote joystick or with custom switches controlled by a Signal Input Module

(SIM)

Requirements

The FieldLevel II system requires: l

FM-1000 Plus application, with or without the Autopilot system l

Platform kit to suit your vehicle and valve type (P/N 55045-xx) l

Unlock code for the field leveling functionality l

Leveling or drainage implement

Setup process

Note  – Before you can configure the system, it must be professionally installed. For more information, contact your local reseller.

FieldLevel II setup and calibration include:

1.

Implement settings for FieldLevel II (page 311)

2.

GPS receiver setup (page 311)

310

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling

3.

FieldLevel II settings (page 312)

4.

Valve module calibration (page 316)

Leveling models

The FieldLevel II system has five leveling models: l

Point and Slope: The system levels at a consistent upward or downward slope, regardless of the vehicle’s direction. This can be useful for installing tile and field drainage.

l

Multiplane Design: The FieldLevel II system supports external leveling designs from Multiplane design software. This software can run a wide range of “what if” scenarios, enabling you to create complex designs with multiple field sections. You can export these design control files and then load them into the FieldLevel II system to shape the field surface based on the work in the office.

l

Plane (flat): Use this leveling model to level a field that has previously been measured with a laser. The FieldLevel II GPS system will correct the design heights to a plane surface to match your previous laser system.

l

Plane (Earth Surface): Use this model to level a field using the FieldLevel II GPS system. No corrections will be made to a flat plane, so the surface will be curved to match the surface of the

Earth. This is the most accurate model to use so that water sits at an equal depth across a field.

l

Contour: The system guides you around a contour and indicates whether to drive up or down to maintain your current level. This is designed for marking rice levees.

For cabling information, see XCN-2050 Cabling Guide.

For operational information, see

Leveling (page 450)

.

Implement settings for FieldLevel II

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

FieldLevel II and then tap

Diagnostics

.

3. At the Field Level Diagnostics screen, use the

Height Control options to set the target height.

4. You can test valve functionality at any time at this screen without the need for a GPS position or an active field design open. See

FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test (page 514) .

GPS receiver setup

The FieldLevel II system uses its own GPS receiver to record the exact position of the leveling blade.

To configure this receiver:

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

311

FieldLevel II Leveling 16   Water Management setup

1. At the Configuration screen, select the

GPS Receiver that is associated with FieldLevel II and then tap

Setup

. The WM-Drain GPS Receiver Settings screen displays.

2. From the Receiver list, select the GPS receiver you will use for your FieldLevel system. It is recommended that you tap Internal Primary when configuring the display as a stand-alone

FieldLevel II system, but you can use an external GPS receiver. If you are also using the

Autopilot system, it is recommended that you use Internal Secondary, as the Autopilot system will be occupying the Internal Primary receiver.

3. From the

Corrections list, select

RTK for all FieldLevel II applications.

4. Set the

Network ID to the same network ID that is set in the base station receiver.

5. Tap

OK

.

6. FieldLevel II is now configured and ready to use.

FieldLevel II settings

Complete the FieldLevel II settings: l

Settings tab (page 312)

l

Blade Settings tab (page 314)

l

Relative Heights tab (page 314)

l

Valve Setup tab (page 315)

l

Height Filter Tab (page 315)

Settings tab

1. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays.

FieldLevel II

2. Select the

Settings tab and complete the settings.

and then tap

Setup

. The FieldLevel II Setup

312

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling

Setting

Operation Mode

Cut/Fill Range

Warning

VDOP Level

Explanation

Choose your leveling model.

Point and Slope: Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage.

l

Multiplane design: Uses more complex surface designs imported from the MultiPlane design software.

l

Plane (Flat): Levels the field to a design plane. The plane can be configured in the on-board software using benchmarks and slopes, or by creating a plane of best-fit over a surveyed surface

(Autoslope). This leveling model uses a high-accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling implement. However, the design heights are corrected to a plane surface to match your old laser-leveled fields.

l

Plane (Earth Surface): Levels the field to a design plane. The plane can be configured in the software using benchmarks and slopes, or by creating a plane of best-fit over a surveyed surface

(Autoslope). It uses a high-accuracy GPS receiver mounted on the leveling implement.

l

Contour: Uses the FM-1000 Plus application's on-screen lightbar to guide the vehicle along contours to keep the vehicle at the same elevation. This can be used for levee marking and applications that require guidance to elevations.

Acceptable warning distance.

When Auto mode is engaged and the blade is outside this range for more than three seconds, a warning displays.

Vertical Dilution of Precision: A measure of the vertical accuracy of the GPS signal. If the VDOP reaches this value, a warning message displays.

A VDOP setting of less than 3 is recommended.

Correction Age

Timeout

On Grade Tolerance Tolerance for a cut / fill value being considered on grade. The

On Grade

Tolerance is shown as the green color in the Cut /Fill scale. If a value of

0.5' is used for the on grade tolerance, any value between 0.5' of cut and 0.5' of fill will show as green on the Cut / Fill map.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

313

FieldLevel II Leveling 16   Water Management setup

Blade Settings tab

Setting

Blade Step

Course Blade Step

Antenna Height

On-grade Limit

Disengage Raise

Remote Input Auto

Explanation

The increment that you require the blade to move each time it is stepped up or down by the plus or minus offset buttons.

Coarse mode enables you to offset the target height in large increments with a single tap, such as a 0.2' fill.

The increment you want the blade to move each time it is stepped up or down in Coarse mode.

Height of the antenna above the lower edge of the blade.

Distance the blade can move before the green blade height indicators change to thin red arrows. At twice this distance, the height indicators become thick red arrows. See

Blade Settings tab (page 314)

.

When you disable Auto while scraping a field, you can set a time value that will automatically raise the blade. For example, if you set 0.5s, the blade will raise for half a second when you turn off Auto mode.

You can attach a remote for enabling and disabling Auto mode. This remote is controlled with the Remote Input Auto setting.

Relative Heights tab

For survey data collection or field leveling, set relative the relative offset height so that the coordinates are recorded relative to the offsets set for the master benchmark.

Setting

Relative Heights

Relative X

Relative Y

Height Offset

Force Re-Bench

Explanation

Enabled: For relative heights from the master benchmark

Disabled: For GPS heights at all times

The X coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative heights are enabled.

The Y coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative heights are enabled.

The height value that will be applied to the master benchmark if relative heights are enabled.

If set to

Yes and the field has been closed and opened again, the system will not let you begin work again until you have re-benched. Use this setting if you are using a different base station setup between work sessions.

314

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup FieldLevel II Leveling

Setting Explanation

If you have a permanent base station setup that is never moved, select

No

. The system will not force you to rebench.

To view relative offset values on the Run screen, set the offsets as status text items on the slide-out tab. See

Status items (page 79) .

Valve Setup tab

Setting

Valve Module

Valve Type

Valve Inverted

Explanation

Type of valve module that is detected

Select the type of valve that is connected.

Not Inverted

: (Default) Keep this setting unless the tank and pressure hoses have been installed incorrectly on the valve.

Inverted

: Select if tank and pressure hoses have not been installed correctly. This eliminates the need to reverse the hoses.

Height Filter Tab

Choose the filter for height:

Setting

None

Average

Jump Detect

Explanation

This setting (this is the raw GPS data used for height) is recommended.

The height will be averaged using the number of positions selected. This will smooth spikes in height readings but will introduce a latency into the controls.

This will filter out some jumps in the height readings. When selected, the following values must be entered: l

Threshold: The change in height value that will trigger the filter l

Decay Time: After the filter is triggered, the amount of time it takes to gradually resume using the raw GPS height

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

315

FieldLevel II Leveling 16   Water Management setup

Valve module calibration

Note  – Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle, the tractor computer may need to be put into a special mode. Refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

II Calibration screen displays.

FieldLevel II and then tap

Calibrate

. The FieldLevel

2. Set the vehicle throttle to 100%.

3. For automatic calibration, tap

Start

.

The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers. This process takes approximately 8 – 10 minutes.

4. To manually calibrate the valve, enter values in the three Manual Calibration entry boxes and then tap

OK

.

Note  – Stopped DeadBand is the control deadband that is applied when the implement is traveling at less than 0.1 mph.

316

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup Tandem / dual scraper setup

Tandem / dual scraper setup

For improved productivity when leveling a field, the FieldLevel II system supports tandem or dual scraper implements.

With a tandem system, the second scraper is also controlled by GPS. This means that you can work in areas requiring cuts, and fill two scraper buckets before you have to empty the scrapers.

With a dual system, an antenna on each side of the scraper controls two independent cylinders.

This creates a more accurate surface by controlling the height of both ends of the scraper.

Tandem scraper

The tandem scraper feature tows two scrapers, one behind the other. This type of leveling provides increased efficiency as it allows for the blade of each scraper to be controlled independently from the other. This means more dirt can be cut before you have to drive to a fill area and remove dirt from the scraper buckets.

For operational information, see

Tandem scraper controls (page 463) .

Dual scraper

A dual scraper is single scraper with two GPS antennas, one at each end of the blade. This allows for control of the roll of the blade, giving a more accurate surface. This configuration is ideal for complex surfaces with high variability slopes.

For operational information, see

Dual scraper controls (page 462)

.

Note  – For the FieldLevel II dual system you must use a scraper with dual hydraulic controls.

Set up

Note  – Before you can configure the system, it must be professionally installed. For more information, contact your local reseller.

l

Implement setup (page 318)

l

Prepare connections (page 318)

l

Primary receiver setup (page 318)

l

Secondary receiver setup (page 318)

l

Tandem / Dual settings (page 318)

l

Tandem / dual calibration (page 319)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

317

Tandem / dual scraper setup 16   Water Management setup

Implement setup

If you have not already configured the implement, see

Implement setup (page 318) .

Prepare connections

If not already installed on the FM-1000 Plus application, install: l

FieldLevel II l

Tandem/Dual

When installed, the Configuration screen will show: l

FieldLevel II with its associated GPS receiver l

Tandem/Dual with its associated GPS receiver

Primary receiver setup

FieldLevel II controls the primary receiver.

1. At the Configuration screen below Field Level, select the

Setup

.

2. From the

Receiver list, select

Internal Primary

.

3. From the

Corrections list, select

RTK

.

GPS receiver listed and then tap

4. Set the

Network ID field to the same network ID that is set in the base receiver.

Secondary receiver setup

Tandem/Dual controls the secondary receiver.

1. At the Configuration screen below Tandem/Dual, select the

Setup

.

2. From the

Receiver list, select

Internal Secondary

.

GPS receiver listed and then tap

Tandem / Dual settings

You must set up the FM-1000 Plus application to control either a tandem configuration or a dual configuration, depending upon the implement being used.

At the Configuration screen, select

Tandem/Dual and then tap

Setup

. The Tandem/Dual Setup screen displays.

318

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup Tandem / dual scraper setup

Setting

Type

Antenna Height

Disengage Raise

Explanation

Tandem (Back): Default. Select to control two implements, one towed behind the other.

Dual (Right): Select for a dual setup.

Height of the antenna installed on either the rear implement, or the antenna installed on the right side of a single implement. Measure the antenna height vertically from the ground to the base of the antenna.

Note  – For FieldLevel II, the antenna height value can be altered on the Blade

Settings tab and relates to the antenna installed on either the front implement, or the antenna installed on the left side of a single implement.

Used to control the rear implement or the right side of a single implement when Auto is disengaged. If you set it to 0.000s then the blade will not move up when you disengage.

Note  – For FieldLevel II, the disengage raise value can be altered from the Blade

Settings tab and relates to the front implement’s blade, or the left side of the blade on a single implement.

Note  – For a tandem system, move the blade up when Auto is disengaged on both the front and back implements as you will be swapping between the two.

For a dual setup with a single implement, we recommend that you have the left and right Disengage Raise values set to the same value.

Tandem / dual calibration

When working with a tandem/dual configuration, the valve module must be calibrated for both: l

FieldLevel II: Relates to the front implement cylinder in a tandem configuration, or the left side cylinder of a single implement.

l

Tandem/Dual: Relates to the rear implement cylinder in a tandem configuration, or the right side cylinder of a single implement.

Depending on the make and manufacturer of your vehicle, the tractor computer may need to be put into a special mode. Please refer to the FieldLevel II Installation Guide for your vehicle type.

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Tandem/Dual and then tap

Calibrate

.

2. Set the vehicle throttle to 100%.

3. Tap

Start

.

The system performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers. This process takes approximately 8 – 10 minutes.

4. To manually calibrate the valve, enter values in the three

Manual Calibration entry boxes and then tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

319

WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

WM-Drain setup

1. If you have not completed implement setup, complete this before continuing.

2. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays.

3. Complete the settings on each tab:

WM-Survey l

Implement control settings (page 321)

Limit and increment settings (page 323)

and then tap

Setup

. The WM-Drain Setup l

Relative heights settings (page 324)

l

Valve settings (page 323)

l

Operation settings (page 324)

4. Tap

OK

when you have completed all the settings.

5.

Calibrate the valve (page 330)

.

For operational information, see

WM-Drain operation (page 464)

.

320

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup WM-Drain setup

Implement control settings

Implement tab

At the

Implement tab, enter the appropriate settings.

Setting

Control Type

Height Gain

Explanation

Height Control

: Select if no IMD-600 slope sensor is installed, or if an

IMD-600 slope sensor is being used for roll corrections only.

Pitch Control

: Select to allow the IMD-600 slope sensor to adjust for roll and pitch corrections.

Height and Pitch

: Select to allow the IMD-600 sensor to control pitch and height.

The amount of pitch control used to get to the target height with

Pitch Control or

Height and Pitch control types.

l

A higher number will more aggressively pitch the plow if it is off target.

l

A lower number will keep the plow closer to the grade and more slowly approach the target height.

Default value for

Pitch Control is 0.2, and for

Height and Pitch is 0.0.

Increase this by 0.05 increments and fine tune if the plow is not pitching enough to achieve the target depth.

Antenna Height

Antenna Selection

The distance from the antenna to the bottom of the boot.

Select the appropriate antenna from the list.

Survey Height Offset The distance from the tip of the boot to the ground when the plow is in the survey position (height and pitch cylinders both in full up position).

Survey Point Density

Slope Sensor (IMD-600)

The distance between the collected survey mapping points.

Select the serial number of the installed IMD-600 slope sensor that is used for pitch and roll corrections. It is recommended that the

IMD-600 be installed parallel to the bottom of the boot. See XCN-

2050 Cabling Guide.

IMD-600 is a CAN device and must connect to Port A of the TM-200

Module.

Click

Measurements

to open the

Tile Plow Measurements

screen and select the appropriate settings.

Slope Transition Distance

Distance required to transition the plow to a different slope

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

321

WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

Setting

Antenna

section

Setting

Horizontal

Vertical

Explanation

increment. If you are using the

Pitch Control or

Height and Pitch control type, it is recommended to set this measurement to twice the length of the boot.

If you are on a particularly rough ground, you can increase this distance to three or four times the boot length for smoother operation of the pitch cylinder. If you want the plow to follow the ground contours more closely, reduce this distance to the boot length.

Tile Plow Measurements

At the Tile Plow Measurements screen (when you are setting up Pitch Control and Height and Pitch control types), complete the settings and tap

OK

.

IMD-600

section

Setting

Label Faces

Connector Faces

Pitch Offset

Roll Correction

Explanation

The direction (Up, Down, Left, Right) that the IMD-600 label faces in relation to the direction the plow travels during installation.

The direction (Left, Right, Forward, Back) that the IMD-600 connector faces in relation to the direction the plow travels during installation.

The amount of angle or tilt (up or down) if the sensor is not installed parallel to the bottom of the boot.

If you adjust the pitch offset, this can help correct the boot pitch if it is not running level through the ground.

Corrects for static roll caused by minor variations in the sensor mounting.

Explanation

The distance from the leading edge of the boot to the center line of the antenna. The horizontal distance should be positive if the antenna is forward from the tip of the boot and negative if it is backward.

The distance from the bottom of the boot to the base of the antenna dome.

322

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup WM-Drain setup

Setting

Lateral

Boot Length

Offset

Antenna Selection

Explanation

Offset of the antenna from the center line of the pipe.

Distance from where the pipe exits, to the back of the boot, to the leading edge of the boot.

The distance of the GNSS antenna from the approximate center of vehicle rotation (the fixed rear axle of a towed plow or the center of the tracks). Forward is the antenna in front of the pivot point. Backward is the antenna behind the pivot point.

Select the antenna from the list.

Valve settings

Select the

Valve Setup tab and complete the settings for the PWM valve.

Setting

Valve Module

Valve Type

Valve Inverted

Explanation

Displays the type of valve module that is detected.

Select the type of valve that is connected.

Leave this value as

Not Inverted unless the raise and lower hoses have been installed incorrectly on the valve.

If this is the case, select

Inverted to eliminate the need to reverse the hoses.

Limit and increment settings

Select the

Steps tab and complete the settings.

Setting

Height Step

Pitch Step

On-grade Limit

Slope Adjust

Explanation

Fine

: You can change height steps in small increments.

Coarse

: You can change height steps in large increments.

Fine

: You can change height steps in small increments.

Coarse

: You can change height steps in large increments.

This limit sets the distance the blade can move before the green blade height indicators change to a thin red arrow. At twice this distance, the height indicators become think red arrows. See blade position in

Blade level indicators (page 452)

.

This percentage controls the amount the gradient changes

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

323

WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

Setting Explanation

each time you increase or decrease the slope on the

Install tab when in Point and Slope mode.

For example, if the leveling gradient is 3% and the

Slope Adjust value is set to 2%, the leveling gradient changes to 5% if you decrease the slope.

Relative heights settings

Select the

Relative Heights tab and complete the settings.

Setting

Relative Heights

Relative X

Relative Y

Height Offset

Explanation

Enabled: Select to use the relative heights from the master benchmark.

Disabled: Select to use GPS heights at all times.

If relative heights are enabled, this is the X coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark.

If relative heights are enabled, this is the Y coordinate that will be applied to the master benchmark.

If relative heights are enabled, this is theheight value that will be applied to the master benchmark.

Operation settings

Select the

Operation tab and enter the settings.

Setting

Force Rebench

VDOP Level

As-Built Logging

Explanation

Yes: If the field has been closed and then reopened, the system will not allow you to begin work until you have rebenched. Use this setting if you are using a different base station setup between work sessions.

No: Select if you have a permanent base station setup that is never moved.

Vertical Dilution of Precision measurs the vertical accuracy of the GPS signal. If the VDOP reaches the value you enter, a warning will display. A setting of less than 3 is recommended.

Manual: Logs data if hydraulics are engaged and if you have begun logging in the Run screen.

324

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup

Setting

Filter Type

WM-Drain setup

Explanation

Engage: Logs data only if Auto is engaged on the plow.

None: Raw GPS data is used for height. This setting is recommended.

Average: The height will be averaged using the number of positions selected. This will smooth spikes in height readings but will introduce a latency into the controls.

Jump detect: This will filter out some jumps in the height readings. When you select this, you must enter the following values: l

Threshold: The change in height value that will trigger the value.

l

Decay Time: When this filter is triggered, this will be the amount of time it takes to gradually resume using the raw

GPS height.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

325

WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

Calibrate WM-Drain for cantilever plow

Follow the steps in sequence for consistent calibration results and improved performance. If you skip steps, you may experience inconsistent results.

Step 1: Select the mode

1. At the Configuration screen, select screen displays.

WM-Drain and then tap

Setup

. The WM-Drain Setup

2. On the

Implement tab, from the

Control Type list select Pitch Control.

3. Tap

Measurements

. The Tile Plow Measurements screen displays.

4. Enter all measurements as accurately as possible to the nearest 0.25 inch (1 cm).

5. Tap

OK

to return to the WM-Drain Setup screen.

6. On the

Implement tab, enter values for

Height Gain and

Slope Transition

.

7. Calibrate the roll offset.

Step 2: Set up the system

In the Implement tab, enter the values for

Height Gain and

Slope Transition Distance

. See

Implement control settings (page 321) .

Step 3: Calibrate Roll Offset

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Diagnostics screen displays.

WM-Drain and then tap

Diagnostics

. The Drainage

2. Complete the roll offset calibration using one of two methods.

Method 1

1. Park the system on a known level surface. Ensure the boot is flat on the ground.

2. Note the

Roll value on the Drainage Diagnostics screen.

3. At the Tile Measurements screen, for the

Roll Correction value enter an offsetting value.

For example: l

Current angle reading = .07°

IMD-600 Roll reading = -0.2° l

Roll Offset

= 0.9°

4. Return to the Drainage Diagnostics screen. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the filtered

326

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup WM-Drain setup reading to settle on a stable value.

If the

Roll value is ± 0-0.1°, the roll offset calculation has been calibrated correctly.

l

If the

Roll value is not ± 0-0.1°, note the value and then repeat Step 3 to enter a value that corrects for any remaining error.

For example: l

Current angle reading = .07°

IMD-600

Roll reading = 0.5° l

Increase

Roll Offset by 0.2°.

Roll Offset now = 1.1°

Method 2

1. Park the system on a known level surface. Ensure the boot is flat on the ground.

2. Place a digital angle indication device flat against a smooth surface on the side of the system's boot shank. Note the roll angle of the boot shank.

3. Note the

Roll value that displays on the Drainage Diagnostics screen.

4. At the Tile Measurements screen, for the

Roll Correction value enter an offsetting value.

For example: l

Shank angle reading = 4.7°

IMD-600

Roll reading = 2.5° l

Roll Offset

= -2.2°

5. Return to the Drainage Diagnostics screen. Wait approximately 30 seconds for the filtered reading to settle on a stable value.

If the

Roll value is ± 0-0.1° of the measurement taken in Step 2, the roll offset calculation has been calibrated correctly.

l

If the

Roll value is not ± 0-0.1°, note the value and then repeat Step 2 to enter a value that corrects for any remaining error.

For example: l

Shank angle reading = 4.7°

IMD-600

Roll reading = 4.5° l

Increase

Roll Offset by -0.2°.

Roll Offset now = -2.4°

Step 4: Calibrate the valve

Perform an automated valve calibration to provide the best valve drive performance. See

Valve module calibration (page 316) .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

327

WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

Step 5: Tune system performance

The system gains may need to be fine tuned to reach the desired level of system performance.

1. Set the tractor hydraulics to ~70% of the maximum flow. This will allow you to fine tune the hydraulics without adjusting any other calibration settings.

2. Walk beside the system while operating a dry run. This allows you to see the visual cues necessary for efficient gain adjustment. Pay close attention to the cylinder movement and note any directional trend.

Excess movement in both directions can indicate the following:

Hydraulic flow is too high. It is recommended that you drop the flow by 5% and then recheck.

l

Drop both valve gains by 5% and then check for improved performance.

Excess movement in one direction can indicate: l

Valve gain in that direction (raise or lower) is too high. Drop the corresponding valve gain by 5% and then check for improved performance.

Valve gain in the opposite direction (raise or lower) is too low. Raise the corresponding valve gain by 5% and then check for improved performance.

Step 6: Set the height gain

Fine tuning the height gain and the overall valve gains are a crucial step in perfecting the precision control of a cantilever plow with the WM-Drain system.

In the

Implement tab, adjust the

Height Gain values:

1. Manually drive the plow to a depth below the optimal depth of the section line that you have surveyed and designed for this calibration run. The system will default to a

Height Gain of 0.2.

2. Move forward at the speed and RPM that you will be running the plow. When the vehicle is moving, engage the WM-Drain system and note how quickly the system takes to get to the design depth.

Note  – The system may not go the optimal depth that you have entered at this time because the pitch offset of this plow has not been determined. In this test, the system should drive to a consistent depth each time it is engaged.

3. If the system is too lazy/slow to get to depth within a reasonable distance, increase the height gain setting by a value of 0.05. Continue to raise this value until the plow achieves depth at the required speed.

Note  – The plow may oscillate while on grade.

4. Split the last two values you entered.

For example:

328

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

16   Water Management setup WM-Drain setup

Height Gain run prior = 0.300

l

Height Gain current run = 0.350

l

Height Gain to try next run = 0.325

Note  – After you have determined the optimal values for a particular plow series, such as Liebrecht 5' plow, it is very likely that you can enter the same measurements, offsets, and height gain values for other plows of the same series. With a good valve calibration for each plow, you should be able to get each subsequent plow running very quickly.

Determine the pitch offset

Note  – It may take some time to determine the proper pitch offset of a plow accurately.

Without a correct pitch offset, the system will most likely attempt to maintain the design slope and drive the plow above or below the optimal depth.

All cantilever plows must assume an angle that is slightly tipped up in order to maintain depth against the immense down-pressure being applied by the soil that is being displaced. If the boot traveled through the soil with an even attitude the plow would progressively plow deeper as it was pulled through the soil.

After the pitch offset value has been determined, the value should only change as the tip begins to show considerable wear.

Note  – Before completing this process, ensure that the system drives to a consistent depth. This depth may not be the optimal depth, but it will ensure that the hydraulic system is operating well. Once you are certain that optimal performance has been achieved, you may begin the process of determining the proper pitch offset with consistent results.

1. Engage the plow on a newly surveyed section line in soil that has been undisturbed.

2. Allow the system to drive the vehicle to a consistent depth and then begin entering a positive

Pitch Offset value in the Implement tab. Enter values in 0.50% increments.

Note  – It may take 1-2 lengths of the boot for the system to fully recognize this offset.

3. Continue the actions in Step 2 until you are within a few hundredths of optimal depth.

4. Allow the system to drive along the entire section line. Ensure that the system continues to be consistent through any transitions that are found in the current section line.

5. When you believe the system is running with the highest accuracy possible, survey another new section line. Allow the system to drive the entire line.

6. Repeat Step 2 through Step 4 until the system gives a consistent result. Note the pitch offset value you came up with and reset the run screen offset back to 0.00%.

7. At the Measurements screen, enter the determined

Pitch Offset value.

Note  – Once determined, this value should only change once the tip begins to show signs of considerable wear

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

329

WM-Drain setup 16   Water Management setup

Calibrate the valve

WM-Drain performs its calibration sequence to test the speed at which the blade raises and lowers.

This process takes approximately 8 - 10 minutes for each valve.

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

WM-Drain and tap

Calibrate

.

3. Select the appropriate valve (depth or pitch), if applicable.

4. At the Depth Valve Calibration screen, set the vehicle throttle to 100% and tap

Start

.

Note  – To manually calibrate the valve, enter values for manual calibration and tap

OK

.

5. When the procedure is complete, tap

OK

.

6. Repeat this procedure for another valve, if applicable.

Note  – To stop the plow cylinders from working excessively when stopped, you can add a value for

Stopped

Deadband

.

330

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

17

Yield Monitoring setup

In this chapter:

Yield Monitoring functionality

Yield Monitoring best practices

332

333

Yield Monitoring settings 336

Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration 340

Third-party display instructions 343

Yield Monitoring obtains data from mass, flow, and moisture sensors to gather data and define high and low productivity areas of a field during harvest.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

331

Yield Monitoring functionality 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Yield Monitoring functionality

The Yield Monitoring module collects data from .from OEM or Trimble installed yield monitoring sensors, and sends that data to the FM-1000 Plus application.

Yield Monitoring enables you to accurately view, map, and record crop yield and moisture data in real-time during harvest to immediately understand how well your crop performed.

Supported yield monitoring types range from EOM sensors (both CAN and Serial) to Trimble's full

Yield Monitoring CAN solution.

Yield Monitoring functions include: l

Variety tracking (page 483)

: Map and compare the performance of different seed varieties throughout your field.

l

Moisture tracking: Determine if grain needs to be stored or dried based on the in-field moisture content.

l

Load tracking (page 484) : Record the amount of grain harvested and loaded onto your trucks.

l

Auto-cut width adjustment: Adjust the cut width automatically when traveling over oddshaped fields, point rows, or other previously harvested areas to improve the accuracy of yield calculations.

332

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

17   Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring best practices

Yield Monitoring best practices

There are key practices required to use the Yield Monitoring system to best advantage. Read this before you start the installation and setup procedures.

Installation

The Yield Monitoring System relies on an appropriate installation of the optical sensors. To ensure the best results: l

Install the optical sensors in the location described in the Installation Guide.

l

If the desired location is not achievable, install the optical sensors as high as possible, but no more than 6 inches (15 cm) below the top spindle of the elevator.

l

Installing the sensors lower than 36 inches (90 cm) above the bottom spindle will give unacceptable results.

l

Interference: Ensure that there is no opportunity for interference between the optical sensors or the retaining brackets and any moving parts on the combine. Be especially aware of chains, belts, pulleys, and tensioning rods, and keep in mind that their range of motion may be much greater during operation than when standing still.

l

Alignment: Ensure that the optical sensors will not move out of alignment during operation.

l

Paddle support bracket: Ensure that the optical sensors will not sense the paddle support bracket. Refer to the Installation Guide for more information.

Tare calibration

The quality of the Tare Calibration is critical to getting good accuracy, particularly at low flow rates.

To ensure the best results: l

Check the tare daily.

l

When performing the tare calibration, run the system at the same speed as you would normally use during operation.

l

While running the system empty, look at the elevator speed. This number must be correct, typically between 12–20 Hz.

l

Run the tare calibration. The tare value represents the measured thickness of the paddles, and should be approximately correct. It is more important that the number is consistent than that is exactly right.

l

If the measured value is considerably higher than expected, check the entered values for paddle spacing, and check that the optical sensors are not being obscured by the support brackets on the paddles.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

333

Yield Monitoring best practices 17   Yield Monitoring setup l

If the measured value is considerably lower than expected, recheck the entered paddle spacing and the elevator speed. If both are correct, low tare should not be a problem.

l

Tare Deviation indicates how much variation there is in the measurement of the paddle size.

Normally, this number should be less than ¼ the size of the paddle itself. If this number is excessively large, check the installation for interference or opportunities for excessive vibration, like a poorly-tensioned elevator chain.

Flow calibration

Calibrating the Yield Monitoring system across the full range of flows will improve the accuracy of the system. To get a good calibration, do the following: l

Select calibration loads where the: l

Conditions are consistent

Crop quality is even l

Ground is as level as possible l

The passes are as long as possible.

l

Keep the combine speed constant during the entire run.

Collect loads that are as large as is practical without sacrificing consistency.

l

Collect as many different calibration loads as possible, with each load at a different flow rate. To accomplish this, you can run the system at different speeds, or harvest partial header widths.

l

If you still have significant errors in the calibrations, check the noise level during harvesting. If this figure is above 30%, check for interference with the optical sensors, or opportunities for excessive vibration. If your paddles are very worn, they may need to be replaced.

Pitch/Roll calibration

The Yield Monitoring system corrects for the pitch and roll of the combine. To benefit from this feature, perform the pitch/roll calibration as described in the owner's manual.

The system has correction parameters for each tilt direction that you can adjust to improve performance. Use the following table when you decide how to adjust these parameters.

Note  – The pitch sensitivity adjustment depends on whether your sensor is mounted in front of or behind the center of the paddle.

Tilt angle

Left roll

Right roll

Backward pitch, sensor

Yield reading too high

Increase left roll sensitivity

Increase right roll sensitivity

Decrease backward pitch

Yield reading too low

Decrease left roll sensitivity

Decrease right roll sensitivity

Increase backward pitch

334

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

17   Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring best practices

Tilt angle

forward of center

Yield reading too high

sensitivity

Backward pitch, sensor aft of center

Increase backward pitch sensitivity

Forward pitch, sensor forward of center

Increase forward pitch sensitivity

Forward pitch, sensor aft of center

Decrease forward pitch sensitivity

To start, adjust the sensitivity numbers in increments of 0.2.

Yield reading too low

sensitivity

Decrease backward pitch sensitivity

Decrease forward pitch sensitivity

Increase forward pitch sensitivity

Test weight

The Yield Monitoring system measures the volume of grain passing through the combine, and estimates the weight by multiplying the measured volume by the test weight. Therefore, an accurate measurement of test weight is required in order to achieve an accurate total weight measurement. To ensure the best results: l

Recheck the test weight whenever the field conditions change significantly, either when harvesting different varieties, or when the moisture level of the crop changes.

l

Take several samples of test weight on calibration loads, and use the average of these samples when calibrating.

Calibrating and operating conditions

How you operate your combine can affect your accuracy. Consider the following: l

Calibration will be most effective if you operate your combine at the same conditions as you used during calibration.

l

Frequent starts and stops during a load could degrade the overall accuracy of the load.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

335

Yield Monitoring settings 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Yield Monitoring settings

The following yield monitoring systems are supported: l l

Trimble Yield Monitoring

Various supported OEM moisture sensors l

Claas, 670 and 700 series (North America only) l l

John Deere, -60 and -70 series

Serial data input

Note  – The Serial tab is not available when you are setting up a Trimble Yield Monitoring, Claas, or John

Deere module.

Before setup

Before setting up Yield Monitoring, make sure:

1. All components are installed on the vehicle. Refer to the Installation Guide that is shipped with every Yield Monitoring kit.

2. Yield Monitoring has been added to the display's configuration. See .

3. The implement has been set up and configured for the appropriate operation. See

Implement setup (page 156) .

Setup steps

To complete the setup for Yield Monitoring:

1. Choose the combine and complete its settings. See

Combine settings (page 336) .

2. Complete the

Operation settings (page 337) .

3. Enter the

Crop settings (page 338)

for your crop.

4. Complete settings for the map legend. See

Map settings (page 339)

.

5. Complete the

Sensor output settings (page 339)

.

6. Complete the

Options settings (page 339)

.

Combine settings

At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the

Setup tab, enter information about the harvester you are using.

336

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

17   Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring settings

Setting

Combine

Series

Yield Monitor Type

Port Connection

Moisture Sensor

Explanation

Make of harvester

Series of combine

Type of Yield Monitoring: l

Trimble YM (Yield Monitoring): If this option is selected, connect the

Yield Monitoring system to any available CAN port on the TM-200 module or the configured and available EXP-100.

l

Serial data input

Choose the EXP-100 configured and assigned for serial communication. If

Yield Monitor Type is not set to

Serial

, the

Port Connection does not display.

Moisture sensor you are using: l

Trimble l

Case IH l

New Holland l

AGCO l

Ag Leader

Advanced Setup

Operation settings

At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the

Operation tab, enter information about the combine you are using.

Note  – The selections available on the Operation tab may vary depending on the yield monitoring type that you selected.

Setting Explanation

Header Height Sensor

Enabled: The sensor is enabled.

Disabled: The sensor is disabled.

Head Logging Height

Note  – Not available for the Claas 600/700. This is set by the CEBIS.

The height at which yield data logging starts and stops. The Head

Logging Height is read from the Header Height Sensor.

If required, tap

Current Height

to enter values related to your own setup.

Grain Flow Delay Time (in seconds) it takes for the grain to reach the yield sensor after it enters the head

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

337

Yield Monitoring settings 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Setting

Reset Autocut

Crop Overlap

Explanation

Controls when the rows are automatically reset l

When head is lifted: Automatically resets the rows at the end of the row when the head is raised above the logging height l

Never: Disables autocut. Rows must be controlled manually.

When more than one crop variety is detected in the head, the system will stop accumulating variety statistics. Use this setting to adjust the percentage of crop overlap that is allowed before the system stops accumulating variety statistics.

Select a value between 1% and 25%. For best results, the recommended setting is 10%.

Crop settings

At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the

Crop tab, enter the settings for your crop.

Setting

Commodity

Units

Explanation

Select the crop that is currently being harvested

Select the unit of measure for the crop type: l

Bushels/acre l

Lbs/acre l

Tons/acre l

Hundred Weight/acre (When this is selected, the Bushel Weight field is automatically set to 100 lbs.) l

Bushels/hectare l

Kgs/hectare l

Tonnes/hectare

Enter the weight of a single bushel of crop.

Standard Bushel

Weight

Storage Moisture Set the cutoff point between a wet crop and a dry crop. Set these values depending on what you want the map to look like.

Moisture Upper Limit Range from 5-40%. The working limit of the sensor if a trimble moisture sensor is attached.

338

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

17   Yield Monitoring setup Yield Monitoring settings

Map settings

At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the

Map Legend tab, enter information about the yield and moisture values to display on the Run screen.

Setting

High Yield

Low Yield

High Moisture

Low Moisture

Explanation

Highest expected yield for the current event

Lowest expected yield for the current event

Highest expected moisture for the current event

Lowest expected moisture for the current event

Sensor output settings

At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the 

Serial tab, enter what output you want from the sensors.

Setting

Baud Rate

Parity

Data Bits

Stop Bits

Explanation

Modulation rate of data transmission in seconds l

None: No parity bit sent l

O: Odd parity bit l

Event: Even parity bit l

Mark: Parity bit is set to mark signal condition l

Space: Party bit is set to space signal condition

Number of data bits to transmit

Number of bits that represent the stop message. Used to identify the end of the cropping message when transmitted by the system.

Options settings

At the Yield Monitoring Setup screen on the 

Options tab, select the setting for

New/End Load Confirmation

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

339

Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration

To calibrate the yield sensor and moisture sensor, use either of these: l

Single-Load Calibration l

Multi-Load Calibration

Before starting either procedure, keep the following in mind: l

Use the same load type for both yield and moisture calibration.

l

To achieve the highest accuracy, perform the Multi-Load Calibration procedure.

Calibration steps

1. Verify that all Yield Monitoring setup parameters are correct.

2. At the Run screen, tap to open the

Yield Monitoring panel.

3. Tap

Loads and Calibration

. The

Loads and Calibration view of the panel displays.

4. Tap either

Yield Sensor Calibration

or

Moisture Sensor Calibration

, depending on which calibration you want to perform.

5. Calibrate the

Header Height

.

6. Calibrate the

Temperature

.

7. Calibrate the

Roll Offset

.

8. Calibrate the

Yield Sensor Tare

.

If the Average Tare Deviation is equivalent to or greater than the thickness of the elevator paddle, the system may encounter a large amount of noise. “Noise” can be introduced into the system by any of the following factors:

340

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

17   Yield Monitoring setup Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration

Paddles contacting the Yield Sensor optical lens l

Yield Sensor optical lens obstructed l

Yield Sensor(s) loose l

Elevator chain with excessive slack or paddles flopping up/down l

Tensioning rod contacting yield sensors l

Excessive paddle wear causing large quantities of grain to fall back down the elevator between the elevator wall and the outside of the paddles

9. To check the noise percentage of the system, turn the combine separator on at full engine RPM and then select

Yield Monitoring / Diagnostics / Status to see the noise percentage. If this is very high, check the aspects listed.

Note  – If the frequency deviation is high, you may have an inconsistent Elevator RPM and may need to inspect the performance of your clean grain elevator pulleys, bearings, chain, and so on.

10. Select either method for calibration:

Speed method : Uses a consistent speed variable to calibrate for Low, Medium, and High

flows.

l

Cut Width method : Uses a consistent cut width variable to calibrate for Low, Medium, and

High flows.

Speed method

1. Conduct a calibration load of 3,000-6,000 lbs. at your normal constant speed.

2. Repeat this procedure for: l

One load at 1 mph less than the normal operating speed

One load at 2 mph less than the normal operating speed l

One load at 1 mph higher than the normal operating speed

This provides a calibration curve for Low, Medium, and High flow variations throughout the course of harvest.

An example of calibration loads using this method is as follows: l

Load 1 = 4,547 lbs. @ 4 mph l

Load 2 = 3,834 lbs. @ 3 mph l

Load 3 = 2,764 lbs. @ 2mph l

Load 4 = 5,768 lbs. @ 5 mph

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

341

Yield sensor / moisture sensor calibration 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Cut width method

Note  – It is highly recommended that you conduct a minimum of three calibration loads to ensure that the system provides accurate readings for all low, medium, and high flows throughout harvest. If you conduct a

Single Load calibration, this may result in poor accuracy performance when Harvesting outside the Flow range at which the system was initially calibrated.

1. Conduct a calibration load of 3,000-6,000 lbs. at your normal constant speed with a 100% cut width (12 rows at 30 ft).

2. Repeat this procedure for: l l

One load at 75% of the normal cut width (8 rows at 20 ft)

One load at 50% of normal cut width (6 rows at 15 ft)

One load at 25% of normal cut width (3 rows at 7.5 ft) at the same constant speed

This provides a calibration curve for Low, Medium, and High.

Flows vary throughout the course of Harvest.

An example of calibration loads using this method is as follows: l

Load 1 = 5,768 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 100%

Load 2 = 4,547 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 75% l

Load 3 = 3,834 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 50% l

Load 4 = 2,764 lbs. @ 4 mph @ 25%

3. At the Yield Sensor Calibration screen for each load: a. Enter the actual scale weight.

b. Enter the actual test weight (average of a minimum of three test weight measurements).

c. Select each load for which the actual weight and test weight will be calibrated.

d. Tap

Update Calibration

.

e. Tap

Apply Calibration

.

4. At the Moisture Sensor Calibration screen for each load: a. Enter the actual moisture.

b. Select each load for which the actual moisture will be calibrated.

5. Tap

Update Calibration

.

6. Tap

Apply Calibration

.

342

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

17   Yield Monitoring setup Third-party display instructions

Third-party display instructions

Claas Cebis Quantimeter setup

Note  – When using Yield Monitoring with Claas Quantimeter, always set Autopilot Coverage Logging to manual. See

Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 165) .

Crop Harvested setting

1. On the Cebis display, tap

2. Tap and then tap .

and then select the crop that you are harvesting.

Moisture Measuring setting

1. Tap and then tap .

2. Tap and then adjust the following settings:

Status l

Moisture correction l

Display of yield with storage moisture l

Adjust storage moisture l

Display of current moisture

Bulk Density setting

1. Turn the HOTKEY dial to the scales icon.

2. Adjust the crop density by rotating the HOTKEY until the correct value displays on the screen.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

343

Third-party display instructions 17   Yield Monitoring setup

Note  – The lbs/bu value must be set before the Weight Measured function can be used.

Zero Yield setting

1. Tap and then tap .

2. Tap and then tap .

3. Tap

OK

.

Zero Angle setting

1. Tap and then tap .

2. Tap and then tap .

3. Tap

OK.

Claas Cebis Quantimeter calibration

1. Tap and then tap .

2. Tap and then scroll to

On

.

3. Harvest a full grain tank or truck load.

4. After the tank or truck is full, tap and then tap .

5. Tap and then scroll to

Off

.

6. Weigh the grain tank or truck to get a scale ticket.

7. Tap and then tap .

8. Tap and then tap

Crop yield weighted

.

9. Scroll to increase or decrease the value until it matches the weight on the scale ticket.

344

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

17   Yield Monitoring setup Third-party display instructions

Claas Cebis Auto Pilot calibration

Activate the AutoPilot system

1. Tap and then tap .

2. Tap and then scroll to

On

.

Steering angle and steering system setup

1. Tap and then tap .

2. Tap and then tap .

3. Tap

Learning sensing system

.

Centralizing switch setup

1. Tap and then tap .

2. Tap

, scroll left or right to adjust the central position and then select

OK

.

Steering sensitivity setup

1. Tap and then tap .

2. Tap

, scroll left or right to adjust the steering sensitivity and then select

OK

.

Greenstar Monitor: Stop Head Height setup

1. Tap

2. Tap

.

for Harvest Monitor.

3. Position the header to 100%.

4. Tap next to Record Stop Height.

Stop Head Height on the Command Center

1. Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center.

2. Tap the Combine icon in the lower right corner of the screen.

3. Tap the third button from the left on the command center to select the Combine tab.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

345

Third-party display instructions 17   Yield Monitoring setup

4. After Combine tab is selected, continue to press the third button from the left until page 3 displays (page numbers are located on the Combine Tab).

5. Position the header to 100%.

6. Press

Enter

on Stop Head Height screen to record the required stop header height.

Greenstar Monitor calibrations

Original Greenstar Display (60 Series Combines)

Moisture calibration

1. Press .

2. Select

.

3. View page 1.

4. Check moisture with a certified tester.

5. Calculate moisture correction (certified tester reading minus the Greenstar reading).

6. Input the moisture difference.

Yield calibration

1. Press .

2. Tap

.

3. View page 2.

4. Verify that the combine’s grain tank and the truck/wagon are both empty, and tap

Start

.

346

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

17   Yield Monitoring setup Third-party display instructions

5. Harvest about 500 bushels, and hit

Stop

.

6. Unload the grain harvested during calibration onto truck/wagon.

7. Select button next change to enter the weight of the truck/wagon in wet pounds.

Command Center (70 Series Combines)

Moisture calibration

1. Navigate to Home screen on the Command Center.

2. Tap

.

3. Press on the Command Center.

4. Continue to press until page 2 displays (page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab).

5. In the Calibrations list, select Moisture.

6. Follow the steps to perform the calibration.

7. Highlight the arrow and then press the Confirm switch on the armrest.

Yield calibration

Navigate to the Home screen on the Command Center.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

347

Third-party display instructions 17   Yield Monitoring setup

1. Tap

.

2. Press on the Command Center.

3. Continue to press until page 2 displays (page numbers are shown on the Wrench tab).

4. In the Calibrations list, select Yield.

5. Follow the steps to perform the calibration.

6. Highlight the arrow and press the Confirm switch on the armrest.

Update the Moisture Sensor (60 Series combines only)

Obtain version 1.20C from Stellar Support

1. Go to www.stellarsupport.com

.

2. Tap Support & Downloads in the left column.

3. Tap Greenstar System update from the Software Downloads column.

4. Select the green box labeled Download GSD4 Software.

5. Tap

Run

in the file download security warning.

6. After the download is complete, choose the preferred language and press

OK

.

7. Follow the Greenstar Update Wizard to load the firmware to the keycard for the original

Greenstar monitor.

Load version 1.20C to the Moisture Sensor

1. Insert the updated keycard into the mobile processor that is hooked to the Greenstar display

(it does not matter which slot the keycard is inserted in on the mobile processor).

2. Power on the Greenstar monitor.

3. Press

.

4. Tap .

5. Tap

.

348

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

17   Yield Monitoring setup

6. Tap

.

7. Tap

.

8. Disconnect the mobile processor after the update is complete.

Third-party display instructions

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

349

Third-party display instructions 17   Yield Monitoring setup

350

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

18

Operations

In this chapter:

Operations overview

Fields

Field feature use

Guidance pattern use

Coverage logging

Field-IQ operation

Manual guidance operation

Autopilot system operation

NextSwath operation

EZ-Pilot system operation

EZ-Steer system operation

GreenSeeker operation

ISOBUS operation

Remote Output operation

Row Guidance operation

TrueGuide operation

TrueTracker operation

Vehicle Sync operation

Water Management functionality

Yield Monitoring operation

416

419

422

427

389

401

402

405

352

361

364

365

386

429

433

437

439

442

446

482

This chapter covers common user work operations preformed at the Run screen.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

351

Operations overview 18   Operations

Operations overview

The Run screen is where you perform operations. Depending on the features you are using, additional feature buttons will display on the right-hand side of the Run screen.

When you begin operations, there are some basic steps you will always perform. If you have already entered implement and vehicle settings:

1. Select a vehicle and an implement.

See

Vehicle selection (page 363)

and

Implement selection (page 362) .

2. Select or create client, farm, field and event.

See

Fields (page 361) .

3. At the Run screen: a. Select or create guidance patterns and lines.

See

Guidance pattern use (page 365)

.

b. Optionally add field features.

See

Field feature use (page 364)

.

4. Optionally activate coverage logging.

See

Coverage logging (page 386)

.

5. When you are finished, close the field.

See

Close a field (page 363)

.

Operation basics

The process of beginning operation can include:

1. Create or select a field. See

Field creation / selection (page 361) .

2. Select a vehicle. See

Vehicle selection (page 363) .

3. Select an implement. See

Implement selection (page 362) .

4. Load or create a guidance pattern to use. See

Guidance pattern use (page 365)

.

5. Optionally, create field features on-screen to indicate their location in your field. See

Field feature use (page 364) .

6. Optionally, activate coverage logging. See

Coverage logging (page 386) .

7. Close the field when operations in that field are complete. See

Close a field (page 363)

.

The system saves an event summary of what has been done in the field. If you want the field to close more quickly, you can change the settings so that you do not save an event summary.

See

Event summary adjustment (page 363)

.

352

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Operations overview

Main buttons

The main buttons on the Run screen enable you to: l

See the status of items l

Change the view l

Open feature panels l

Navigate to other screens l

Control automatic steering, if applicable l

Turn coverage logging on or off, if applicable

Left side of Run screen

Button/Indicator

GNSS Status

Explanation

Provides information about GPS. If the GPS signal is lost completely, a warning displays and this button turns red. Tap to view

GNSS status

(page 360)

.

In the

Operational view (page 355)

of the Run screen, shows an overhead view of the field, with the vehicle in it.

Overhead view

Trailing view In the

Operational view (page 355)

of the Run screen, shows a threedimensional representation of the field from the driver’s perspective.

Version 3.0, Revision A

Information configured using the

Status items (page 79)

menus.

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

353

Operations overview 18   Operations

Button/Indicator

Zoom / Pan

Explanation

Opens the zoom and pan controls for the

Operational view (page 355) .

With the pan function, you can view the field outside of the normal viewing area.

xFill icon

To pan around the field, tap one of the four arrows positioned at the edge field area.

To zoom in and out, tap either plus or minus

Note  – To toggle the zoom feature on or off, tap the field area of the Run screen.

The fifth level of zoom in the pan view is a summary view of all your coverage. It adjusts, depending on the size of the field. It does not include grid lines.

Tip  – If you close the field, create a second field and then show the summary view, the summary view may be zoomed to show the area of both fields. To avoid this, reboot the display and open FM-1000 Plus application.

The view will be correct.

Tap to see a listing of all optional features/plugins and their description.

xFill is activated, displays in the top left: l

Blue: Engaged and has been used between 0 - 15 minutes l

Red: Engaged and 5 minutes remain

354

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Operations overview

Right side buttons on Run screen

The following buttons are the standard buttons on the right that are always available.

Item Explanation

If you are at the Run screen and have a field open, tap to close the field and return to the Field Selection screen. See

Close a field (page

363)

.

Home

Tap to go to the Configuration screen. See

Configuration screen

(page 44)

.

Settings

Mapping guidance

Also see: l

Coverage logging (page 386)

l

Engage button (page 359)

Tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel. See: l

Feature panels (page 356)

l

Guidance pattern use (page 365)

l

Guidance settings (page 66)

Operational view

The operational section of the Run screen shows your guidance lines and an on-screen representation of your vehicle in the field. Hashed grids provide a measure of distance. Each small square represents 10 feet, and each dark green outline represents 50 feet.

You can change your view from an overhead view to a trailing view. See

Main buttons (page 353)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

355

Operations overview 18   Operations

Feature panels

On the Run screen, you open a feature panel to view controls related to that feature. The

feature buttons

display on the right-hand side of the screen.

One feature is always on the Run screen:  opens the Mapping Guidance panel.

Item Explanation

1 Location for

feature buttons

. Tap to open the feature panel.

2

3

Feature panel. Contains controls specifically related to the feature.

Optional control button. Tap to open additional views related to the feature.

4

5

Additional information related to the feature.

Area for controls such as the coverage logging and

Engage

button when applicable. See: l

Coverage logging (page 386)

l

Engage button (page 359)

356

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Operations overview

Feature / plugin buttons

Button Opens the feature panel for...

TrueGuide implement control system. See

Using TrueGuide (page 438)

.

Autopilot automatic steering system. See

Autopilot system operation (page

402)

.

EZ-Pilot automatic steering system. See

EZ-Pilot system operation (page 416)

.

EZ-Steer automatic steering system. See

EZ-Steer system operation (page

419)

.

Field-IQ application control system. See

Field-IQ operation (page 389)

.

FieldLevel II. See

Leveling (page 450)

.

FieldLevel II, tandem. See

Tandem scraper controls (page 463)

and

Tandem / dual scraper setup (page 317)

.

GreenSeeker. See

GreenSeeker functionality (page 258)

.

Guidance mapping. See

Guidance pattern use (page 365)

and

Field feature use

(page 364)

.

ISOBUS Task Controller. See

Task Controller operation (page 427)

.

ISOBUS Virtual Terminal. See

Virtual Terminal operation (page 428)

.

Manual guidance. See

Manual guidance operation (page 401) .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

357

Operations overview

Button Opens the feature panel for...

NextSwath. See

NextSwath settings (page 189)

.

Remote Output. See

Remote Output setup (page 136)

.

Row Guidance. See

Row Guidance operation (page 433) .

18   Operations

Serial Rate Control. See

Variable rate controller setup (page 271) .

Survey. See

Create a survey (page 446)

.

TrueGuide system. See

TrueGuide operation (page 437)

.

TrueTracker system. See

TrueTracker operation (page 439)

.

Vehicle Sync. See

Vehicle Sync (page 302)

.

WM-Drain. See

WM-Drain operation (page 464)

.

Yield Monitoring. See

Yield Monitoring operation (page 482)

.

358

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Operations overview

Engage button

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

The

Engage

button displays on the Run screen when you are using an automatic steering system such as: l

Autopilot system operation (page 402)

l

EZ-Pilot system operation (page 416)

l

EZ-Steer system operation (page 419)

Indicator/Button Explanation

The vehicle is close enough to the guidance line to engage on it.

Ready to Engage (yellow)

The vehicle is engaged on the guidance line.

Engaged (green)

Not Ready to Engage (red)

The vehicle is not ready to engage on the line because the guidance line is too far from the vehicle.

Automatic steering is not allowed due to how it has been set up.

Auto steering not allowed

(red)

Tap to...

Engage on the guidance line.

Stop engaging on the guidance line.

N/A. You cannot tap this button.

It is an indicator only.

N/A. You cannot tap this button.

It is an indicator only.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

359

Operations overview 18   Operations

Coverage button for logging

When you are applying material, the coverage button displays on the Run screen. The coverage button controls whether or not you are logging the coverage you are applying.

Indicator/Button Explanation

Indicates coverage logging is off. Tap to start logging.

Logging Off

Indicates coverage logging is on. Tap to stop logging.

Logging On

See

Coverage logging (page 386) .

GNSS status

CAUTION – The GNSS antenna may experience interference if you operate the vehicle within 100 m (300 ft) of any power line, radar dish, or cell phone tower.

Tap to see status information on GNSS.

If the feature/plugin you are using has a second GNSS receiver, there will be a satellite icon for both receivers. Tap the other to see status on the second GNSS receiver.

On-screen lightbar for vehicle

The on-screen lightbar indicates where the vehicle is in relation to the guidance line.

l

Green in center: The vehicle is on the guidance line exactly

On-screen lightbar for implement

There can be more than one row of lights, depending on the feature/plugin that is being used. The second row shows where the implement is in relation to the guidance line.

See

Implement on-screen lightbar (page 440)

.

360

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Fields

Fields

The FM-1000 Plus application Data Dictionary organizes all work preformed based on a Client / Farm

/ Field / Event structure.

Field creation / selection

1. To change the vehicle or implement, tap

Switch

next to the item and select the one you want.

2. Tap

OK

. The Field Selection screen displays.

l

For existing client, farm, field or events, select the appropriate choice from each list.

To create new items, tap

New

.

Item

Client

Farm

Field

Event

Event Attributes

Variety Setup

Explanation

Select the client. The

Farm list will show only farms associated with this client.

Select the farm. The

Field list will show only fields associated with this farm.

Tap

New

. Enter the new field name.

Select the event.

Tap to add more information for record keeping.

Tap to add and edit information on the variety of products that can be distributed from the implement, tap

Hybrid Setup

.

3. Tap

OK

to enter the Run screen.

After you create the field, select a swath pattern to use while you drive the field. See

Field creation / selection (page 361)

.

Event Attributes screen

Category

Operator Name

Operator EPA#

Harvest Year

Explanation

Name of the vehicle's operator

Vehicle operator's EPA license number. For spreading restricted-use or state-restricted pesticides or herbicides.

Year the crop will be harvested

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

361

Fields 18   Operations

Category

Farm Location

Vehicle

Implement

Application method

Wind speed

Wind gust speed

Wind direction

Sky conditions

Soil conditions

Soil type

Temperature

Relative humidity

Crop

Target pests

Custom 1

Custom 2

Custom 3

Custom 4

Material

Explanation

Country or region where the farm is located

Vehicle used in the operation

Implement connected to the vehicle

Method used, such as spraying, seeding, harvesting and so on

Average wind speed

Maximum speed of any wind gusts

Average wind direction

Amount of cloud cover

Description of the soil's state

Description of the soil type

Current temperature

Percentage of humidity

Crop in the field

Pests to be eliminated by spraying

Additional information you enter

Additional information you enter

Additional information you enter

Additional information you enter

Material being applied

Implement selection

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration Selection screen displays.

2. Next to the existing implement, tap

Switch

to select to a different implement.

362

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Fields

Vehicle selection

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Configuration Selection screen displays.

2. To change the vehicle currently selected, tap

Switch

to select to a different vehicle.

Event summary adjustment

When a field is closed, the system saves an HTML summary for the event.

To reduce the time it takes to close a field, you can prevent the system from saving a summary:

1. At the Configuration screen, select

System and then tap

Setup

.

2. At the Display Setup screen, select

Map Settings and then tap

Setup

.

3. At the Mapping screen, select

Off from the

Save Summaries list.

Close a field

After you finish using a field, tap want to do next. These options are: to close it. The system displays a message asking what you

Tap...

Cancel

Close

Open Another

To...

Return to the currently open field.

Close the current field and return to the Home screen.

Close the current field, and open a new field.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

363

Field feature use 18   Operations

Field feature use

You can place field features in the field while driving to define on the field points of interest or areas to avoid. There are three types of field feature: l

Point: A single point in the field, such as a tree l

Line: A straight or curved line in a field, such as a fence l

Area: An area of land, such as a pond

Field feature buttons display on the

Guidance Mapping panel at the Run screen.

Add field features

To add a feature to the on-screen map of your field:

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel, which contains the buttons for field features you defined.

2. Begin to drive the field.

3. When you reach the point in your field where you want to add a feature, tap the appropriate feature button. If the feature is a line or area feature, the feature will begin. To mark the end of the line or feature, tap the feature button again.

Note  – You can add a point feature while adding a line or area feature. For example, use a line feature to draw an overhead telephone wire and at the same time use a point feature to add the telephone poles.

To set up feature buttons, see

Field feature mapping settings (page 65)

.

364

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Guidance pattern use

Guidance patterns enable you to either: l

Manually steer on the guidance lines of the pattern using the on-screen lightbar to guide your accuracy l

Use an automatic steering system to engage on and drive on the guidance lines of the pattern

The swath measurement is based on the implement width you are using.

Creating patterns

The guidance pattern types available in the FM-1000 Plus application to create are: l

Straight swaths created using an AB line or an A+ line (see

Straight guidance pattern (page 369)

) l

Curved pattern (page 371)

l

Circular pivots. See

Pivot pattern (page 374) .

l

Headlands. See

Headland pattern (page 372)

.

l

Free form patterns. See

FreeForm pattern (page 376)

.

Access paths

With some guidance patterns, you can add an access path that provides a space such as for a road.

See

Access paths (page 379)

.

Existing patterns

After you have created a guidance pattern, you can choose it from the list and: l

Load it for use. See

Load a pattern (page 381) .

l

Shift it. See

Shift a swath (page 383)

.

l

Rename it. See

Rename a swath (page 381) .

l

Delete it. See

Delete a swath (page 383)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

365

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

Guidance mapping controls

When you tap at the Run screen, the Mapping Guidance panel displays with controls for features and guidance. The following controls may display in the Mapping Guidance panel, depending on the function you are performing.

Button Tap to...

Done

Finish an A+ or an AB line.

Feature buttons

Create features in the field, such as boundary, rock, fence and so on. See

Field feature use (page 364)

.

Load the next master line in the Swaths library with each tap.

Note  – The active master line name will be displayed on the

Run screen.

Next

Project a straight line in front of the on-screen vehicle.

Pause recording a path.

Pause

Swaths

Use A+

Stop pausing and resume recording the path.

Resume

Record the path you are driving.

Record

Stop recording the path you are driving.

Stop Recording

Set A

Set B

Skip

Set the A point of an AB line.

Set the B point of an AB line.

Skip a swath (page 385)

.

Open the

Swaths Management screen.

Set the point of an A+ line.

366

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Swaths Management screen

From the Mapping Guidance panel, you can access the Swaths Management screen by tapping

. The tabs on this screen are:

Tab

Swaths

Line Features

FreeForm

Features

On this tab, you can: See...

Choose the type of pattern you want to create

Straight guidance pattern

(page 369)

Curved pattern (page 371)

Headland pattern (page

372)

Pivot pattern (page 374)

Shift, rename or export an existing pattern

Rename a swath (page 381)

Shift a swath (page 383)

Import or delete an existing pattern

Add an access path

Import AB Lines or boundaries (page 380)

Delete a swath (page 383)

Access paths (page 379)

Field feature use (page 364)

A list of line features you have created and can load.

Set when the path is recorded and whether you want the U-turn at the end of a path to be recorded.

Delete all line segments created in your

FreeForm pattern.

FreeForm pattern (page

376)

A list of features you have created in the field.

The buttons on the bottom of the Swaths Management screen are:

Field feature use (page 364)

Buttons

No AB

New FreeForm

Load

Close

Tap to...

Prevents the AB guidance lines from being loaded (for WM Form activities).

Begin a new FreeForm line and go to the Run screen.

Load a new pattern.

Close the Swaths Management screen and

See...

FreeForm pattern (page

376)

Load a pattern (page 381)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

367

Guidance pattern use

Buttons

New Straight

Import

18   Operations

Tap to...

return to the Run screen.

Begin a new straight line and go to the Run screen.

Open the Import Swaths screen to import AB lines or boundaries.

See...

Straight guidance pattern

(page 369)

Import AB Lines or boundaries (page 380)

368

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations

Straight guidance pattern

There are two ways to create a straight guidance pattern: l

Create an AB Line: Define the start and end points.

l

Create an A+ Line: Define a point on the line and the heading direction.

Guidance pattern use

AB line creation

To create a straight AB line:

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Swaths

.

3. At the Swath Management screen, select the AB pattern from the pattern list.

4. Enter an access path, if required. See

Access paths (page 379)

.

5. Tap

New Straight

. The Run screen displays.

6. To create the start point of the line, tap

Set A

.

7. Drive to the end of the line.

Note  – The end (B) point must be at least 50 meters (160 feet) from the A point.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

369

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

8. Tap

Set B

. The new AB line displays.

9. To extend the line, drive further along it and then tap

Set B

again.

10. Tap

Done

to indicate you have finished.

11. The system automatically creates the remaining swaths. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see: l

Shift a swath (page 383)

Skip a swath (page 385)

A+ line creation

To create a straight A+ line:

1. At the Swath Management screen, select the A+ pattern from the pattern list.

2. Enter an access path, if required. See

Access paths (page 379) .

3. In the

A+ Heading entry box, enter the angle that you want the line to be on or select a previous

AB Line to use its heading.

Note  – The default angle is the same as the previous AB Line heading.

4. Tap

New Straight

. The Run screen displays.

5. Drive to the start of the line and then tap

Set A

.

6. Tap

Use A+

. The new A+ line displays.

7. Tap

Done

.

8. The system automatically creates the remaining swaths. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see: l

Shift a swath (page 383)

Skip a swath (page 385)

370

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations

Curved pattern

Guidance pattern use

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Swaths

.

3. At the Swath Management screen, select the

Curve pattern from the pattern list.

4. Enter an access path, if required. See

Access paths (page 379)

.

5. Tap

New Curve

. The Run screen displays.

6. Drive to the start point of the curve and then tap

Set A

.

7. To stop recording your exact path and create a straight section of line, tap

Record

.

8. Drive the curve until you reach the end point and then tap

Set B

. The new curve pattern displays showing all the swaths the system automatically generated.

9. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see: l

Shift a swath (page 383)

Skip a swath (page 385)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

371

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

Headland pattern

A headland is a straight AB Line or an A+ line pattern that is confined inside a boundary. This boundary is called the headland.

Note  – If you want to create a headland based on the A+ line pattern, select the straight line pattern and then set the A+ heading for the internal line. Then complete the following steps.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Swaths

.

3. At the Swath Management screen, select the

Headlands pattern from the pattern list.In the

#

Headlands entry box, enter the width of the headland boundary in swaths. For example, if you enter

2

, the headland will be two swaths wide.

4. Tap

New Headland

. The Run screen displays.

5. Drive to the start point of the headland and then tap vehicle to show that the headland is being recorded.

. A red line displays behind the

6. Define the inner pattern before you complete the headland. To do so, tap

Infill

. The Mapping

Guidance panel changes to show the inner pattern buttons.

Note  – After infill lines have been created, they cannot be moved.

7. When you reach the location for the A point, tap

Set A

.

8. To create an internal AB Line, drive to the location for the B point (at least 50 m (164 ft)) and then tap

Set B

.

9. To create an internal A+ line, tap

Use A+

.

372

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

10. Tap

Back to HL

. The Mapping Guidance panel returns to its original appearance.

11. When you complete the headland circuit, the system will draw a straight line from the vehicle back to the start point. Drive the vehicle to a position on the headland circuit where a straight line back to the start will not cut off part of the pattern.

12. Tap

Close HL

. The new headland displays showing all the swaths that the system has automatically generated.

13. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see: l

Shift a swath (page 383)

Skip a swath (page 385)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

373

Guidance pattern use

Pivot pattern

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Swaths

.

3. At the Swath Management screen, select the

Pivot pattern from the pattern list.

4. Tap

New Pivot

.

5. The Run screen displays.

18   Operations

6. Drive to a point on the outermost rut of the pivot and then tap

Set A

.

7. Follow the pivot rut around to the end and then tap

Set B

. The Enter Distance to Pivot Field

Edge screen displays.

8. Enter the distance or the number of rows from the current path to the outside of the pivot and then tap

OK

. The pivot displays, showing the swaths it generated.

9. If you need to shift or skip a swath, see: l

Shift a swath (page 383)

Skip a swath (page 385)

Outer edge radius adjustment

The pivot has an outer edge radius that is used to calculate the coverage area. After you create a pivot, you can adjust this outer edge radius.

374

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

1. At the Run screen, tap

Swaths

. The Swath Management screen displays.

2. Select the pivot to be adjusted from the list of available pivots.

Note  – The default is the AB curve.

3. In the

Outer Edge Radius entry box, adjust or enter the value that represents the distance from the pivot center to the outer edge and tap

OK

. The Swath Management screen displays.

4. To update the pivot, tap

Load

. The Run screen displays with the new pivot dimensions.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

375

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

FreeForm pattern

Using the FreeForm pattern, you can create non-symmetrical guidance paths in fields that have irregular shapes. FreeForm combines these patterns: l

Straight line guidance segments l

Curved guidance segments

With this combination, you can use the FreeForm pattern to create circular spirals or guidance lines with curved and straight line segments for irregular-shaped fields as well as rugged topographics.

Unlike the other patterns where the next swath is repeated, you must drive and record all paths.

Create a FreeForm pattern

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Swaths

. The Swath Management screen displays.

3. Select the

FreeForm tab and complete the settings.

Setting

Record Swath

U-Turn Detection

Explanation

l

Manually: Use the record button to record the path.

When Logging: Record the path when you are logging coverage.

Note  – If you have an external remote logging switch that controls coverage logging, the system records FreeForm curves when the remote logging switch is enabled).

l

Auto: Do not record the U-turn at the end of a path.

None: Do record the U-turn at the end of a path.

Removes all segments of the FreeForm pattern you have recorded.

Delete All

4. Tap

New FreeForm

.

5. To begin recording, you can either:

Tap .

l

Tap (if you have set up to record logging coverage while you are engaged. See

Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 165)

,

Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system (page

201)

or

Engage settings for EZ-Steer (page 206)

and

Coverage logging (page 386) .

6. To stop recording, you can:

376

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Tap if you are recording manually.

l

Tap to stop logging coverage (if you have set up to record logging while you are engaged. See

Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 165)

,

Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 201)

or

Engage settings for EZ-Steer (page 206)

and

Coverage logging (page

386) .

7. To create a straight line within a FreeForm path: a. Make sure you are actively recording and the vehicle is moving forward.

b.  Tap

. The system projects a straight dashed line from the front of the on-screen vehicle based on the current heading.

You can immediately engage on this line and the path driven is recorded.

c. To stop recording the path, disengage automatic steering by either tapping to disengage the automatic steering or moving the steering wheel more than 5 degrees.

Pause recording

You can pause recording and then begin recording again. This is useful when you encounter areas or objects you are driving around but will not need to drive around on the next line.

1. Tap l

.

A pause indicator displays on map.

A straight dashed line projects from the rear of the moving vehicle based on the current heading.

l

The pause button changes to .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

377

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations l

Your position is saved to a file on the FM-1000 Plus application. You can then close the field and power off the display. When you open the field again, you will be guided back to your former position.

2. When you have returned to your desired position (for example, after driving around an obstacle), tap to stop the pause and snap a straight line from the initial pause location and the current vehicle position.

378

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

Access paths

An access path is a space between your guidance lines. These paths can be useful if there is road (or other field feature that breaks the consistent flow of swaths) through the middle of your field.

Note  – You can add access paths on a straight or curved pattern, but not headlands or pivots.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Swaths

.

3. At the Swath Management screen, tap

Access Paths

. The Access Path Setup screen displays.

Complete the settings on this screen and tap

OK

.

Setting Explanation

Swaths between access paths This value must be equal to or higher than the

Swaths in first group setting. The next access path will display this number of swaths beyond the first access path, and will continue to repeat after this number of swaths.

The access path will display after this number of swaths

(including the master line).

Path width

Swaths in first group

ABs place in the first group

(left to right)

Provide Guidance to

Width of the access path

Enter the number of swaths

Enter a value in the ABs place in the first group (left to right) entry box. This setting enables you to specify where the master line displays in the first group (from left to right).

Select whether guidance will be based on swaths or access paths.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

379

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

Switch to the next pattern

You can switch from one existing line pattern to another. To do so, tap .

Each time you tap , the system changes the line pattern to the next pattern available in the list on the Swaths Management screen (

Swaths tab).

The system switches to the next available pattern and displays the name of the active pattern on the Mapping Guidance panel.

Note  – FreeForm cannot be actively recording the path for the Next button to be active.

Import AB Lines or boundaries

The FM-1000 Plus application can load field boundaries and AB Lines created by: l

A Remote Data Logger (RDL) l

A Geographic Information System (GIS)

Note  – To load GIS boundaries, files must be in WGS-84 latitudes, longitudes, and heights in decimal degrees.

To import an AB Line or a boundary into the FM-1000 Plus application:

1. Insert the USB drive into an office computer.

The three files that define a line or field (.shp, .shx, and .dbf) must have identical names.

Otherwise, they are not recognized. If you put multiple sets of files in the folder, ensure that you do not have more than one set of files with each name or your files will be overwritten.

2. Copy the following files to the

\AgGPS\AB Lines\ folder on the USB drive: l

<field name>.shp

<field name>.shx

l

<field name>.dbf

3. Power on the display and open the FM-1000 Plus application. Tap

4. Either open an existing field or start a new field.

.

5. Tap

Swaths

.

6. Tap

Import

. The Import Swaths screen displays.

7. Tap the field or AB Line to import from the list of available swaths and then tap

OK

. The field or

AB Line is imported.

If the AB Line file contains more than one AB Line, all AB Lines in the file are imported.

8. Tap the AB Line that you want to use and tap

Load

. A warning message displays.

380

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations

9. Tap

OK

. The imported field or AB Line is ready to use.

10. For best results, close the field and then reopen it.

Load a pattern

Guidance pattern use

To load a line/pattern you previously created in a field:

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Swaths

. The Swath Management screen displays.

3. To load a pattern, select it from the list on the left of the screen. The system loads the closest pattern to you.

4. Tap

Load

. The Run screen displays, with the pattern loaded.

If you try to load a pattern that is over 100 km (63 miles) away, the following message displays:

Your current position is too far from the field to work in it.

Rename a swath

Note  – To rename swaths, you must have entered the administration password. You cannot rename line features or FreeForm curves.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

381

Guidance pattern use 18   Operations

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Swaths

. The Swath Management screen displays.

3. From the list on the left, select the swath to rename.

4. Tap

Rename

. If prompted, enter the password. The Enter new swath name screen displays.

5. Enter the new name for the swath and tap

OK

. The Swath Management screen displays again.

6. To return to the Run screen, tap

Close

.

382

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations

Delete a swath

Guidance pattern use

Note  – To be able to delete swaths, you must have entered the Administration password.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Swaths

. The Swath Management screen displays.

3. From the list on the left, select the swath to delete.

4. Tap

Delete

. If prompted, enter the password. The swath is marked as deleted. The next time you close the current field, the swath does not show in the list.

Note  – You cannot delete a swath that is currently active.

5. To return to the Run screen, tap

Close

.

Switch to the next pattern

You can switch from one existing line pattern to another. To do so, tap .

Each time you tap , the system changes the line pattern to the next pattern available in the list on the Swaths Management screen (

Swaths tab).

The system switches to the next available pattern and displays the name of the active pattern on the Mapping Guidance panel.

Note  – FreeForm cannot be actively recording the path for the Next button to be active.

Shift a swath

Note  – Shifting a swath is a permanent adjustment. To temporarily change the spacing of swaths, skip a swath instead. See

Skip a swath (page 385) .

Note  – You cannot shift line features or FreeForm curves.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

383

Guidance pattern use

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Swaths

. The Swath Management screen displays.

3. Select the swath to shift from the list on the left.

4. Tap

Shift

. The Enter the Shift Distance screen displays.

18   Operations

5. Enter the values.

Setting

Left

Right

Value entry boxes

Metric

Feet & Inches

Decimal Feet

Rows

Calculator

Tap to...

Shift the line to the left of your view.

Shift the line to the right of your view.

Enter the distance you want to shift the line.

Change to metric values.

Change to feet and inches.

Change to decimal feet.

Open the calculator.

Note  – If you shift a line, it will shift the original version of the line and remove any skip that you have applied.

384

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Guidance pattern use

6. Tap

OK

. The Swath Management screen displays. The newly shifted swath displays in the swath list on the left of the screen.

Skip a swath

Note  – The Skip position of a swath line is temporary and is not saved permanently. To save such an adjustment, shift the swath instead. See

Shift a swath (page 383)

.

FM-1000 Plus application uses the original swath that you drove to automatically generate the position of the other swaths. Occasionally, the on-screen swaths do not accurately indicate where your swaths are. For example, you may need to skip a swath to drive to the other side of a road.

To temporarily correct the spacing of the automatically generated swaths in a field:

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Mapping Guidance panel.

2. Tap

Skip.

The Enter the Skip Distance screen displays.

3. Complete the settings.

Setting

Left

Right

Value entry boxes

Metric

Feet & Inches

Decimal Feet

Rows

Calculator

Tap to...

Shift the line to the left of your view.

Shift the line to the right of your view.

Enter the distance you want to skip to the next swath.

Change to metric values.

Change to feet and inches.

Change to decimal feet.

Open the calculator.

The swath line moves the required amount.

4. Tap

OK

. The Swath Management screen displays. The newly shifted swath displays in the swath list on the left of the screen.

Note  – The skip occurs based on the direction of the vehicle, not on the A-to-B orientation of the line. For example, if you select

Left

, the line shifts to the left of your view.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

385

Coverage logging 18   Operations

Coverage logging

When you are applying material, the coverage button displays on the Run screen. The coverage button controls whether or not you are logging the coverage you are applying.

Indicator/Button Explanation

Indicates coverage logging is off. Tap to start logging.

Logging Off

Indicates coverage logging is on. Tap to stop logging.

Logging On

When the system logs coverage, it records the area that you have covered when you carry out an operation (such as applying fertilizer to a field).

If you have chosen to log coverage, the covered area displays on the Run screen as a pale yellow area that shows: l

Coverage the first time l

Any skips in coverage l

Areas you covered twice or three times

Coverage logs record more than the applied material. See

View coverage layers (page 386)

and

Log coverage for varieties (page 387) .

You can begin logging coverage: l

Manually by tapping l

Automatically if you are using automatic steering and tapping .See

Engage settings for

Autopilot system (page 165)

,

Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 201)

, or

Engage settings for EZ-Steer (page 206)

.

If you are applying a variety of materials, you can set up coverage to show the varieties. See

Log coverage for varieties (page 387) .

View coverage layers

1. To see different aspects (or layers) of coverage on the screen, tap the screen.

2. Select the layer you want to view.

on the lower left side of

386

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Coverage logging

Layer

Overlap

Height

GPS Quality

Cut/Fill

Explanation

General coverage and overlap

Altitude of GPS receiver

Quality of GPS signal

Cut or fill (for water management operations)

Variety

Applied Rate

Speed

Different varieties being applied

Rate at which material is being applied

Speed of the vehicle

Average Cross Track Error (XTE) Position of the vehicle in relation to the guidance line

Log coverage for varieties

By default, coverage is displayed on the screen as a pale yellow. However, if you are applying varieties, you can set up the system to make different varieties visible on the screen.

By logging varieties, you can: l

Change product in a field, so that you can later identify which parts of the field are covered in which product.

l

Plant or apply two or more different products side by side and record the locations in your field. For example, track the planting of:

Corn seed in the left side hoppers l

Clover seed in the right side hoppers

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

387

Coverage logging 18   Operations

Varieties are assigned to rows on your implement. Specify the number of rows on your implement when you configure it. For more information, see

Edit implement settings (page 158) .

Set up variety logging

To log varieties:

1. At the Home screen, tap

. The Field Selection screen displays.

2. Tap

Hybrid Setup

. The Hybrid Setup screen displays. Use this screen to complete the settings for hybrids.

Setting or Button

Left-hand list

Add

Remove

Edit

Assign

Clear

Explanation

List of varieties.

Add a new variety and select a name for it.

Select a variety name in the left-hand list and tap

Remove

to delete it.

Select a variety name in the list and tap

Edit

to change the settings.

The Variety Attributes screen displays.

Enter a name for the variety, choose the color to display for the variety and optionally complete additional record keeping information.

Select the variety from the left-hand list and tap

Assign

. For each variety, select the row numbers on your implement that will be applying the variety.

Tap to clear all current entries.

3. When you have finished with the settings, tap

OK

.

When you enable coverage logging and set the Mapping Guidance panel list to

Variety

, this variety color displays in the guidance window.

Tip  – For quick access to the Hybrid Setup screen from the Run screen, set the Mapping Guidance panel list to

Variety and then tap

Attributes

.

If you select a different implement or change the settings of the current implement, the variety assignments are removed.

388

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Field-IQ operation

Field-IQ operation

WARNING –

When the implement is down and the master switch is in the On position, the machine is fully operational. Take all necessary precautions to ensure user safety. Failure to do so could result in injury or death.

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Current Configurations screen, configure the display/vehicle/ implement settings and then tap

OK

.

3. At the Field Selection screen, select the required client/farm/field/event settings and then tap

OK

.

For setup information, see

Field-IQ system setup (page 218)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

389

Field-IQ operation 18   Operations

Field-IQ panel

To open the Field-IQ panel, tap views: l

Material detail view (page 390)

l

Row detail view (page 392)

l

Section control view (page 393)

. The panel displays. Within the panel, you can navigate to many

Material detail view

The main view shows a list of materials. Up to six materials are listed. The current target and actual rates are shown for each material.

Material details, page 1

Tap the material to see the first details view of the material.

390

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Field-IQ operation

Page 1 Buttons

Material On

Sections Auto

Target

Rows

Tap to...

Turn the material on or off.

Turn automatic section control on or off.

Select if Target 1 or Target 2 is shown, or to select Manual to turn the Target rate off.

Tap to decrease the Target rate by 1.

Tap to increase the Target rate by 1.

To see the

second detailed view

of the material.

To go to the

Row detail view (page 392)

.

Material details, page 2

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

391

Field-IQ operation 18   Operations

Depending on the material, the following buttons display on the second page of the material details view.

Page 2 Buttons

Bin

Seed Disc

Arm Pump

Gate Setup

Density

Tap to...

Go to the Virtual Bin / Tank Setup screen where you can adjust the bin settings.

Fill the seed disk.

Enable Field-IQ to control the pump.

Go to the Gate Setup screen.

Go to the Density screen where you can enter the density of the current product.

Return to the

previous detailed view

.

Rows

To go to the

Row detail view (page 392)

.

Row detail view

To see detailed information on the rows, tap

Rows

.

The color of the row numbers indicate how far off target the rows are applying.

l

Green: Rows are applying on target.

l

Red: Rows are applying off target.

l

Black: Rows have been manually turned off.

l

White: Rows have been turned off automatically by the system.

To view more rows, tap the arrow buttons .

392

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Field-IQ operation

To return to the previous view, tap .

Section control view

To open the section control view on the Run screen, tap in the lower left corner of the screen.

The section control view shows the engage status of each row on the implement: l

Green: Engaged l

Gray: Section closed due to overlap l

Red: Not engaged or section manually turned off

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

393

Field-IQ operation

Field-IQ master switch box functions

Note  – All systems must have a Field-IQ master switch box.

18   Operations

Item Setting

1

2

3

4

5

Increment/ decrement switch

Rate switch

LED indicator

Automatic/Manual section switch

Master switch

Explanation

Increases or decreases the applied amount by a set amount

(the amount is set in the Setup screen,

Rate tab).

Preset Rate 1, preset Rate 2, or Manual rate.

l

Red: Unit is powered but not communicating with the

FM-1000 Plus application.

l

Green: Unit is powered and communicating with the FM-

1000 Plus application.

l

Yellow: Unit is initializing communications with the FM-

1000 Plus application.

You can switch from Automatic to Manual mode while traveling.

l

Automatic mode: The FM-1000 Plus application automatically opens and closes sections when entering areas of overlap, non-apply zones, or crossing boundaries.

l

Manual mode: The sections are controlled by the user using the Field-IQ system.

l

5a: Jump start position. The same functions as in Master

On are active, plus the system is overridden to use a preset control speed (the speed is set in the Setup screen,

Override tab).

l

5b: On position. The sections and rate are ready to be commanded by the FM-1000 Plus application.

l

5c: Off position. Sections are closed and rate is set to zero.

394

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations

Item Setting

Field-IQ operation

Explanation

When you use Lock in Last Position, the valve is locked and the rate is controlled by an auxiliary master valve or section.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

395

Field-IQ operation

Field-IQ 12-section switch box (optional)

18   Operations

Only one section switch box can be used on each system. Each section switch is automatically assigned to the corresponding section. The sections are read from left to right. For example, switch

1 assigns to the section furthest on the left when standing behind the implement. For more information, see the

Hardware tab in Setup screen of Field-IQ.

The section switches have different functions, depending upon the status of the master

Automatic/Manual section control switch on the master switch box.

Automatic section control

When the Automatic/Manual section control switch is in the

Automatic position, if the section switch is in the: l

On/up position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded automatically by the FM-1000

Plus application.

l

Off/down position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded to be off.

Manual section control

When the Automatic/Manual section control switch is in the Manual position, if the section switch is in the: l

On/up position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded to be on. This overrides the FM-

1000 Plus application and coverage logging is ignored.

l

Off/down position: The section(s) assigned to it are commanded to be off. This overrides the

FM-1000 Plus application and coverage logging is ignored.

LED status indicators

The LED indicators on the section switch box are: l

Green: Unit is powered and is communicating with the display.

l

Yellow: Unit is initializing communications with the display.

l

Red: Unit is powered but not communicating with the display.

Material assignment

To change materials quickly and easily:

396

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Field-IQ operation

1. At the Material Assignment screen, tap the material to change. A list of available materials displays.

2. Select the material you want from the list and tap

OK

.

Material assignment

Use the

Material Assignment option to quickly and easily change materials. The location name you set up displays (for example, Hoppers) and the button shows the current material name.

Tap the button to see a list of the same type of materials. To change the material type, select the required material from the list, and then tap

OK

.

Enable sections

To enable sections:

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

Field-IQ and then tap

Diagnostics

.

3. At the Field-IQ Diagnostics screen on the

Operations tab, tap the section you want to enable.

Enter values manually

To enter values manually:

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

Field-IQ and then tap

Diagnostics

.

3. At the Field-IQ Diagnostics screen on the

Operations tab, you can enter values manually for:

Setting

Tank Level

Target Rate

Speed

Aggressiveness

Explanation

Enter a value or tap

Refill Tank

.

Use the buttons to decrease or increase the required rate for the rate switch.

Use the buttons to decrease or increase speed.

Check the value for

Applied Rate

. Increase or decrease aggressiveness to achieve the rate you want.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

397

Field-IQ operation 18   Operations

Test optional switch box

To test the optional switch box:

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

Field-IQ and then tap

Diagnostics

.

3. At the Field-IQ Diagnostics screen on the

Operations tab: a. Flip each switch in the section switch box.

b. The section it is assigned to displays as gray.

Prescriptions

To send target rates to the variable controller, you can define variable rate controller setup data and

load prescription files

that define the rates to be applied in different areas of the field. This information is used to send target rates to the variable rate controller. Applied rates are received from the controller, and both target and applied rates display on the screen. In addition, you can log data relating to the variable rate application to the hard drive.

After you create the prescription, store either the three prescription files in ESRI shape-file format or the single .gdx file in the \AgGPS\Prescriptions\ folder. Then, when you are within the proximity criteria, the prescription is available to load.

If you use complex contoured prescriptions, loading the prescriptions can take some time. The FM-

1000 Plus application shows progress bars while it loads and converts prescriptions.

You can configure the status sliders on the main navigation screen (the Run screen) to show the target rate specified in the prescription file, and the applied rates returned from the controller for the active channel.

When a field is open, a prescription is loaded, and a controller is connected, the target rates (read from the prescription) and applied rates (received from the controller) can be shown in the status text items. For more information, see

Status items (page 79) .

The FM-1000 Plus application can load prescription files created by a Geographic Information

System (GIS). The method you use to create the prescription depends on which GIS package you use.

When you map a new field or select an existing field, you can also select any shapefile (.shp) or

AgInfo GDX (.gdx) prescription file created in AgInfo version 3.5.44.0 or later, that is within these limits:

For...

Boundary

AB Line

Proximity

Prescriptions must...

Overlap the field boundary

Overlap the AB Line

Be within 1 km of the field

398

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Field-IQ operation

If you load a shapefile prescription, select the rate column.

CAUTION – When you select a shapefile prescription, the applied rate will be incorrect if you choose the wrong column when using a variable rate controller.

Load prescription file

A prescription works only when the Field-IQ rate selection switch is in the Rate 1 position.

Rate Switch Position

Rate 1

Rate 2

Increment/Decrement Switch Status

Disabled

Enabled

To load a prescription file:

1. Map a new field or select an existing field. The FM-1000 Plus application lists the prescription files within the specified limits. If there are many prescriptions on the hard drive, this can take several seconds, and a progress bar displays.

If any prescription files are within the specified limits, the Select Prescription screen displays.

2. From the

Available Prescriptions list, select a prescription file.

Note  – If an AgInfo GDX prescription has an incorrect format, it will not display in the Available

Prescriptions list.

If you select a shapefile prescription, select the correct prescription rate column.

Note  – When you select a shapefile prescription, if you choose the wrong column when using a variable rate controller, the applied rate will be incorrect.

l

If you select an AgInfo GDX prescription, the

Rate Column box does not appear.

3. From the

Prescription Scale Factor

, select the scale factor for the units used in the prescription file.

4. Set the

lead time .

5. From the

When off prescription use list, select the target rate for when you are outside the area that is covered by the prescription file. See

Prescriptions (page 398)

.

6. Tap

OK

to load the prescription file.

Lead time

Lead-time is the average time required by the controller before it can react to a requested rate change. Define the lead time in the Select Prescription screen. For example, a value of 5.0 means that, on average, it takes the controller around five seconds to change from one rate to a new rate.

The direction and speed of the vehicle are combined with the lead time to project a future position of the vehicle. The target rate at this projected position is sent to the variable rate controller, giving the controller time to reach the required rate at approximately the same time that the vehicle arrives at the projected position.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

399

Field-IQ operation 18   Operations

You must choose an appropriate lead time. This depends on the: l

Controller type and configuration l

Type of materials being applied l

Nature and specifications of the delivery equipment

Control outside the prescription area

When the vehicle moves outside the area covered by the prescription file, no target rate is available.

There are three options for controlling the output rate: l

Continue to use the last rate being output when the vehicle moves off the prescription l

Use a default rate l

Use a zero rate

Specify the required option in the Select Prescription screen.

You can now select prescriptions even when the vehicle is a great distance away from the field, which enables you to load a prescription before driving to the field.

400

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Manual guidance operation

Manual guidance operation

When you use the Manual Guidance option, you must steer the vehicle manually while you watch the virtual lightbar for guidance.

The Run screen looks similar to when the Autopilot option is installed, except that: l

There is no Autopilot tab on the right l

There is no

Engage

button

You can still tap guidance lines.

to open the Mapping Guidance panel and add field features or create

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

401

Autopilot system operation 18   Operations

Autopilot system operation

To engage the Autopilot system, you must have: l

Have a field open in the Run screen l

Have an existing pattern you are using l

The vehicle within the distance of the guidance line set in the Engage tab. See

Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 165) .

When you are using Autopilot, you use the

Engage

button to automatically steer on the guidance line. The Engage button can indicate status and, in some cases, also control the Autopilot system.

Indicator/Button Explanation

The vehicle is close enough to the guidance line to engage on it.

Tap to...

Engage on the guidance line.

Ready to Engage (yellow)

The vehicle is engaged on the guidance line.

Stop engaging on the guidance line.

Engaged (green)

Not Ready to Engage (red)

The vehicle is not ready to engage on the line because the guidance line is too far from the vehicle.

Automatic steering is not allowed due to how it has been set up.

N/A. You cannot tap this button.

It is an indicator only.

N/A. You cannot tap this button.

It is an indicator only.

Auto steering not allowed

(red)

You can also

Adjust Autopilot guidance (page 403)

settings during operations in the field.

402

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Autopilot system operation

Adjust Autopilot guidance

At the Run screen, tap

Setting

Nudge

Trim

Online Aggr

. The Autopilot panel displays.

Explanation

The guidance line can move off target due to either: l

GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system l

GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field

Use the

<

and

>

buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction (left or right).

To set the increment for this setting, see

Steering settings for Autopilot system (page 166) .

Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections.

The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions.

Use the

<

and

>

buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction

(left or right) of the line you are currently engaged on.

To set the increment for this setting, see

Steering settings for Autopilot system (page 166) .

Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes.

Use the

-

and

+

buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to the guidance line. A setting that is: l

Higher brings the vehicle back online faster, but may cause tight oscillations about the line l

Lower: Brings the vehicle back online more slowly, but can avoid overshoot

Note  – The default aggressiveness setting is 100%.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

403

Autopilot system operation 18   Operations

Disengage Autopilot system

The Autopilot t system can be disengaged

automatically

and

manually

.

Automatic disengagement

The Autopilot system disengages automatically when: l

The vehicle is outside the allowed distance from the guidance line set up in the

Engage tab. See

Engage settings for Autopilot system (page 165) .

l

The system is paused.

l

GPS positions are lost.

Manual disengagement

To manually disengage the system, you can: l l

Tap on the screen.

Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor.

When you turn the steering wheel manually, the Autopilot system disengages. It is recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new installation. To do so: a. Engage on a line.

b. Turn the wheel until Autopilot disengages.

To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the steering wheel, see

Automated Deadzone calibration (page 173) .

404

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations NextSwath operation

NextSwath operation

Note  – For NextSwath setup, see

NextSwath settings (page 189)

.

WARNING –

Installers, technicians, and operators must verify that the Autopilot function (line acquisition and online guidance) is in good, safe, working order before the operator uses NextSwath.

The optional NextSwath feature/plugin works with Autopilot to enable you to: l

Use automatic turns between swaths (see

Automatic turn (page 406)

) l

Tap the Turn Now button to begin an automatic turn prior to or after the turn point (see

Start turn now (page 411)

) l

Extend the point for the automatic turn to compensate for larger implements when you enable

TrueSwath (see

TrueSwath operation (page 413) )

l

Use automated implement functions and reminders to occur before you begin or end a swath

(see

Using automated headlands management (page 415)

)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

405

NextSwath operation 18   Operations

Automatic turn

Note  – Only use NextSwath for straight AB and A+ lines, and headland infill patterns. NextSwath cannot be used with curve, pivot, or FreeForm patterns, feature line guidance, TrueTracker, FieldLevel II, or RG-100 Row

Guidance systems.

WARNING –

A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.

WARNING –

NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.

WARNING –

Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While

NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.

Automatic turn points are calculated from one of these: l

A headland infill boundary. see Shorten or Extend Swath setting in

Automatic turn settings

(page 190)

.

l

Whether the turn point is inside or outside a productive boundary (if you have a boundary without headlands). see Turn Point Inside/Outside Boundary setting in

Automatic turn settings

(page 190)

.

l

The A and B points for a line in a field without a boundary

The basic steps to use the NextSwath automatic turn are:

1. Enter the field.

2. At the Run screen, tap to go to the NextSwath panel.

3. Check the

NextSwath checkbox to enable the NextSwath capability.

Note  – Each time you enter the field or change to a different guidance line/pattern, you must enable

NextSwath before you can use it.

4. When the system displays the liability warning, read the warning and accept it if you understand it and are ready to accept it.

5. Tap

(yellow) to engage on a guidance line. When you are engaged, the engage button will change to green , indicating you are engaged on the line and the Autopilot system is now steering the vehicle. When you reach the location where the end of row warning message

406

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations NextSwath operation displays, the system:

Checks the

Enable Turn

checkbox which indicates automatic turn is enabled l

Changes the turn button from red to yellow l

Displays buttons that enable you to cancel the automatic turn or confirm you want the automatic turn (If you are not on the NextSwath panel, the

Adjust button also displays.

6. Use the swath direction controls to choose the direction you want the vehicle to automatically turn toward (in reference to the forward direction of travel). Tap either the left

<

or right

>

direction button. With each tap of the direction button, the amount of swaths (shown by the swath number ) you will move to during the turn increases. If viewable, the selected swath to change to will be highlighted in green on the Run screen. See

Adjust direction and swath number (page 410)

. The system displays a yellow line indicating the length of the automatic turn.

Note  – You can travel up to 10 swaths over or a maximum of 500 feet/150 meters.

This graphic indicates you are moving one swath and are turning left.

Note  – To clear the swath number, uncheck and recheck

Enable Turn

.

7. If you want the automatic turn to occur, tap

Accept Auto Turn

. The system:

Displays information about the turn, including how far away from the turn point you are l

Changes the turn button to green l

Begins the turn when your vehicle reaches the turn point, and completes the turn

Note  – If you are traveling too fast for the system to complete the turn, the automatic turn will not occur.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

407

NextSwath operation 18   Operations

Note  – The automatic turn shape and speed will occur based on how you have set up auto turn. See

NextSwath settings (page 189)

.

After the turn is completed, the system disables the

Enable Turn

checkbox.

8. If you want to cancel the automatic turn, tap

Cancel Auto Turn

. The system cancels the automatic turn and the turn button changes to yellow . Also see

Start turn now (page 411)

.

9.  As you drive on the next swath, when you reach the location where the end of row warning message displays, the system: l

Enables and checks the

Enable Turn

checkbox

Enables the swath chooser in the opposite direction, as shown in this graphic:

Follow steps 6 through 8 as appropriate.

Tip – You can set up status items to show the length of the swath (Swath Length) and the calculated distance to the end of the swath (Along Track Error). See

Status items (page 79) .

408

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations NextSwath operation

Auto turn cancel

WARNING –

A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.

WARNING –

NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.

When you want to cancel an automatic turn:

1. When you reach the location where the end of row warning message displays, the system displays controls that enable you to confirm or cancel the automatic turn.

2. Tap

Cancel Auto Turn

. The system:

Cancels the automatic turn l

Changes the turn button to yellow

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

409

NextSwath operation 18   Operations

Adjust direction and swath number

WARNING –

Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While

NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.

WARNING –

A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.

WARNING –

NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.

If you are not at the NextSwath panel while engaged and you want to change the number of swaths to skip or change the direction of the upcoming automatic turn:

1. When you reach the point when the end of row warning displays, the system displays the

Adjust

button as well as the options to accept or cancel the automatic turn. Tap

Adjust

to quickly return to the NextSwath panel.

2. Make the appropriate changes to the direction and swath number.

410

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations NextSwath operation

Start turn now

WARNING –

Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While

NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.

WARNING –

NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.

WARNING –

A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.

When you want to start an automatic turn instead of having the system start it, the steps to begin the automatic turn depend on where your vehicle is in relation to the point for the end-of-row turn warning or the turn point. The turn button indicates this by changing colors.

Yellow turn button

If the turn button is yellow and you want to begin an automatic turn, tap the turn button

(yellow).

The system will: l

Change the turn button to green l

Immediately begin and complete the automatic turn

If you have programmed automated headlands management events for use, also see

Using automated headlands management (page 415) .

Red turn button

If the turn button is red and you want to begin an automatic turn:

1. Check

Enable Turn

.

2. Choose the direction and number of swaths to move to. The system changes the turn button to yellow .

3. Tap the yellow turn button. The vehicle will begin and complete the automatic turn.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

411

NextSwath operation 18   Operations

Green turn button

If the turn button is green, you are already in the process of an automatic turn. To cancel the automatic turn, you can do any of these: l

Tap the turn button again.

l

Grab the wheel.

l

Tap to disengage the Autopilot system.

The system stops the automatic turn and changes the turn button to yellow .

412

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations NextSwath operation

TrueSwath operation

WARNING –

A trained and qualified operator must be at the controls of the vehicle at all times, and be ready to safely take over controls of the system at anytime. NextSwath is not a safety aid nor a replacement for a skilled operator.

WARNING –

Interaction with and avoidance of boundaries is solely the operator's responsibility. While

NextSwath can use field boundaries for a reference point for turn start points, the trained and qualified operator is responsible for determining offsets from field boundaries. NextSwath does not calculate distance of the vehicle or machinery from the boundary during the turn.

WARNING –

NextSwath cannot avoid obstacles. The operator is solely responsible for avoiding obstacles.

Note  – You can only use TrueSwath with drawn implements. Rigid mounted / 3-point implements cannot use

TrueSwath.

Without TrueSwath, the implement lags behind the vehicle during line acquisition, preventing proper coverage.

TrueSwath optimizes line acquisition and end-of-row turns for pulled implements. You can use

TrueSwath whether or not you are using automated turns. (To use TrueSwath for automated turns, you must have NextSwath enabled.)

Tap the TrueSwath checkbox to enable the feature. On the display for either an end-of-row turn or acquiring the line, a green line shows the path for the vehicle and a yellow line the implement path.

If you use TrueSwath for an automatic turn, the turn point will be extended to allow the implement to reach the turn point before the turn is started. The vehicle will purposely drive beyond the guidance line to pull the implement on the guidance line.

The path planned for the implement is based on the values you enter in the Measurements tab

(under Autopilot setup) for:

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

413

NextSwath operation 18   Operations l

Vehicle control point to tow hitch (see

Measurements for NextSwath (page 167)

) l

Hitch to ground contact point

Adjust these measurements to improve the performance of TrueSwath. See

Measurements for

NextSwath (page 167)

.

414

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations NextSwath operation

Using automated headlands management

Note  – To set up the capability for automated functions in the FM-1000 Plus application, see

Automated headlands management settings (page 194) .

WARNING –

Do not use automated implement functions to: 1) control hazardous materials (including NH3) or 2) operate implements near ground laborers. Failure to follow these restrictions could result in serious injury or death.

In the Run screen, before you have reached the point for the end-of-row turn warning, tap either or both: l

The checkbox next to the Swath Start Events button  (the button on the left) to enable the sequence at the start of the swath l

The checkbox next to the Swath End Events button (the button on the right) to enable the sequence at the end of the swath

The vehicle will perform the end and/or begin sequence of automated operations you have programmed in your vehicle. The FM-1000 Plus application will provide any sound or text alerts you have set up.

Using turn now

If you choose to turn the vehicle prior to or after the point of the end-of-row turn warning: l

Follow the appropriate steps in

Start turn now (page 411)

l

After you tap the yellow turn button , the system begins the first automated event or reminder you have programmed and provides a countdown to the turn.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

415

EZ-Pilot system operation 18   Operations

EZ-Pilot system operation

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

To engage the EZ-Pilot system, you must have: l

Have an open field in the Run screen l

Have an existing pattern you are using l

The vehicle within the engage distance set in the Engage tab. See

Engage settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 201) .

The Engage button on the screen can indicate status and, in some cases, also control the EZ-Pilot system.

When you are using EZ-Pilot, to automatically steer on the guidance line you can: l

Tap (yellow) on the screen l

Press the

Engage

button on the EZ-Remote joystick l

Use an external foot or rocker switch

Indicator/Button Explanation

The vehicle is close enough to the guidance line to engage on it.

Ready to Engage (yellow)

The vehicle is engaged on the guidance line.

Engaged (green)

Not Ready to Engage (red)

The vehicle is not ready to engage on the line because the guidance line is too far from the vehicle.

Automatic steering is not allowed due to how it has been set up.

Auto steering not allowed

(red)

Tap to...

Engage on the guidance line.

Stop engaging on the guidance line.

N/A. You cannot tap this button.

It is an indicator only.

N/A. You cannot tap this button.

It is an indicator only.

416

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations EZ-Pilot system operation

You can also

Adjust EZ-Pilot guidance (page 418)

settings during operations in the field.

Disengage EZ-Pilot system

The EZ-Pilot system can be disengaged

automatically

and

manually

.

Automatic disengagement

The EZ-Pilot system disengages automatically when: l

The vehicle is outside the engage distance set up in the

Engage tab. See

Engage settings for EZ-

Pilot system (page 201)

.

l

The system is paused.

l

GPS positions are lost.

l

The

Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives low accuracy positions (such as no corrections).

Manual disengagement

To manually disengage the system, you can: l l l

Tap (green) on the screen.

Press the

Engage

button on the optional remote control.

Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor.

When you turn the steering wheel manually, the EZ-Pilot system disengages. It is recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new installation. To do so: a. Engage on a line.

b. Turn the wheel until EZ-Pilot disengages.

To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the steering wheel, see

Steering performance calibration (page 203)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

417

EZ-Pilot system operation 18   Operations

Adjust EZ-Pilot guidance

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

At the Run screen, tap . The EZ-Pilot panel displays.

Setting

Nudge

Trim

Online Aggr

Explanation

The guidance line can move off target due to either: l

GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system l

GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field

Use the

<

and

>

buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction (left or right).

To set the increment for this setting, see

Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 200) .

Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections.

The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions.

Use the

<

and

>

buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction

(left or right) of the line you are currently engaged on.

To set the increment for this setting, see

Steering settings for

TrueTracker system (page 291)

.

Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes.

Use the

-

and

+

buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to the guidance line.

A setting that is: l

Higher brings the vehicle back online faster, but may cause tight oscillations about the line l

Lower: Brings the vehicle back online more slowly, but can avoid overshoot

Note  – The default aggressiveness setting is 100%.

418

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations EZ-Steer system operation

EZ-Steer system operation

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

To engage the EZ-Steer system, you must have: l

Have a field open in the Run screen l

Have an existing pattern you are using l

The vehicle within the engage distance set in the

Engage Options tab. See

Engage settings for EZ-

Steer (page 206)

.

The

Engage

button on the screen can indicate status and, in some cases, also control the EZ-Steer system.

When you are using EZ-Steer, to automatically steer on the guidance line you can: l

Tap (yellow) on the screen.

l

Press the optional remote engage foot pedal.

Indicator/Button Explanation

The vehicle is close enough to the guidance line to engage on it.

Tap to...

Engage on the guidance line.

Ready to Engage (yellow)

The vehicle is engaged on the guidance line.

Stop engaging on the guidance line.

Engaged (green)

Not Ready to Engage (red)

The vehicle is not ready to engage on the line because the guidance line is too far from the vehicle.

Automatic steering is not allowed due to how it has been set up.

N/A. You cannot tap this button.

It is an indicator only.

N/A. You cannot tap this button.

It is an indicator only.

Auto steering not allowed

(red)

You can also

Adjust EZ-Steer guidance (page 421)

settings during operations in the field.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

419

EZ-Steer system operation 18   Operations

Disengage EZ-Steer system

The EZ-Steer system can be disengaged

automatically

and

manually

.

Automatic disengagement

The EZ-Steer system disengages automatically when: l

The vehicle is outside the engage distance set up in the

Engage tab. See

Engage settings for EZ-

Steer (page 206)

.

l

The system is paused.

l

GPS positions are lost.

l

The

Minimum Fix Quality setting is set to a high accuracy correction method and the system receives low accuracy positions (such as no corrections).

Manual disengagement

To manually disengage the system, you can: l l l

Tap (green) on the screen.

Press the

Engage

button on the optional remote control.

Turn the steering wheel to override the electric motor.

When you turn the steering wheel manually, the EZ-Steer system disengages. It is recommended that you check this setting before you begin using the system in a new installation. To do so: a. Engage on a line.

b. Turn the wheel until EZ-Pilot disengages.

To make adjustments to the amount of force required to disengage the system using the steering wheel, see

Steering performance calibration (page 203)

.

When the system is not in use, hinge the motor away from the steering wheel and then secure it with the lock pin.

420

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations EZ-Steer system operation

Adjust EZ-Steer guidance

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

At the Run screen, tap

Setting

Nudge

Trim

Online Aggr

. The EZ-Steer panel displays.

Explanation

The guidance line can move off target due to either: l

GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system l

GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field

Use the

<

and

>

buttons to move the line in a perpendicular direction (left or right).

To set the increment for this setting, see

Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 200) .

Trim replaces Nudge when you are using RTK corrections.

The vehicle can steer offline as a result of uneven drag on the vehicle from an unbalanced implement or from soil conditions.

Use the

<

and

>

buttons to move the vehicle in a perpendicular direction

(left or right) of the line you are currently engaged on.

To set the increment for this setting, see

Steering settings for EZ-Pilot system (page 200) .

Aggressiveness is the measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes.

Use the

-

and

+

buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle moves to the guidance line.

A setting that is: l

Higher brings the vehicle back online faster, but may cause tight oscillations about the line l

Lower: Brings the vehicle back online more slowly, but can avoid overshoot

Note  – The default aggressiveness setting is 100%.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

421

GreenSeeker operation

422

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

18   Operations

GreenSeeker operation

The GreenSeeker system requires either of these to be activated for use: l

Field-IQ system l

Serial Rate Control system

Prior to using the GreenSeeker system:

1. Collect or input reference strip data.

2. Calibrate the system with either:

The boom mounted sensors on the RT200 l

The GreenSeeker handheld sensor

3. If you are using the RT200 interface module for variable rate control, set up the application equipment and rate controller to match the expected delivery rate commands.

Best practice

To ensure best performance from the GreenSeeker variable application system: l

Rinse the boom at the end of every day. Do this to keep the system clean and remove to any corrosive materials. Doing so will greatly extend the life of your machine.

l

Do not use high pressure spray on the sensors when rinsing the machine. Even though all of the connectors and modules are fully sealed, there is the potential for leakage caused by the pressurized stream.

l

Every time the spray tank is filled, take a soft cloth and wipe the lenses of the sensors. Try to check sensors at least once a day during full time operation.

l

Be more aware of cleaning the sensors directly behind the machine.

l

If you do not have ground protection devices on the boom (such as gauge wheels or skids) take extra care to not run the boom into the ground. Also, be aware of sensor vulnerability to stationary structures in the field.

l

Sensors are usually mounted on the front of the boom and do not have rigid protection.

l

Sensors should be re-calibrated after approximately 1000 hours of use due to possible changes in light output. This is generally done at the factory, or authorized service center.

l

Sensors have an optimum operating range of 32" - 48" above the crop canopy. 38" is the optimum height, and must be measured from the top of the crop to the rectangular LED window of the sensor.

l

Make sure all wiring harness components remain fastened to the boom as to not obstruct the view of the sensors and are free of any pinch points from boom folding and movement.

Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations GreenSeeker operation

Variable rate setup

To set up variable rate application on the FM-1000 Plus application:

1. Power up the RT200 interface module and the rate controller (if required).

When the RT200 interface module is first powered on: a. The module's green power LED will blink three times accompanied by three beeps.

b. The status LED will blink in time with each transmission of sensor data over the CAN bus.

Expect to see a brief green flash, followed by a red flash at the I/M message rate (typically at 0.5sec). This indicates that data from the left (green flash) and right (red flash) CAN ports is being transmitted.

2. Activate GreenSeeker for use. See

Activate features/plugins for use (page 60) .

3. At the Home screen, tap

.

4. At the Configuration Selection screen, tap

OK

.

5. At the Field Selection screen, load the field to be sprayed.

Create a custom table

Historical knowledge about the crop enables growers or crop consultants to determine different crop input requirements based upon biomass/size of the crop/plant. An example of this type of use would be variable rate application of: l

Defoliant in cotton l

Desiccant in potatoes

For these cases, the field is scouted (field calibrated) to determine areas of the field that require different rates of defoliant.

To obtain the NDVI values in representative areas of the field, you can use either: l

The RT200 system l

A GreenSeeker handheld

Using this data, you can create a table with NDVI values corresponding to application rates.

To create a custom table:

1. At the GreenSeeker Calibration screen, tap the

Algorithm tab.

2. From the

Formula list, select either:

Custom Table

: Manually enter NDVI calibration values (go to step 4)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

423

GreenSeeker operation 18   Operations

Auto Calibration

: The system automatically enters NDVI calibration values from the Calibration step by transferring the Maximum, Average, and Minimum NDVI values into rows two, three, and four respectively.

3. Tap the

Number Of Rows entry box, enter a value and tap

OK

.

The number of available

NDVI and

Rate values are dictated by the value entered in the

Number Of

Rows entry box.

Typically the number of rows for the custom table are two more than the number of filed calibration areas sampled. This allows for starting at zero and ending at .99 NDVI.

4. Tap an

NDVI entry box to enter a custom value.

5. Tap

OK

.

6. Tap a corresponding

Rate entry box to enter a custom value.

7. Tap

OK

.

8. Select the

Output tab.

9. From the

Material Type list, select either

Granular or

Liquid

.

10. Tap

OK

.

Calibrate GreenSeeker

In the GreenSeeker panel on the Run screen, the controls displayed depend on what you previously selected (for example, a crop algorithm or a custom table).

When you first open a new job or event and a crop algorithm has been previously used or selected, the

Calibration Required message displays.

If you want to use a custom table, but see the

Calibration Required message, tap

Edit

. See

Create a custom table (page 423) .

Note  – If a custom table has been previously selected, the Calibration Required message will not display.

Calibration steps

1. At the Run screen, tap

. The GreenSeeker panel opens.

2. Tap

Calibrate

.

3. The GreenSeeker panel displays: l

The buttons

Ref

,

Non-Ref

and

Done

NDVI bar graph showing the real-time combined average NDVI from the RT200 module

4. Position the vehicle at the reference locations.

5. To record NDVI data from:

424

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations GreenSeeker operation

The reference strip: Tap

Ref

, drive the reference strip and then tap

Ref

again to end recording.

l

The non-reference strip: Tap

Non-Ref

, drive the nonreference strip and then tap

Non-Ref

again to end recording.

Note  – As the NDVI is collected, the data displays. Keep the vehicle moving as you collect the data. If you stop in one location, this will affect the average values. The

Ref

and

Non-Ref

buttons change to a lighter color when selected or active.

6. Tap

Done

. At the GreenSeeker Calibration screen on the

Calibration panel, values that were collected are displayed.

Setting

Maximum

Average

Minimum

Calibrate

Explanation

Reference: You can override the existing data and enter new data.

Non-Reference or Reference: You can override the existing data and enter new data.

Reference: You can override the existing data and enter new data.

Non-Ref

or

Reference

: Tap to collect fresh data. You will not see the new values until you deselect the button you have tapped.

Note  – The reference values for

Maximum

,

Average

, and

Minimum

are also available for the Auto

Calibration function on the

Algorithm

tab.

7. When you are satisfied with the data on the

Calibration tab, select the

Algorithm tab.

For

Formula

, select either: l

An existing formula

Custom Table to create a new algorithm (see

Create a custom table (page 423)

)

Note  – The formula selected for your last job will still be current, so you are often just verifying that the correct formula is being used.

The values to be entered will change based upon the formula selected. Some values (such as

Nitrogen Use Efficiency

) have default values that are formula specific. You can change any value by tapping the entry box.

8.

Note  – You may need to reference the specific algorithms instruction for more detailed explanation of the CumGDD F, or similar fields. For example the CumGDD F for the corn v1.3 GrtPlns GDD OKState is

Cumulative Growing Degree Days, Base 50F. For specific algorithm instructions, visit

www.GreenSeeker.com

.

Tap

OK

.

9. Go to the

Chart tab and enter the settings.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

425

GreenSeeker operation 18   Operations

Setting

Limit

Max Limit

Min Limit

Explanation

Enabled:

Disabled:

If necessary, enter a value based on rate controller or application equipment limitations.

If necessary, enter a value based on rate controller or application equipment limitations.

Note  – Maximum and minimum settings will limit the rate commands given to the rate controller.

10. Review the application chart for each job to determine the appropriate nozzle selections and/or application equipment settings.

11. Tap

OK

.

12. Tap the

Output tab.

13. From the

Material Type list, select either

Granular or

Liquid

.

14. Tap

OK

.

426

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations ISOBUS operation

ISOBUS operation

With ISOBUS, you can use the FM-1000 Plus application to control an ISO-certified implement without an additional display. An ISO-certified implement has small computers called electronic control units (ECUs) which send signals to the FM-1000 Plus application. An ISO-certified tractor has a tractor ECU (TECU) installed on it. ECUs on implements enable you to control the operation: l

With the FM-1000 Plus application, using Task Controller (an optional feature). See

Task

Controller operation (page 427) .

l

With Virtual Terminal, an on-screen window opens so you can directly access the functions provided by the ECUs. See

Virtual Terminal operation (page 428) .

Task Controller operation

After you have activated Task Controller, displays on the Run screen.

1. If you are using one of the following models, you must tap the

Start

or

Auto

button in the Virtual

Terminal screen before starting section and rate control using Task Controller.

a. Tap to open the Virtual Terminal.

b. Tap the appropriate button (

Start

or

Auto

).

Mode

Kuhn Moduliner Seed Drill

Kverneland Exacta TL GEOspread

Rauch/Kuhn AXIS-H-EMC

Rauch/Kuhn AXIS-W

Vicon RO-EDW GEOspread

Tap...

Auto

Start

Start

Start

Start

2. At the Run screen, tap

3. Tap on the right-hand side to display the Task Controller panel.

to begin logging coverage.

4. Tap on the left-hand side to view the current section control.

5. To switch between the two target rates, tap the appropriate target rate button

Task Controller panel.

6. To turn section control on and off, tap the

Section Control On

/

Off

button.

on the

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

427

ISOBUS operation 18   Operations

When section control is off, use the Virtual Terminal for section control.

l

When section control is on, sections will automatically turn off to limit multiple pass coverage.

Virtual Terminal operation

After you have activated Virtual Terminal, the

To access the Virtual Terminal screen: button displays on the Run screen.

l

From the Diagnostics screen (under

Configuration

) l

By tapping on the Run screen. (This button displays on the Run screen after you have activated Virtual Terminal.)

Icon(s) on the left of the screen show the available ECUs. The center area and the buttons on the right of the screen change depending on information provided by the ECU.

Note  – Virtual Terminal screens and functions vary by platform. For more information, refer to the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions.

428

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Remote Output operation

Remote Output operation

The FM-1000 Plus application automatically outputs pulses based on the settings in

Remote Output settings (page 136)

as well as

Line feature settings (page 152)

Crossing a line feature operation

Using this option, a pulse is output at any point where the line you are engaged on intersects another line feature that has the remote output option enabled. See

Line feature settings (page

152) .

You can use this remote output option with AB/A+ lines as well as pivots and curves.

Your screen will show: l l

Dots showing additional previous pulses

A red X indicating where the system will output the next pulse l

Note  – The location of the next output may change as accuracy of the calculated position improves.

A warning when you near the intersecting line, if you have set up warnings (see

Remote Output settings (page 136)

)

The Remote Output panel shows:

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

429

Remote Output operation

Remote Output Panel

Next Output ID

Current Pass Output

Total Outputs

Next Output Distance

Manual Trigger

18   Operations

Explanation

A combination of the next pulse number and the current swath ID).

(The pulse number increments with each pulse, and is not related to the swath or vehicle position.)

The number of pulses that have been output on the current swath.

The number of pulses that have been output in the field currently.

The distance between the implement and the next point for the system to output a pulse.

Tap this button to manually output a pulse.

430

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Remote Output operation

Distance-based pulse operation

With this option, pulses are output based on a specific distance you set up in

Remote Output settings (page 136) . You can use distance-based pulses with straight AB or A+ lines.

Within range limits

When you use remote output with distance-based pulses and you are within the limits of the range set in the Trigger Limits setting, your screen will show: l

The first dot for the first pulse output at the A point for the current swath l l

Dots showing additional previous pulses

A red X indicating where the system will output the next pulse

The Remote Output panel shows:

Remote Output Panel

Next Output ID

Current Pass Output

Total Outputs

Next Output Distance

Trigger Limits

Explanation

A combination of the next pulse number and the current swath ID.

The number of pulses that have been output on the current swath.

The number of pulses that have been output in the field currently.

The distance between the implement and the next point for the system to output a pulse.

The maximum number of pulses allowed per swath past the A point. This is set in

Remote Output settings (page 136)

. You can also

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

431

Remote Output operation

Remote Output Panel

Manual Trigger

18   Operations

Explanation

change this during operation. See

Change trigger limits during operation (page 432)

.

Tap this button to manually output a pulse.

Outside range limits

When the vehicle and implement are outside the range limits: l l

There is no red X on the screen.

On the Remote Output panel, the Next Output ID shows n/a for both the next pulse number and the current swath ID.

Change trigger limits during operation

To change the maximum number of pulses per swath during operation, tap the button to the left of the label

Trigger Limits and enter the new number.

Manually output a pulse

To manually output a pulse, tap .

To set the color of the dot that indicates a manual pulse, see

Remote Output settings (page 136)

.

432

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Row Guidance operation

Row Guidance operation

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

With Row Guidance, the information from existing sensors installed on the combine heads are used to automatically adjust the combine response to changes in the row position.

Row Guidance is used with the Autopilot system to help center the combine on the crop rows when they are are not aligned with the guidance line used to plant the crop (caused by planter drift or environmental damage).

Row Guidance enables you to: l

Increase corn yield through reduced ear loss l

Reduce operator fatigue in difficult conditions (such as down corn, curved rows, long passes and other poor visibility conditions) l

Operate effectively in fields that were planted using other steering systems or in areas where the planter drifted

You can operate Row Guidance with: l

Straight lines: You can use either A-B or A+ lines.

l

FreeForm patterns: When recording and in corn rows, the Row Guidance sensors drive the firsts pass. After that, the guidance system uses the previously recorded pass but augments it with sensor input.

l

Curves: When operating on a sharp curve, Row Guidance aggressiveness may need to be increased for performance. See

Row Guidance adjustments (page 436)

.

To open the Row Guidance panel, at the Run screen tap .

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

433

Row Guidance operation 18   Operations

Use row sensors

To use the sensors:

1. Make sure the Autopilot system is engaged.

2. Activate the sensors by tapping on the Row Guidance panel.

When active, the row guidance sensors will feel the number of "strikes" against them. After a set number of strikes, the Row Guidance will determine the average peak displacement of the sensors on each side of the row for the strikes and react to this peak displacement on each side to steer the vehicle until the peak displacements on each sensor are equal.

Note  – Row sensors override the set Autopilot guidance line. When you turn around in headlands with the sensor turned on, random strikes on stubble cause the system to veer off the set Autopilot guidance line. It is recommended that you travel through the headlands with Autopilot only to guide to the proper row. After you enter the unharvested crop, activate the sensors for row guidance.

On the Row Guidance panel, the sensor button/indicator shows the status of the sensors.

Indicator/Button Explanation

Row sensors are on but not active.

(Yellow)

Row sensors are on and active. Tap to turn sensors off.

(Green)

(Gray)

Row guidance sensors are off. Tap to turn row guidance sensors on and off while the Autopilot system is engaged. The guidance system will now function as a traditional Autopilot system

There is an error with the sensors.

434

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Row Guidance operation

Shift or skip guidance line

You may need to skip the guidance line to coordinate with the crop and guidance line if you operate in a crop that was planted: l

Without automatic steering l

Using WAAS corrections and is being harvested using WAAS guidance

In either case, satellite drift and/or operator guidance can lead to misalignment of the guidance line with the crop. Depending on conditions, it may be necessary to shift or skip the guidance line to coordinate with the crop and guidance line. This will be evident when the sensors guide down the proper row with offline distance is shown to be 0, but the selected guidance line is not centered on the current swath on the screen.

In this case it is recommended to skip (temporarily move the guidance line) to align with the drifted crop rows. The Autopilot system must be disengaged to skip.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

435

Row Guidance operation 18   Operations

Row Guidance adjustments

On the Row Guidance panel, you can adjust guidance using the following controls.

Control

Nudge

Trim

Steering Aggressiveness

Row Guidance Aggr

Explanation

Use to correct satellite drift.

Nudge adjustments are available for autonomous, WAAS, Omni, and RTX Rangepoint corrections. This adjustment will move the position of the vehicle in the global (cardinal) direction perpendicular to the path traveled in the user defined increment.

When a correction is made heading South on a guidance line to the right, the position of the vehicle will be moved to the West. When heading back North, the correction will still be to the West but left to the direction of travel.

The vehicle can steer offline as a result of: l

Uneven drag on a vehicle from an unbalanced implement l

Uneven drag on a vehicle from soil conditions

Trim adjustment is available for RTK and RTX Centerpoint corrections (FS, SS, SC). Trim moves the vehicle perpendicular to the line with reference to the forward direction (to the right or left of vehicle forward travel) the amount setup by the user. For example, while traveling South down a line and the trim is moved 1 inch right

(West), when the vehicle is turned around and driven north the correction will still be right of the line which is East on the Northern heading.

Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively to command the steering to the guidance line.

Aggressiveness should not be set too high. This can cause the vehicle steering not to react to commands (the steering wheels cannot react fast enough to keep up with the steering commands).

Instability in steering will result.

Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the vehicle reacts to the input from the Row Guidance sensors.

436

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations TrueGuide operation

TrueGuide operation

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

TrueGuide uses a second GPS receiver on the implement to enable the Autopilot system to pull the implement onto the guidance line.

To open the TrueGuide panel, at the Run screen, tap

Control

Trim

Aggr

Explanation

TrueGuide engagement

.

Adjust aggressiveness during operation.

Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the implement moves to the guidance line.

l

To increase the response to move the implement back to the line, increase aggressiveness.

l

To smooth the response to the implement moving offline, decrease aggressiveness

The recommended settings for default values are: l

For steep slopes (10% - 30%): 150% l

For slow speed applications: 125% l

For normal operation: 100% l

For high speed applications (>8 mph): 33%

On: When the right-hand button displays ON, the Autopilot system is engaged.

Auto: When the right-hand button displays AUTO, the TrueGuide system is engaged.

Off: Tap to disengage the TrueGuide system.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

437

TrueGuide operation 18   Operations

Using TrueGuide

1. At the Run screen on the TrueGuide panel, tap

(yellow). The right-hand button changes to

ON

and the TrueGuide status changes to

Waiting

.

The Autopilot system acquires the line before transitioning to the TrueGuide system.

The TrueGuide system status remains at

Waiting while the Autopilot system acquires the line.

After the TrueGuide system has taken control, its status changes to

ON and the right-hand button changes to

AUTO

.

2. To disengage the TrueGuide system at anytime, tap

OFF

(the left-hand button).

Note  – As soon as the TrueGuide system is disengaged, the Autopilot system immediately begins providing all guidance.

Note  – To turn on the TrueGuide system when the status is Waiting, tap

ON

again.

TrueGuide system status indicators

The system status displays on the TrueGuide tab between the

Off / On (Auto)

buttons.

TrueGuide Status

Off

Disengaged

Waiting

On

Expanation

The TrueGuide system is off.

The TrueGuide system is ready, but not engaged.

The Autopilot system is engaged, and the TrueGuide system is preparing to engage after a short pause.

The TrueGuide system has engaged and is on.

438

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations TrueTracker operation

TrueTracker operation

WARNING –

Many large and sudden changes in satellite geometry caused by blocked satellites can cause significant position shifts. If operating under these conditions, auto-guidance systems can react abruptly. To avoid possible personal injury or damage to property under these conditions, disable the auto-guidance system and take manual control of the vehicle until conditions have cleared.

When using TrueTracker with the Autopilot system, the implement receives its own separate guidance and steering to increase accuracy.

TrueTracker controls

To open the TrueTracker panel, tap

Control

Nudge

Aggr

Zero Steering

Engage

Engage

(Green)

(Red)

Explanation

.

The guidance line can move off target due to either: l

GPS position drift after pausing or turning off the system l

GPS satellite constellation changes as you drive in the field

Use the < and > buttons to move the guidance line in a perpendicular direction (left or right).

Use the - and + buttons to adjust how aggressively the implement moves to the guidance line.

Off: Zero Steering is not used.

On: Commands the steering to zero degrees left/right, centering the steering device on the implement. This option can be turned on in the field, keeping the coulters pointed straight, or just at the ends of the field to center the steering.

Note  – Disengaging the TrueTracker system automatically turns off Zero

Steering.

For the main button color: Vehicle steering is engaged.

For the smaller inner color on the button: Implement steering is engaged.

For settings on Engage, see

Engage settings for TrueTracker system

(page 290)

.

For the main button color: Vehicle steering cannot engage.

For the smaller inner color on the button: Implement steering cannot

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

439

TrueTracker operation 18   Operations

Control

Engage

(Yellow)

Explanation

engage.

For settings on Engage, see

Engage settings for TrueTracker system

(page 290)

.

For the main button color: Vehicle steering is ready to engage.

For the smaller inner color on the button: Implement steering is ready to engage.

For settings on Engage, see

Engage settings for TrueTracker system

(page 290)

.

Implement status

GPS status

Tap the second to view status on the implement receiver: l

Implement GPS Status l

Implement Correction Type l

Implement Correction Age l

Latitude l

Longitude l

Altitude l

Satellites l

HDOP l

VDOP l

Network ID

Text

A number of status text items provide information about the implement. You can set these status text items to appear permanently at the top of the screen or on a slide-out tab. To set up status items, see

Status items (page 79)

.

Implement on-screen lightbar

When implement steering is enabled, a second, smaller lightbar displays on the screen below the main lightbar.

440

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations TrueTracker operation

The lower lightbar shows the implement guidance relative to the guidance line. Each LED on the second lightbar represents 1 inch.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

441

Vehicle Sync operation 18   Operations

Vehicle Sync operation

Vehicle Sync replaces the transfer of data using a USB drive. Instead, data is transferred wirelessly between vehicles. Real-time, up-to-date information improves operational efficiency and accuracy.

Multiple operators belonging to the same WorkGroup in the same field can transfer location information on other vehicles and: l

Point/line/area features l

Coverage mapping and implement section switching l

Productivity and operational statistics and conditions

Vehicles using Vehicle Sync can also share data on: l

Yield and moisture l

Tank levels l

Location and speed

Common uses

You can use Vehicle Sync for: l

Same operation: Multiple vehicles and implements in a Vehicle Sync WorkGroup performing the same tasks (such spraying, planting or harvesting) l

Same field, different operation: Multiple vehicles and implements performing different tasks

(such as a sprayer working with a planter or a harvester working with a grain buggy) l

Observation: A vehicle can see the location and productivity of the WorkGroup, but does not share coverage, lines or points.

Benefits

Vehicle Sync assists in: l

Planting: Using Field-IQ provides clutch triggering based on coverage sharing, which maximizes input conservation.

l

Spraying: Sharing tank level and as-applied information l

Harvesting: Maintaining yield-to-area integrity within the harvest data, and sharing instant yield and moisture information

Using Vehicle Sync

Up to six vehicles can join a Vehicle Sync WorkGroup by joining the same channel.

442

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Vehicle Sync operation

Join a WorkGroup

To sync with a specific vehicle, make sure: l

Your vehicle has a clear line of sight with that vehicle.

l

You are within a distance of 325 yards (300 meters) from that vehicle.

l

At least one vehicle is working in an open field.

To link with a vehicle, see .

Guidance lines with Vehicle Sync

You create guidance lines as normal (with the exception of adaptive curves and Free Form lines that are not supported by Vehicle Sync).

Naming guidance lines

To avoid any confusion, it is recommended that you take care in naming guidance lines. All guidance lines are automatically combined together, including lines that vehicles possessed prior to linking. If guidance lines have the same name prior to linking (for example, if both vehicles have a line called

AB line 1), Vehicle Sync reviews the lines to determine whether they are the same or different: l

If they are exactly the same, they are not duplicated.

l

If there is a difference, the lines are pooled and labeled with the tractor from which they have come (for example, for both Tractor A and Tractor B, AB line 1 will be relabelled in all guidance line pools as AB Line 1 Tractor A and AB Line 1 Tractor B).

Note  – Vehicle Sync will not shift lines to account for different implement widths. The actual line is transferred.

If you are performing an operation in which all vehicles have the same swath width and use the same guidance line, the line on which the other vehicle is engaged becomes dotted, as shown for

H1:

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

443

Vehicle Sync operation 18   Operations

Although you can engage on this line, an alert will display to inform you that you are engaged on the same line as another vehicle.

Coverage

Your vehicle coverage is colored yellow on the screen. When the vehicle sync layer is selected (for events that have the same Client/Farm/Field/Event), the coverage associated with other vehicles will be color coordinated to that vehicle.

View only layer

When vehicles are not in the same event, a View Only layer is shown for those vehicles that does not affect section control.

444

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Vehicle Sync operation

There is also the option to show only the coverage logged by the your vehicle.

Coverage controls the following: l

Tru Count clutches l

Liqui-Block clutches l

“Rate as” section l

Header swath width for yield calculation l

Sprayer sections

Note  – The warning

Event Memory Low

displays when the size of the file in the current event exceeds the memory capacity of the display. If this warning displays, exit the current field and begin a new event with a similar name.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

445

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Water Management functionality

The functions you can perform with Water Management features include: l

Create a survey (page 446)

l

Create / save a design (page 449)

l

Leveling (page 450)

l

Point and Slope mode (page 455)

Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) modes (page 456)

l

Contour mode (page 460)

For dual or tandem operations, there are: l

Dual scraper controls (page 462)

l

Tandem scraper controls (page 463)

Create a survey

The steps to create a survey are:

1.

Create benchmarks (page 446)

.

2.

Survey the field (page 447)

.

Create benchmarks

Before you can create a survey, you must set a point at a known location called a benchmark. When you create a benchmark, the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base station for that specific point in your field.

When you are leveling, you use benchmarks to: l

Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re-calibrate your exact position. This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling.

l

Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point.

The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag labeled MB . Field coordinates are calculated from this point.

Subsequent benchmarks display as orange flags labeled with their corresponding number .

446

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Bechmark steps

1. Place the GPS antenna in a known, repeatable location that will not change throughout the leveling of a field.

Tip  – Mark this location with flags or some other marker so that you can return to the exact spot.

2. Stop the vehicle.

3. On the WM-Survey tab, tap

Bench

.

Note  – If FieldLevel II is installed, you can tap

Bench

on that instead. Both

Bench

buttons have the same effect.

A countdown timer runs for 30 seconds and then the system creates the benchmark. To stop the averaging during the countdown, tap

Bench

again.

Note  – If you are within the circle around an existing benchmark, a new mark is not created.

Survey the field

After you create the benchmark(s), collect field layout data by conducting a survey.

Define the boundary

Define a boundary to establish the confines of your field. Drive around the boundary while you record the shape.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the Survey/Design panel.

2. Before driving the boundary, select the reference point you want to use for recording the boundary.

l

Center: Records the boundary based on the location of the antenna.

Left: Records the boundary offset half of the implement width to the left of the direction of travel.

l

Right: Records the boundary offset half of the implement width to the right of the direction of travel.

3. Select

Boundary from the list.

4. Tap

Record

.

5. Drive the boundary while recording. The boundary records with a line showing it begins and ends at the starting point. (The boundary is a complete loop.)

6. After you have driven to the end of the boundary, tap

Record

again.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

447

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Define interior points

To complete a full survey, create guidance lines and then drive over all of the interior of the field boundary, while the system records interior points.

1. At the Survey/Design panel, select

Interior from the list.

2. Tap

Record

and drive around the interior of the field, gaining enough coverage to produce a height map. You can change the data logging intensity in the FieldLevel II Survey/Design settings (Coarse = 25 ft; Medium = 10 ft; Fine = 5 ft).

Define a section (optional)

After you create a boundary, you have the option to create sections that split the entire area into portions. This enables you to create a design for each section instead of the entire area.

Sections can be useful after you finish working on the area for the day. Define the area that you completed as a section. When you return to the area, you can level the remaining area to a second best-fit plane. See

Design (page 448) .

There are two methods for defining a section.

l

Method 1: l

Begin recording the section line outside the boundary.

Drive through the field to define the section line, then cross outside the boundary again.

l

The section is defined.

l

Method 2: 

Record a section line inside the boundary.

l

The ends of the line will extend to meet the boundary.

Design

After you have completed the survey, the system can create the design based on the information gathered by the survey and the settings you enter as part of the design process. FieldLevel II defines the three-dimensional height for the field and controls how the implement reshapes the ground.

The Autoplane functionality uses the topographic survey of your field to estimate its surface elevations.

You can accept the AutoPlane calculation and have the system create a best-fit design, or manually edit settings, including: l

Cut/Fill ratio: Amount of cut dirt that equals one volume of fill dirt.

l

South --> North Slope: Angle of the slope from North to South.

l

West --> East Slope: Angle of the slope from West to East.

448

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality l

Composite Slope: The true angle of the fall of the design. In other words, the angle of the slope when the two slope angles are combined.

l

Slope Heading: The heading direction of the slope when the East/West and North/South slopes are combined.

Create / save a design

After you complete the survey, the

AutoPlane

button displays on the Survey/Design panel.

To create a design for the optimum slope for your field that requires the minimum amount of dirt to be moved:

1. Tap

AutoPlane

. The AutoPlane screen displays.

If necessary, you can manually adjust the angle of the slope. However, this may require a greater amount of dirt to be moved because the original design was the optimum.

2. Complete the settings.

If necessary, you can manually adjust the angle of the slope. However, this may require a greater amount of dirt to be moved because the original design was the optimum.

Setting

Cut/Fill Ratio

Section

Explanation

The amount of cut material that equals one volume of fill material.

If you set up sections when you defined the field, you can select a section from the list.

l

None: Levels the entire field.

Left: Levels only the section to the left of the section line.

l

Right: Levels only the section to the right of the section line.

Composite Slope

Slope Heading

The true angle of the fall of the design when the East/West and

North/South slopes are combined.

The heading direction of the slope when the East/West and

North/South slopes are combined.

North -> South Slope The angle of the design slope from North to South.

East -> West Slope

Height or Cut/Fill

The angle of the design slope from East to West.

Height: Gives the design the theme of a topographic height map.

Cut/Fill: Gives the design the theme of a cut/fill map. Red indicates the cut areas. Blue indicates the fill areas. Green indicates areas that do not need cut or fill.

3. Tap

Best Fit

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

449

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

The system uses the interior points that you collected to calculate the optimum slope of the field. An arrow displays on the image of the field to show the direction of fall. The

Stats table lists the statistics of the design computation: l

Cut: The volume of material that must be removed for the current design.

Fill: The volume of material that must be added for the current design.

l

Area: The area of the field inside the boundary.

4. Tap

OK

 to close the AutoPlane screen and save the design. The the system saves the design as the default plane for this field.

Leveling

Before you begin your leveling operation using Field LevelII, you may need to: l

Import designs (page 451)

l

Reload a field (page 451)

l

Re-bench (page 451)

Getting started with leveling

The FieldLevel II system automatically raises and lowers the blade on the implement to match the design height anywhere in the field. You will use the color cut/fill map, simple on-screen adjustments, and automatic blade control to perform leveling.

In addition to the following instructions, depending on where you are in your operation, you may need to: l

Reload a field (page 451)

l

Re-bench (page 451)

1. Open a field as normal.

2. When your leveling model is set to Multiplane design and the FM-1000 Plus application opens the field, the system: l

Scans the

\AgGPS\Designs\

.

Opens any Multiplane .gps control files that are close to your current position and displays a list of these files in the Select Design screen.

3. Select the design you want to use and tap

OK

.

4. To enter the leveling panel, tap either or , depending on whether you are using a tandem scraper or dual scraper. See

Dual scraper controls (page 462)

or

Tandem scraper controls (page 463) .

5. Determine which leveling model you want to use:

450

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Point and Slope mode (page 455)

l

Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) modes (page 456)

l

Define a plane (page 457)

l

Contour mode (page 460)

Import designs

After you finish with your design, you can export a control file (.GPS) for use with the FieldLevel II system. Copy the design control file into the

\AgGPS\Designs\ folder on a USB drive.

Reload a field

When you create a design for a field (for example, a target leveling plane), the design is saved in the

/field/ directory.

The design files are associated with the field. If you close the field and then open it again, the design reloads with the field.

With RTK GPS, the position of the RTK base station is important to the heights used when the field was previously open. If the base station is not accurately positioned in the same physical location, you must reestablish the design over an existing benchmark to re-establish the height.

Re-bench

When you are leveling, you use benchmarks to: l

Return to a point in the field with known coordinates to re-calibrate your exact position. This may include setting the bucket on the ground or on a solid surface that will not be disturbed while you perform field leveling.

l

Move the design up or down to match the field surface at that point.

Re-benching is designed to accommodate differences with RTK base station setup from the last time the field was opened.

Manual re-bench

On the Field LevelII panel, if you tap either of the

Re-bench

buttons when the receiver is within the circular radius of a benchmark, the receiver is calibrated over the existing benchmark. Re-benching enables you to synchronize your position with the design you created.

1. Tap

Re-Bench

. A message displays showing a list of the saved benchmarks within the open field.

The system automatically selects the benchmark closest to you (if multiple benchmarks exist), but allows you to select the benchmark you want to use.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

451

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Note  – To ensure the design is properly aligned to the field, return to the exact location of the master benchmark that you marked on the ground (for example, with flags, see

Create benchmarks (page 446)

), and re-bench on the master benchmark.

2. Select the benchmark to re-bench on.

3. Tap

OK

. A confirmation message displays showing the calculated distance to the selected benchmark.

Note  – This calculation may be quite exaggerated if the base was moved a considerable distance away from its previous position.

4. Verify this is the benchmark you want (if multiple benchmarks exist).

5. Tap

OK

to accept the message. The system begins the standard 30-second averaging process to re-establish the field relevance to the benchmark you just re-benched on.

Force re-bench

If you open a field that has an existing master benchmark and have chosen to require

Force Rebench

(see

Relative Heights tab (page 314)

), the

Create Benchmark

button label changes to

Re-Bench

. The system will not allow you to engage automatic control until the system has been re-benched.

Note  – You must locate the machine exactly over the actual mark on the ground. Do not rely on your relative position to the master benchmark if the base station was moved.

Blade level indicators

In the operational view of the Run screen, a blade indicator shows the status of the blade related to the On-Grade Limit.

452

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Indicator Explanation

The blade is above the target height beyond the On-Grade Limit.

The blade is below the target height beyond the On-Grade Limit.

The blade is considerably above the target height, more than double the On-

Grade Limit.

The blade is considerably below the target height, more than double the On-

Grade Limit.

The blade is at the correct target height, within the On-Grade Limit.

When you are using dual or tandem scrapers, you will see two blade indicators on the Run screen.

Additionally, you can tap select either Height or Cut/Fill.

to open the legend for the operational view of the Run screen and

FieldLevel II status items

Status items are text information that: l

Describe factors in leveling models l

Beginning with P are for the primary GPS receiver (for example, P Blade Height) l

Beginning with S for the secondary if you are using dual or tandem scrapers (for example,

S Blade Height)

Status items can be set to always display at the top of the screen or on a slide-out tab. See

Status items (page 79)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

453

Water Management functionality

Status Item

Altitude

Blade Height

Boot Depth

CMR Percent

Correction Age

Correction Type

Cut/fill

Design Height

Design Slope

Distance Traveled

East

GPS Status

H Error

HDOP

Heading

Latitude

18   Operations

Explanation

Current GPS altitude of the blade.

Current height of the blade shown as a relative height or a GPS height depending on settings selected.

Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches (used with the Autoslope leveling model).

Percentage of data being successfully received from the base GPS receiver.

Time since the last GPS correction was received from the GPS base station.

Note  – Can also be viewed from the Run screen.

Solution type (for example: RTK Fixed, or RTK Float, etc.)

Note  – Can also be viewed from the Run screen.

Difference between the blade height and the target height.

When Cut is displayed, the current ground height is above the target height, and the height adjustment indicator shows a red down arrow, which means that the blade needs to moved down to reach the target height.

When Fill is displayed, the current ground height is below the target height.

Originally planned or designed height at the current location.

Design slope with respect to the current location along the section line. Used with Autoslope leveling model.

Distance traveled since Auto mode was enabled. Used with Point to

Slope leveling model.

Difference in the East component from the Local Tangent Plane

(LTP).

Solution type (for example: RTK Fixed, or RTK Float, and so on).

Note  – Can also be viewed from the Run screen.

Current estimate of the error in the horizontal component.

Horizontal dilution of position. Horizontal component of

PDOP .

Current direction the vehicle is heading in

Latitude as recorded by the GPS receiver

454

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Status Item

Longitude

Network ID

North

Offset

Offset X

Offset Y

Satellites

Section Line Number

Speed

Survey Cut / Fill

Target Height

Up

VDOP

Vertical Error Estimate

Explanation

Longitude as recorded by the GPS receiver.

Network ID of the GPS receiver, which must be the same as the base receiver network ID.

Difference in the North component from the Local Tangent Plane

(LTP).

Relative offset in the vertical component.

Relative offset in the X axis.

Relative offset in the Y axis.

Amount of satellites in the GPS/GLONASS solution.

Line number selected for design in AutoSlope. This is the current section line being recorded in the field.

Current speed of the vehicle.

Cut/fill for the location of the vehicle within a field that has been processed in AutoPlane.

Height the blade will attempt to reach. This is the design height ± the offset. When the blade reaches the target height, the arrows turn green.

Difference in the up component from the Local Tangent Plane (LTP).

Vertical dilution of precision. Vertical component of

PDOP .

Current estimate of error in the height calculated by the FieldLevel

GPS receiver.

Leveling models

You have different leveling options, depending on the leveling mode that you selected: l

Point and Slope mode l

Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) mode l

Contour mode

Point and Slope mode

Slope is the percentage of vertical drop compared to horizontal travel. A positive slope goes upward, and a negative slope goes downward. For example, if the slope is set to -1%, the slope will drop 1 ft for every 100 ft horizontally traveled.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

455

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

When you drive in Point and Slope mode, the Leveling panel displays the following controls.

Button

Coarse

/

Fine

Edit

Explanation

Coarse: The blade will move by large increments.

Fine: The blade will move by small increments.

Tap to view or change the

Slope Adjust increment. This setting controls the amount the gradient changes each time you increase or decrease the design slope.

For example, if the leveling gradient is set to -3%, and the slope adjust is set to 2%, when you decrease the design slope amount, the leveling gradient decreases to -5%.

Tap to increase the design slope by the

Slope Adjust increment.

Bench

or

Re-Bench

Delete Benchmark

Logging

Auto

Tap to decrease the design slope by the

Slope Adjust increment.

Tap to create a benchmark or re-bench.

Set the

Design Height equal to the

Blade Height

.

Tap to remove any benchmark on the field that you have selected.

You do not need to drive over a benchmark to delete it.

Tap to log coverage. This shows on the map where you have been, dependent on your implement width. A shape file is created with cut/fill and height information.

Engages automatic blade height control: l

Starts the slope calculation l

Resets the height l

Resets the cut/fill

Flat Plane (Laser) and Flat Plane (GPS) modes

When driving in Flat Plane mode, these options operate the same: l

Flat Plane (Laser): Use this model when the land has previously been leveled with a laser system and you want to touch up the field. This model results in a mathematically flat surface (which means the plane does not follow the curvature of the Earth, but completely flat).

l

Flat Plane (GPS): Results in a design with a surface that is curved the same as the surface of the

Earth (an equipotential surface).

Note  – Neither of these models can be used with a laser system. The entire FieldLevel II system only works with GPS.

The controls on the Leveling panel for these modes are:

456

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Button

Coarse

/

Fine

Design

Bench

or

Re-Bench

Delete Benchmark

Logging

Auto

Explanation

Coarse: The blade will move by large increments.

Fine: The blade will move by small increments.

Raises the blade by the fine or coarse increment.

Lowers the blade by the fine or coarse increment.

Tap to open the Plane Editor. Here you can edit the design plane.

Tap to create a benchmark or re-bench.

Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height.

Removes any benchmark on the field. You do not need to drive over a benchmark to delete it.

Tap to log coverage. This shows on the map where you have been, dependent on your implement width. A shape file is created with cut/fill and height information.

Engages automatic blade height control: l

Starts the slope calculation l

Resets the height l

Resets the cut/fill

Define a plane

You can define a plane in the Plane Editor screen. The controls on the Plane Editor screen enable you to either: l

Design a field slope and orientation l

Set the design parameters for the tile or surface ditch profile

To define a plane, you can use: l

A single point

l

Multiple benchmarks

Use at least one point as a pivot point and extra information based on direction and slope requirements.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

457

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Item

1

2

3

4

Name

Pivot

Benchmark

Explanation

The single benchmark where the plane is defined. All slopes will pivot around this point.

Primary The first axis upon which the slope is defined. It has a Primary Slope and

Primary Heading component. The Primary Slope is defined as a negative number, where water will fall along the primary axis.

Cross The second axis upon which the slope is defined. The Cross Heading will always be 90° or 270° from the Primary Heading. The Cross Slope is defined as a negative number, where water will fall along the cross axis.

To define the plane by a single heading and slope, then you should set the Cross Slope value to 0.000%

Composite

When both Primary and Cross slopes are defined, the Composite Slope direction shows the actual heading where water will fall. If you have

0.000% slope on the Cross axis, the Composite Heading will be the same as the Primary Heading.

Use a single point

To define a plane using a single point:

1. At the FieldLevel II panel, create a benchmark to define the direction of the slope and its heading.

458

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

It can be useful to create the benchmark at the critical point. For example, where the water will enter or exit the field. This ensures that where the benchmark is, the plane is on grade.

2. Tap

Design

. The Plane Editor screen displays. Complete the settings and tap

OK

.

Explanation Item

New Plan

Choose Pivot

Primary Slope

Tap and select the benchmark you want to be on grade.

If you want to define the primary heading by measuring a second point, see

Define a plane (page 457)

.

Cross Slope

Height Above Pivot

Primary Heading

Flip

Enter the known offset if you are using one.

Tap to change the direction of the Cross Slope. This changes the

Heading between 90° and 270° from the

Primary Heading

.

Cross

For water to run along the Primary and Cross axis, the slope values must be keyed in as negative values.

Note  – FieldLevel II searches for a survey on the field. If there is a survey, a Cut/Fill map displays on the new design plane.

Use multiple benchmarks

You can use multiple benchmarks to define a plane based on your specific requirements. If multiple benchmarks are created, you can design a plane of best-fit through them.

If you use three benchmarks to design the plane, the cut and fill values will be "0.0" through those points so the system can create a perfect plane. If you use more than three benchmarks to design the plane, the cut/fill values will be the residual difference between the plane of best-fit and the benchmark elevations.

To define a plane using multiple points:

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

459

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

1. At the FieldLevel II panel, create two or more benchmarks to help define the plane. If a primary heading definition is required you only need two benchmarks. If all the slopes of a field are to be defined, then you need at least three benchmarks. Select the FieldLevel II plugin and tap

Design

. The Plane Editor screen displays.

2. Tap

New Plane

. The New Plane screen displays.

3. From the

Benchmarks list, select the benchmark you want to use for the primary pivot, then tap

Add

. The benchmark is copied to the

Design Benchmarks list.

4. Repeat the previous step until all the required benchmarks are copied to the

Design Benchmarks list. The

Design Benchmarks list contains the benchmarks for the multi-point plane.

5. Set the

Primary Slope Heading

: a. Choose the first benchmark to define the heading and then tap the

Set> From: button.

Note  – It is recommended that this point is the uphill point of the two points that will be used to define the primary slope.

b. Select the second point of the primary slope and then tap the

Set> To: button.

c. Tap

OK

. The

Plane Editor screen displays.

The selected benchmarks appear in the

Benchmarks table on the upper left along with their associated cut/fill values. The

Primary Slope and

Cross Slope values reflect the calculated slopes based on the benchmarks entered in the New Plane screen.

6. To update the slope values: a. Identify the benchmark to be used as the new pivot.

b. Tap

Choose Pivot

. The Choose Pivot screen displays.

c. Select the benchmark to be used as a the pivot for the new slope from the screen.

d. Tap

OK

. The Plane Editor screen displays.

7. Select the Primary Slope, Cross Slope, or Height Above Pivot areas to edit the slope values as required.

Note  – The cut/fill values in the Benchmarks table will update automatically.

8. The plane is now defined. Tap

OK

. The Run screen displays.

Note  – The FieldLevel II system will search for a survey on the field. If there is a survey, a cut/fill map displays as the new design plane.

Contour mode

1. At the Run screen, drive the vehicle to the location where you want to start the first levee.

2. Set the master benchmark at this point.

3. Set which side of the vehicle is uphill.

4. Tap

Guide

and drive the vehicle forward, following the lightbar to keep the vehicle on the same contour.

460

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality a. To move to the next levee, turn the vehicle around and change the

Up Hill direction.

b. To step the blade up or down, use the and plus and minus buttons to achieve the required offset and then follow the lightbar to keep the correct grade.

When you drive in Point and Slope mode, the FieldLevel II panel displays these controls.

Button

Coarse

/

Fine

Explanation

Coarse: The blade will move by large increments.

Fine: The blade will move by small increments.

Raises the blade by the fine or coarse increment.

Up Hill Left

Up Hill Right

Bench

or

Re-Bench

Delete Benchmark

Logging

Guide

Lowers the blade by the fine or coarse increment.

Select if you are driving around the contour with the uphill slope on your left and the downhill slope on your right.

Select if you are driving around the contour with the uphill slope on your right and the downhill slope on your left.

Tap to create a benchmark or re-bench.

Set the Design Height equal to the Blade Height.

Removes any benchmark on the field. You do not need to drive over a benchmark to delete it.

Tap to log coverage. This shows on the map where you have been, dependent on your implement width. A shape file is created with cut/fill and height information.

Tap to get lightbar guidance at the current level.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

461

Water Management functionality

Dual scraper controls

18   Operations

Blade height indicators: l

The left height indicator shows the height of the left/primary blade.

l

The right height indicator shows the height of the right/secondary blade.

Left plus and minus: Controls the blade height for the left/primary blade.

Right plus and minus: Controls the blade height for the right/secondary blade.

: Controls the left/primary automatics

: Controls the right/secondary automatics

462

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations

Tandem scraper controls

Water Management functionality

Left plus and minus: Controls the blade height for the front/primary blade.

Right plus and minus: Controls the blade height for the rear/secondary blade.

Blade height indicators: l

The left height indicator shows the height of the front/primary blade.

l

The right height indicator shows the height of the rear/secondary blade.

: Controls the front/primary automatics

: Controls the rear/secondary automatics

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

463

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

WM-Drain operation

To use WM-Drain, you use the following to edit the survey and design, and to install tile or perform ditch cleaning: l

Survey tab (page 465) : 

Set survey height offset (page 473)

and

Create a tile / ditch survey line

(page 474)

l

Design tab (page 467)

and

Design screen (page 468)

:

Design a section line (page 474)

,

Clip a portion of a section line (page 477)

and

Add a fixed point (page 477)

l

Install tab (page 466) :

Installation/ditch cleaning (page 478)

464

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Survey tab

The

Survey tab is used to create a survey by creating a master benchmark and logging survey points while driving the area you want to survey.

7

8

9

4

5

6

Item

1

2

3

Explanation

Survey tab

Design tab (page 467)

Install tab (page 466)

Record Section

button

Pause Section

button

Delete Section

button

Manual Data Point

button

Type of design: Main

Size of design

Create Benchmark: Tap to create a benchmark

Rebench: Tap to rebench

Delete Benchmark: Delete a benchmark

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

465

Water Management functionality

Install tab

On the Install tab, you perform installation.

18   Operations

2

3

4

5

6

Item

1

7

Explanation

Survey tab (page 465)

Design tab (page 467)

Install tab

Mode

:

Type of pipe: The type of pipe to install. Options are: Main, Sub-Main, Lateral

Height Offset controls

- Decrease height offset

- Increase height offset

Choice of Coarse or Fine increments for changing height offset

466

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Design tab

On the

Design tab, you choose a section to design and tap

Design

. The

Design screen (page 468)

opens.

4

5

6

Item

1

2

3

Explanation

Survey tab (page 465)

Design tab

Install tab (page 466)

Section

: Section chosen to design

Select Closest

button: Tap to choose the closest section

Design

button: Tap to open the

Design screen (page 468)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

467

Water Management functionality

Design screen

At the Design screen, you determine the design of the section line you have chosen.

Settings Tab

18   Operations

4

5

6

Item

1

2

3

Explanation

Section

: The section you are currently designing.

Rename

button: Tap to rename the section.

Direction list:

The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the

Direction list to the other option in the list.

Options are: l

Outlet at Survey Start l

Outlet at Survey End

Outlet information: Elevation of outlet depth.

Boot Slope information: The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD-600.

Settings tab

468

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

13

14

Item

7

8

9

10

11

12

15

16

17

18

Explanation

Edit Line tab

Info tab

Minimum Depth

: The minimum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design profile to be any shallower than the minimum depth, which is shown on the profile as a red line.

Note  – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the surface

Optimal Depth

: The depth to install the tile or ditch. The design will keep this to the depth when it can. It will move off the optimal depth to be within the other constraints where it is needed.

Note  – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the surface.

Maximum Depth

: The maximum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design profile to be any deeper than the maximum depth, which is shown on the profile as a blue line.

Outlet to Optimal

: The distance it takes to change the depth of the design from the Outlet

Depth to the Optimal Depth. The tile plow will level out over a long distance rather than trying to achieve the depth too quickly at the start of a run.

Minimum Slope

: The minimum slope for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design to slope to be any less than the minimum slope.

Outlet Depth

: The depth at which the design profile will be at the outlet. This depth can either be entered or measured. To measure the depth:

1. Drop the tile plow into the ground so the boot is at the same height as the main or outlet.

2. Tap Measure. The outlet depth is entered by the system. Also, another point is added to the section line if you are within 20 m (65 ft) of the end of the surveyed section line.

The height of the outlet is shown by a yellow tag.

Outlet Elevation

: The real or relative elevation of the outlet.

Smoothing list: The required smoothing level (None, Low, Medium, High) to work out any humping sections in the design. It is recommended you use either Low or Medium smoothing.

Measure Outlet

button: Tap to show the outlet depth and outlet elevation layers with the current boot depth in relation to the surveyed surface.

OK

 button: Tap to save any changes to the design.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

469

Water Management functionality

Edit Line tab

18   Operations

4

5

6

7

8

9

Item

1

2

3

Explanation

Section

: The section you are currently designing.

Rename

button: Tap to rename the section.

Direction list:

The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the

Direction list to the other option in the list.

Options are: l

Outlet at Survey Start l

Outlet at Survey End

Outlet information: Elevation of outlet depth.

Boot Slope information: The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD-600.

Settings tab

Edit Line tab

Info tab

Distance

: The distance of the fixed point from the beginning of the line.

470

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

10

11

12

13

Item

14

15

Info tab

Explanation

Clipping Distance

: The distance from the beginning of the line.

Design information: Elevation of the designed section at that location.

Surface information: Elevation of the surface at that location.

Design Tool list: Options: Clip Start, Clip End, Fix Point.

Add

button: Tap to add a fixed point to the design.

Clip

button: Tap to clip the designated portion of the section line.

Delete All

button: Tap to delete all of the fixed points created.

OK

 button: Tap to save any changes to the design.

2

3

Item

1

Explanation

Section

: The section you are currently designing.

Rename

button: Tap to rename the section.

Direction list: The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the

Direction list to the other option in the list.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

471

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

6

7

8

4

5

9

10

Item Explanation

Options are: l

Outlet at Survey Start l

Outlet at Survey End

Outlet information: Elevation of outlet depth.

Boot Slope information: The current reading for the boot slope from the IMD-600.

Settings tab

Edit Line tab

Info tab

Distance

: The selected location's distance from the start of the section line.

OK

 button: Tap to save any changes to the design.

472

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Set survey height offset

To set the Survey Height Offset:

1. At the Home screen, tap . The Configuration screen displays.

2. Select

3. On the tile plow, raise the boot as high as it will raise.

4. Measure the distance from the bottom of the tile boot to the ground.

5. Enter this value into the

Survey Height Offset entry box.

Note  – It is recommended that you change the survey point spacing to 1.5m (5 feet). This will then record the survey points every 1.5M (5 feet) and provide a more accurate profile of the ground surface.

6. Tap

OK

.

WM-Drain and tap

Setup

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

473

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Create a tile / ditch survey line

Before creating the survey line,

Set survey height offset (page 473) . This offset will be applied to the

heights of your surveyed alignment so that you do not need to rebench before installing tile.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.

2. Go to the

Survey tab of the panel.

3. Drive to a point that will be untouched to use as a reference point.

4. Tap to create a master benchmark and flag this point so you can find it again easily.

5. Drive the vehicle to the start of the line where you want to install tile or clean a ditch.

Note  – For the most efficient method, it is recommended that you drive to the high end of the line.

6. From the

Type list, select the type of design. The options are

Main

,

Sub main and

Lateral

.

7. In the

Size entry box, enter the size of the design.

8. Tap

Record Section

to begin recording a section and then drive. To pause recording, tap

Pause

Section

. (The

Record

button changes to white when activated.)

If you have created a section you want to remove, tap

Delete Section

and choose the section from the list that displays.

Note  – For the most efficient method, it is recommended that the end point is where the tile line is to be connected to a main or outlet.

9. To add a manual survey point at a distance different from the normal survey distance, tap

Manual Data Point

.

10. Tap

Record

again to stop the recording.

11. If you create a benchmark you want to remove, tap list that displays.

and choose the benchmark from the

Design a section line

After you create survey lines, use design screen to create designs for installing tile or cleaning ditches along those lines.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.

2. Go to the

Design tab of the panel.

3. From the

Section list, select the section line that you want to design and tap

Edit Design

.

4. If required, tap

Select Closest

. This enables you to select the line that is closest to you. If there is more than one line within 10 m of your current position, the Select Closest Section Line screen

474

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality displays. The line that is calculated as being closest to you is highlighted. The section line number and pipe type are shown. Choose the line you want and tap

OK

. The system displays the Design screen.

5. At the Design screen, from the

Section list choose the section line you want to design.

Explanation Setting at Top of

Screen

Section Selection

Rename

button

Direction

Auto: The nearest section line is automatically selected.

Manual: Manually select a section from the list.

Tap to rename the section name.

The design screen shows the outlet at the left side of the screen and runs the design uphill to the right side of the screen. The direction of the profile is defined by the direction that it was surveyed. If your survey profile is displayed the other way, switch the option shown in the

Direction list to the other option in the list.

Options are: l

Outlet at Survey Start

Outlet at Survey End

Note  – The section lines are labeled automatically by the system (beginning at S1) in the sequence they were surveyed.

6. Edit the design to your requirements.

On the

Settings tab, set:

Settings Tab

Min Depth

Optimal Depth

Max Depth

Outlet to Optimal

Explanation

The minimum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design profile to be any shallower than the minimum depth, which is shown on the profile as a red line.

Note  – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the surface.

The depth to install the tile or ditch. The design will keep this to the depth where it can. It will move off the optimal depth to be within the other constraints where it is needed.

Note  – For ditching applications, this depth is set close to the surface.

The maximum depth for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design profile to be any deeper than the maximum depth (shown as a blue line).

The distance it takes to change the depth of the design from the

Outlet Depth

to the

Optimal Depth

. The tile plow will level out over a

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

475

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Settings Tab

Min Slope

Outlet Depth

Explanation

long distance rather than trying to achieve the depth too quickly at the start of a run.

The minimum slope for the tile or ditch installation. The system will not allow the design to slope to be any less than the minimum slope.

The depth at which the design profile will be at the outlet. This depth can either be entered or measured. To measure the depth: a. Drop the tile plow into the ground so the boot is at the same height as the main or outlet.

b. Tap

Measure

. The outlet depth is entered by the system. Also, another point is added to the section line if you are within 20 m

(65 ft) of the end of the surveyed section line.

The height of the outlet is shown by a yellow tag.

Outlet Elevation

Smoothing

Elevation of outlet depth.

The required smoothing level (None, Low, Medium, High) to work out any humping sections in the design. It is recommended you use either

Low or

Medium smoothing.

Measure Output

button Tap to show the outlet depth and outlet elevation layers with the current boot depth in relation to the surveyed surface.

Distance Tap the design graph or enter a distance to display the Design Info

(depth, elevation, slope, surface) for that location.

7. On the

Edit Line tab, you have the options to: a. Indicate fixed points on the line. See

Add a fixed point (page 477) .

b. Clip and remove sections of the line. See

Clip a portion of a section line (page 477)

.

8. Tap

OK

.

At the Run screen, you can install the tile or clean the ditch from either the outlet or the top end of the profile. The section line that you use for installation or cleaning will display as red on the screen

(other section lines are white).

476

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Add a fixed point

You can add a fixed point to your design. This enables you to avoid: l

An underground structure l

Intersecting a specific depth or existing tile line

1. At the

Design tab, tap Design to open the Design screen.

2. Go to the

Edit Line tab.

3. From the far left-hand list at the bottom of the screen, choose

Fix Point

.

4. Indicate where you want the fixed point by: a. Touching on the screen b. Moving the slider c. Entering a specific distance in the Distance entry box

5. Tap

Add

. The screen will show the design elevation for the fixed point.

6. Enter the elevation that represents the target or obstacle. The system redesigns the section line to account for the new fixed point. If the slope approaching the point is now too steep, you have the option to enter more fixed points ahead of the original fixed point to make the transition better from one slope to the next.

Clip a portion of a section line

You can remove a portion of the section line from either the beginning or end of the line (or both).

1. At the

Design tab, tap

Design

to open the Design screen.

2. Go to the

Edit Line tab.

3. From the far left-hand list at the bottom of the screen, choose either

Clip Start or

Clip End

(depending on which end of the line you want to remove).

4. Indicate where you want to clip to by: a. Touching on the screen b. Moving the slider c. Entering a specific distance in the

Distance entry box

5. When you have finished indicating the areas to clip, tap

Delete All

.

6. To save the changes, tap

OK

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

477

Water Management functionality 18   Operations

Installation/ditch cleaning

Autoslope mode

You can use the Autoslope mode for: l

For tile applications: The system runs on both self-propelled tile machines and pull-type plows towed behind a tractor.

l

For ditching applications: You can use any type of scraper or ditching machine supported by the WM-Drain system.

Note  – When the system is not running in Autoslope mode, the on-screen or LB25 lightbar will guide to any existing A-B line. This means you can use manual guidance for surveying in section lines to be tiled at a consistent spacing.

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.

2. Go to the

Install tab of the panel. Use the controls for installation or ditch cleaning.

Control

Survey

Design

Mode

Explanation

Tap to open the Survey screen where you can survey the section line you will design.

Tap to open the Design screen where you can select a section line and then edit the design.

Note  – A white cross displays on the Run screen to show both the horizontal and vertical location.

l l

Autoslope: Creates sloped tile or surface drainage targeting the optimal depth defined on the Design tab.

Slope: Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage. From the starting point, the vehicle leves at a constant slope, regardless of direction.

Constant Depth: Use to collect a live, rolling survey of the ground surface. This survey is passed in real time to the control system, which enables it to run at the specified depth above or below the ground surface.

The constant depth mode can only be accessed when you have properly configured manual guidance, Autopilot or EZ-Pilot.

This mode requires two RTK-enabled receivers are available and assigned on the system. One of the RTK-enabled receivers:

Is not required to be an internal receiver

478

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Control

Pipe

Recalc

Explanation

l

Must be assigned to the appropriate guidance plugin/feature l

Must be mounted in front of the antenna used for WM-

Drain

Pipe Type: Select the type of pipe to be installed.

Pipe Size: The size of the pipe to be installed.

When the tile plow encounters a rock, pull the boot up over the rock and tap

Recalc

.

This modifies the design to ensure the remaining tile run stays within the minimum slope requirement and prevents the pipe from diving down to the original design grade.

Note  – This works only when installing tile in the direction away from the outlet point.

Height Offset Increase button

Raise the tile boot or blade by the blade step increment.

Height Offset

Decrease button

Lower the tile boot or blade by the blade step increment.

Height Offset or

Fine

button

Coarse

When you tap

Coarse

, the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the Coarse Blade increment. This enables you to move the blade by a larger increment.

When you tap

Fine

, the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the fine increment.

Pitch Offset Increase Raises the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.

Pitch Offset Decrease Lowers the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.

Coarse (Pitch Offset) When you tap Coarse, the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the Coarse Pitch increment. This enables you to move the blade pitch by a larger increment.

Point and slope mode

1. At the Run screen, tap to open the WM-Drain panel.

2. Go to the

Install tab of the panel. Use the controls for installation or ditch cleaning.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

479

Water Management functionality

Control

Survey

Design

Mode

Pipe

Slope Increase

Slope Decrease

18   Operations

Explanation

Tap to open the Survey screen where you can survey the section line you will design.

Tap to open the Design screen where you can select a section line and then edit the design.

Note  – A white cross displays on the Run screen to show both the horizontal and vertical location.

l

Autoslope: Creates sloped tile or surface drainage targeting the optimal depth defined on the Design tab.

Slope: Creates consistently sloped tile or surface drainage. From the starting point, the vehicle leves at a constant slope, regardless of direction.

Constant Depth: Use to collect a live, rolling survey of the ground surface. This survey is passed in real time to the control system, which enables it to run at the specified depth above or below the ground surface.

The constant depth mode can only be accessed when you have properly configured manual guidance, Autopilot or EZ-Pilot.

Run depth is defined by setting the Height Offset value to the desired depth. Examples:

For a consistent depth of 4.0' (1.22 m), adjust the Height

Offset to -4.0' (-1.22m).

l

For a consistent height of 6" (0.15 m) above the ground surface, adjust the Height Offset to 6" (0.15cm).

This mode requires two RTK-enabled receivers are available and assigned on the system. One of the RTK-enabled receivers:

Is not required to be an internal receiver l

Must be assigned to the appropriate guidance plugin/feature l

Must be mounted in front of the antenna used for WM-

Drain l

Pipe Type: Select the type of pipe to be installed.

Pipe Size: The size of the pipe to be installed.

Increase the design slope by the

Slope Adjust increment.

Decrease the design slope by the

Slope Adjust increment.

480

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Water Management functionality

Control Explanation

Height Offset Increase Raise the tile boot or blade by the

Slope Adjust increment.

Height Offset

Decrease

Lower the tile boot or blade by the

Slope Adjust increment.

Height Offset Increase Raise the boot or blade by the blade step increment.

Height Offset

Decrease

Slope

Lower the boot or blade by the blade step increment.

Select a defined percentage of vertical drop for a horizontal distance traveled.

Coarse (Height Offset) When you tap

Coarse

, the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the

Coarse Blade

increment. This enables you to move the blade by a larger increment.

Pitch Offset Increase Raises the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.

Pitch Offset Decrease Lowers the blade pitch relative to the design pitch.

Coarse (Pitch Offset) When you tap

Coarse

, the increase or decrease button moves the blade by the

Coarse Pitch increment. This enables you to move the blade pitch by a larger increment.

Auto Set Automatics to the hydraulic valve. The blade or tile boot will be driven to the design depth depending on where you are located relative to the section line.

Logging Tap to log coverage to be able to see on your map where you have been dependent on your implement width. A shape file will also be created with cut/fill and height information.

Define boot depth

You can define the boot depth by either of the steps below.

l

Option 1: Enter the relative depth above and below the surveyed surface.

l

Option 2: Enter a specific elevation in the

Outlet Elevation entry box. The system calculates the other box.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

481

Yield Monitoring operation 18   Operations

Yield Monitoring operation

Yield Monitoring enables you to track the: l l

Loads of grains harvested through the season for a field.

After the harvest is complete, use the Farm Works

™ office. See

Load tracking (page 484)

.

Mapping software to track loads in the

Variety of grains harvested throughout the season for a field that has an associated planting variety map.

After harvest is complete, use the Farm Works Mapping software to create and view a yield variety report to see a yield by variety comparison. See

Variety tracking (page 483)

.

Yield Monitoring panel

To access the Yield Monitoring panel, at the Run screen tap

The panel contains several views that you can navigate between.

.

Crop summary and details

The initial view shows each crop being harvested and summary information for each one.

Tap a crop/summary section to see more details about the crop.

To change the status items that show for a crop, at the

Crop Name view tap

Edit Overview

.

482

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

18   Operations Yield Monitoring operation

Variety tracking

For a field that has an associated planting variety map, Yield Monitoring enables you to track the variety of grains harvested throughout the season.

Variety map

When you are planting or seeding and are , a variety map layer is created within the

Field folder if you are using either: l

Field-IQ crop input control system l

Serial Rate Control

When you open the client, farm, and field and create a harvest event, the system automatically loads the variety map layer into the background on the screen.

Note  – Set up the implement as a harvest operation if you want the variety map layer to display.

After harvest is complete, use the Farm Works Mapping software to create and view a yield variety report to see a yield by variety comparison.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

483

Yield Monitoring operation 18   Operations

Load tracking

Yield Monitoring tracks loads of grains harvested through the season for a field. After the harvest is complete, use the Farm Works

Mapping software to track loads in the office.

At the Load Details screen, you can view for each load listed:

Item

Load Name

Recorded Weight

Scale Ticket Weight

Recorded Moisture

Scale Ticket Moisture

Explanation

Name you assigned to the load

The weight of the load

484

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

19

Diagnostics

In this chapter:

System diagnostics

Advanced system diagnostics

CAN Bus data

Configuration data

Network diagnostics

Serial Comms

Autopilot diagnostics

EZ-Pilot diagnostics

EZ-Steer diagnostics

Field-IQ diagnostics

FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test

GPS status

GreenSeeker diagnostics

Row-Guidance diagnostics

Vehicle Sync diagnostics

Yield Monitoring diagnostics

492

514

514

514

487

488

490

491

486

486

487

487

487

515

517

518

This chapter covers diagnostics and troubleshooting.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

485

System diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

System diagnostics

At the Configuration screen, select

System and then tap

Diagnostics

. Each tab contains specific information about the system: l

Advanced system diagnostics (page 486)

l

CAN Bus data (page 487)

l

Network diagnostics (page 487)

l

Serial Comms (page 487)

Advanced system diagnostics

1. At the Configuration screen, tap

2. Go to the

Advanced

tab.

System and then tap

Diagnostics

.

3. Select the

Diagnostics Level

. This determines how much debugging information is logged in the program files.

Item

1

6 (default)

9

Explanation

Minimal level of information

Medium level of information

Highest level of information

4. At

Swath Control Points

, select whether to hide or show swath control points.

When the guidance line is a curve, it displays on-screen as a series of short straight sections joined together. Swath control points appear where these line segments meet.

You can also use the System Diagnostics screen to view raw port data. For more information, see

Serial Comms (page 487)

.

486

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics CAN Bus data

CAN Bus data

You can view CAN Bus data as the FM-1000 Plus application receives it.

To view the data:

1. At the Configuration screen, select

System and then tap

Diagnostics

.

2. Go to the

CAN Bus tab.

3. To view the data from a port, tap

View

. The port diagnostics screen for that port displays.

4. To capture data, tap the

Capture

button. Approximately five seconds of serial data is captured and then displays on the screen. You can review the data or capture another snapshot of data.

5. To close the screen, tap

OK

.

Configuration data

1. To view FM-1000 Plus application configuration information, tap .

2. The Home screen shows: l

FM-1000 Plus application firmware information

Autopilot controller information l

GPS receiver and correction method information l

Vehicle make and model

Network diagnostics

1. At the Configuration screen, tap

2. Go to the

Network

tab.

System and then tap

Diagnostics

.

The status of various network connections display.

Serial Comms

You can view raw serial data as the FM-1000 Plus application receives it. This can be useful for analyzing the GPS signal.

To view the raw serial data:

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

487

Autopilot diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

1. At the Configuration screen, select

System and then tap

Diagnostics

.

2. Go to the

Serial Comms tab. This diagnostics screen shows each of the connectors (ports) on the display harness and the number of data packets that have been sent and received.

3. To view the raw data from a port, tap

View

.

4. To capture data, tap

Capture

. Approximately five seconds of serial data is captured and then displays on the screen. You can review the data or capture another snapshot of data.

5. To close the screen, tap

OK

.

Note  – Text shown in green is incoming data. Text shown in red is outgoing data.

Autopilot diagnostics

1. At the Configuration screen, select

Autopilot

.

2. Tap

Diagnostics

. The Vehicle Controller Setup - Guidance screen displays. From this screen, you can access information on: l

Guidance

Steering

l

Details

l

Fault log

l

Warnings

Controls

The following buttons are available on every tab: l

Engage

: You can tap to engages or disengage the system. The button also shows the current engage state. When this button is red, tap it to see the fault that is preventing the automatic mode.

l

View Fault Log

: Tap to view

faults.

l

View Warning

: Tap to view

warnings.

488

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Autopilot diagnostics

Guidance tab

Section

Offline distance graph

GPS status

Heading error

Roll

Direction

Cross Track Error

On-screen lightbar

Heading

Speed

1PPS

Aggressiveness

Nudge

Steering tab

Section

PWM status

Explanation

A graph of offline distance over time. Useful for diagnosing problems with the vehicle coming online and staying online.

Current GPS position fix quality and number of satellites

The difference between vehicle heading and path heading

Current roll value calculated by the system

Current vehicle direction: Forward, backward, or stopped

Numeric value of the offline distance

Visual representation of offline distance

Current vehicle heading calculated by the system

Current vehicle speed calculated by the system

Shows whether the 1PPS signal from a GPS receiver is detected

A slider to adjust the aggressiveness of the steering system.

Enter the increment of distance you want for nudging.

Steering command override

Steering angle

Explanation

Shows the current PWM signals being sent to the electrohydraulic valve. This is an indication of whether the system is attempting to turn left or right.

Bypasses the normal steering command to the wheels. With this feature, you can force a certain angle of turn and make sure that the system responds as expected.

Required angle: The angle that the system is trying to attain

Steering angle: Where the system calculates the wheels are pointing

Enable

Reset

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

489

EZ-Pilot diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Details tab

Section

Diagnostics

Accelerometers

Vehicle voltage

Vehicle voltage

Explanation

Vehicle and configuration specific diagnostics. Up to nine diagnostics can be shown.

Raw voltage and scaled G-force for each of the system’s accelerometers

Input voltage currently being fed into the Autopilot system from the vehicle’s electrical system

Input voltage currently being fed into the Autopilot system from the vehicle’s electrical system

Autopilot Faults screen

The Autopilot Faults screen lists all faults on the Autopilot controller. To access this screen tap

View

Fault Log

.

Item

Active

History

Cancel

Refresh Fault Lists

Clear History

Close & Clear Faults

Explanation

Faults that are currently active

Faults that have previously occurred

Tap to close the screen.

Tap to see the latest faults.

Tap to clear historical faults.

Tap to clear all faults and close the screen.

Warning screen

When you are viewing the vehicle diagnostics screens, the

View Warning

button flashes red if there is an active warning. To view any active warnings, tap the button.

EZ-Pilot diagnostics

The EZ-Pilot Diagnostics screen contains the statistics for the IMD-600 and SAM-200 and inertial information.

490

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

EZ-Pilot and then tap

Diagnostics

.

The EZ-Pilot Diagnostics screen displays.

IMD-600 status

Status

Version

Serial Number

Explanation

Status of the system's connection to the IMD-600

Firmware version of the IMD-600

Serial number of the IMD-600

EZ-Steer diagnostics

SAM-200 status

Status

Version

Serial Number

Temperature

Voltage

Explanation

Status of the system's connection to the SAM-200

Firmware version of the SAM-200

Serial number of the SAM-600

Temperature of the SAM-600

3. To view faults, tap

View Fault Log

.

4. To adjust the steering performance of the system, tap

Steering Performance

. See

EZ-Pilot system calibration (page 202)

.

EZ-Steer diagnostics

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

EZ-Steer and then tap

Diagnostics

. The EZ-Steer Diagnostics screen displays the SCM statistics and inertial information.

3. To view faults, tap

View Fault Log

.

4. To adjust the steering performance of the system, tap

Steering Perf

. See

EZ-Steer system calibration (page 208)

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

491

Field-IQ diagnostics

492

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

19   Diagnostics

Field-IQ diagnostics

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap screen displays.

Field-IQ and then tap

Diagnostics

. The Field-IQ Diagnostics

Operations tab

On this tab, you can: l

Test optional switch box (page 398)

if you are using an optional section switch box l

Enter values manually (page 397)

l

Enable sections (page 397)

Status Item

Control Mode

Rate Switch Mode

Applied Rate

Current Flow

Control Speed

Master Switch

Current Pressure

Explanation

Auto or Manual

Manual, Rate 1 or Rate 2

The rate being applied

Relation of material being applied to time

Speed you are moving

Indicates which switches have been assigned to each section.

Tap

View Error Log

to see all errors listed since the last time the log was cleared.

Tap

Section Test

to begin a sequence of engaging each section and groups of sections.

The color coding for the sections are:

Section Number Tab

Not indented

Not indented

Indented

Indented

Section Indicator Graphic Section is...

Red

Gray

Red

Green

Not armed

Not armed

Armed

Armed

Section switch is...

Off

On

Off

On

Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Testing section switches

Testing the switches from the Diagnostic screen is useful because you do not have to open a field or set a manual speed and manual coverage to make the section switches active.

At the

Operation tab:

1. Arm the sections by tapping on the box with the sections you want to turn on.

2. Flip the section switches to test that they are working properly and are in the correct order.

Hardware tab

On this tab, the control modules are listed with the: l

Serial number of the module l

Position on the implement l

Firmware version l

Status of CAN connection l

Tx/Rx number of packets

Row Monitor tab

The status column of this screen indicates: l

Disabled: Sensor is not detected.

l

Off: Sensor is detected but is not actively looking for seed.

l

On: Sensor is detected and is looking for seed. (The field is open with system planting.)

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

493

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Field-IQ faults and troubleshooting

Faults

Message That Displays

Field-IQ devices not found.

New Field-IQ devices need configuring. Please go to the Field-IQ Setup.

The 12-section switch box has been disconnected.

Sections will be controlled automatically.

Explanation

One or more Field-IQ system devices in the current implement configuration are not present.

Possible Causes/Actions

Check: l

Implement selection l

Cabling and fuses l

Field-IQ Diagnostics to identify missing modules l

Field-IQ Setup

Check:

The Field-IQ system cannot be used without the master switch box.

Field-IQ can operate without the

12-section switch box. Section switching will depend only on existing coverage, field boundaries and exclusion zones.

To get on-screen buttons for controlling sections, cycle power to the display and open the FM-

1000 Plus application.

l

Cabling l

To see if CAN has been dropped. Check terminators.

Check: l

Cabling l

To see if CAN has been dropped. Check terminators.

One or more Field-IQ system devices were disconnected.

One or more Field-IQ system devices have lost communication with the system.

Check:

1. Cabling and fuses

2. Field-IQ system Diagnostics to identify missing modules

3. Field-IQ System Setup

Rate not achievable For current target rate, the maximum speed is X mph.

The target application rate cannot be achieved within the configured maximum RPM at the current speed. The Field-IQ system is limiting the RPM to

Maximum flow/rpm has been set too low for desired speed and rate.

494

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation

Target rate may not be achieved for current target rate, the minimum speed is

X\ mph.

the configured maximum.

At the current speed and target application rate, the required

RPM is below the configured minimum RPM limit.

Minimum flow/rpm has been set to high for desired speed and rate.

The current coverage pattern will degrade system performance.

A "combing" coverage pattern is being generated because of a mix of on and off boom sections.

This causes generation of many coverage polygons, possibly leading to degraded system performance.

Contact Trimble support.

Hydraulic motor over speed.

or

Hydraulic motor under speed

The hydraulic motor is not running at the commanded speed.

Rate control stopped due to hydraulic motor over speed or

Rate control stopped due to hydraulic motor under speed

The hydraulic motor was stopped due to it not running at commanded speed.

Hydraulic motor stalled

Rate control has been disabled. Toggle the master switch to re-enable rate control.

Check the hydraulic motor.

It ran too fast (Rawson).

The hydraulic motor is not running at the commanded speed

Degraded GPS.

Automatic section control has been disabled.

Use switches to control sections.

The GPS positions are uncorrected. Due to potential inaccuracy of the positions, the

Field-IQ system will not switch the boom sections automatically. You must control

Possible Causes/Actions

No RPM is being reported from encoder.

Check hydraulic pressure.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

495

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays

Controller Requires Valve

Calibration

Sprayer configuration error

Check the settings on the

Valve Calibration screen

Explanation

No GPS.

Automatic rate and section control has been disabled.

Please maintain speed at X mph.

the sections manually through the switches.

The Field-IQ system is no longer adjusting the application rate.

You are prompted to maintain the current speed. The last sentence appears only if the master switch was on at the time of the warning.

General system warning Tank/bin level is getting low.

Using jump start speed.

Please maintain speed at

XX mph.

The GPS speed has been overridden with the jump start speed. You must drive at that speed to maintain the current target application rate.

Warning typically appears when system drops under 10 V.

A power brown-out has occurred - check cabling and fuses - check power supply

Section controller reported over-current.

Section and rate control have been disabled.

Toggle the master switch to re-enable control.

Rate and Section Control

Module Not Configured

Please set the number of nozzles in the Field-IQ

Setup

Number of nozzles has not been set.

The valve type, plumbing, or auxiliary valve setting is incorrect.

Possible Causes/Actions

Check: l

Cabling and fuses l

Power supply

Possible causes:

Controller is drawing too much current.

There is an electrical short somewhere.

Go to the Valve Calibration screen to set the valve type.

496

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays

Flow meter configuration error

Check the flow meter calibration

Shaft encoder configuration error

Check the Shaft Encoder

Constant in the Flow

Calibration screen

Valve configuration error

Check the valve calibration

Unknown Field-IQ configuration error

Explanation

The flow meter calibration number has not been set.

The shaft encoder constant has not been set.

No flow detected

Attention Minimum flow

XX gal/min is applying

Rate not responding.

Unstable flow control

Possible Causes/Actions

The valve settings are not valid for the selected valve type.

This message shows if the FM-

1000 Plus application does not understand the fault code that was received from the rate and section control module.

The Field-IQ system attempted to apply material, but the flow sensor failed to detect any flow.

Check firmware versions. Report this fault to Trimble Support.

Possible causes: l

Incorrect flow calibration l

Damaged or disconnected feedback sensor l

Broken valve wiring

The current target application rate and speed require a flow that is less than the configured minimum flow limit. The flow will be at that limit instead.

Therefore, the actual applied rate will probably be above the target rate.

The flow sensor indicates that the actual flow is not changing as expected.

The rate and section control module is having difficulty

Verify correct setup on the Valve

Calibration screen.

Perform a valve calibration.

Inspect feedback sensor and rate control valve for damage.

Check the Plumbing setting on the Valve Calibration screen

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

497

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays

Valve controller reported over-current

Unknown valve error

Unable to lock valve position.

Unable to start flow

Field-IQ unknown internal error

The second pressure entry must differ from the first

Please enter a different

Explanation

maintaining the target flow, possibly due to an incorrect setup.

Possible Causes/Actions

Reduce Field-IQ system aggressiveness.

This message shows if the FM-

1000 Plus application does not understand the fault code that was received from the rate and section control module.

An error occurred when attempting to lock the position of the control valve.

An error occurred when attempting to control the valve.

This message appears if the FM-

1000 Plus application does not understand the fault code that was received from the rate and section control module.

Probably due to incompatible firmware versions.

The pressure calibration process requires calibration at two different pressures. This

Possible causes: l

Control valve is drawing too much current.

l

There is an electrical short somewhere.

Probably due to incompatible firmware versions. Make sure that the correct firmware versions and the rate and section control module are installed.

Report this fault to Trimble

Support.

Probably due to incompatible firmware. Make sure that the correct firmware versions are installed on the FM-1000 Plus application and the rate and section control module.

Probably due to incompatible firmware. Make sure that the correct firmware versions are installed on the FM-1000 Plus applicationand the rate and section control module.

Make sure that the correct firmware versions are installed on the FM-1000 Plus application and the rate and section control module.

Report this fault to Trimble

Support.

498

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays

pressure

No pressure change has been detected Please change the system pressure

Invalid setup for flow calibration

Invalid setup for granular calibration

The second gate height entry must differ from the first

Please enter a different height

No gate height change has been detected

Explanation

message indicates that you entered the same pressure twice.

Note  – Zero is a valid pressure for calibration.

Possible Causes/Actions

The pressure calibration process requires calibration at two different pressures. This message indicates that the report from the pressure sensor did not change when the second reading was taken.

The pressure in the system must be changed between readings, for example, by either: l l

Opening or closing a valve

Starting or stopping the pump.

If this message persists after the pressure is changed, check the installation and wiring of the pressure sensor.

Check: l

Total Nozzles in the Boom tab in the Field-IQ system setup l

Width in the Hardware tab in Field-IQ Setup l

Flow meter number

Check: l

Shaft Encoder Constant l

Width in the Hardware tab in Field-IQ Setup

The gate height calibration process requires calibration at two different gate heights. This message indicates that you entered the same gate height twice.

Note  – Zero is a valid gate height for calibration.

The gate height calibration process requires calibration at

If this message persists after the gate is moved, check the

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

499

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays

Please change the gate height

Gate not open

Please open the gate

Explanation

two different gate heights. This message indicates that the report from the gate height sensor did not change when the second reading was taken. The gate must be raised or lowered between readings.

Possible Causes/Actions

installation and wiring of the gate height sensor.

The Field-IQ system is attempting to dispense material, but the gate height sensor indicates that the gate is closed.

Or if the gate height sensor is disabled, you did not enter a non-zero gate height.

Open the gate, or enter a nonzero gate height.If the gate is already open, check the installation and wiring of the gate height sensor.

The spinner pulses per revolution setting is invalid

Please check the spinner sensor setup

The tank/bin is empty

Please refill tank/bin

Valve Calibration Not

Started.

Valve Calibration Failed

Please turn off the master switch

The tank/bin level sensor has reported that the tank/bin is empty.

This shows only during auto valve calibration, which is not available in firmware version 4.0.

For safety reasons, when running an auto valve calibration for anhydrous, the vehicle must be moving at a speed of at least 2 mph. If the vehicle speed is above 2 mph, check that the FM-1000 Plus application is receiving valid GPS positions.

If this is incorrect, check the tank/bin sensor installation and wiring.

The vehicle is moving too slow to begin the automatic valve calibration. Increase the speed of the vehicle and start the valve calibration again

The vehicle is moving too slow to continue the automatic valve calibration.

The Field-IQ system is in a mode in which material application is

Increase the speed of the vehicle and start the valve calibration again.

500

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation

not expected. It is asking for the master switch to be turned off to make the system safe.

NH3 is an irritant and corrosive to the skin, eyes, respiratory tract and mucous membranes and is dangerous if not handled properly. May cause severe burns to the eyes, lungs and skin. Skin and respiratory related diseases could be aggravated by exposure. It is recommended that protective gloves, boots, slicker and/or pants and jacket, and chemical-splash goggles that are impervious to anhydrous ammonia are worn at all times.

The application type is set to

Anhydrous

Application width is different from the control width.

Please visit Field-IQ setup to reconfigure settings.

Application width is different from the control and section width.

Do you want the control and section width to be automatically adjusted to match the application width?

The total of the rate controller widths in the Hardware tab of the Field-IQ Setup must match the application width in the

Implement Setup. A difference of about 0.4 inches is tolerated.

This message could appear when you exit the Field-IQ

Setup.

The total of the rate controller widths in the Hardware tab of the Field-IQ Setup must match the application width in the

Implement Setup. A difference of about 0.4 inches is tolerated.

Please select your NH3 unit This messages shows if the application type is anhydrous and you attempt to exit the

Field-IQ Setup without selecting

Possible Causes/Actions

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

501

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays

The total number of rows assigned to sections (XX) exceeds the number of rows on the implement

(XX)

Press Continue to exit the

Field-IQ Setup or press Edit to edit the row assignments.

XX implement rows are not assigned to sections

Press Continue to exit the

Field-IQ Setup or press Edit to edit the row assignments.

The number of nozzles must not be less than the total number of sections.

Explanation

the Anhydrous Units type ("lbs.

Actual N" or "lbs. NH3") in the

Features tab.

This message may appear when you exit the Field-IQ Setup.

The total of the numbers in the fields in the Sections tab exceeds the number of rows configured in the Implement Setup.

This message may appear when you exit the Field-IQ Setup.

The total of the numbers in the fields in the Sections tab exceeds the number of rows configured in the Implement Setup.

This message could appear when you exit the Field-IQ

Setup.

The total number of sections in the Hardware tab exceeds the

Total Nozzles setting in the Rate tab. There must be at least as many nozzles as sections.

Some devices have not been identified by serial number.

None of the expected Field-

IQ system devices were found on the implement.

Do you want to switch to another implement configuration?

None of the configured

This message shows when you exit the Field-IQ Setup, if one or more of the serial number selection fields in the Hardware tab has no serial number selected.

The rate and/or section controllers that are identified in the current Field-IQ system configuration were not detected on the CAN bus.

The rate and/or section

Possible Causes/Actions

502

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays

Field IQ devices are connected.

Do you want to remove all of the missing devices from the Field IQ hardware configuration?

Explanation

controllers that are identified in the current Field\ IQ configuration were not detected on the CAN bus.

Fence nozzle is enabled The configured sections exceed the maximum that is supported

Please reduce the number of sections

If the left fence nozzle is enabled in the Sections tab of the Field

IQ Setup, the leftmost section controller must not have more than 11 sections.

If the right fence nozzle is enabled in the Sections tab of the Field-IQ Setup, the rightmost section controller must not have more than 11 sections.

Cannot flush because the system is not calibrated.

Rate and Section Control

Module and Rawson

Control Module can not be present at the same time.

Please disconnect either device before continuing setup.

Field-IQ has been disabled

Rate and Section Control

Module and Rawson

Control Module cannot be present at the same time.

Field-IQ has been disabled

One or more of the Field-IQ system devices requires calibration

Please enter a valid

This message appears if you try to use the Manual Flush button in the Tank/Bin tab of the Field-

IQ Setup when a rate controller is not yet calibrated.

When using multiple rate controllers for 1 material, they must all be of the same type.

When using multiple rate controllers for 1 material, they must all be of the same type.

The flow meter constant must

Possible Causes/Actions

Go to the calibration screen to calibrate a controller.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

503

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays

flowmeter calibration constant

Weighed NH3 (End) must be less than Weighed NH3

(Start).

Explanation

be greater than zero.

This appears during anhydrous flow calibration.

The process requires you to enter the weighed amounts of

NH3 at the start and end of a run. If this warning appears, it is likely that you transposed the two amounts.

This will appear if you try to flush when the current target rate is zero.

No target rate

The flush cannot be performed until a target rate has been set

Please select a target rate

The calibration cannot be completed because the quantity dispensed is zero.

Press Edit to edit the quantity or Restart to restart the calibration.

Calibration Failed

The flow calibration was cancelled

Calibration Failed

No flow was detected

The granular flow calibration requires you to enter the amount that was dispensed.

This message shows if the entered amount was zero.

The granular calibration failed because you cancelled the calibration or an error occurred.

The granular flow calibration failed because there were no pulses reported from the shaft encoder.

Possible Causes/Actions

Check that the shaft turns during calibration.

Check the installation and wiring of the shaft encoder.

Calibration Failed

No material was dispensed

The selected target rate and speed cannot be achieved.

Reduce target speed or target rate.

The granular calibration failed because you entered zero for the actual amount of material dispensed.

This shows during granular calibration if the target rate and target speed that you entered require the shaft to turn faster than the maximum RPM that is set in the Limits tab in the flow

504

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Message That Displays Explanation

The selected target rate and speed may not be achieved.

It is recommended that the target speed be increased.

calibration screen.

This shows during granular calibration if the target rate and target speed that you entered require the shaft to turn slower than the minimum RPM that is set in the Limits tab in the flow calibration screen.

If you choose to continue, the

Field-IQ system tries to run the system below the minimum

RPM limit.

The calibration constant changed significantly.

For best results it is recommended that the calibration be repeated.

Motor failed to start

This message shows at the end of the granular calibration process, if the calibration constant changed by more than

30%.

This message shows if the hydraulic motor fails to start during the Rawson Control

Module Hydraulic Test.

Motor stopped unexpectedly

The number of seeds dispensed did not match the number of seeds expected. Do you want to adjust the calibration constant in order to attain the target rate?

Adjusting the calibration constant will alter the seed spacing.

Calibration Failed

This message shows if the hydraulic motor stops unexpectedly during the Rawson

Control Module Hydraulic Test.

This message may appear during calibration of a Rawson Control

Module in a planter application.

If the calibration test does not dispense the expected number of seeds, it is likely that the seed pick up is not operating perfectly. You can adjust the calibration constant to compensate for this but the seed spacing will be inconsistent where seeds are missed or doubled up.

This message shows if the

Possible Causes/Actions

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

505

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Message That Displays

The motor failed to turn

Speed Too Low

The vehicle is moving too slow for safe anhydrous application. Increase the speed of the vehicle.

Explanation

hydraulic motor fails to turn during calibration of a Rawson

Control Module.

For safety reasons, the Field-IQ system will not apply anhydrous in auto rate control mode at speeds below 2 mph. Either increase the speed or switch to manual mode.

Possible Causes/Actions

Anhydrous Rate Control troubleshooting

Unable to open valve.

1. Check all for proper valve type in rate control setup.

2. NH3 will not operate unless vehicle is moving over 1.5 MPH.

If settings are correct:

1. Disconnect the tank from the system.

2. Set the system up as a liquid.

3. Check that system has control of the valve when in manual rate. (During this procedure a no flow detected warning may appear. This is normal as there is no flow going through the system)

4. For FM-1000 integrated display 6.5 and up. System will run in diagnostics. (Only attempt after trying the previous steps.)

If system will run in diagnostics:

1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.

a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test) b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.

c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position.

2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.

Unable to reach target.

1. Check that system control components are sized properly.

2. See if the valve will open any further when set to manual rate. (if not, may be a tank or cooler limitation)

506

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

If system is sized properly for rate:

1. Check minimum and maximum flow settings.

2. Check that the flowmeter calibration is close to the number listed on the tag.

If settings check ok:

Check that control valve has been calibrated.

If PWM, check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters. May need to be set to 100%.

Rate fluctuates around target.

1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.

2. Turn valve on and set rate switch to Manual to lock the valve.

3. If the rate still fluctuates check the flowmeter. (may be a cooler or a tank issue)

If the rate holds in manual, the valve needs to be tuned.

Any Implement Section Control troubleshooting

Section Control does not work.

1. Check that section control has been completely set up.

2. Check that switching type is set up properly. Boom valve Vs. air clutch

3. Check that auxiliary power and auxiliary I/O on the Field-IQ cables are connected. (if present)

If system is set up properly:

1. Run a flow calibration (catch test.) This will force the sections on and confirm that all cabling and connections are correct.

2. Operate the system in diagnostics. (FM-1000 Plus application only) Arm sections at bottom of the screen and perform a catch test.

If system works in diagnostics:

1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.

a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test) b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.

c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position.

2. If sections are yellow, boom valves should be on but no flow is detected.

3. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

507

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Section control timing is off.

1. Check that all implement and vehicle measurements are correct. (Do not guess. These measurements are crucial for an accurate application.)

2. Check that start and end overlaps have not been adjusted to take care of timing issues. (These settings are only used for intentional overlap!)

If sections are coming on too late or shutting off too late:

1. Check that start and end overlaps are set to the desired intentional overlap.

2. Raise the on latency to allow the section to turn on earlier.

3. Raise the off latency to allow the system to start turning off earlier. Typically these settings are no more than 5 seconds. If they are higher double check implement measurements.

If sections are coming on too early or shutting off too early:

1. Check that start and end overlaps are set to desired intentional overlap.

2. Lower the on latency if the system is turning on too soon.

3. Lower the off latency if the system is shutting off too soon.

4. If settings are set to 0 and system is still not accurate check implement measurements.

Any Implement Sensor troubleshooting

Erratic sensor readings.

1. Has sensor been calibrated?

2. Check that sensor is specified properly for the system.

3. Make sure the feedback voltage is in the right range. Pressure sensors are 0 to 5 V.

Erratic flowmeter / encoder readings.

1. Check all cabling and connections.

2. Check that the encoder constant is correct.

3. Check that there isn’t a rate control issue by setting the Rate to Manual to lock the valve.

4. Check that the meter is sized properly for the application.

5. Check that there is nothing mechanically wrong with the meter.

508

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Lift switch won't calibrate.

1. Check that the switch is plugged in

2. Check that switch works. Use a volt meter to check continuity on the switch. One way it will be open the other way it will be a closed circuit.

Switch is functional.

1. Jump the A and B terminals at the module harness to bypass cabling. If this works check all cabling.

2. If previous test didn’t work set up a new implement. May be a bad module.

3. Check that the OEM harness is not supplying constant power to signal wire.

Planter Rate Control troubleshooting

Unable to turn motor.

1. Check valve type in Rate control set up.

2. Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow.

3. Check that motor will pass a drive calibration (PWM) only.

4. Perform a hydraulics test (Rawson).

If the motor will run in the calibration screen, check the operation of the system in the Field-IQ diagnostics screen.

1. Enter a manual speed and turn all sections on.

2. Arm all sections at the bottom of the screen.

3. If equipped with an implement switch make sure it is calibrated and shows the implement in the running position.

If motor ran in diagnostics screen:

1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.

a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test) b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.

c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position

2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

509

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Unable to reach target rate.

1. Check that maximum meter RPM has not been set to low. System defaults to 120 RPM

2. Rawson: Check that maximum motor RPM has been set to 300 RPM

3. Check Gear ratio and encoder constant (gear ratio needs to be figured from the encoder to the meter.)

4. Check info tab in the drive calibration screen. Make sure target rates and speeds are logical. If they are not this usually represents improper Field-IQ system set up.

If the settings check out okay:

1. Check that the control valve has been calibrated. If PWM, check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters. May need to be set to 100%.

2. Rawson: Check that the motor will reach 300 RPM in the hydraulic test. If it will and system still can’t reach rate check that the gear ratio will allow system to reach target rate. Formula on page.

If the rate fluctuates around the target:

1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.

2. If population monitoring is on, disable it to see target rate of the motors. If system holds rate it is a seed monitoring issue.

Drive calibration is performed (PWM):

1. Check that motor(s) have sufficient hydraulic flow.

2. Raise the PWM base frequency to 200Hz. (if PWM valve is a raven set to 120hz)

Rawson:

1. Check that drive is running above 100 RPM. Adjust gear ratio to achieve proper RPM.

2. Isolate the drive from the seed shaft. Make sure the drive operates properly with no load.

No communication with seed sensors.

1. Check that the Auxiliary I/O connector is plugged in.

2. A power cycle must be performed every time a cable is plugged in. The system only looks for the sensors on boot up. If they are not present it won’t look for them until power is cycled.

3. Check that sensors are compatible with Field-IQ.

If the cables are connected:

510

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

1. Check for the right harness.

2. CT harness (John Deere) will always have pins 27 and 28 populated. These will be a power and a ground that provides 8 V to the sensors. DO NOT ASSUME YOUR JD PLANTER HAS A CT

HARNESS IT MAY HAVE BEEN RETROFITTED WITHA PM STYLE HARNESS.

3. PM harness. (Also referred to as a Dickey John or DJ harness. Typically on all planters but JD.)

These harnesses will have pins 24-27 populated. 24 and 25 are 8 V power. 26 and 27 are ground.

If you have the correct harness and have power to the sensor:

Check that all the sensors have 8 V power and 5 volt signal. If not this could represent a bad seed sensor harness.

Planter Seed Sensor troubleshooting

No communication with seed sensors.

1. Check that the Auxiliary I/O connector is plugged in.

2. A power cycle must be performed every time a cable is plugged in. The system only looks for the sensors on boot up. If they are not present it won’t look for them until power is cycled.

3. Check that sensors are compatible with Field-IQ.

If the cables are connected:

1. Check for the right harness.

2. CT harness (John Deere) will always have pins 27 and 28 populated. These will be a power and a ground that provides 8 V to the sensors. DO NOT ASSUME YOUR JD PLANTER HAS A CT

HARNESS IT MAY HAVE BEEN RETROFITTED WITHA PM STYLE HARNESS.

3. PM harness. (Also referred to as a Dickey John or DJ harness. Typically on all planters but JD.)

These harnesses will have pins 24-27 populated. 24 and 25 are 8 V power. 26 and 27 are ground.

If you have the correct harness and have power to the sensor:

Check that all the sensors have 8 V power and 5 volt signal. If not this could represent a bad seed sensor harness.

Sprayer/Liquid Strip Till Rate Control troubleshooting

Control valve will not open.

1. Check valve type in Rate control set up.

2. Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow (PWM)(pump servo).

3. Check that the product pump is on and producing flow (Servo).

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

511

Field-IQ diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

For PWM:

1. Check that system will pass a drive calibration.

a. If not check that max flow setting has not been set too high. This setting is dependent of nozzle size. Refer to a tip chart.

b. If system still will not pass perform the calibration with no tips.

2. Sprayers with a pump arming relay:

Check that the pump arming relay is working by checking that the relay clicks on when the pump is armed. (there will be 12 V at terminal 85 on the relay)

For Servo:

1. Operate the valve in the drive settings screen.

2. Check that there is manual control of the valve in manual rate control. If there is no control check cabling.

3. If valve will work in manual, it may need to be calibrated to work in auto. See calibration procedure.

If the system ran in Diagnostics:

1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.

a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test) b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.

c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position.

2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.

Unable to reach target rate.

If unable to reach target:

1. Check that system control components are sized properly.

2. Check that nozzles are sized properly for sprayer.

3. See if the valve will open any further when set to manual rate. (if not may be a pump issue)

If system is sized properly for rate:

1. Check minimum and maximum flow settings.

2. Check that the flowmeter calibration is close to the number listed on the tag.

If settings check ok:

Check that control valve has been calibrated.

If PWM, check upper PWM limit under advanced parameters. May need to be set to 100%.

512

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Field-IQ diagnostics

Rate fluctuates around target.

1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.

2. Check that tips/orifices are sized appropriately for the system.

For PWM / Servo systems:

1. You may need to manually tune the valve.

2. Set valve to manual rate. With the rate in manual the valve should be "locked". If the rate still fluctuates check the pump and the flowmeter.

For Rawson:

1. Check that the drive is running above 100 RPM.

2. Isolate the drive from the pump. Make sure the drive operates properly with no load.

Spreader Rate Control troubleshooting

Unable to turn motor.

1. Check valve type in Rate control set up.

2. Check that hydraulic motor is receiving flow.

3. Check that motor will pass a drive calibration (PWM) only.

4. Perform a hydraulics test (Rawson).

If the motor will run in the calibration screen, check the operation of the system in the Field-IQ diagnostics screen.

1. Enter a manual speed and turn all sections on.

2. Arm all sections at the bottom of the screen.

3. If equipped with an implement switch make sure it is calibrated and shows the implement in the running position.

If motor ran in diagnostics screen:

1. Check color of sections in the run screen. If sections are red there is an issue.

a. Check that system is not outside a boundary (open a new field to test) b. Check that system is not over a previously applied area.

c. Check that system has a "fixed" GPS position

2. Check that the material has not been disabled in the material detail screen.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

513

FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test 19   Diagnostics

Rate fluctuates around target.

1. Check that a drive calibration has been performed.

2. Set the Rate to Manual. With the drive "locked" the drive should be running steady. If the rate is still fluctuating check the encoder.

If drive calibration is performed, check that motor(s) have sufficient hydraulic flow.

For Rawson:

1. Check that drive is running above 100 RPM. Adjust gate height to achieve proper RPM.

2. Isolate the drive from the shaft if possible (try to minimize the load on the drive.) Make sure the drive operates properly with little or no load.

FieldLevel II diagnostics valve test

1. At the Home screen, tap .

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

FieldLevel II and then tap

Diagnostics

.

3. You can test valve functionality at any time at this screen without the need for a GPS position or an active field design open by either tapping: l

Auto: To engage the system (this sets the current elevation as Target Height = 0.0) and tests its response as height offsets are added or subtracted from the current elevation, based upon the current coarse offset entered into the system l

Up or Down: To manually stroke the valve to 100% command in the required direction to verify valve performance and wiring accuracy

GPS status

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

GPS Receiver and then tap

Diagnostics

. The GPS Status screen. Use this screen to check that the GPS receiver is outputting the expected data.

To analyze the GPS signal, see

Serial Comms (page 487)

to view raw serial data.

GreenSeeker diagnostics

The GreenSeeker Diagnostics screen reports on the quantity of sensors detected on system and any error conditions.

514

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Row-Guidance diagnostics

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

GreenSeeker and then tap

Diagnostics

. The GreenSeeker

Diagnostics screen displays.

The hardware and firmware version information at the top of the diagnostics screen indicates the

FM-1000 Plus application and RT200 are communicating.

Incorrect data

The RT200 system monitors the sensors for proper operation, and if a sensor reports incorrect data, the data is not included in the rate control calculation. Incorrect data can come from mud on the sensor lenses, sensors viewing concrete, snow, wet asphalt, or other non soil or non plant surface.

-5

-9

-3

-4

Error

-1

-2

Error conditions

Error conditions include sensors disconnected from the CAN bus, or a sensor transmitting invalid data.

Invalid data could occur if the sensor malfunctions, or more commonly, if it is seeing a target other than plants and soil.

For example, when setting up the system, the sensors may be pointed into the air or against wet asphalt. Either of these conditions will likely generate an error code from a sensor.

Code

Red > NIR

BOTH < .01

RED < .01

NIR < .01

BOTH > .98

NIR < .015

Explanation

Red reflectance higher than NIR

Both reflectances are below 0.01

Red reflectance below 0.01

NIR reflectance below 0.01

Either reflectance above 0.98

NIR net reflectance below 0.15

Row-Guidance diagnostics

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

Row Guidance and then tap

Diagnostics

.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

515

Row-Guidance diagnostics

Item

Offline Distance

Status

Enable

/

Disable

Voltage

Voltage status

Explanation

Status of the sensor

Tap to enable or disable sensors

Voltage for the left and right sensor

Status for the left and right sensor

19   Diagnostics

516

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Vehicle Sync diagnostics

Vehicle Sync diagnostics

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

Diagnostics screen displays.

Vehicle Sync

3. Check the signal quality for the WiFi connection.

and then tap

Diagnostics

. The Vehicle Sync

4. View the other vehicles that are on the selected channel.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

517

Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Yield Monitoring diagnostics

1. At the Home screen, tap

.

2. At the Configuration screen, tap

Yield Monitoring and then tap

Diagnostics

. The Yield

Monitoring Diagnostics screen displays.

Status tab

The

Status tab includes information on the optical and moisture sensors.

Optical Sensor Item Explanation

Noise level

Indicates how clean the optical sensor signal is and if the noise level is too high.

This number should be less than 30% for best performance. If larger values are seen, check the following:

Elevator speed

Percent Dark l

Optical sensor interference l

Worn paddles l

Optical sensors protruding too far into the chamber l

Installation in the wrong location (too low on elevator).

Frequency of paddles, typically 15 Hz to 20 Hz l l

Unusually low numbers: Indicate the system is not seeing the paddles

This most likely occurs when running empty. Inspect the optical sensor installation.

Unusually high numbers: Typically be accompanied by large noise levels

Inspect the optical sensor installation.

The duty cycle.

This data can be used to determine if you are close to exceeding the capacity of the combine.

518

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics

Moisture Sensor Item Explanation

Sensor Value

Percent of moisture and the raw sensor value

Can be used by support or engineering if troubleshooting is necessary.

Temperature

Yield Monitor error messages

State 1 - During boot up

Cause

60 Series

Moisture unit

Head unit

Armrest unit

70 Series

Moisture sensor

CC1 unit

Cab unit

Corner post

YM 2000

Cannot detect YM

2000

Serial port

Actions

1. Ensure that the correct cable is installed.

2. Ensure the FM-1000 Plus application is communicating with the CAN bus (system / diagnostics / serial port / Port A/B). Is there another value other than zero for CAN messages?

3. For 60 Series Combines: Check if Crop Type will change on the

Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FM-1000 Plus application has been changed.

4. For 70 Series Combines: Change the Crop Type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FM-1000 Plus application.

5. Raise the head up or down to see if the FM-1000 Plus application will show a change for header height.

6. If step 1 and step 2 resolve the issue, log field data.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

519

Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

State 2 - During boot up

Cause

Never sees the armrest, header unit, moisture sensor, or reports which one is not visible by the FM-

1000 Plus application.

Actions

1. Ensure the FM-1000 Plus application is communicating with the CAN bus (system / diagnostics / serial port / Port A/B). Is there another value other than zero for CAN messages?

2. For 60 Series Combines: Make sure Moisture Sensor has version

1.20C loaded.

3. For 60 Series Combines: Check if Crop Type will change on the

Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FM-1000 Plus application has been changed.

4. For 70 Series Combines: Change the crop type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FM-1000 Plus application.

5. Raise head up or down to see if the FM-1000 Plus application shows a change for header height.

State 3 - During boot up

Cause

Will show which controller is not visible (armrest, header unit, moisture sensor).

Actions

1. Ensure the FM-1000 Plus application is communicating with the CAN bus (system / diagnostics / serial port / Port A/B). Is there another value other than zero for CAN messages?

2. For 60 Series Combines: Make sure Moisture Sensor has version 1.20C

loaded.

3. For 60 Series Combines: Check if Crop Type will change on the

Greenstar display after Crop Type on the FM-1000 Plus application has been changed.

4. For 70 Series Combines: Change the crop type in the command center and make sure it changes on the FM-1000 Plus application.

5. Raise head up or down to see if the FM-1000 Plus application shows a change for header height.

520

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics

State 4

Cause

Display has lost communication with the CAN bus.

Actions

1. Check cabling.

2. Recycle power (power down the display and the combine and wait

20 seconds before powering the display and the combine back up).

3. Make sure other logging devices are not connected to the CAN bus

(disconnect Mobile Processor or GS2 display).

Yield Monitor troubleshooting

The FM-1000 Plus application is not mapping.

1. Make sure the display Header Height setting is lower than John Deere's setting.

2. Ensure that the crop type is the same.

3. The machine must be in normal harvesting operation mode.

The FM-1000 Plus application stops mapping periodically through the field.

Cause: The header could be raising and lowering past the setting for Stop Logging Header Height.

Action: Increase the Header Height setting on the FM-1000 Plus application.

FM-1000 Plus application yield information does not match John Deere's information.

Cause: Different crop types may be selected.

Action: Verify the crop types match in both displays.

The display shows a major jump or extremely different weight values from those shown on the John Deere monitor.

Cause: The Stop Head Height setting is lower than what the John Deere monitor shows. The John

Deere monitor could be logging more data than the FM-1000 Plus application logs, therefore showing a larger value.

Action: Set the Head Height to 100% on the John Deere display.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

521

Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Yield Monitoring warning messages

Warning message

Unable to calibrate yield monitor.

Invalid selection. Please select one of the calibration types below this item.

No Connection. Please check connections.

Explanation

Occurs when tare calibration fails.

The user clicked on the wrong line in the Yield

Monitor Calibration menu.

User attempted to calibrate a device that is not connected.

Failed to detect yield sensor!!!

Yield sensor has not uploaded configuration into FmX.

Trimble Yield Monitor not found—check cabling and fuses—check Yield Monitor Setup.

Trimble Moisture Sensor not found—check cabling and fuses—check Yield Monitor Setup.

One or more Yield Monitor devices were disconnected.

Some setup parameters cannot be edited because the yield monitor is not connected.

Some setup parameters cannot be edited because they have not been received from the yield monitor.

Yield monitor not detected.

Moisture sensor not detected.

A device has been disconnected.

Bad reading received from moisture sensor.

Moisture out of range. Check the sensor is positioned properly and not being struck by paddles, and there is no free water or wet soil on sensor surface.

The label cannot be oriented along the same axis as the connectors.

Choose the options that match the Trimble

Yield Monitor’s mounting orientation.

Would you like to calibrate the roll sensor?

For accurate Roll Offset calibration you must turn the vehicle around.

Please select one or more loads to use for calibration. Tap the check mark to select a load.

Would you like to apply the calibration to the current field?

Invalid selection in IMU sensor orientation setup.

Attempting to perform roll calibration before setting a valid orientation.

User did not turn the vehicle around for second step of roll calibration.

Attempted to run load calibration with no loads selected.

522

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics

Warning message

Current field is successfully recalibrated.

Explanation

Unable to recalibrate current field.

Calibration was unable to be applied to field, possibly due to invalid data in field.

User tapped

Reset

in a calibration screen.

The calibration will be cleared. Are you sure you want to do this?

The yield sensor calibration has been reset.

User confirmed yield calibration reset.

The moisture sensor calibration has been reset.

User confirmed moisture calibration reset.

User confirmed temperature calibration reset.

The temperature sensor calibration has been reset.

No load information is available. You must record some data by harvesting some crop before you can run this calibration.

This load is too small to be used for calibration or contains invalid data.

Optical sensor is not responding.

There are no loads for the current crop type.

The load data is not valid for calibration, usually because the load is too small.

Optical sensor failed to respond during tare calibration.

Displayed in load details dialog if there are no loads for the current crop type.

No loads have been recorded. Use the 'New

Load' button on the map screen to record a load.

This load cannot be deleted because it is used in the yield calibration.

This load cannot be deleted because it is used in the moisture calibration.

Loads that were used for the current yield calibration cannot be deleted.

Loads that were used for the current moisture calibration cannot be deleted.

Loads cannot be recorded when there is no field open.

You have chosen to delete some loads. Are you sure you want to do this?

The system is not yet ready to delete fields or events.

Occurs when tapping

New Load

in the diagnostic screen if no field is open.

User tapped

OK

after selecting loads for deletion in Load Details screen

The FM-1000 Plus application needs some time to determine whether deletion of the field/event would remove a load that was used for calibration. Try again later.

Accepting the new test weight will affect the current calibration.

The average moisture will be reset to the Manual moisture will cause the average to be

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

523

Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

Warning message

manually entered moisture setting.

Do you want to reset average moisture and recalculate dry yield?

Closing this field will cause your current load being recorded to be automatically finished.

Would you like to clean out the moisture sensor?

Would you like to begin a new load? The Test

Weight for the new load is XXXXX.

What would you like to do? End Load, ends the current Load. Cancel, continue with the current

Load. New Load, closes this Load and starts another Load.

This operation will delete one or more loads that were used in the most recent yield or moisture calibration. These loads will not be available for use in any future recalibration.

CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING.

Uninitialized.

Explanation

reset.

Requesting confirmation when setting manual moisture.

The user has chosen to close the field before ending the load.

The FM-1000 Plus application offers to clean out the Trimble moisture sensor when shutting down.

User tapped

New Load

and New/End Load

Confirmation is enabled in setup.

User tapped

End Load

and New/End Load

Confirmation is enabled in setup.

User is deleting a client, farm, field or event that contains one or more loads that were used in the current calibration.

CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Cannot configure CAN port.

CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Cannot detect the CLAAS CAN bus.

CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Cannot configured Yield Monitoring.

Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.

Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.

Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.

Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.

CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Lost CAN communications.

Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.

CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Error state.

Error in communication with Claas yield monitor.

CLAAS YIELD MONITOR: WARNING. Head configuration differs between the FmX and

CEBIS.

YIELD MONITOR: CAN bus error (state#XX).

Failed to detect the following device(s):-…..

The implement width in the FM-1000 Plus application setup must be set to match the width that was set in the Claas yield monitor.

John Deere moisture sensor, head unit or armrest unit not detected. Check port

524

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

19   Diagnostics Yield Monitoring diagnostics

Warning message

YIELD MONITOR: CAN bus error (state#XX).

Explanation

selection.

Unknown error when communicating with John

Deere yield monitor.

YIELD MONITOR: Failed to update crop type!!!

Unable to set grain type in John Deere yield monitor. Probable communication error.

Lost connection with John Deere yield monitor.

YIELD MONITOR: Configuration Error

(state#XX). Verify the FmX is connected to the

CAN bus and CAN bus/combine series configuration.

Trimble moisture sensor connection error.

YIELD MONITOR: Moisture sensor is not connected

YIELD MONITOR: Temperature sensor is reporting values outside of a valid range

YIELD MONITOR: Field changed on YM2000.

Verify that the Crop type is not inadvertently changed on YM2000

YIELD MONITOR: Load changed on YM2000.

Verify that the crop type is not inadvertently changed on YM2000.

YIELD MONITOR: Cannot Detect YM2000 Serial

Port (state#XX) !!!

Bad reading received from temperature sensor.

YM2000 reported a "field" error.

YM2000 reported a "load" error.

Lost connection with YM2000 yield monitor.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

525

Yield Monitoring diagnostics 19   Diagnostics

526

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

Chapter

20

Glossary

A

A+ line

A guidance line you define on your field. The A+ line is defined fixing a point, then heading in a direction.

Guidance lines are for use with automated steering.

AB line

A guidance line you define on your field. You set a beginning point (A) and an end point (B). You use guidance lines for use with automated steering.

Accelerometer

A device that measures non-gravitational acceleration.

Access path

A space between your guidance lines. They can be useful if there is road (or other field feature that breaks the consistent flow of swaths) through the middle of your field.

Aggressiveness

The measure of how strongly the system makes steering changes.

Autonomous GNSS positioning

Autonomous GNSS positioning uses no corrections. The rover receiver calculates its position using only the GNSS signals it receives. This method does not have high absolute accuracy, but the relative accuracy is comparable to the other methods.

RTK GNSS positioning uses the RTK positioning method to achieve centimeter-level accuracy. To use the

RTK method, you must first set up a base station. The base station uses a radio link to broadcast RTK corrections to one or more rover receivers.

B

Benchmark

A point on the field with GPS coordinates assigned to it.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

527

C 20   Glossary

Blade height

Current height of the blade shown as a relative height or a GPS height depending on settings selected.

Boot depth

Depth of the boot when installing tiles or the depth of the blade when cleaning surface ditches.

Boundary

A line indicating the border surrounding a field.

C

CenterPoint™ RTK for radio

Positioning correction service for radio communication systems. Requires access to a base station located within a eight-mile radius (approximately) from your farm. An RTK base station sends corrections via a radio transmitter to a mobile receiver attached to your vehicle. Works well for farms within 8 miles of an established RTK base station or base station network, without line-ofsight obstructions such hilly terrain or an abundance of trees.

CenterPoint™ RTX™

Positioning correction service for satellite communication systems. Delivers GPS or GNSS enabled corrections via satellite directly to your receiver. Does not require a base station or cellular data plan. CenterPoint RTX corrections are provided on as subscription basis.

CenterPoint RTX for cellular

Positioning correction service for cellular communications. Delivers corrections via cellular network directly to your receiver. Requires a cellular data plan.

CenterPoint™ VRS™

Virtual reference station. Positioning correction service for cellular communication systems. Enables

RTK (Real-Time Kinetic) corrections over a large geographic area where robust cellular data coverage is available. Provides high accuracy for guidance applications throughout the whole coverage area.

Requires a cellular data plan. Uses a cellular communication modem, such as the DCM-300 or

Ag3000. Relies on CORS.

Clean grain elevator

After grain has been separated from the rest of the plant, the clean grain auger moves the grain from the separator to the grain bin.

Client

The customer for whom the work is being done.

Composite slope

The true angle of the fall of the design. In other words, the angle of the slope when two slope angles are combined.

Controller orientation

Correctly associate the outputs of the Autopilot controller sensors with the direction of the vehicle.

Correction age

Time since the last GPS correction was received.

528

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

20   Glossary D

Correction service

A service which provides corrections to create a higher GPS accuracy.

CORS network

Continuously Operating Reference Station. A network of GPS/GNSS reference stations situated within the coverage area to transmit RTK (Real-Time Kinetic) corrections to the cellular modem. The distance between the reference stations and the modem on the vehicle does not affect accuracy.

CORS works well in areas with spotty RTK radio tower coverage.

Curved line

A guidance line you define on your field. You begin recording and drive until you are at the end of the curved line or segment, then stop recording. Guidance lines are for use with automated steering.

Cut

A point on the field where dirt needs to be removed. A cut occurs when the existing field is higher than the proposed field surface.

Cut/Fill ratio

Difference between the blade height (1) and the target height (4):

When cut (dirt to be removed) is displayed, the current ground is above the target. The height indicator arrow turns red and points down, which means that the blade needs to move down to reach the target height.

When fill (dirt to be replaced) is displayed, the current ground is below the target. The height indicator arrow turns red and points up, which means that the blade needs to move up to reach the target height.

D

Data Dictionary

A set of data that contains categories for entry data when you are setting up client, farm, field and event.

Design height

The height of the land called for in a design.

Design slope

The slope of the land called for in a design.

DGNSS

Differential GNSS positioning. The GNSS receiver uses corrections from WAAS/EGNOS satellites or from OmniSTAR HP, XP, G2, or VBS satellites. These differential systems use special algorithms to provide differential corrections that allow the rover receiver to calculate its position more accurately. Not all corrections services support the use of GLONASS satellites in their solution.

DGPS

Differentially corrected Global Positioning System (GPS).

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

529

E 20   Glossary

E

EGNOS

European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service. An

SBAS

operated by the European Space

Agency.

Event

A precision agriculture activity on a particular field. For example: planting seed, applying fertilizer or lime, or spraying with fungicide, herbicide or insecticide.

F

Farm

A collection of fields.

Field

Settings created in the FM-1000 Plus application to represent an actual field, one or more parts of an actual field, or a group of two or more fields. Field profiles include guidance lines for steering, pivot patterns and landmarks.

Fill

A point on the field where dirt must be added. A fill occurs when the existing field is lower than the proposed field surface.

Freeplay

Movement in the steering linkage through which a movement of the steering wheel will cause no change in wheel angle.

Freeplay offset

A value entered to give the control system a way to account for freeplay during guidance.

G

GDD

Growing Degree Days. A measurement of heat units since planting above a prescribed base temperature.

GLONASS

A Russian space-based satellite navigation system.

GNSS

Global Navigation Satellite System. A system of GPS US and Russian satellites that provide information about geo-spatial positioning. A GNSS receiver can determine its longitude, latitude and altitude. In the future, GNSS will also use Chinese GPS satellites.

530

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

20   Glossary H

GPS

Global Positioning System. A space-based satellite navigation system. A GPS receiver can determine its position by using GPS satellites.

GPS autonomous positioning

A mode of operation in which a GPS receiver computes position fixes in real time from satellite data alone, without reference to data supplied by a base station. Autonomous positioning is the least precise positioning procedure a GPS receiver can perform, yielding position fixes that are precise to

±100 meters.

H

HDOP

The horizontal component of

PDOP

.

Header height

A sensor that indicates the position of the head.

I

IMD

Inertial Measurement Device.

IMEI

International Mobile Station Equipment Identity. A number to identify mobile equipment. The GSM network uses this number to identify valid devices. The IMEI number has no relationship to the subscriber.

Implement steering

A system that actively steers the implement being towed by a vehicle.

IMU

Inertial Measurement Unit. An electronic device that measures and reports on a vehicle's velocity, orientation, and gravitational forces, using a combination of accelerometers and gyroscopes.

Integrated radio

Trimble integrated radios contain a radio antenna integrated with the GNSS receiver or display in a single unit. These integrated radios receive corrections transmitted by Trimble GNSS RTK base stations.

L

Logging

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

531

M 20   Glossary

Also called coverage logging. Logging records the area that you have covered when you carry out an operation, for example applying fertilizer to a field.

License

A license enables a software feature, and is valid for an unlimited duration. A license does not need to be activated, but does need to be assigned to and delivered to a specific display. Assignment and delivery of a license occurs on the reseller portal.

M

Manual override

Required for platforms that employ a pressure transducer for the manual override function. Change the default only if the operation of the manual override function is unacceptable

Master benchmark

Before you can create a survey, you must set at least one point at a known location called a benchmark. When you create a benchmark, the GPS receiver obtains and records location information from the base station for that specific point in your field. The first benchmark you create on a field is the master benchmark and displays as an orange flag labeled MB. Field coordinates are calculated from this point.

Material

A product that is controlled by a PWM valve, Servo valve, or Rawson drive. You can use a planter

(seed), liquid, granular seed and granular fertilizer, all of which have different setup parameters.

Multipath error

An error caused by the interference of the same signal reaching the receiver by two different paths: once via the direct path, and once via a reflection. A major cause of GPS errors.

N

NDVI

Normalized Difference Vegetative Index. Commonly used to measure plant health and vigor. NDVI =

(NIR_reflected Red_reflected)/(NIR_reflected + Red_reflected).

NMEA standard

An electrical, hardware and data standard designed by the National Marine Electronics Association that dictates the content and format of communication between GPS receivers and other devices.

NMEA messages include data that provides location and accuracy, the number of satellites being used, the dilution of precision and signal strength.

NEU

Nitrogen Use Efficiency. A percentage of nitrogen taken up by the plant. For example, an NUE of 60% means that 6 lbs. of nitrogen fertilizer is expected to be used by the plant that year for every 10 lbs.

applied. For more information, visit www.nue.okstate.edu

.

532

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

20   Glossary O

NRS

Nitrogen Rich Strip. An area for determining the amount of nitrogen being made available to the plant by the environment (mineralization, etc), and importantly this year's expected maximum yield potential and response to additional nitrogen.

O

OEM moisture sensor

Moisture sensor installed by the combine manufacturer.

Offset

Difference between design height and target height. By using the offset buttons, you can create a plane that is parallel to the original design.

P

Parity

When used with a serial port, an extra data bit is sent with each data character to detect errors in transmission.

PDOP

Position Dilution of Precision. A calculation that takes into account the satellites that can be seen, how high they are and their bearing. The outcome of the calculation is an estimation of how prone to error your GPS position is. The lower the value, the more accurate your position. You may wish to plan your field work for periods of low PDOP. Generally, the more satellites in view, the better

(lower) the PDOP.

Pivot

A guidance pattern you define for your field by recording the outer circular boundary of the pivot area and then entering a value to compute the rows within the pivot. Guidance patterns are for use with automated steering.

R

RangePoint™ RTX™

Positioning service for satellite communication systems. RangePoint RTX works with a built-in GNSS receiver. Does not require a base station or cellular data plan.

Rate switch for Field-IQ

Used to select Preset Rate 1, Preset Rate 2, or Manual Rate Control.

Real Time Kinematic (RTK)

A navigation technique to improve the information received from satellite-based positioning systems. Used with GPS, GLONASS and Galileo.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

533

S 20   Glossary

RI

Response Index. An indication of how the crop will respond this season to additional nitrogen.

Roll correction

Compensates for antenna height and static roll caused by minor variations in the navigation controller and the mounting of the GPS receiver.

Row

The individual row unit which seed comes from on the planter. This can be controlled individually as a single row section, or as a group with other rows in a multiple row section.

Run screen

The screen where you perform field activities.

S

SBAS

Space Based Augmentation System. A system of Earth-based systems at points surveyed for location accuracy that measure satellites, signals and factors that can impact the signals. The SBAS then broadcasts corrections to satellite signals to improve accuracy.

Scintillation

Causes extreme fluctuations in signals that are received. Scintillation can be caused by turbulence that creates air pockets with different temperatures and densities.

Section

A number of rows or spray nozzles that are controlled by existing shut-off valve, Tru Count air clutches, or Tru Count LiquiBlock valves. A section can have either a single row/nozzle or multiple rows/nozzles depending on how the system is set up.

Section Control Module

Controls 12 sections/rows per module with up to 4 modules (48 module sections / rows).

Service

A service is a subscription to an application that lasts for a specific amount of time, such as one or two years. You associate a service with a specific display that can be delivered wirelessly, through a

QR code included in an email or through download to a computer.

Signal Input Module

The signal input module (SIM) can interface with existing equipment inputs to control on-screen buttons and features.

Singulation

The percentage of time an individual seed is placed for every intended drop.

Slew time

The amount of time that the front wheels take to move from the far left to the far right position and back.

Slope heading

The heading direction of the slope.

Steering deadzone

534

FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide Version 3.0, Revision A

20   Glossary T

The amount of pressure that the system must apply to the hydraulics before the wheels begin to turn.

Stop bit

A bit sent at the end of every character to enable the detection of the end of the character. Then the hardware can synchronize again with the character stream.

T

TAP

Tuning parameter for guidance algorithms.

Target height

Height on the target plane that the blade will attempt to reach. This is the design height (6) ± the offset (5). When the blade reaches the target height, the height indicator arrow turns green.

V

VDOP

A measurement of the vertical

PDOP .

VI

Vegetation Index. A value that is calculated (or derived) from sets of remotely-sensed data used to quantify plant health, stress, and vigor.

VRA

Variable Rate Application. The rate of fertilizer or other chemical applied, based on information supplied to a rate controller.

W

Wheelbase

The distance between the front and rear axles. On tracked vehicles, the wheelbase is exactly half the length of the track.

Version 3.0, Revision A FM-1000 Plus Application User Guide

535

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents